RAN Feature Activation Guide Huawei

RANV900R013C00

Feature Activation Guide

Issue 02

Date 2011-07-11

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 02 (2011-07-11) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

PurposeThis document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration.Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, theguidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network.

This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in RAN.

NOTE

The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.

Product VersionThe following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R013C00

NodeB V100R013

NodeB V200R013

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Technical support engineersl Maintenance engineersl Field engineersl Network optimization engineers

Organization1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

RANFeature Activation Guide About This Document


iii

This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide.

2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide

RAN features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Optional features arelicense-controlled and therefore require license activation before use.

3 Activating the UMTS License

In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. Thelicense control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature.The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT,whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000.

4 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2 kbit/s RRC Connection and RAB Assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-0105103.4/6.8/13.6/27.2 kbit/s RRC Connection and RAB Assignment.

5 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501Conversational QoS Class.

6 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502Streaming QoS Class.

7 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503Interactive QoS Class.

8 Configuring Background QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504Background QoS Class.

9 Configuring Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104Emergency Call.

10 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-2106042-Way Antenna Receive Diversity.

11 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205Cell Digital Combination and Split.

12 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,CELL_FACH)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).

13 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

About This DocumentRAN


iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1).

14 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2).

15 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC).

16 Configuring Integrity Protection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401Integrity Protection.

17 Configuring Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402Encryption.

18 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501Open Loop Power Control.

19 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502Downlink Power Balance.

20 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503Outer Loop Power Control.

21 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504Inner Loop Power Control.

22 Configuring Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101Admission Control.

23 Configuring Load Measurement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102Load Measurement.

24 Configuring Load Reshuffling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106Load Reshuffling.

25 Configuring Overload Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107Overload Control.



v

26 Configuring Code Resource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108Code Resource Management.

27 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301Shared Network Support in Connected Mode.

28 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201Intra NodeB Softer Handover.

29 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202Intra RNC Soft Handover.

30 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203Inter RNC Soft Handover.

31 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301Intra Frequency Hard Handover.

32 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801Intra RNC Cell Update.

33 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802Inter RNC Cell Update.

34 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901Intra RNC URA Update.

35 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902Inter RNC URA Update.

36 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR).

37 Configuring NodeB Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501NodeB Clock.

38 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface



vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface.

39 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic.

40 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth.

41 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature"WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes".

42 Configuring F5

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110F5.

43 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305UBR+ ATM QoS Class".

44 Configuring Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100Flow Control.

45 Configuring BOOTP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with theBSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function.

46 Configuring NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode.

47 Configuring License Control for Urgency

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300License Control for Urgency.

48 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000Intelligently Out of Service.

49 Configuring OCNS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator).

50 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400Power Off the Equipment Level by Level.



vii

51 Configuring Solar Power Device Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500Solar Power Device Management.

52 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).

53 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602Remote Electrical Tilt.

54 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz).

55 Configuring Multiple RAB Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010615Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).

56 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS Services.

57 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.

58 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS Services.

59 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services.

60 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS Services.

61 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010610HSDPA Introduction Package.

62 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell.

63 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex



viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex.

64 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).

65 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic CodeAllocation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic CodeAllocation.

66 Configuring HSDPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control.

67 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control.

68 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control.

69 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management.

70 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28.

71 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service.

72 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01062916QAM Modulation.

73 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010631Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.

74 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010611HSDPA Enhanced Package.

75 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR



ix

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.

76 Configuring HSDPA State Transition

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition.

77 Configuring HSDPA DRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD.

78 Configuring Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010630Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPA.

79 Configuring HSDPA over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010651HSDPA over Iur.

80 Configuring SRB over HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010652SRB over HSDPA.

81 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030010CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.

82 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010612HSUPA Introduction Package.

83 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control.

84 Configuring HSUPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control.

85 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management.

86 Configuring HSUPA DCCC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC.

87 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.



x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

88 Configuring E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061401 E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH).

89 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI.

90 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.

91 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User.

92 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010632Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA.


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01063460 HSUPA Users per Cell.

94 Configuring HSUPA over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010635HSUPA over Iur.

95 Configuring SRB over HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010636SRB over HSUPA.

96 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010641HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.

97 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010690TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.

98 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020138HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation.

99 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010712Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power.

100 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion



xi

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010637HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.

101 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010638Dynamic CE Resource Management.

102 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010680HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User.



104 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010685Downlink Enhanced L2.

105 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010688Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.

106 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010701Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH.

107 Configuring Enhanced DRX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010702Enhanced DRX.

108 Configuring MIMO Prime

This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030011MIMO Prime.



110 Configuring Downlink 64QAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010683Downlink 64QAM.

111 Configuring 2x2 MIMO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-0106842x2 MIMO. Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is a multi-antenna technology, whichenables multiple antennas to receive and transmit data. This increases the data transmission rate.

112 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010693DL 64QAM+MIMO.



xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

113 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010700Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA.

114 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010704Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection.

115 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010686CPC - DTX /DRX.

116 Configuring CPC-HS-SCCH Less Operation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010687CPC-HS-SCCH Less operation.

117 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01065396 HSDPA Users per Cell.



119 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell




121 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010691HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.

122 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020137Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation.

123 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020136Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA.

124 Configuring HSUPA Frequency Domain Equalization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature HSUPAFrequency Domain Equalization.

125 Configuring Uplink 16QAM



xiii

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010694Uplink 16QAM.

126 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010697E-DPCCH Boosting.

127 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010698HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User.

128 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010695UL Layer 2 Improvement.

129 Configuring DC-HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010696DC-HSDPA.

130 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary CarrierIn Multi-carrier

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010713Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier.

131 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010699DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial).

132 Configuring Queuing and Preemption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010505Queuing and Preemption.

133 Configuring Access Class Restriction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021103Access Class Restriction.

134 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050424Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources.

135 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020806Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight.

136 Configuring Web Browsing Acceleration

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020132Web Browsing Acceleration.

137 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020133P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour.



xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

138 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020135Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.

139 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020302Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage.

140 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020304Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS.

141 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved).

142 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.

143 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.

144 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020303Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage.

145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020309Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS.

146 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020307Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO.

147 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2


148 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change).

149 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS.

150 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1



xv

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020126Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1. For details about how to configure this feature onthe LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.

151 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE (trial)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020129Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE (trial).

152 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020103Inter Frequency Load Balance.

153 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020305Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.

154 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020306Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load.

155 Configuring DRD Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020400DRD Introduction Package.

156 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry.

157 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry.

158 Configuring Inter-System Redirect

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect.

159 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040004 Service Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup.

160 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature WRFD-020401 Inter-RATRedirection Based on Distance.

161 Configuring Measurement-based Direct Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020402Measurement based Direct Retry.

162 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020500Enhanced Fast Dormancy.



xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

163 Configuring Cell Barring

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102Cell Barring.

164 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-0203103G/2G Common Load Management.

165 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010506RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface.

166 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010507Rate Negotiation at Admission Control.

167 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020120Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup.

168 Configuring TCP Accelerator

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020123TCP Accelerator.

169 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020124Uplink Flow Control of User Plane.

170 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020130Videophone Service Restriction.

171 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011502Active Queue Management (AQM).

172 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020128Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.

173 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020131Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness.

174 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011000Cell Broadcast Service.

175 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast



xvii

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011001Simplified Cell Broadcast.

176 Configuring TFO/TrFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011600TFO/TrFO.

177 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020116Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers.

178 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020117Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load.

179 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020118Energy Efficiency Improved.

180 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020122Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS.

181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020119Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup.

182 Configuring Intelligent Power Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020121Intelligent Power Management.

183 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010613AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band).

184 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020701AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control.

185 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050405Overbooking on ATM Transmission.

186 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+.

187 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA.



xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

188 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618IMS Signaling over HSPA.

189 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501PDCP Header Compression (RoHC).

190 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+.

191 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020801Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.

192 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020802OTDOA Based LCS.

193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020803A-GPS Based LCS.

194 Configuring LCS Classified Zone

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020804LCS Classified Zone.

195 Configuring LCS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020805Configuring LCS over Iur.

196 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020807Iupc Interface for LCS service.

197 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021304RAN Sharing Introduction Package.

198 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.

199 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture.

200 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation



xix

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD02130403 Mobility Control and Service Differentiation.

201 Configuring Independent License Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130404 Independent License Control.

202 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021305RAN Sharing Phase 2.

203 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130501 Dedicated Iub Transmission Control.

204 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021303IMSI-Based Handover.

205 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021311MOCN (Multi-Operator Core Network) Introduction Package.

206 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators.

207 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131102 Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.

208 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131103 MOCN Mobility Management.

209 Configuring MOCN Load Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131104 MOCN Load Balance.

210 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131106 Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.

211 Configuring Iu Flex

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021302Iu Flex.

212 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021306Iu Flex Load Distribution Management.



xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

213 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020160Enhanced Multiband Management.

214 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050104Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface.

215 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050108Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface.

216 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010616MBMS Introduction Package.

217 Configuring MBMS Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control.

218 Configuring MBMS Load Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control.

219 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management.

220 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS.

221 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.

222 Configuring MBMS Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010660MBMS Phase 2.

223 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode.

224 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA.

225 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement



xxi

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement.

226 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users.

227 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010627FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS.

228 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency LayerDispersion)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010626MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion).

229 Configuring MBMS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010661MBMS over Iur.

230 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010662Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.

231 Configuring MSCH Scheduling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010663MSCH Scheduling.

232 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010665Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics.

233 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020114Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).

234 Configuring One Tunnel

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020111One Tunnel.

235 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050402IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.

236 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050403Hybrid Iub IP Transmission.

237 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050404ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB.



xxii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

238 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050409IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface.

239 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050410IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface.

240 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050420Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission.

241 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050422Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP.

242 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050408Overbooking on IP Transmission.

243 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature WRFD-050412 UDPMUX for Iu-CS Transmission.

244 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050105ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB.

245 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050106AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB.

246 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050107IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB.

247 Configuring Ethernet OAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050425Ethernet OAM.

248 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050501Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB.

249 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050502Synchronous Ethernet.

250 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy



xxiii

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040202RNC Node Redundancy.

251 Configuring RRU Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040203RRU Redundancy.

252 Configuring Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010203Transmit Diversity. Transmit diversity enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RFDL channels compared with no transmit diversity.

253 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-0102094-Antenna Receive Diversity.

254 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021308Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km.

255 Configuring High Speed Access

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010206High Speed Access.

256 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021350Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell.

257 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011500PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).

258 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021200HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).

259 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020104Intra Frequency Load Balance.

260 Configuring Potential User Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105Potential User Control.

261 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070004Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g.

262 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Basedon Iur-g



xxiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070005NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g.

263 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070006GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.

264 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070007GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.

265 Configuring Warning of Disaster

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020127Warning of Disaster.

266 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021001Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.

267 Configuring Push to Talk

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020134Push to Talk.

268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-012001RNC Offload (Trial). With this feature, the RNC can send some PS service data directly toInternet over the offload Gi interface.

269 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221801Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS).

270 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221802GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing. This feature enables the spectrum resources tobe dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic load,improving frequency utilization.

271 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221501IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.

272 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(NodeB)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221504TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB).

273 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221601Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB).



xxv

274 Configuring 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTSMode (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-2217032.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTS Mode (UMTS).

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.



xxvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.



xxvii

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



xxviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Contents

About This Document...................................................................................................................iii

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide...................................................................1-1

2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide..................................................................................2-1

3 Activating the UMTS License..................................................................................................3-13.1 Activating the BSC6900 License....................................................................................................................3-23.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators.....................................................................................................3-33.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs......................................................................................................................3-4

4 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2 kbit/s RRC Connection and RAB Assignment.................4-1

5 Configuring Conversational QoS Class ................................................................................5-1

6 Configuring Streaming QoS Class.........................................................................................6-1

7 Configuring Interactive QoS Class.........................................................................................7-1

8 Configuring Background QoS Class......................................................................................8-1

9 Configuring Emergency Call...................................................................................................9-1

10 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity..............................................................10-1

11 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split............................................................11-1

12 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,CELL_FACH)................................................................................................................................12-1

13 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1).....................13-1

14 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2).........................14-1

15 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control.................................................15-1

16 Configuring Integrity Protection........................................................................................16-1

17 Configuring Encryption........................................................................................................17-1

18 Configuring Open Loop Power Control............................................................................18-1

19 Configuring Downlink Power Balance.............................................................................19-1

20 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control ...........................................................................20-1

RANFeature Activation Guide Contents


xxix

21 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control ...........................................................................21-1

22 Configuring Admission Control.........................................................................................22-1

23 Configuring Load Measurement.........................................................................................23-1

24 Configuring Load Reshuffling............................................................................................24-1

25 Configuring Overload Control............................................................................................25-1

26 Configuring Code Resource Management........................................................................26-1

27 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode.........................................27-1

28 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover......................................................................28-1

29 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover.............................................................................29-1

30 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover.............................................................................30-1

31 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover..................................................................31-1

32 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update..................................................................................32-1

33 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update..................................................................................33-1

34 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update.................................................................................34-1

35 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update.................................................................................35-1

36 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) .......................36-1

37 Configuring NodeB Clock....................................................................................................37-1

38 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface.........................38-1

39 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic.......................39-1

40 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth.........................40-1

41 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes......................................41-1

42 Configuring F5........................................................................................................................42-1

43 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class..................................................................................43-1

44 Configuring Flow Control....................................................................................................44-1

45 Configuring BOOTP..............................................................................................................45-1

46 Configuring NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode..................................................46-1

47 Configuring License Control for Urgency.........................................................................47-1

48 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service..........................................................................48-1

49 Configuring OCNS................................................................................................................49-1

50 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level.................................................50-1

ContentsRAN


xxx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

51 Configuring Solar Power Device Management...............................................................51-1

52 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)..............................52-1

53 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt.....................................................................................53-1

54 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)..........................................54-1

55 Configuring Multiple RAB Package .................................................................................55-1

56 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services................................................................56-1

57 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services...........................57-1

58 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services.............................................................58-1

59 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services........................59-1

60 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services................................................................60-1

61 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package.....................................................................61-1

62 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell............................................................................................62-1

63 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex.....................................................63-1

64 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)..........................64-1

65 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic CodeAllocation......................................................................................................................................65-1

66 Configuring HSDPA Power Control .................................................................................66-1

67 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control.........................................................................67-1

68 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control....................................................................................68-1

69 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management...................................................................69-1

70 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28.........................................................................70-1

71 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service......................71-1

72 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation................................................................................72-1

73 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB..............................................73-1

74 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package...........................................................................74-1

75 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR............................................................75-1

76 Configuring HSDPA State Transition...............................................................................76-1

77 Configuring HSDPA DRD...................................................................................................77-1

78 Configuring Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPA............................78-1

79 Configuring HSDPA over Iur..............................................................................................79-1

80 Configuring SRB over HSDPA...........................................................................................80-1



xxxi

81 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target..................................81-1

82 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package......................................................................82-1

83 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control..........................................................................83-1

84 Configuring HSUPA Power Control .................................................................................84-1

85 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management...................................................................85-1

86 Configuring HSUPA DCCC.................................................................................................86-1

87 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell..............................................................................87-1

88 Configuring E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)...........................88-1

89 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI.............................................................................................89-1

90 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover..............................................................90-1

91 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User...........................................................................91-1

92 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA............................................................92-1

93 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell..............................................................................93-1

94 Configuring HSUPA over Iur..............................................................................................94-1

95 Configuring SRB over HSUPA............................................................................................95-1

96 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission..................................................................96-1

97 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.......................................97-1

98 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation......................98-1

99 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power.................................99-1

100 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.........................100-1

101 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management......................................................101-1

102 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User......................................................102-1


104 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2.............................................................................104-1

105 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.........................................................105-1

106 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH...............................................................106-1

107 Configuring Enhanced DRX............................................................................................107-1

108 Configuring MIMO Prime...............................................................................................108-1


110 Configuring Downlink 64QAM......................................................................................110-1

ContentsRAN


xxxii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

111 Configuring 2x2 MIMO....................................................................................................111-1

112 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO......................................................................112-1

113 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier..........113-1

114 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection..................................................114-1

115 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX.........................................................................................115-1

116 Configuring CPC-HS-SCCH Less Operation...............................................................116-1

117 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell..........................................................................117-1

118 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell..........................................................................118-1

119 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell........................................................................119-1

120 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell........................................................................120-1

121 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation....................................................121-1

122 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation.......................................................................................................................................................122-1

123 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA.............................................123-1

124 Configuring HSUPA Frequency Domain Equalization.............................................124-1

125 Configuring Uplink 16QAM............................................................................................125-1

126 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting....................................................................................126-1

127 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User.........................................................127-1

128 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement..........................................................................128-1

129 Configuring DC-HSDPA..................................................................................................129-1

130 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary CarrierIn Multi-carrier..........................................................................................................................130-1

131 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial).......................................................................131-1

132 Configuring Queuing and Preemption..........................................................................132-1

133 Configuring Access Class Restriction ...........................................................................133-1

134 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources....................134-1

135 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight........................................135-1

136 Configuring Web Browsing Acceleration.....................................................................136-1

137 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour.............................137-1

138 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.............................138-1

139 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage..........................139-1



xxxiii

140 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS............................140-1

141 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)......................................................141-1

142 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.................................................142-1

143 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update..............................................143-1

144 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage..............................................144-1

145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS.................................................145-1

146 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO.......................................................................................................................................................146-1

147 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2...................................................................147-1

148 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change).................................................148-1

149 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS..............................................149-1

150 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1...........................................150-1

151 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE (trial).......................................................................................................................................................151-1

152 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance..................................................................152-1

153 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service..................................................153-1

154 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load......................................................154-1

155 Configuring DRD Introduction Package.......................................................................155-1

156 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry..........................................................................156-1

157 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry..........................................................................157-1

158 Configuring Inter-System Redirect................................................................................158-1

159 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup......................159-1

160 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance............................................160-1

161 Configuring Measurement-based Direct Retry............................................................161-1

162 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy..........................................................................162-1

163 Configuring Cell Barring..................................................................................................163-1

164 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management.......................................................164-1

165 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface...................165-1

166 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control.................................................166-1

167 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup.........167-1

168 Configuring TCP Accelerator..........................................................................................168-1

ContentsRAN


xxxiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

169 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane........................................................169-1

170 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction..............................................................170-1

171 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)........................................................171-1

172 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service......................................172-1

173 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness................................173-1

174 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service...............................................................................174-1

175 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast.........................................................................175-1

176 Configuring TFO/TrFO.....................................................................................................176-1

177 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers...........................................177-1

178 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load..................................178-1

179 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved.....................................................................179-1

180 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS.................................................180-1

181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup...............................181-1

182 Configuring Intelligent Power Management...............................................................182-1

183 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)........................................183-1

184 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control...................................................184-1

185 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission.....................................................185-1

186 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+...........................................................................186-1

187 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA........................................187-1

188 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA........................................................................188-1

189 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)......................................................189-1

190 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+...................................................................190-1

191 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS........................................................191-1

192 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS....................................................................................192-1

193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.......................................................................................193-1

194 Configuring LCS Classified Zone...................................................................................194-1

195 Configuring LCS over Iur.................................................................................................195-1

196 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service.................................................................196-1

197 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package.......................................................197-1

198 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator......................................................198-1



xxxv

199 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture.................................................................199-1

200 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation......................................200-1

201 Configuring Independent License Control...................................................................201-1

202 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2.................................................................................202-1

203 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control.....................................................203-1

204 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover...............................................................................204-1

205 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package...................................................................205-1

206 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators...................................................................206-1

207 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators......................................................207-1

208 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management................................................................208-1

209 Configuring MOCN Load Balance.................................................................................209-1

210 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion......................................................210-1

211 Configuring Iu Flex............................................................................................................211-1

212 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management.................................................212-1

213 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management........................................................213-1

214 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface.................................................214-1

215 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface...................................................215-1

216 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package...................................................................216-1

217 Configuring MBMS Admission Control.......................................................................217-1

218 Configuring MBMS Load Control..................................................................................218-1

219 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management.............................................219-1

220 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS...................................................................220-1

221 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS...........................................221-1

222 Configuring MBMS Phase 2............................................................................................222-1

223 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode..........................................................223-1

224 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA..........................................................................224-1

225 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement............................................................225-1

226 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users.......................................................................................................................................................226-1

227 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS...............................................227-1

ContentsRAN


xxxvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

228 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency LayerDispersion) ................................................................................................................................228-1

229 Configuring MBMS over Iur...........................................................................................229-1

230 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH..................................................230-1

231 Configuring MSCH Scheduling......................................................................................231-1

232 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics.........................................232-1

233 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)..............................................233-1

234 Configuring One Tunnel..................................................................................................234-1

235 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface....................................235-1

236 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission....................................................................236-1

237 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB......................................................................237-1

238 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface......................................238-1

239 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface.....................................239-1

240 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission...................................................................240-1

241 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP..................................................241-1

242 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission...........................................................242-1

243 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission.........................................................243-1

244 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB........................................................244-1

245 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB.......................................................245-1

246 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB.................................................................246-1

247 Configuring Ethernet OAM.............................................................................................247-1

248 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB......................................248-1

249 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet................................................................................249-1

250 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy............................................................................250-1

251 Configuring RRU Redundancy.......................................................................................251-1

252 Configuring Transmit Diversity.....................................................................................252-1

253 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity....................................................................253-1

254 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km.....................................................254-1

255 Configuring High Speed Access.....................................................................................255-1

256 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell.......................................................................................................................................................256-1



xxxvii

257 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)..................................................257-1

258 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)...........................................................258-1

259 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance..................................................................259-1

260 Configuring Potential User Control...............................................................................260-1

261 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g.......................................................................................................................................................261-1

262 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Basedon Iur-g........................................................................................................................................262-1

263 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g................................263-1

264 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g................................264-1

265 Configuring Warning of Disaster...................................................................................265-1

266 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier..................................266-1

267 Configuring Push to Talk.................................................................................................267-1

268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)...................................................................................268-1

269 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS).....................................269-1

270 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing......................................270-1

271 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB).......................................................................................................................................................271-1

271.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side..................................271-2271.2 Configuring IP-Based UMTS and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side....................................271-8

272 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side(NodeB).......................................................................................................................................272-1

273 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)..........................273-1273.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference Clock.....................................................................273-2273.2 Configuring UMTS and LTE Common Reference Clock......................................................................273-9

274 Configuring 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTSMode (UMTS)............................................................................................................................274-1

ContentsRAN


xxxviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figures

Figure 3-1 License Distributed to Operator..........................................................................................................3-3Figure 4-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box............................................................................................................4-2Figure 5-1 Iub interface trace dialog box ............................................................................................................5-2Figure 6-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box..............................................................................................................6-2Figure 7-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box..............................................................................................................7-2Figure 8-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box..............................................................................................................8-2Figure 15-1 IE trafficVolumeMeasurement.......................................................................................................15-6Figure 15-2 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger..........................................................................................................15-6Figure 15-3 IE measurementQuantity................................................................................................................15-7Figure 15-4 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger..........................................................................................................15-7Figure 15-5 IE rrc-StateIndicator....................................................................................................................15-7Figure 18-1 ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo IE....................................................................................................18-2Figure 19-1 RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message traced in Uu interface message tracing.............19-2Figure 19-2 Information element dedicatedMeasurementType......................................................................19-3Figure 20-1 UL SIR............................................................................................................................................20-2Figure 20-2 OLPC..............................................................................................................................................20-2Figure 21-1 UL SIR Tracing..............................................................................................................................21-2Figure 21-2 UE Tx Power Tracing.....................................................................................................................21-2Figure 36-1 Uu interface tracing dialog box .....................................................................................................36-2Figure 36-2 RRC CONNECTION RELEASE...................................................................................................36-3Figure 41-1 Service type of ATM......................................................................................................................41-2Figure 60-1 VoIP service...................................................................................................................................60-1Figure 62-1 Cell Performance Monitoring.........................................................................................................62-2Figure 73-1 User Tracing...................................................................................................................................73-2Figure 73-2 Message Browser............................................................................................................................73-3Figure 73-3 Message Browser............................................................................................................................73-4Figure 76-1 RRC_RB_RECFG message...........................................................................................................76-2Figure 78-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box........................................................................................................78-2Figure 80-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box........................................................................................................80-2Figure 80-2 Value of the dl-TransportChannelType IE.................................................................................80-3Figure 80-3 Value of the rb-Identity IE............................................................................................................80-3Figure 89-1 HSUPA service with 2 ms TTI carried on the E-DCH...................................................................89-2Figure 96-1 IE information.................................................................................................................................96-2

RANFeature Activation Guide Figures


xxxix

Figure 97-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box........................................................................................................97-2Figure 97-2 2 ms TTI.........................................................................................................................................97-3Figure 97-3 10 ms TTI.......................................................................................................................................97-3Figure 98-1 Viewing the minReduced-E-DPDCH-GainFactor IE ................................................................98-2Figure 99-1 PO parameters of typical services...................................................................................................99-3Figure 99-2 Rate of the new BE service ............................................................................................................99-4Figure 99-3 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed (256 kbit/s).................................99-4Figure 99-4 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed...................................................99-5Figure 99-5 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed ..................................................99-6Figure 99-6 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed ...................................................99-6Figure 99-7 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for large retransmission at a low speed ....................................................99-7Figure 101-1 dynamic-CE-Switch-Private....................................................................................................101-2Figure 104-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................104-2Figure 104-2 Value of the IE dL RLC PDU size............................................................................................104-2Figure 107-1 Information element in the system information message of enhanced DRX.............................107-2Figure 107-2 Indication sent from the RNC to the NodeB on the DCCH or DTCH.......................................107-3Figure 107-3 HS-DSCH DATA FRAME type2..............................................................................................107-3Figure 109-1 Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box.......................................................................109-2Figure 110-1 Uu interface tracing....................................................................................................................110-2Figure 110-2 Checking the dl-64QAM-Configured information element.....................................................110-3Figure 111-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................111-4Figure 111-2 IE mimoParameters..................................................................................................................111-5Figure 114-1 mimoParameters message........................................................................................................114-3Figure 114-2 dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD IE...................................................................................................114-3Figure 115-1 Uu interface tracing task.............................................................................................................115-2Figure 115-2 IE information.............................................................................................................................115-2Figure 116-1 RRC_RB_SETUP Information...................................................................................................116-2Figure 121-1 Cell RTWP 1..............................................................................................................................121-2Figure 122-1 Cell RTWP 1..............................................................................................................................122-2Figure 122-2 Cell RTWP 2..............................................................................................................................122-2Figure 123-1 Cell RTWP (feature disabled)....................................................................................................123-2Figure 123-2 Cell RTWP (feature enabled).....................................................................................................123-3Figure 125-1 Uu Interface tracing....................................................................................................................125-2Figure 125-2 Indication of uplink 16QAM......................................................................................................125-3Figure 126-1 Tracing messages over the Uu interface.....................................................................................126-3Figure 126-2 Tracing messages over the Iub interface....................................................................................126-4Figure 128-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................128-2Figure 128-2 Value of the IE rlc-PDU-Size....................................................................................................128-3Figure 129-1 Uu Interface Trace dialogue box..............................................................................................129-4Figure 129-2 RRC_RB_SETUP message.......................................................................................................129-4Figure 133-1 RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message...........................................................................................133-2Figure 133-2 RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message...........................................................................................133-3

FiguresRAN


xl Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 135-1 SPI and SPI weight of UE A in the uplink ................................................................................135-3Figure 135-2 SPI and SPI weight of UE A in the downlink ...........................................................................135-4Figure 135-3 SPI and SPI weight of UE B in the uplink ................................................................................135-4Figure 135-4 SPI and SPI weight of UE B in the downlink ............................................................................135-5Figure 138-1 Uu interface tracing task.............................................................................................................138-3Figure 138-2 Message tracing..........................................................................................................................138-3Figure 139-1 Event 2D measurement report....................................................................................................139-2Figure 139-2 Inter-frequency measurement control message..........................................................................139-2Figure 140-1 RRC_RB_RECFG message.......................................................................................................140-2Figure 140-2 RRC_RB_RECFG message.......................................................................................................140-3Figure 140-3 RRC_RB_RECFG message.......................................................................................................140-3Figure 141-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box......................................................................................................141-3Figure 141-2 Iur Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................141-3Figure 142-1 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover......................................................................................142-3Figure 144-1 Event 2D measurement report....................................................................................................144-2Figure 144-2 Inter-frequency measurement control message..........................................................................144-2Figure 145-1 RRC_RB_RECFG message.......................................................................................................145-2Figure 145-2 RRC_RB_RECFG message.......................................................................................................145-3Figure 145-3 RRC_RB_RECFG message.......................................................................................................145-3Figure 150-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................150-3Figure 150-2 SIB message tracing...................................................................................................................150-3Figure 151-1 Viewing the IE e-UTRA-FrequencyInfo .................................................................................151-2Figure 151-2 Viewing the IE EUTRA-TargetFreqInfo ................................................................................151-3Figure 153-1 Inter-frequency measurement control message..........................................................................153-2Figure 160-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................160-2Figure 160-2 GSM-Targetcellinfo IE.............................................................................................................160-3Figure 162-1 Status of the Enhanced Fast Dormancy license..........................................................................162-5Figure 162-2 UE in the CELL_DCH state.......................................................................................................162-5Figure 162-3 State transition to the CELL_PCH state.....................................................................................162-6Figure 162-4 Cell update..................................................................................................................................162-6Figure 162-5 Channel reconfiguration.............................................................................................................162-6Figure 163-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................163-2Figure 163-2 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................163-3Figure 163-3 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................163-4Figure 166-1 Iu message tracing......................................................................................................................166-2Figure 166-2 RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message on the Iu interface .........................................166-2Figure 166-3 Iu message tracing......................................................................................................................166-3Figure 166-4 RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RESP message on the Iu interface .......................................166-3Figure 169-1 Iub interface trace dialog box ....................................................................................................169-2Figure 169-2 TrafficClass-Private....................................................................................................................169-3Figure 171-1 UE Trace dialog box...................................................................................................................171-2Figure 173-1 Iub interface tracing dialog box .................................................................................................173-2



xli

Figure 173-2 fairness common measurement report........................................................................................173-3Figure 174-1 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY message..........................................................................174-3Figure 174-2 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY_CMP message................................................................174-3Figure 174-3 Viewing the CBS function..........................................................................................................174-4Figure 174-4 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE message ....................................................................174-5Figure 174-5 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE_CMP message .........................................................174-6Figure 174-6 Viewing the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message .........................................................................174-7Figure 174-7 Viewing the SAB_KILL message..............................................................................................174-8Figure 174-8 Viewing the SABP_KILL_CMP message.................................................................................174-9Figure 175-1 UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message .............................................................................................175-2Figure 184-1 Uu interface tracing....................................................................................................................184-3Figure 184-2 IEs contained in RRC_MEAS_CTRL........................................................................................184-3Figure 184-3 AMR mode.................................................................................................................................184-4Figure 186-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................186-3Figure 186-2 UE in CELL_DCH state.............................................................................................................186-3Figure 186-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+....................................................................................186-4Figure 186-4 Type of TTI carried in the message............................................................................................186-4Figure 188-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................188-2Figure 188-2 UE in CELL_DCH state.............................................................................................................188-2Figure 188-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+....................................................................................188-3Figure 188-4 Type of TTI carried in the message............................................................................................188-3Figure 190-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................190-3Figure 190-2 UE in CELL_DCH state.............................................................................................................190-3Figure 190-3 CS voice services carried on HSPA/HSPA+..............................................................................190-3Figure 190-4 Type of TTI carried in the message............................................................................................190-4Figure 191-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box .....................................................................................................191-2Figure 191-2 Iub Interface Trace dialog box ...................................................................................................191-3Figure 191-3 Uu Interface Trace dialog box ...................................................................................................191-3Figure 191-4 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL....................................................................................191-4Figure 191-5 LOCATION REPORT...............................................................................................................191-5Figure 191-6 Dedicated Measurement Type....................................................................................................191-6Figure 191-7 Round Trip Time........................................................................................................................191-6Figure 191-8 UE Rx-Tx time difference..........................................................................................................191-7Figure 191-9 UE Rx-Tx time difference type 1...............................................................................................191-7Figure 193-1 Iub interface tracing....................................................................................................................193-4Figure 193-2 Uu Interface Trace dialog box ...................................................................................................193-4Figure 193-3 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL....................................................................................193-5Figure 193-4 LOCATION REPORT...............................................................................................................193-6Figure 193-5 ue-positioning-GPS-AssistanceData..........................................................................................193-6Figure 193-6 GPS-MeasurementParam............................................................................................................193-7Figure 194-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................194-2Figure 194-2 LOCATION REPORT message.................................................................................................194-3

FiguresRAN


xlii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 195-1 Iur Interface Trace dialog box....................................................................................................195-3Figure 195-2 GPS assistance data carried in the INFORMATION REPORT message...............................195-3Figure 195-3 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST.......................................................195-4Figure 195-4 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE.....................................................195-5Figure 195-5 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST....................................................195-5Figure 195-6 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE..................................................195-6Figure 206-1 PLMN Identify field in the MIB message..................................................................................206-2Figure 206-2 Multiple PLMN List IE in the MIB message.............................................................................206-3Figure 207-1 PLMN Identify IE in the MIB message......................................................................................207-2Figure 213-1 Message containing the IE..........................................................................................................213-2Figure 233-1 DSAC activated..........................................................................................................................233-2Figure 233-2 DSAC not activated....................................................................................................................233-3Figure 234-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box......................................................................................................234-2Figure 234-2 Iu Interface Trace dialog box......................................................................................................234-2Figure 234-3 Configured GGSN IP address.....................................................................................................234-2Figure 241-1 Link performance monitoring.....................................................................................................241-2Figure 247-1 PPP Ethernet OAM network.......................................................................................................247-2Figure 250-1 Network topology not configured with RNC pool.....................................................................250-2Figure 250-2 Network topology configured with RNC pool...........................................................................250-2Figure 250-3 Normal heartbeat between RNC202 and RNC203.....................................................................250-5Figure 250-4 NodeB control rights obtained by RNC202...............................................................................250-5Figure 250-5 CS AMR service set up successfully..........................................................................................250-5Figure 268-1 Offload Gi interface....................................................................................................................268-1Figure 271-1 IP-over-FE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side...........................................271-2Figure 271-2 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side......................................271-3Figure 271-3 IP-over-GE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side..........................................271-3Figure 271-4 IP over FE/GE UMTS and LTE co-transmission on base station side.......................................271-9Figure 271-5 IP over E1/T1 UMTS and LTE co-transmission on base station side........................................271-9Figure 272-1 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission................................................272-2Figure 272-2 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission........................................272-2Figure 273-1 Common GPS reference clock...................................................................................................273-3Figure 273-2 Common BITS reference clock..................................................................................................273-4Figure 273-3 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU).....................................................273-4Figure 273-4 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)...................................................273-4Figure 273-5 Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)...............................................273-5Figure 273-6 Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT).........................................................273-5Figure 273-7 Common GPS reference clock.................................................................................................273-10Figure 273-8 Common BITS reference clock................................................................................................273-11Figure 273-9 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT).................................................273-11Figure 273-10 Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)................................................273-12Figure 273-11 Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)..........................................................273-12



xliii

Tables

Table 2-1 RAN Basic Feature List.......................................................................................................................2-1Table 2-2 RAN Optional Feature List..................................................................................................................2-7Table 37-1 Parameters........................................................................................................................................37-2Table 37-2 Parameters........................................................................................................................................37-2Table 162-1 Processing procedure after the comparison..................................................................................162-4Table 215-1 Timers related to SAAL links of satellite transmission...............................................................215-2Table 271-1 IP Planning of connecting between BTS and BSC......................................................................271-3Table 271-2 IP Planning of connecting between NodeB and RNC (IP over FE/GE)......................................271-3Table 271-3 IP planning of connection between NodeB and RNC (IP over E1/T1).......................................271-4

RANFeature Activation Guide Tables


xlv

1 Changes in the RAN Feature ActivationGuide

This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide.

02 (2011-07-11)This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-04-25), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 81 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Targetl 108 Configuring MIMO Prime

Compared with issue 01 (2011-04-25), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue 01 (2011-04-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2011-04-25)This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 170 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction

Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue Draft B (2011-03-21), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft B (2011-03-21)This is the Draft B release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 136 Configuring Web Browsing Accelerationl 137 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hourl 235 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interfacel 238 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface

RANFeature Activation Guide 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide


1-1

l 239 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2011-01-31)

This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following newtopics:

l 98 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation

l 99 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power

l 106 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH

l 107 Configuring Enhanced DRX

l 114 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection

l 122 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

l 123 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

l 126 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting

l 127 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User

l 130 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the SupplementaryCarrier In Multi-carrier

l 131 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial)

l 138 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management

l 151 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE (trial)

l 173 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

l 180 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS

l 182 Configuring Intelligent Power Management

l 210 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion

l 256 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in OneCell

l 267 Configuring Push to Talk

l 268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)

l 270 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing

l 274 Configuring 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM andUMTS Mode (UMTS)

Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not incorporate anychanges.

Compared with issue 06 (2010-11-30) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation GuideRAN


1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide

RAN features are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not license-controlled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Optional features arelicense-controlled and therefore require license activation before use.

Table 2-1 lists the RAN basic features. Table 2-2 lists the RAN optional features.

Table 2-1 RAN Basic Feature List

Feature ID Feature Name Configuration Method

WRFD-000001 System Improvement forRAN5.1

None


None


None


None


None


None


None


None

WRFD-010101 3GPP R9 Specifications None

WRFD-010102 Operating Multi-band None

WRFD-010201 FDD Mode None

RANFeature Activation Guide 2 Overview of Feature Activation Guide


2-1


WRFD-010510 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRCConnection and RadioAccess Bearer Establishmentand Release

4 Configuring3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2 kbit/sRRC Connection and RABAssignment

WRFD-010501 Conversational QoS Class 5 ConfiguringConversational QoS Class

WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class 6 Configuring StreamingQoS Class

WRFD-010503 Interactive QoS Class 7 Configuring InteractiveQoS Class

WRFD-010504 Background QoS Class 8 Configuring BackgroundQoS Class

WRFD-010609 Multiple RAB IntroductionPackage (PS RAB < 2)

None

WRFD-01060901 Combination of Two CSServices (Except for TwoAMR Speech Services)

None

WRFD-01060902 Combination of One CSService and One PS Service

None

WRFD-01060903 Combination of Two CSServices and One PS Service(Except for Two AMRSpeech Services)

None

WRFD-021104 Emergency Call 9 Configuring EmergencyCall

MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna ReceiveDiversity

10 Configuring 2-WayAntenna Receive Diversity

WRFD-010205 Cell Digital Combination andSplit

11 Configuring Cell DigitalCombination and Split

WRFD-010208 Fast Power CongestionControl (FCC)

None

WRFD-010211 Active TX Chain GainCalibration

None

WRFD-010202 UE State in Connected Mode(CELL-DCH, CELL-PCH,URA-PCH, CELL-FACH)

12 Configuring UE State inConnected Mode(CELL_DCH,CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,CELL_FACH)

WRFD-010401 System InformationBroadcasting

None

2 Overview of Feature Activation GuideRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


WRFD-010301 Paging UE in Idle,CELL_PCH, URA_PCHState (Type 1)

13 Configuring Paging UEin Idle, CELL_PCH,URA_PCH State (Type 1)

WRFD-010302 Paging UE in CELL_FACH,CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

14 Configuring Paging UEin CELL_FACH,CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

WRFD-020900 Logical ChannelManagement

None

WRFD-021000 Transport ChannelManagement

None

WRFD-022000 Physical ChannelManagement

None

WRFD-021101 Dynamic ChannelConfiguration Control(DCCC)

15 Configuring DynamicChannel ConfigurationControl

WRFD-011401 Integrity Protection 16 Configuring IntegrityProtection

WRFD-011402 Encryption 17 Configuring Encryption

WRFD-020501 Open Loop Power Control 18 Configuring Open LoopPower Control

WRFD-020502 Downlink Power Balance 19 Configuring DownlinkPower Balance

WRFD-020503 Outer Loop Power Control 20 Configuring Outer LoopPower Control

WRFD-020504 Inner Loop Power Control 21 Configuring Inner LoopPower Control

WRFD-020101 Admission Control 22 Configuring AdmissionControl

WRFD-020102 Load Measurement 23 Configuring LoadMeasurement

WRFD-020106 Load Reshuffling 24 Configuring LoadReshuffling

WRFD-020107 Overload Control 25 Configuring OverloadControl

WRFD-020108 Code Resource Management 26 Configuring CodeResource Management

WRFD-021301 Shared Network Support inConnected Mode

27 Configuring SharedNetwork Support inConnected Mode



2-3


MRFD-210104 BSC/RNC Resource Sharing None

WRFD-020201 Intra NodeB Softer Handover 28 Configuring IntraNodeB Softer Handover

WRFD-020202 Intra NodeB Softer Handover 29 Configuring Intra RNCSoft Handover

WRFD-020203 Inter RNC Soft Handover 30 Configuring Inter RNCSoft Handover

WRFD-020301 Intra Frequency HardHandover

31 Configuring IntraFrequency Hard Handover

WRFD-010801 Intra RNC Cell Update 32 Configuring Intra RNCCell Update

WRFD-010802 Inter RNC Cell Update 33 Configuring Inter RNCCell Update

WRFD-010901 Intra RNC URA Update 34 Configuring Intra RNCURA Update

WRFD-010902 Inter RNC URA Update 35 Configuring Inter RNCURA Update

WRFD-021400 Direct Signaling ConnectionRe-establishment (DSCR)

36 Configuring DirectSignaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)

MRFD-210204 Star Topology None

MRFD-210205 Chain Topology None

MRFD-210206 Tree Topology None

MRFD-210501 NodeB Clock 37 Configuring NodeBClock

MRFD-210502 RNC Clock None

WRFD-050301 ATM TransmissionIntroduction Package

None

WRFD-05030101 ATM over E1T1 on IubInterface

None

WRFD-05030102 ATM over ChannelizedSTM-1/OC-3 on IubInterface

None

WRFD-05030103 ATM over Non-channelizedSTM-1/OC-3c on Iub/Iu/IurInterface

None




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


WRFD-05030104 Dynamic AAL2 Connectionsin Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

38 Configuring DynamicAAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

WRFD-05030105 Permanent AAL5Connections for ControlPlane Traffic

39 Configuring PermanentAAL5 Connections forControl Plane Traffic

WRFD-05030106 Call Admission Based onUsed AAL2 Path Bandwidth

40 Configuring CallAdmission Based on UsedAAL2 Path Bandwidth

WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR,UBR ATM QoS Classes

41 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATMQoS Classes

WRFD-05030110 F5 42 Configuring F5

WRFD-050304 IMA for E1T1 orChannelized STM-1/OC-3on Iub Interface

None

WRFD-050305 UBR+ ATM QoS Class 43 Configuring UBR+ATM QoS Class

MRFD-210103 Link aggregation None

WRFD-040100 Flow Control 44 Configuring FlowControl

WRFD-040101 DPU Board Replacedwithout Service Interrupt inRNC

None

MRFD-210101 System Redundancy None

MRFD-210102 Operate System SecurityManagement

None

MRFD-210302 Performance Management None

MRFD-210304 Fault Management None

MRFD-210303 Inventory Management None

MRFD-210301 Configuration Management None

MRFD-210305 Security Management None

MRFD-210801 Interface Tracing None

MRFD-210802 Call Tracing None

MRFD-210401 RNC Software Management None

MRFD-210402 NodeB SoftwareManagement

None



2-5


MRFD-210310 NodeB Software USBDownload

None

WRFD-031100 BOOTP 45 Configuring BOOTP

WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-discovery Basedon IP Mode

46 Configuring NodeB Self-discovery Based on IPMode

WRFD-031102 NodeB Remote Self-configuration

None

WRFD-031103 NodeB Self-test None

MRFD-210403 License Management None

WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency 47 Configuring LicenseControl for Urgency

MRFD-210309 DBS Topology Maintenance None

WRFD-031000 Intelligently Out of Service 48 ConfiguringIntelligently Out of Service

WRFD-031200 OCNS 49 Configuring OCNS

WRFD-031400 Power off the equipmentlevel by level

50 Configuring Power Offthe Equipment Level byLevel

WRFD-031500 Solar Power DeviceManagement

51 Configuring SolarPower Device Management

WRFD-021404 Single IP Address for NodeB None

WRFD-020406 Intelligent PowerMeasurement

None

WRFD-010212 Improved CE Mapping for E-DCH

None

MRFD-210701 Documentation None

MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA(Tower Mounted Amplifier)

52 Configuring Connectionwith TMA (TowerMounted Amplifier)

MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt 53 Configuring RemoteElectrical Tilt

WRFD-060003 Same Band Antenna SharingUnit (900Mhz)

54 Configuring Same BandAntenna Sharing Unit (900MHz)

MRFD-220001 Multi-mode BS CommonCPRI Interface(NodeB)

None




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


MRFD-220002 Multi-mode BS RRU/RFUstar-connection with separateCPRI interface(NodeB)

None

Table 2-2 RAN Optional Feature List

Feature ID Feature Name LicenseControl Item

LicenseConfiguredon...

ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010615 Multiple RABPackage

Multiple RAB BSC6900 55 ConfiguringMultiple RABPackage

WRFD-01061501

Combination ofTwo PSServices

Multiple RAB BSC6900 56 ConfiguringCombinationof Two PSServices

WRFD-01061502

Combination ofOne CS Serviceand Two PSServices

Multiple RAB BSC6900 57 ConfiguringCombinationof One CSService andTwo PSServices

WRFD-01061503

Combination ofThree PSServices

Multiple RAB BSC6900 58 ConfiguringCombinationof Three PSServices

WRFD-01061504

Combination ofOne CS Serviceand Three PSServices

Multiple RAB BSC6900 59 ConfiguringCombinationof One CSService andThree PSServices

WRFD-01061505

Combination ofFour PSServices

Multiple RAB BSC6900 60 ConfiguringCombinationof Four PSServices



2-7



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010610 HSDPAIntroductionPackage

RNC:HighSpeedDownlinkPacket AccessNODEB:thenumber ofNodeBs withHSDPAfunctionenabled

BSC6900&NodeB

61 ConfiguringHSDPAIntroductionPackage

WRFD-01061017

QPSKModulation


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061001

15 Codes perCell


BSC6900&NodeB

62 Configuring15 Codes perCell

WRFD-01061018

Time and HS-PDSCH CodesMultiplex


BSC6900&NodeB

63 ConfiguringTime and HS-PDSCH CodesMultiplex




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061009

HSDPA H-ARQ &Scheduling(MAX C/I, RRand PF)


BSC6900&NodeB

64 ConfiguringHSDPA H-ARQ &Scheduling(MAX C/I, RR,and PF)

WRFD-01061005

HSDPA StaticCode Allocationand RNC-ControlledDynamic CodeAllocation


BSC6900&NodeB

65 ConfiguringHSDPA StaticCodeAllocation andRNC-ControlledDynamic CodeAllocation

WRFD-01061004

HSDPA PowerControl


BSC6900&NodeB

66 ConfiguringHSDPA PowerControl

WRFD-01061003

HSDPAAdmissionControl


BSC6900&NodeB

67 ConfiguringHSDPAAdmissionControl



2-9



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061019

HSDPADynamic PowerAllocation


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061010

HSDPA FlowControl


BSC6900&NodeB

68 ConfiguringHSDPA FlowControl

WRFD-01061006

HSDPAMobilityManagement


BSC6900&NodeB

69 ConfiguringHSDPAMobilityManagement

WRFD-01061014

HSDPATransportResourceManagement


BSC6900&NodeB

None




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061008

Interactive andBackgroundTraffic Class onHSDPA


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061002

HSDPA UECategory 1 to 28


BSC6900&NodeB

70 ConfiguringHSDPA UECategory 1 to28

WRFD-01061015

HSDPA1.8Mbps perUser


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061016

16 HSDPAUsers per Cell


BSC6900&NodeB

None



2-11



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061020

Improvement ofUser Experiencein Low TrafficService


BSC6900&NodeB

71 ConfiguringImprovementof UserExperience inLow TrafficService

WRFD-010620 HSDPA3.6Mbps perUser

High SpeedDownlinkPacket AccessFunction 3.6M

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010629 DL 16QAMModulation

the number ofNodeBs withHSDPA RRMpackage 1enabled

NodeB 72 ConfiguringDL 16QAMModulation

WRFD-010631 Dynamic CodeAllocationBased onNodeB

the number ofNodeBs withHSDPA RRMpackage 1enabled

NodeB 73 ConfiguringDynamic CodeAllocationBased onNodeB


High SpeedDownlinkPacket AccessFunction 7.2M

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010622 32 HSDPAUsers per Cell


BSC6900 None

WRFD-010611 HSDPAEnhancedPackage

None None 74 ConfiguringHSDPAEnhancedPackage

WRFD-01061103

Schedulingbased on EPFand GBR

None None 75 ConfiguringSchedulingbased on EPFand GBR

WRFD-01061111

HSDPA StateTransition

HSDPA StateTransition

BSC6900 76 ConfiguringHSDPA StateTransition




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061112

HSDPA DRD HSDPA DRD BSC6900 77 ConfiguringHSDPA DRD

WRFD-01061113

HS-DPCCHPreambleSupport

HS-DPCCHPreamblesupport

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010630 StreamingTraffic Class onHSDPA

StreamingTraffic Class onHSDPA

BSC6900 78 ConfiguringInteractive andBackgroundTraffic Classon HSDPA


HSDPA13.976Mbps perUser

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010651 HSDPA over Iur HSDPA over Iur BSC6900 79 ConfiguringHSDPA overIur

WRFD-010652 SRB overHSDPA

SRB overHSDPA

BSC6900 80 ConfiguringSRB overHSDPA



BSC6900 None

WRFD-030010 CQIAdjustmentbased ondynamic BLERtarget

CQIAdjustmentBased onDynamic BLERTarget(per Cell)

NodeB 81 ConfiguringCQIAdjustmentBased onDynamicBLER Target

WRFD-010612 HSUPAIntroductionPackage

RNC:HighSpeed UplinkPacket AccessNodeB:thenumber ofNodeBs withHSUPAfunctionenabled

BSC6900&NodeB

82 ConfiguringHSUPAIntroductionPackage



2-13



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061201

HSUPA UECategory 1 to 7


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061209

HSUPA HARQand Fast ULScheduling inNodeB


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061202

HSUPAAdmissionControl


BSC6900&NodeB

83 ConfiguringHSUPAAdmissionControl

WRFD-01061203

HSUPA PowerControl


BSC6900&NodeB

84 ConfiguringHSUPA PowerControl




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061204

HSUPAMobilityManagement


BSC6900&NodeB

85 ConfiguringHSUPAMobilityManagement

WRFD-01061208

HSUPA DCCC RNC:HighSpeed UplinkPacket AccessNodeB:thenumber ofNodeBs withHSUPAfunctionenabled

BSC6900&NodeB

86 ConfiguringHSUPA DCCC

WRFD-01061207

HSUPATransportResourceManagement


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061206

Interactive andBackgroundTraffic Class onHSUPA


BSC6900&NodeB

None



2-15



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061210

HSUPA1.44Mbps perUser


BSC6900&NodeB

None

WRFD-01061211

20 HSUPAUsers per Cell


BSC6900&NodeB

87 Configuring20 HSUPAUsers per Cell

WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 None None None

WRFD-01061401

HSUPA E-AGCH PowerControl (Basedon CQI or HS-SCCH)

None None 88 ConfiguringE-AGCHPower Control(Based on CQIor HS-SCCH)

WRFD-01061402

Enhanced FastUL Scheduling

None None None

WRFD-01061403

HSUPA 2msTTI

the number ofNodeBs withHSUPA 2msTTI functionenabled

NodeB 89 ConfiguringHSUPA 2msTTI

WRFD-01061404

HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTIHandover

HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTIhandover

BSC6900 90 ConfiguringHSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTIHandover

WRFD-01061405



BSC6900 91 ConfiguringHSUPA5.74Mbps perUser




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010632 StreamingTraffic Class onHSUPA

StreamingTraffic Class onHSUPA

BSC6900 92 ConfiguringStreamingTraffic Classon HSUPA

WRFD-010634 60 HSUPAUsers per Cell


BSC6900 93 Configuring60 HSUPAUsers per Cell

WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur HSUPA over Iur BSC6900 94 ConfiguringHSUPA overIur

WRFD-010636 SRB overHSUPA

SRB overHSUPA

BSC6900 95 ConfiguringSRB overHSUPA

WRFD-010640 Uplink MacroDiversityIntelligentReceiving

Uplink MacroDiversityIntelligentReceiving

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010641 HSUPAAdaptiveTransmission

HSUPAAdaptiveRetransmission

BSC6900 96 ConfiguringHSUPAAdaptiveTransmission

WRFD-010690 TTI Switch forBE ServicesBased onCoverage

TTI Switch forBE ServicesBased onCoverage

BSC6900 97 ConfiguringTTI Switch forBE ServicesBased onCoverage

WRFD-020138 HSUPACoverageEnhancement atUE powerlimitation

HSUPACoverageEnhancement atUE powerlimitation

BSC6900 98 ConfiguringHSUPACoverageEnhancementat UE PowerLimitation

WRFD-010712 AdaptiveConfigurationof TrafficChannel Poweroffset forHSUPA

AdaptiveConfig ofTraffic ChannelPower forHSUPA

BSC6900 99 ConfiguringAdaptiveConfigurationof TrafficChannel Power



2-17



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010637 HSUPA IubFlow Control inCase of IubCongestion

None None 100ConfiguringHSUPA IubFlow Controlin Case of IubCongestion

WRFD-010638 Dynamic CEResourceManagement

the number ofNodeBs withdynamic CEfunctionenabled

NodeB 101ConfiguringDynamic CEResourceManagement

WRFD-010680 HSPA+Downlink28Mbps perUser

HSPA +Downlink 28Mbit/s Per User

BSC6900 102ConfiguringHSPA+Downlink28Mbps perUser


HSPA +Downlink 21Mbit/s Per User


WRFD-010685 DownlinkEnhanced L2

DownlinkEnhanced L2

BSC6900 104ConfiguringDownlinkEnhanced L2

WRFD-010688 DownlinkEnhancedCELL_FACH

EnhancedCELL_FACH

BSC6900 105ConfiguringDownlinkEnhancedCELL_FACH

WRFD-010701 UplinkEnhancedCELL_FACH

EnhancedUplink forCELL_FACH

BSC6900 106ConfiguringUplinkEnhancedCELL_FACH

WRFD-010702 Enhanced DRX Enhanced DRX BSC6900 107ConfiguringEnhancedDRX




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-030011 MIMO Prime MIMO Prime(per Cell)

NodeB 108ConfiguringMIMO Prime


HSPA+Downlink42Mbps perUser


WRFD-010683 Downlink64QAM

the number ofcells with64QAMfunctionenabled

NodeB 110ConfiguringDownlink64QAM

WRFD-010703 HSPA+Downlink84Mbit/s perUser (trial)

HSPA+Downlink84Mbit/s perUser

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO the number ofcells withMIMO functionenabled

NodeB 111Configuring2x2 MIMO

WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO

the number ofCells with DL64QAM+MIMOfunctionenabled

NodeB 112ConfiguringDownlink64QAM+MIMO

WRFD-010700 PerformanceImprovement ofMIMO andHSDPA Co-carrier

The number ofcells withperformaceimprovement ofMIMO andHSDPA co-carrier functionenabled

NodeB 113ConfiguringPerformanceImprovementof MIMO andHSDPA Co-carrier

WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA+ TechnologySelection

Flexible HSPA+ TechnologySelection

BSC6900 114ConfiguringFlexible HSPA+ TechnologySelection



2-19



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX /DRX

CPC-DTX /DRX

BSC6900 115ConfiguringCPC - DTX /DRX

WRFD-010687 CPC - HS-SCCH lessoperation

CPC-HS-SCCHLess Operation

BSC6900 116ConfiguringCPC-HS-SCCH LessOperation



BSC6900 117Configuring 96HSDPA Usersper Cell



BSC6900 118Configuring 96HSUPA Usersper Cell



BSC6900 119Configuring128 HSDPAUsers per Cell



BSC6900 120Configuring128 HSUPAUsers per Cell

WRFD-010691 HSUPA ULInterferenceCancellation

The number ofCells with ULIC functionenabled

NodeB 121ConfiguringHSUPA ULInterferenceCancellation

WRFD-020137 Dual-ThresholdScheduling withHSUPAInterferenceCancellation

the number ofNodeBs withdual-thresholdscheduling withHSUPAinterferencecancellationfunctionenabled

NodeB 122ConfiguringDual-ThresholdSchedulingwith HSUPAInterferenceCancellation




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-020136 Anti-InterferenceScheduling forHSUPA

the number ofcells with anti-interferencescheduling forHSUPAfunctionenabled

NodeB 123ConfiguringAnti-InterferenceScheduling forHSUPA

WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE The number ofCells with FDEfunctionenabled

NodeB 124ConfiguringHSUPAFrequencyDomainEqualization

WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM The number ofCells with UL16QAMfunctionenabled

NodeB 125ConfiguringUplink16QAM

WRFD-010697 E-DPCCHBoosting

the number ofcells with E-DPCCHboostingfunctionenabled

NodeB 126Configuring E-DPCCHBoosting

WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink11.5Mbit/s perUser

HSPA+ Uplink11.5Mbit/s perUser

BSC6900 127ConfiguringHSPA+ Uplink11.5Mbps perUser

WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2Improvement

The number ofCells with ULL2Improvementfunctionenabled

NodeB 128ConfiguringUL Layer 2Improvement

WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA The number ofCells with DLDC functionenabled

NodeB 129ConfiguringDC-HSDPA



2-21



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010713 Traffic-BasedActivation andDeactivation oftheSupplementaryCarrier In Multi-carrier

None None 130ConfiguringTraffic-BasedActivation andDeactivation oftheSupplementary Carrier InMulti-carrier

WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial)

the number ofcells with DC-HSDPA+MIMOfunctionenabled

NodeB 131ConfiguringDC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial)

WRFD-010505 Queuing andPre-Emption

Queuing andPre-emption

BSC6900 132ConfiguringQueuing andPreemption

WRFD-021103 Access ClassRestriction

Access ClassRestrictionwhen SPUoverload

BSC6900 133ConfiguringAccess ClassRestriction

WRFD-050424 Traffic PriorityMapping ontoTransmissionResources

Traffic PriorityMapping onTransport

BSC6900 134ConfiguringTrafficPriorityMapping ontoTransmissionResources

WRFD-020806 DifferentiatedService Basedon SPI Weight

DifferentiatedService Basedon SPI Weight

BSC6900 135ConfiguringDifferentiatedService Basedon SPI Weight

WRFD-020132 Web browsingacceleration

Web PageAccessAcceleration

BSC6900 136ConfiguringWeb BrowsingAcceleration




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-020133 P2PDownloadingRate Controlduring BusyHour

P2P RateRestrictionDuring BusyHours

BSC6900 137ConfiguringP2PDownloadingRate Controlduring BusyHour

WRFD-020135 Intelligent Inter-Carrier UELayeredManagement

Intelligent Inter-Carrier UELayeredManagement(per Cell)

BSC6900 138ConfiguringIntelligentInter-CarrierUE LayeredManagement

WRFD-020302 Inter FrequencyHard HandoverBased onCoverage

Inter frequencyhard handover

BSC6900 139ConfiguringInterFrequencyHardHandoverBased onCoverage

WRFD-020304 Inter FrequencyHard HandoverBased on DLQoS

Inter FrequencyHard HandoverBased on DLQoS

BSC6900 140ConfiguringInterFrequencyHardHandoverBased on DLQoS

WRFD-020605 SRNSRelocationIntroductionPackage

SRNSRelocation (UENot Involved)

BSC6900 None

WRFD-02060501

SRNSRelocation (UENot Involved)

None None 141ConfiguringSRNSRelocation (UENot Involved)

WRFD-02060502

SRNSRelocation withHard Handover

SRNSRelocation withHard Handover

BSC6900 142ConfiguringSRNSRelocationwith HardHandover



2-23



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-02060503

SRNSRelocation withCell/URAUpdate

SRNSRelocation withCell/URAUpdate

BSC6900 143ConfiguringSRNSRelocationwith Cell/URAUpdate

WRFD-02060504

Lossless SRNSRelocation

Lossless SRNSRelocation

BSC6900 None

WRFD-020303 Inter-RATHandoverBased onCoverage

Coverage BasedInter-RATHandoverBetween UMTSand GSM/GPRS

BSC6900 144ConfiguringInter-RATHandoverBased onCoverage

WRFD-020309 Inter-RATHandoverBased on DLQoS

Inter-RATHandoverBased on DLQoS

BSC6900 145ConfiguringInter-RATHandoverBased on DLQoS

WRFD-020307 VideoTelephonyFallback toSpeech (AMR)for Inter-RATHO

VideoTelephonyFallback toSpeech (AMR)for Inter-RATHO

BSC6900 146ConfiguringVideoTelephonyFallback toSpeech (AMR)for Inter-RATHO

WRFD-020308 Inter-RATHandover Phase2

None None 147ConfiguringInter-RATHandoverPhase 2

WRFD-02030801

NACC(NetworkAssisted CellChange)

NACC(NetworkAssisted CellChange)

BSC6900 148ConfiguringNACC(NetworkAssisted CellChange)




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-02030802

PS HandoverBetween UMTSand GPRS

PS HandoverBetween UMTSand GPRS

BSC6900 149ConfiguringPS HandoverbetweenUMTS andGPRS

WRFD-020126 MobilityBetween UMTSand LTE Phase1

MobilityBetween UMTSand LTE Phase1

BSC6900 150ConfiguringMobilityBetweenUMTS andLTE Phase 1

WRFD-020129 Service-BasedPS ServiceRedirectionfrom UMTS toLTE (trial)

PS ServiceRedirectionfrom UMTS toLTE

BSC6900 151ConfiguringService-BasedPS ServiceRedirectionfrom UMTS toLTE (trial)

WRFD-020103 Inter FrequencyLoad Balance

Inter frequencyload handover

BSC6900 152ConfiguringInterFrequencyLoad Balance

WRFD-020305 Inter-RATHandoverBased onService

Inter systemServiceHandover

BSC6900 153ConfiguringInter-RATHandoverBased onService

WRFD-020306 Inter-RATHandoverBased on Load

Inter systemLoad Handover

BSC6900 154ConfiguringInter-RATHandoverBased on Load

WRFD-020400 DRDIntroductionPackage

None None 155ConfiguringDRDIntroductionPackage

WRFD-02040001

Intra SystemDirect Retry

Intra SystemDirect Retry

BSC6900 156ConfiguringIntra SystemDirect Retry



2-25



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-02040002

Inter SystemDirect Retry

Inter SystemDirect Retry

BSC6900 157ConfiguringInter SystemDirect Retry

WRFD-02040003

Inter SystemRedirect

Inter SystemRedirect

BSC6900 158ConfiguringInter-SystemRedirect

WRFD-02040004

Traffic Steeringand LoadSharing DuringRAB Setup

None None 159ConfiguringTrafficSteering andLoad SharingDuring RABSetup

WRFD-020401 Inter-RATRedirectionBased onDistance

Inter SystemRedirect Basedon Distance

BSC6900 160ConfiguringInter-RATRedirectionBased onDistance

WRFD-020402 MeasurementBased DirectRetry

MeasurementBased DirectRetry Function

BSC6900 161ConfiguringMeasurement-based DirectRetry

WRFD-020500 Enhanced FastDormancy

Fast DormancyEnhancement(per PS ActiveUser)

BSC6900 162ConfiguringEnhanced FastDormancy

WRFD-021102 Cell Barring Cell Barringwhen IU in fault

BSC6900 163ConfiguringCell Barring

WRFD-020310 3G/2GCommon LoadManagement

3G/2GCommon LoadManagement

BSC6900 164Configuring3G/2GCommon LoadManagement




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010506 RAB Quality ofServiceRenegotiationover Iu Interface

RAB Quality ofServiceRenegotiationover Iu

BSC6900 165ConfiguringRAB Quality ofServiceRenegotiationover IuInterface

WRFD-010507 RateNegotiation atAdmissionControl

RABDownsizing atAdmissionControl

BSC6900 166ConfiguringRateNegotiation atAdmissionControl

WRFD-020120 Service Steeringand LoadSharing in RRCConnectionSetup

Service Steeringin RRCConnectionSetup

BSC6900 167ConfiguringServiceSteering andLoad Sharingin RRCConnectionSetup

WRFD-020123 TCPAccelerator

TCPAccelerator

BSC6900 168ConfiguringTCPAccelerator

WRFD-020124 Uplink FlowControl of UserPlane

Uplink FlowControl of UserPlane

BSC6900 169ConfiguringUplink FlowControl of UserPlane

WRFD-020130 VideophoneServiceRestriction

VideophoneServiceRestriction

BSC6900 170ConfiguringVideophoneServiceRestriction

WRFD-011502 Active QueueManagement(AQM)

Active QueueManagement(AQM)

BSC6900 171ConfiguringActive QueueManagement(AQM)



2-27



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-020128 QualityImprovementfor SubscribedService

QualityImprovementfor SubscribedService

BSC6900 172ConfiguringQualityImprovementfor SubscribedService

WRFD-020131 Optimization ofR99 andHSUPA UsersFairness

Optimization ofR99 andHSUPA UsersFairness

BSC6900 173ConfiguringOptimizationof R99 andHSUPA UsersFairness

WRFD-011000 Cell BroadcastService

Cell broadcastservice

BSC6900 174ConfiguringCell BroadcastService

WRFD-011001 Simplified CellBroadcast

Simplified CellBroadcastService

BSC6900 175ConfiguringSimplified CellBroadcast

WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO TFO/TrFO BSC6900 176ConfiguringTFO/TrFO

WRFD-020116 Dynamic PowerSharing inMulti-Carriers

the number ofNodeBs withPA-SHARINGfunctionenabled

NodeB 177ConfiguringDynamicPower Sharingof Multi-Carriers

WRFD-020117 Multi-CarrierSwitch offBased on TrafficLoad

Multi-carrierswitch off basedon traffic load

BSC6900 178ConfiguringMulti-CarrierSwitch offBased onTraffic Load

WRFD-020118 EnergyEfficiencyImproved

the number ofNodeBs withenergyefficiencyimprovedfunctionenabled

NodeB 179ConfiguringEnergyEfficiencyImproved




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-020122 Multi-CarrierSwitch offBased on QoS

the number ofcells with multi-carrier switchoff based onQoS functionenabled

NodeB 180ConfiguringMulti-CarrierSwitch offBased on QoS

WRFD-020119 Multi-CarrierSwitch offBased on PowerBackup

Multi-CarrierSwitch offBased on PowerBackup

NodeB 181ConfiguringMulti-CarrierSwitch offBased onPower Backup

WRFD-020121 IntelligentPowerManagement

None None 182ConfiguringIntelligentPowerManagement

WRFD-010613 AMR-WB(Adaptive MultiRate WideBand)

Wide BandAMR

BSC6900 183ConfiguringAMR-WB(AdaptiveMulti RateWide Band)

WRFD-020701 AMR/WB-AMR SpeechRates Control

AMR voicecoding ratecontrol

BSC6900 184ConfiguringAMR/WB-AMR SpeechRates Control

WRFD-050405 Overbooking onATMTransmission

ATM IUBoverbookingFunction

BSC6900 185ConfiguringOverbookingon ATMTransmission

WRFD-010617 VoIP overHSPA/HSPA+

VoIP overHSPAIntroductionPakage

BSC6900 186ConfiguringVoIP overHSPA/HSPA+

WRFD-01061701

RAB Mapping VoIP overHSPAIntroductionPakage

BSC6900 None



2-29



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061703

OptimizedScheduling forVoIP overHSPA

VoIP overHSPAIntroductionPakage

BSC6900 187ConfiguringOptimizedScheduling forVoIP overHSPA

WRFD-010618 IMS Signalingover HSPA

IMS Signalingover HSPA

BSC6900 188ConfiguringIMS Signalingover HSPA

WRFD-011501 PDCP HeaderCompression(RoHC)

PDCP ROHCFunction

BSC6900 189ConfiguringPDCP HeaderCompression(RoHC)

WRFD-010619 CS voice overHSPA/HSPA+

CS voice overHSPA

BSC6900 190ConfiguringCS Voice overHSPA/HSPA+

WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTTFunction BasedLCS

Cell ID LCS BSC6900 191ConfiguringCell ID + RTTFunctionBased LCS

WRFD-020802 OTDOA BasedLCS

OTDOA LCS BSC6900 192ConfiguringOTDOA BasedLCS

WRFD-020803 A-GPS BasedLCS

AGPS LCS BSC6900 193Configuring A-GPS BasedLCS

WRFD-020804 LCS ClassifiedZones

LCS ClassifiedZones

BSC6900 194ConfiguringLCS ClassifiedZone

WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur LCS over Iur BSC6900 195ConfiguringLCS over Iur




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-020807 Iupc Interfacefor LCS service

Iu-PC Interfacefor LCS service

BSC6900 196ConfiguringIupc Interfacefor LCSService

WRFD-021304 RAN SharingIntroductionPackage

RAN SharingFunction

BSC6900 197ConfiguringRAN SharingIntroductionPackage

WRFD-02130401

DedicatedCarrier for EachOperator

RAN SharingFunction

BSC6900 198ConfiguringDedicatedCarrier forEach Operator

WRFD-02130402

FlexibleNetworkArchitecture

RAN SharingFunction

BSC6900 199ConfiguringFlexibleNetworkArchitecture

WRFD-02130403

MobilityControl andServiceDifferentiation

RAN SharingFunction

BSC6900 200ConfiguringMobilityControl andServiceDifferentiation

WRFD-02130404

IndependentLicense Control

RAN SharingFunction

BSC6900 201ConfiguringIndependentLicenseControl

WRFD-02130405

IndependentCell-level FM/PM/CM

RAN SharingFunction

BSC6900 None

WRFD-02130406

TransmissionRecourseSharing on Iub/Iur Interface

RAN SharingFunction

BSC6900 None

WRFD-021305 RAN SharingPhase 2

RAN SharingEnhancedPackage

BSC6900 202ConfiguringRAN SharingPhase 2



2-31



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-02130501

Dedicated IubTransmissionControl

None BSC6900 203ConfiguringDedicated IubTransmissionControl

WRFD-021303 IMSI BasedHandover

IMSI BasedHandover

BSC6900 204ConfiguringIMSI-BasedHandover

WRFD-021311 MOCNIntroductionPackage

MOCNIntroductionPackage

BSC6900 205ConfiguringMOCNIntroductionPackage

WRFD-02131101

Carrier Sharingby Operators


BSC6900 206ConfiguringCarrierSharing byOperators

WRFD-02131102

DedicatedNodeB/Cell forOperators


BSC6900 207ConfiguringDedicatedNodeB/Cell forOperators

WRFD-02131103

MOCNMobilityManagement


BSC6900 208ConfiguringMOCNMobilityManagement

WRFD-02131104

MOCN LoadBanlance


BSC6900 209ConfiguringMOCN LoadBalance

WRFD-02131105

MOCNIndependentPerformanceManagement


BSC6900 None

WRFD-02131106

RoutingRoaming UEs inProportion


BSC6900 210ConfiguringRoutingRoaming UEsin Proportion




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-021302 Iu Flex IU FLEX BSC6900 211Configuring IuFlex

WRFD-021306 Iu Flex LoadDistributionManagement

Enhanced IuFlex

BSC6900 212Configuring IuFlex LoadDistributionManagement

WRFD-020110 MultiFrequency BandNetworkingManagement

MultiFrequency BandNetworkingManagement

BSC6900 None

WRFD-020160 EnhancedMultibandManagement

Enhancementfor Multifrequency bandNetworkingmanagement

BSC6900 213ConfiguringEnhancedMultibandManagement

WRFD-050104 SatelliteTransmissionon Iub Interface

SatelliteCommunicationin Iub Interface

BSC6900 214ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionon IubInterface

WRFD-050108 SatelliteTransmissionon Iu Interface

SatelliteTransmissionon Iu Interface

BSC6900 215ConfiguringSatelliteTransmissionon Iu Interface

WRFD-010616 MBMSIntroductionPackage

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 216ConfiguringMBMSIntroductionPackage

WRFD-01061601

MBMSBroadcast Mode

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 None

WRFD-01061602

MBMSAdmissionControl

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 217ConfiguringMBMSAdmissionControl



2-33



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01061603

MBMS LoadControl

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 218ConfiguringMBMS LoadControl

WRFD-01061604

MBMS Soft/SelectiveCombining

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 None

WRFD-01061605

MBMSTransportResourceManagement

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 219ConfiguringMBMSTransportResourceManagement

WRFD-01061606

StreamingService onMBMS

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 220ConfiguringStreamingService onMBMS

WRFD-01061607

MBMS 2Channels perCell

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 None

WRFD-01061608

16/32/64/128Kbps ChannelRate on MBMS

MBMSFunction

BSC6900 221Configuring16/32/64/128Kbps ChannelRate on MBMS

WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 MBMS P2Pover HSDPA

BSC6900 222ConfiguringMBMS Phase 2

WRFD-01066001

MBMSEnhancedBroadcast Mode

MBMSEnhancedBroadcast Mode

BSC6900 223ConfiguringMBMSEnhancedBroadcastMode

WRFD-01066002

MBMS P2Pover HSDPA

MBMS P2Pover HSDPA

BSC6900 224ConfiguringMBMS P2Pover HSDPA




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-01066003

MBMSAdmissionEnhancement

MBMSAdmissionEnhancement

BSC6900 225ConfiguringMBMSAdmissionEnhancement

WRFD-01066004

Inter-FrequencyNeighboringCell Selectionfor MBMS PTPUsers

None None 226ConfiguringInter-FrequencyNeighboringCell Selectionfor MBMSPTP Users

WRFD-010627 FACHTransmissionSharing forMBMS

None None 227ConfiguringFACHTransmissionSharing forMBMS

WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC(FrequencyLayerConvergence)/FLD(FrequencyLayerDispersion)

MBMS FLC(FrequencyLayerConvergence)/FLD(FrequencyLayerDispersion)

BSC6900 228ConfiguringMBMS FLC(FrequencyLayerConvergence)/FLD(FrequencyLayerDispersion)

WRFD-010624 MBMS 8Channels perCell


BSC6900 None

WRFD-010625 256KbpsChannel Rate onMBMS

256KbpsChannel Rate onMBMS

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010628 MBMS 16Channels perCell


BSC6900 None

WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur MBMS over Iur BSC6900 229ConfiguringMBMS overIur



2-35



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010662 Dynamic PowerEstimation forMTCH

Dynamic PowerEstimation forMTCH

BSC6900 230ConfiguringDynamicPowerEstimation forMTCH

WRFD-010663 MSCHScheduling

MSCHScheduling

BSC6900 231ConfiguringMSCHScheduling

WRFD-010665 MBMS ChannelAudienceRating Statistics

MBMS ChannelAudienceRating Statistics

BSC6900 232ConfiguringMBMSChannelAudienceRatingStatistics

WRFD-020114 DomainSpecific AccessControl(DSAC)

DomainSpecific AccessControl(DSAC)

BSC6900 233ConfiguringDomainSpecific AccessControl(DSAC)

WRFD-020111 One Tunnel One Tunnel BSC6900 234ConfiguringOne Tunnel

WRFD-050402 IP TransmissionIntroduction onIub Interface

IPTransportationin Iub Interface

BSC6900 235Configuring IPTransmissionIntroductionon IubInterface

WRFD-050411 Fractional IPFunction on IubInterface

Fractional IP BSC6900 None

WRFD-050403 Hybrid Iub IPTransmission

IUB Hybrid IPTransportationFunction

BSC6900 236ConfiguringHybrid Iub IPTransmission

WRFD-050404 ATM/IP DualStack NodeB

IUB ATM/IPDual StackTransportationFunction

BSC6900 237ConfiguringATM/IP DualStack NodeB




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-050409 IP TransmissionIntroduction onIu Interface

IPTransportationin Iu Interface

BSC6900 238Configuring IPTransmissionIntroductionon Iu Interface

WRFD-050410 IP TransmissionIntroduction onIur Interface

IPTransportationin Iur Interface

BSC6900 239Configuring IPTransmissionIntroductionon IurInterface

WRFD-050420 FP MUX for IPTransmission

FP MUX BSC6900 240ConfiguringFP MUX for IPTransmission

WRFD-050422 DynamicBandwidthControl of IubIP

DynamicBandwidthControl of IubIP

BSC6900 241ConfiguringDynamicBandwidthControl of IubIP

WRFD-050408 Overbooking onIP Transmission

IP IUBoverbookingFunction

BSC6900 242ConfiguringOverbookingon IPTransmission

WRFD-050412 UDP MUX forIu-CSTransmission

UDP MUX forIu-CSTransmission

BSC6900 243ConfiguringUDP MUX forIu-CSTransmission

WRFD-050105 ATM SwitchingBased HubNodeB

None None 244ConfiguringATMSwitching-Based HubNodeB

WRFD-050106 AAL2SwitchingBased HubNodeB

None None 245ConfiguringAAL2Switching-Based HubNodeB



2-37



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-050107 IP routing BasedHub NodeB

None None 246Configuring IPRouting-BasedHub NodeB

WRFD-050406 ATM QoSIntroduction onHub NodeB(Overbookingon Hub NodeBTransmission)

HUB IUBoverbookingFunction

BSC6900 None

WRFD-050425 Ethernet OAM None None 247ConfiguringEthernet OAM

WRFD-050501 Clock Sync onEthernet inNodeB

the number ofNodeBs with IPClock functionenabled

NodeB 248ConfiguringClockSynchronization on Ethernetin NodeB

WRFD-050502 SynchronousEthernet

The Number ofNodeBs withEthernetSynchronization FunctionEnabled

NodeB 249ConfiguringSynchronousEthernet

WRFD-040202 RNC NodeRedundancy

RNC NodeRedundancy

BSC6900 250ConfiguringRNC NodeRedundancy

WRFD-040203 RRURedundancy

None None 251ConfiguringRRURedundancy

WRFD-010203 TransmitDiversity

None None 252ConfiguringTransmitDiversity

WRFD-010209 4-AntennaReceiveDiversity

None None 253Configuring 4-AntennaReceiveDiversity




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-010210 ControlChannelParallelInterferenceCancellation(CCPIC)

the number ofNodeBs withCCPIC functionenabled

NodeB None

WRFD-021308 Extended CellCoverage up to200km

None None 254ConfiguringExtended CellCoverage up to200km

WRFD-021309 ImprovedDownlinkCoverage

ImprovedDownlinkCoverage

BSC6900 None

WRFD-010206 High SpeedAccess

None None 255ConfiguringHigh SpeedAccess

WRFD-021350 IndependentDemodulationof Signals fromMultiple RRUsin One Cell

the number ofRRUs with inindependentdemodulation ofsignals in onecell

NodeB 256ConfiguringIndependentDemodulationof Signals fromMultiple RRUsin One Cell

WRFD-011500 PDCP HeaderCompression(RFC2507)

PDCP Headercompression

BSC6900 257ConfiguringPDCP HeaderCompression(RFC2507)

WRFD-050302 Fractional ATMFunction on IubInterface

Fractional ATM BSC6900 None

WRFD-021200 HCS(HierarchicalCell Structure)

HierarchicalCell Structure

BSC6900 258ConfiguringHCS(HierarchicalCell Structure)

WRFD-020104 Intra FrequencyLoad Balance

Intra frequencyload balancing

BSC6900 259ConfiguringIntraFrequencyLoad Balance



2-39



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-020105 Potential UserControl

Potential usercontrol

BSC6900 260ConfiguringPotential UserControl

WRFD-070004 Load BasedGSM andUMTSHandoverEnhancementBased on Iur-g

HandoverBased on Loadon Iur-g

BSC6900 261ConfiguringLoad BasedGSM andUMTSHandoverEnhancementBased on Iur-g

WRFD-070005 NACCProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-g

NACCProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-g

BSC6900 262ConfiguringNACC(NetworkAssisted CellChange)ProcedureOptimizationBased on Iur-g

WRFD-070006 GSM andUMTS LoadBalancingBased on Iur-g

BSC LoadBalancingBased on Iur-g

BSC6900 263ConfiguringGSM andUMTS LoadBalancingBased on Iur-g

WRFD-070007 GSM andUMTS TrafficSteering Basedon Iur-g

BSC ServiceDistributionBased on Iur-g

BSC6900 264ConfiguringGSM andUMTS TrafficSteering Basedon Iur-g

WRFD-020127 Warning ofDisaster

Warning ofDisaster

BSC6900 265ConfiguringWarning ofDisaster

WRFD-021001 Flexiblefrequencybandwidth ofUMTS carrier

None None 266ConfiguringFlexiblefrequencybandwidth ofUMTS carrier




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



ConfigurationMethod

WRFD-020134 Push to Talk Push To Talk BSC6900 267ConfiguringPush to Talk

WRFD-012001 RNC offload(trial)

None None 268ConfiguringRNC Offload(Trial)

MRFD-221801 Multi-modeDynamic PowerSharing(UMTS)

the number ofNodeBs withMulti-modeDynamic PowerSharingfunctionenabled

NodeB 269ConfiguringMulti-modeDynamicPower Sharing(UMTS)

MRFD-221802 GSM andUMTSDynamicSpectrumSharing(UMTS)

GSM andUMTSDynamicSpectrumSharing(UMTS)

NodeB 270ConfiguringGSM andUMTSDynamicSpectrumSharing

MRFD-221501 IP-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmissionon BS side(NodeB)

None None 271ConfiguringIP-BasedMulti-ModeCo-Transmissionon Base StationSide (NodeB)

MRFD-221504 TDM-BasedMulti-mode Co-Transmissionvia Backplaneon BS side(NodeB)

None None 272ConfiguringTDM-BasedMulti-modeCo-Transmissionvia Backplaneon BS side(NodeB)



2-41



ConfigurationMethod

MRFD-221505 Bandwidthsharing ofMBTS Multi-mode Co-Transmission(NodeB)

the number ofNodeBs withBandwidthsharing ofMBTS Multi-mode Co-Transmissionfunctionenabled

NodeB None

MRFD-221601 Multi-mode BSCommonReferenceClock(NodeB)

None None 273ConfiguringMulti-ModeBS CommonReferenceClock (NodeB)

MRFD-221703 2.0MHz CentralFrequency pointseparationbetween GSMand UMTSmode(UMTS)

2.0MHz CentralFrequency pointseparationbetween GSMand UMTSmode(UMTS)

NodeB 274Configuring2.0 MHzCentralFrequencyPointSeparationBetween GSMand UMTSMode (UMTS)




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

3 Activating the UMTS License

About This Chapter

In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. Thelicense control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature.The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT,whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000.

3.1 Activating the BSC6900 LicenseThis section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license.

3.2 Allocating a license to Telecom OperatorsWhen multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined ina NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators.

3.3 Allocating a License to NodeBsAfter uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate thelicense to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

RANFeature Activation Guide 3 Activating the UMTS License


3-1

3.1 Activating the BSC6900 LicenseThis section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license.

Prerequisitel The LMT is started and you have logged in to the BSC6900.

l The BSC6900 is in service.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ESN and record the Equipment Serial Number (ESN)of the BSC.

Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command DLD LICENSE to download the license file from the FTPserver to the \ftp\license directory of the main area directory of the OMU.

Step 3 Run the LST LICENSE command and enter the filename of the license to be activated to querythe file information.

If... Then...

The file information complies with the information ofthe file that you apply for,

Go to Step 4.

The file information does not comply with theinformation of the file that you apply for,

Exit the task and contact Huawei.

Step 4 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the BSC6900 configuration status. If theBSC6900 is ineffective, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to theeffective state.

Step 5 Run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the license.

Step 6 If the primary operator and secondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command toactive the license for the primary operator first and then for secondary operators. If multiplesecondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command repeatedly.

Step 7 Run the BSC6900 MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license onthe host is consistent with that on the OMU.

If... Then...

If the running license on the host is consistent with thaton the OMU

End the task or go to Step 8.

If the running license on the host is inconsistent withthat on the OMU

End the task and contact Huawei.

3 Activating the UMTS LicenseRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Step 8 In the case of high traffic, run the SET LICENSECTRL command to enable the license controlfunction of the BSC6900 to enter the grace protection period. For details, see License Controlin Emergencies.

----End

3.2 Allocating a license to Telecom OperatorsWhen multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined ina NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators.

PrerequisiteYou have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeBLicense Management window is displayed.

Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, selectan RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server.

Step 3 Right-click a license, and then choose License Distributed to Operator from the shortcut menu.As show in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 License Distributed to Operator



3-3

Step 4 In the License Distributed to Operator window, set available functions and resources for eachtelecom operator, and then click OK.For details about the parameters, see Parameters of NodeB License Information.

----End

3.3 Allocating a License to NodeBsAfter uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate thelicense to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

PrerequisiteYou have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeB

License Management window is displayed.

Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, selectan RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server.

Step 3 Optional: In the lower part of the license information area, click the tab of a telecom operator.

If a RAN is shared by multiple telecom operators, you can allocate a NodeB license to them byreferring to 3.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators.

The license allocation information about all the NodeBs related to the telecom operator isdisplayed in a list.

Step 4 Double-click a NodeB to which you need to allocate the license, or right-click the NodeB andchoose Modify from the shortcut menu. Then, set available resources and functions for theNodeB.

NOTE

l You can set a function control item to either 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the function is not enabled while1 indicates that the function is enabled.

l You can hold down Ctrl or Shift to select multiple NodeBs at a time. Right-click the selected NodeBs,and then choose Modify from the shortcut menu to set a control item value to all the selected NodeBs.

l If a control item is unavailable in the Modify dialog box, it indicates that the control item is notsupported by NodeBs. To view the values indicating that the control item is not supported by NodeBs,click the status description on the right in the Modify dialog box. For descriptions of the values, seeParameter Description in the dialog box.

l When setting a certain control item, you can click Clear to clear the preset values in the column of thecontrol item.

l You can click Settings in the Modify dialog box to add or delete one or multiple control items to beset.

Step 5 Perform operations according to license allocation policies.After a NodeB license file is uploaded to the M2000, you can allocate the license to NodeBsimmediately. You can also create a scheduled task for delivering preset license allocationinformation to NodeBs at a certain non-busy hour. You can allocate an inactive license toNodeBs. After an inactive license is allocated to NodeBs, it is activated automatically.

3 Activating the UMTS LicenseRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

If you want to ... Then ...

Allocate a license to NodeBs immediately 1. In the license information area, right-click alicense record, and then choose Distributefrom the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed Message dialog box, clickYes.You can click Details to view the licenseallocate information.

Deliver license allocation information toNodeBs on a scheduled basis

1. In the license information area, right-click alicense record, and then choose LicenseDistribute Task from the shortcut menu.Alternatively, select the license record, and

then click . The Task Managementwindow is displayed.

2. Set the parameters of the scheduled task fordelivering license allocation information.For details about the task parameters, seeParameters for Setting the CommonInformation About Timing TasksCommonInformation About Timing Tasks andParameters for Creating/Modifying/CopyingScheduled NodeB License Allocation Tasks.

----End

ResultWhen delivering license allocation information to NodeBs, the M2000 delivers only new controlitem values and the control item values that are inconsistent on the NodeBs and the M2000.

NOTE

The control item values that have been delivered to NodeBs are still valid after an M2000 upgrade or alicense capacity expansion.

If resource control item values are incorrectly set, the total number of resources used by NodeBsmay exceed the maximum available resource number specified in the license, and the licensemay fail to be allocated to NodeBs. In this case, the M2000 reports the EVT-513 The Amountof Used NodeB License's Resource Exceeds the Threshold event, and you need to set theresource control items and allocate the license to NodeBs again.

If setting resource control item values fails or the resource control item values used by NodeBsare inconsistent with the corresponding values set on the M2000, the M2000 reports theEVT-514 Changes in the Usage of NE License Resources event, and you need to synchronizethe license allocation information saved on the M2000 to the NodeBs. For details, seeSynchronizing a NodeB License.



3-5

4 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2 kbit/s RRCConnection and RAB Assignment

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-0105103.4/6.8/13.6/27.2 kbit/s RRC Connection and RAB Assignment.

Prerequisitel Dependencies on Hardware

– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature does not depend on other features.l License

– This feature is not under license control.

ContextThis feature enables RRC connection establishment and release and RAB assignment forservices of different rates, so as to meet different QoS requirements. This feature is fundamentalto service provision.

Procedurel Activation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCESTCAUSE to set the channel typeand bit rate corresponding to a specific RRC connection establishment cause.

NOTE

Do not set Channel type for RRC establishment to FACH. Set Switch for RRC establishedon E_FACH to OFF.

l Verification Procedure1. Start Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 4-1

RANFeature Activation Guide

4 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2 kbit/s RRC Connection andRAB Assignment


4-1

Figure 4-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

2. Establish a service on the UE. Among the traced Iub data, view the dCH-ID in theDCH-Specific-FDD-Item IE in the NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message. The resultshows that the ID of the transport channel that carries signaling is 32.

3. View the transmissionTimeInterval and nrOfTransportBlocks IEs in the ul-TransportFormatSet IE associated with the DCH whose dCH-ID value is 32.– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 40, you can infer that an RRC

connection is established for a 3.4 kbit/s service.– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 20, you can infer that an RRC

connection is established for a 6.8 kbit/s service.– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value of

nrOfTransportBlocks is 1, you can infer that an RRC connection is establishedfor a 13.6 kbit/s service.

– If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value ofnrOfTransportBlocks is 2, you can infer that an RRC connection is establishedfor a 27.2 kbit/s service.

4. Release the service on the UE, and perform Uu interface tracing. If you find anRRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CMP message in the traced data, you can infer that theRRC connection is released.

l Deactivation Procedure1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activating 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release.

//set the channel type and bit rate corresponding to a specific RRC connection establishment cause




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_6.8K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_27.2K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF;




4-3

5 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501Conversational QoS Class.




– This feature is not under license control.l Others

– The UE and the CN support the conversational class.

ContextBased on QoS requirements, 3GPP defines four traffic classes: conversational, streaming,interactive, and background.

They differ in their sensitivity to delay. The conversational class is highly sensitive to the delayand therefore has a high requirement on real-time transmission. The conversational class has thefollowing fundamental characteristics:l Preservation of the time relationships between information entities in a stream and

limitation of the transmission delay and delay jitter within an acceptable range.l Conversational pattern (stringent requirement on the delay).

Conversational services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. Most typical applicationsof the conversational class are voice services and videophone services in the CS domain andVoIP services in the PS domain.

Huawei RAN supports the following basic types of conversational services:l CS AMR speech services at the rates of 12.2 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 7.4 kbit/s, 6.7

kbit/s, 5.9 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, and 4.75 kbit/sl CS transparent data services (conversational class) at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 56 kbit/s, 32

kbit/s, and 28.8 kbit/s

RANFeature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Conversational QoS Class


5-1

l PS bidirectional symmetric voice services at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 42.8 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, setCS voice channel type and VOIP channel type to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1 Iub interface trace dialog box

2. Establish a conversational service on the UE. Check the DPC (that is, the source) ofthe RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data todetermine whether the service is a CS service or PS service.

3. View the trafficClass IE in the rRB-Parameters IE of theRANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message to verify that the traffic class isconversational.

4. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in theRANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional,then the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlinkrate of the conversational service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of theservice. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission uses asymmetric rates.

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional,then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate applicable inboth the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmissionuses symmetric rates.

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directionaldownlink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates thedownlink rate of the conversational service. In this case, the uplink rate of theservice is 0.

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directionalUplink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplinkrate of the conversational service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is0.

5 Configuring Conversational QoS ClassRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

5. View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the conversational service)and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQmessage by following the same rules as those for viewing maxBitrate.


----End

Example//Activating conversational QoS class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH, VoipChlType=DCH;

RANFeature Activation Guide 5 Configuring Conversational QoS Class


5-3

6 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502Streaming QoS Class.





– The UE and CN support streaming services.

Context

Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive,and background.

QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. The streaming class is a relatively recentdevelopment in data communications, which raises a number of new requirements in bothtelecommunication and data communication systems. The transmission of streaming servicesmust follow the time sequence of information entities . The streaming class has the followingfeatures:l The time sequence of information entities in a stream is not changed.l Streaming services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. The most typical

applications of the streaming class are fax services in the CS domain and streaming videoservices in the PS domain.

Streaming services are real-time services, such as audio and video programs. They aretransmitted in only one direction and serve individual users.


RANFeature Activation Guide 6 Configuring Streaming QoS Class


6-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for streaming services. If the assigned rate of a streamingservice is lower than this threshold, the streaming service is set up on R99 channels.

NOTE

In the tests on 384 kbit/s streaming services, the settings of the thresholds cannot ensure thatthe services are set up on R99 services. In this case, you can disable the HSDPA and HSUPAcapabilities of the cell to enable the streaming services to be set up on R99 channels.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA to disable theHSDPA capability of the cell.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA to disable theHSUPA capability of the cell.

l Verification Procedure1. Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 6-1

Figure 6-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Use a UE to set up a streaming service. Check the DPC (that is, the source) of theRANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data todetermine whether the service is a CS service or PS service.

3. Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the valueof the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is streaming.

4. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in theRANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.Expected result:– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional,

the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rateof the streaming service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, themaxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink andthe downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directionaldownlink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the downlinkrate of the streaming service. In this case, the uplink rate of the service is 0.

– If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directionalUplink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplink rate ofthe streaming service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is 0.

6 Configuring Streaming QoS ClassRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

5. View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the streaming service) andrAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQmessage by following the same rules as those for the maxBitrate IE.


----End

Example//Activating Streaming Class QoSSET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D384, UlStrThsOnHsupa=D384; DEA UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1; DEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 6 Configuring Streaming QoS Class


6-3

7 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503Interactive QoS Class.





– The UE and CN support interactive services.

ContextBased on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive,and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay.

The interactive class is a typical data communication solution. It is characterized by the request/response pattern of end users. For example, a person or an entity at the destination sends a datarequest to a remote server and expects a response message within a specific time. In this situation,the Round Trip Time (RTT) is one of the key attributes of the interactive class. Anothercharacteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit Error Rate(BER). In summary, the interactive class has the following fundamental characteristics: request/response pattern and preservation of the payload.

Interactive services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. Themost typical application of the interactive class is web browsing.

Huawei RAN supports the following types of interactive services: PS bidirectional symmetricor asymmetric interactive services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 285 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s,64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

RANFeature Activation Guide 7 Configuring Interactive QoS Class


7-1


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for interactive services. If the assigned rate of an interactiveservice is lower than this threshold, the interactive service is set up on R99 channels.



2. Use a UE to set up an interactive service. Check theRANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of thetrafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is interactive.


the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rateof the interactive service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.



----End

Example//Activating Interactive QoS Class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

7 Configuring Interactive QoS ClassRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

8 Configuring Background QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504Background QoS Class.


– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

l Dependencies on Other Features

– This feature does not depend on other features.

l License


l Others

– The UE and CN support this feature.

Context

Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive,and background.

QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. A typical type of background service isdata services. One of the characteristics of the background class is that the destination does notexpect data within a specific time, and therefore the background class is delay-insensitive.Another characteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit ErrorRate (BER).

In summary, the background class has the following fundamental characteristics: destination notexpecting data within a specific time and preservation of the payload.

Background services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. Themost typical applications of the background class are download and emails.

Huawei RAN supports the following types of background services: PS bidirectional symmetricor asymmetric background services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s,64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

RANFeature Activation Guide 8 Configuring Background QoS Class


8-1


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for background services. If the assigned rate of a backgroundservice is lower than this threshold, the background service is set up on R99 channels.



2. Use a UE to set up a background service. Check theRANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of thetrafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is background.


the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rateof the background service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.



----End

Example//Activating Background QoS Class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

8 Configuring Background QoS ClassRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

9 Configuring Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104Emergency Call.





ContextThis feature grants higher priority to emergency calls so that they are preferentially processed,compared to normal calls.


This feature need not be activated.l Verification Procedure

1. Use a UE to initiate an emergency call.. The emergency call is successfully established.l Deactivation Procedure

This feature need not be deactivated.

----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 9 Configuring Emergency Call


9-1

10 Configuring 2-Way Antenna ReceiveDiversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-2106042-Way Antenna Receive Diversity.


– In receive diversity mode, the NodeB should provide sufficient RF channels anddemodulation resources to meet the requirements for the number of antenna diversities.




Context

The 2-Antenna Receive Diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation byusing two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals arecombined after certain processing.


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC. In this step, set Antenna Magnitude to2.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to query the value of Antenna

Magnitude.Expected result: Antenna Magnitude is 2.

l Deactivation ProcedureThis feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 10 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity


10-1

Example//Activation procedureADD SEC: STN=1, SECN=0, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2N=R0B; //Verification procedureLST SEC: STN=1, SECN=0;

10 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive DiversityRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

11 Configuring Cell Digital Combinationand Split

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205Cell Digital Combination and Split.


– Only DBS3800, DBS3900 and iDBS3900 support this feature.– In the case of the DBS3900 and iDBS3900, when the WBBPa board is configured, each

RRU supports only the one-antenna receive mode; when other baseband boards areconfigured, each RRU can support the one-antenna or two-antenna receive mode. In thecase of DBS3800, each RRU supports only the one-antenna receive mode. Multiple-antenna receive modes are not supported.

– One CPRI port supports a maximum of eight cascaded RRUs. A maximum of eightRRUs share one cell. A maximum of three distributed cells are supported.

– One BBU supports combination of UL digital signals on a maximum of two CPRI ports.A maximum of 16 RRUs share one cell.

– With the delay considered, the optical fiber for interconnecting RRUs in one cell andwith neighboring coverage areas should be less than 4 km in length.

– RF modules, RRU 3828 and RRU3829 can only support maximum of 4 carriers whenthey are implemented for Cell Digital Combination and Split.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature does not depend on other features.

l License– This feature is not under license control.

ContextThe feature enables multiple sectors to use the resources in the same cell, which improves systemspectrum efficiency and resource utilization. Compared with the analog combination and split,the digital combination and split can provide higher capacity and wider coverage withoutbringing additional noises or signal losses. Cell coverage can be adjusted simply throughsoftware to adapt to actual traffic distribution and changes, which improves CE resourceutilization and operation benefits.

RANFeature Activation Guide 11 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split


11-1


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRUCHAIN to add an RRU chain. In thisstep, set Topo Type to CHAIN.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU to add an RRU. Set a group of RRUs inconsecutive numbering to the RRUs to be used by the distributed sector.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC to add a sector. In this step, set SectorType to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add a local cell. In this step, setSector Type to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).

l Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC. In this step, check that Sector Type isset to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL. In this step, check that SectorType is set to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).


----End

Example1. NodeB V200R013

//Activation procedureADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSN=2, HPN=0;ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO;ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=1, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO;ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61;ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, HISPM=FALSE;//Verification procedureLST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1;LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;

2. NodeB V100R013//Activation procedureADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HSN=0, HPN=0;ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU;ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU;ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61;ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, BBPOOLTYPE=GEN_POOL, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, HISPM=FALSE;//Verification procedureLST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1;LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;

11 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and SplitRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

12 Configuring UE State in ConnectedMode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,

CELL_FACH)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).




– This feature is not under license control.l Other Prerequisites

– The Iu-PS activity factor is already modified.The Iu-PS activity factor can be modified by running the ADD TRMFACTOR andMOD ADJMAP commands. The recommended value of the Iu-PS activity factor is10%.

NOTE

If there are excessive users in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, a large amount of bandwidthon the Iu-PS interface is consumed though such users do not have data to transmit.

Adjusting the Iu-PS activity factor can prevent PS service admission failures due to the increasein the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

ContextHuawei RAN supports four states of UEs in connected mode: CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH,URA_PCH, and CELL_FACH. This feature helps save radio resources efficiently.



12 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH,CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)


12-1

A UE can directly enter the CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH state. It can enter the CELL_PCHor URA_PCH state only through state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH. Thesettings of state transition are as follows:1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,

select the DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check box under theparameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER. In this step,set BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer and Cell ReselectionTimer to appropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS. In this step, set CellReselection Counter Threshold to an appropriate value.

NOTE

l This feature involves the parameter settings of state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH toCELL_PCH or URA_PCH. For the parameter settings of other types of state transition, see 15Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control.

l For the parameter settings related to fast dormancy, see 162 Configuring Enhanced FastDormancy.

l Verification ProcedureThis feature cannot be verified separately. The state of a UE changes when it requestsdifferent services. This is referred to as state transition. For details, see 15 ConfiguringDynamic Channel Configuration Control.


----End

Example//Activating UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=65535, CellReSelectTimer=180;SET UPSINACTTIMER: CellReSelectCounter=9;;

12 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH,CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

13 Configuring Paging UE in Idle,CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1).





ContextIn paging type 1, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in idle mode, CELL_PCH state,or URA_PCH state through the paging control channel (PCCH).


1. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH toturn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set theparameters Cell Reselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BEFACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer to 60s, 30s, and 30s respectively.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS to set the parameterCell Reselection Counter Threshold to 1.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set inactivitydetection timers for PS services.

l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in Idle Mode)1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu

Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.


13 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCHState (Type 1)


13-1

2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and SaveFile. Then, click Submit.

3. Power on UE1 and UE2, and camp on CELL1. Use UE2 to call UE1. TheRRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed on the Trace Data tab page.

l Commissioning Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_PCH State)1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu

Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.2. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.3. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be

displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should beCELL_DCH.

4. Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should performUE1 transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, andthe value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.

5. Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side shouldperform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message,and the value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.

6. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed.l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in URA_PCH)

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click UuInterface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

2. Repeat step 3 through step 5 described in section "Paging a UE in URA_PCH" toperform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH. Cause UE1 to perform a cell reselectionbetween CELL1 and CELL2. Cause UE1 to perform another cell reselection after theCell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Search for the lastRRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH.

3. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed.

NOTEFor details about how to enable UE transition to CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, see 12Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH,CELL_FACH).


----End

Example//Activating paging type 1SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=30, BeF2PStateTransTimer=30;SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1;SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1440, ProtectTmrForInt=20, PsInactTmrForBac=1440, ProtectTmrForBac=20;

13 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCHState (Type 1)



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

14 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH,CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2).





l License


Context

In paging type 2, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in CELL_FACH or CELL_DCHstate through the DCH or FACH.


1. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH toturn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set theparameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] to 30s.


l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_DCH State)


2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and SaveFile. Then, click Submit.


14 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCHState (Type 2)


14-1

3. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should bedisplayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should beCELL_DCH.

4. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 message should be displayed.l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_FACH State)


2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File, and thenclick Submit. The Trace Data tab page is displayed.

3. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.4. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be


5. Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, you can view that the networkside performs UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFGmessage. The value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.

6. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 message should be displayed.l Deactivation Procedure

1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activating paging type 2SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30;SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1440, ProtectTmrForInt=20, PsInactTmrForBac=1440, ProtectTmrForBac=20;

14 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCHState (Type 2)



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

15 Configuring Dynamic ChannelConfiguration Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC).


– This feature does not depend on the hardware.l Dependencies on Other Features



Context

This feature allows dynamic rate adjustment and UE state transition triggered by various reasons.This improves the quality of services and increases resource utilization.

Procedurel Activating DCCC

1. To activate the DCCC algorithm, perform the following steps:

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.

2. To activate traffic-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps:

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set thefollowing event 4A and 4B parameters:

– Direction

– Event4AThd

– Event4BThd

– TimetoTrigger4A

RANFeature Activation Guide 15 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control


15-1

– TimetoTrigger4B– PendingTime4A– PendingTime4B

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNC-level DCCC algorithm parameters:– DcccStg– UlRateUpAdjLevel– UlRateDnAdjLevel– DlRateUpAdjLevel– DlRateDnAdjLevel– UlDcccRateThd– DlDcccRateThd– UlMidRateCalc– DlMidRateCalc– UlMidRateThd– DlMidRateThd

3. To activate throughput-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps:

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch toDRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC. In this step, set DCH ThrouMeas Period and HSUPA DCCC strategy.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set thefollowing event 4B parameters for the DCH:– Period Amount to trigger 4B on DCH– Period Amount after trigger 4B on DCH

4. To activate link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the followingsteps:

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to set the RNC-level QoSenhancement algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stabilityare:– QOS Switch for BE Traffic– First Action for BE Uplink QOS– Second Action for BE Uplink QOS– Third Action for BE Uplink QOS– Wait Timer for BE Uplink Rate– First Action for BE Downlink QOS– Second Action for BE Downlink QOS– Third Action for BE Downlink QOS– Indicator for BE Uplink QOS Event– Srnc Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS– DRNC Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS

15 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

– Measurement of 6A1 Switch– Measurement of 5A Switch– Measurement of 6D Switch

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUALITYMEAS to set the RNC-level QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stabilityare:– BE Trigger Time 6A1– BE Trigger Time 6B1– BE Trigger Time 6A2– BE Trigger Time 6B2– BE Trigger Time 6D– UL Measurement Filter Coefficient– DL TCP Measurement Filter Coefficient– BE Trigger Time of Event E– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E– BE Event E Reporting Period or BE Event E Reporting Period minute– BE Trigger Time of Event F– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F– BE Event F Reporting Period or BE Event F Reporting Period minute

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the cell-level CallAdmission Control (CAC) algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuringlink stability are:– Max UL TX power of interactive service– Max UL TX power of background service

NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for Max UL TX power of interactive service andMax UL TX power of background service. Retain the default values in normalsituations.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLRLPWR to set the cell-leveldownlink transmit power parameters.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLQUALITYMEAS to set thecell-level QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring linkstability are:– BE Trigger Time 6A1– BE Trigger Time 6B1– BE Trigger Time 6A2– BE Trigger Time 6B2– BE Trigger Time 6D– BE Trigger Time of Event E– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E– BE Event E Reporting Period– BE Trigger Time of Event F



15-3

– BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F– BE Event E Reporting Period

NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the defaultvalues in normal situations.

(6) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS to setthe following typical parameters for QoS measurement:– Uplink Event 6A1 Relative Threshold– Uplink Event 6A2 Relative Threshold– Uplink Event 6B1 Relative Threshold– Uplink Event 6B2 Relative Threshold– Statistic Block Number for 5A Event– Event 5A Threshold– Event 5A Interval Block Number– Event Ea Relative Threshold– Event Eb Relative Threshold

(7) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABRLC to set Radio LinkControl (RLC) parameters for a typical Radio Access Bearer (RAB). Theparameters for ensuring link stability are:– Re-TX monitor period– Event A threshold– Hysteresis of Event A– Event A pending time after trigger– Filter Coefficient of RLC Retransmission Ratio

NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the defaultvalues in normal situations.

(8) Link stability control for BE services is implemented through Inter-frequencyhandover.

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step,set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERFREQ.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. Inthis step, set HandOver Switch toHO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH.

(9) To configure inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services, performthe following steps:

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step,set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERRAT andInter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. Inthis step, set HandOver Switch toHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

(10) To configure inter-frequency handover and inter-RAT handover for the linkstability of BE services, perform the following steps:




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step,set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch toSIMINTERFREQRAT and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON.

b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. Inthis step, set HandOver Switch toHO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

(11) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNC-level DCCC algorithm parameters:

– Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate

– Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate

(12) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDCCC to set the followingcell-level DCCC algorithm parameters:

– Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate

– Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate

NOTEFor details about the settings of measurement control parameters, see 97 Configuring TTI Switchfor BE Services Based on Coverage.

5. Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERGBR to set the guaranteed bitrates (GBRs) for gold, silver, and copper users requesting interactive andbackground services.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET to setHSUPA Uplink Rate Adjust Set.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNC-level DCCC algorithm parameters:

– DCCC Rate Up Fail Time Threshold

– DCCC Rate Up Fail Monitor Time length

– DCCC Rate Up Fail Penalty Time Length

l Activating the UE state transition algorithm

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,turn on the following switches of Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch:

– DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

– DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

– DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

– DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

NOTE

The HSDPA state transition license must be activated before the HSDPA state transition switch isturned on.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS to set the measurementcontrol parameters of the UE state transition algorithm.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set thetimer parameters of the UE state transition algorithm.



15-5

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set Low Activity Bit RateThreshold.

l Activating always online

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the followingtimer parameters for checking the low activity of PS users:

– Conversational service T1

– Streaming service T1

– Interactive service T1

– Background service T1

– IMS signal T1

– Conversational service T2

– Streaming service T2

– Interactive service T2

– Background service T2

– IMS signal T2

l Verifying DCCC

1. Traffic-based BE service rate adjustment

Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the information element (IE)trafficVolumeMeasurement exists in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced onthe Uu interface, as shown in Figure 15-1. In addition, check whether the value of theIE periodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 15-2.

Figure 15-1 IE trafficVolumeMeasurement

Figure 15-2 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

2. Throughput-based BE service rate adjustment

(1) On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page,double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring.Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidthmonitoring tasks.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(2) Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. Inthe Connection Performance Monitoring tab page, you can view the bandwidthreduction in UL Throughput Bandwidth.

3. Link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment

Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the value of measurementQuantity in theRRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced on the Uu interface is ue-TransmittedPower(0), as shown in Figure 15-3. In addition, check whether the value of the IEperiodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 15-4.

Figure 15-3 IE measurementQuantity

Figure 15-4 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

4. Basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment

(1) On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page,double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring.Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidthmonitoring tasks.

(2) Set up an R99 BE service. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSPUCELLCHK to check the cell congestion status on the Uu interface (the cell isin the basic congestion state). You can view the bandwidth decrease in ULThroughput Bandwidth in the Connection Performance Monitoring tabpage.

l Verifying the UE state transition algorithm

Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. Check whetherthe value of rrc-StateIndicator in the traced RRC_RB_RECFG message is cell-FACH(1), as shown in Figure 15-5.

Figure 15-5 IE rrc-StateIndicator

l Verifying always online

Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. The messageRRC_RB_REL is not traced on the Uu interface.

l Deactivation Procedure



15-7

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn off therelated switches.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.

----End

Example//Activating DCCC//Activating the DCCC algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1;//Activating traffic-based BE service rate adjustmentMOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=DOWNLINK, Event4aThd=D1024, Event4bThd=D16, TimetoTrigger4A=D240, PendingTime4A=D4000, TimetoTrigger4B=D2560, PendingTime4B=D4000;SET UDCCC: UlDcccRateThd=D64, DlDcccRateThd=D64, DcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_DCH, UlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates, UlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates, UlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, UlMidRateThd=D128, DlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates, DlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates, DlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, DlMidRateThd=D128;//Activating throughput-based BE service rate adjustmentSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH-1;SET UDCCC: HsupaDcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH, DchThrouMeasPeriod=100;MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=UPLINK, Event4bThd=D64, DchThrouTimetoTrigger4B=2, DchThrouPendingTime4B=16;SET UUESTATETRANS: E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30;//Activating link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment//Setting the QoS-related parameters SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeUlAct1=RateDegrade, BeUlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeUlAct3=InterRatHO, BeDlAct1=RateDegrade, BeDlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeDlAct3=InterRatHO, BeUlEvTrigInd=SINGLE, SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES, DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES, BeUlQos6A1McSwitch=YES, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch=YES, BeUlQos6DMcSwitch=YES;SET UQUALITYMEAS: UlBeTrigTime6A1=D640, UlBeTrigTime6B1=D2560, UlBeTrigTime6A2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6B2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6D=D240, UlMeasFilterCoef=D19, DlMeasFilterCoef=D1, DlBeTrigTimeE=64, ChoiceRptUnitForBeE=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeE=480, DlBeTrigTimeF=64, ChoiceRptUnitForBeF=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeF=480;MOD UCELLRLPWR: CellId=1, CNDOMAINID=CS_DOMAIN, MAXBITRATE=12200, RLMAXDLPWR=-30, RLMINDLPWR=-180, DLSF=D128;MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS: RabIndex=1, UlThd6a1=1, UlThd6a2=5, UlThd6b1=1, UlThd6b2=5, StaBlkNum5A=500, Thd5a=280, HangBlockNum5a=512, ThdEa=2, ThdEb=2;MOD UTYPRABRLC: RabIndex=1, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH, OppositeTrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, RlcMode=AM, AmRlcCfgPara=FLOWCONTROL_PARA, TimeToMoniter=6000, MoniterPrd=1000, ReTransRatioFilterCoef=1, EventAThred=160, TimeToTriggerA=2, PendingTimeA=1;//Configuring inter-frequency handover for the link stability of BE servicesMOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERFREQ, CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=OFF;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;//Configuring inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE servicesMOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERRAT, CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;//Setting the DCCC algorithm parameters




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

SET UDCCC: UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64;MOD UCELLDCCC: CellId=1, UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64;//Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustmentSET UUSERGBR: TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, THPClass=High, BearType=R99, UserPriority=GOLD, UlGBR=D16, DlGBR=D16;SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_144KBPS-1&RATE_384KBPS-1&RATE_1280KBPS-1;SET UDCCC: FailTimeTh=4, MoniTimeLen=60, DcccUpPenaltyLen=30;//Activating the UE state transition algorithmSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=9, D2F2PTvmThd=D64, D2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, D2FTvmPTAT=D1000, F2PTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, F2PTvmPTAT=D16000, BeF2DTvmThd=D1024, BeF2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeH2FTvmThd=D64, BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, BeH2FTvmPTAT=D1000, BeF2HTvmThd=D1024, BeF2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30, E2FThrouThd=8, E2FThrouTimeToTrig=2, E2FThrouPTAT=4, BeF2ETvmThd=D1024, BeF2ETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeF2CpcHTvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcHTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeF2CpcETvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2DTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2HTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2CpcTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2CpcTvmTimeToTrig=D0, FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D3k;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=180, BeD2FStateTransTimer=5, BeF2PStateTransTimer=5, BeH2FStateTransTimer=5, BeE2FStateTransTimer=5, BeCpc2FStateTransTimer=5, BeD2EFachStateTransTimer=5, BeH2EFachStateTransTimer=5, BeCpc2EFachStateTransTimer=5;SET UDCCC: LittleRateThd=D64;//Activating always onlineSET UPSINACTTIMER:PsInactTmrForInt=240, ProtectTmrForInt=10, PsInactTmrForBac=240, ProtectTmrForBac=10, PsInactTmrForCon=240, ProtectTmrForCon=10,PsInactTmrForStr=240, ProtectTmrForStr=10, PSInactTmrForImsSig=3600, ProtectTmrForImsSig=10;//Deactivating DCCCSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-0;



15-9

16 Configuring Integrity Protection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401Integrity Protection.





ContextThis feature protects the network and user data from being listened and modified illegally.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUIA to enable the RNC to support theintegrity protection algorithm.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu

Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.2. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1.3. Use UE2 to call UE1.4. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. ThechosenIntegrityProtectionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the integrityprotection algorithm.


----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 16 Configuring Integrity Protection


16-1

Example//Activating integrity protectionSET UUIA: IntegrityProtectAlgo=UIA1-1;

16 Configuring Integrity ProtectionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

17 Configuring Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402Encryption.





Context

The encryption algorithms supported by Huawei RAN include UEA0 and UEA1.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUEA to enable the RNC to support theencryption algorithm.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu

Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.2. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1.3. Use UE2 to call UE1.4. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. ThechosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryptionalgorithm.

5. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode.6. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMMAND and

RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The

RANFeature Activation Guide 17 Configuring Encryption


17-1

chosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryptionalgorithm.


----End

Example//Activating encryptionSET UUEA: EncryptionAlgo=UEA0-1&UEA1-1;

17 Configuring EncryptionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

18 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501Open Loop Power Control.





ContextThis feature enables BSC6900 to roughly estimate path loss based on power measurementresults, network parameter settings, and QoS requirements. Based on the estimation results,BSC6900 sets the initial transmit power for a UE and a NodeB before connection is establishedbetween them.


Activate open loop power control on the downlink DPCH.

1. This feature does not need to be activated on the downlink DPCH.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink DPCH.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, set the parameters relatedto uplink DPCH power control.

RANFeature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Open Loop Power Control


18-1

NOTE

l The BSC6900 uses the Default Constant Value parameter to calculate the power offseton the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Power_offset). Based on the calculation result, the UEcalculates the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Initial_Power).

l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Power_offset is: DPCCH_Power_offset = PrimaryCPICH DL TX power + UL interference + Default Constant Value. Where,DPCCH_Power_offset indicates the initial transmit power offset on the DPCCH, PrimaryCPICH DL TX power indicates the downlink transmit power on the P-CPICH, ULinterference indicates the uplink interference, and Default Constant Value is the value ofDefault Constant Value.

l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Initial_Power is: DPCCH_Initial_Power =DPCCH_Power_offset - CPICH_RSCP. Where, CPICH_RSCP indicates the receivedsignal code power (RSCP) that the UE measures on the P-CPICH. An excessively smallvalue of DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to uplink synchronization failures at the cell edgeduring initial link establishment, which affects uplink coverage. An excessively great valueof DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to instantaneous interference on uplink signalreception, which affects the uplink receiving performance. For details, see 3GPP TS 25.331.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink PRACH.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UPRACHUUPARAS. In this step, set theparameters related to the PARCH to appropriate values.


Verify open loop power control on the downlink DPCH

1. Use UE 2 to establish a conversation with UE 1.2. The message NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ on the Iub interface shows the value of the

IE initialDL-transmissionPower. This value is used for the downlink DPCH openloop power control.

Verify open loop power control on the uplink DPCH

1. Check the IE dpcch-PowerOffset, whose value is the same as that of DPCCH PowerOffset, under the IE ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo contained in the RRC messageRadio Bearer Setup, as shown in Figure 18-1. Based on the dpcch-PowerOffsetvalue, the UE can further calculate the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH(DPCCH_Initial_Power) and perform uplink open loop power control.

Figure 18-1 ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo IE

Verify open loop power control on the uplink PRACH

1. Check whether the IE constantValue whose value is -20 is contained in theRRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE5 message by referring to Tracing Messages on the UuInterface. If the message contains this IE, parameters configured for the UE take effect.After obtaining values of these parameters, the UE calculates the initial transmit powerand performs open look power control on the uplink PARCH.


18 Configuring Open Loop Power ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


----End

Example//Activating open loop power control on the uplink DPCH SET UFRC: DefaultConstantValue=-22;

//Activating open loop power control on the uplink PRACH MOD UPRACHUUPARAS: CellId=111, PhyChId=1, Constantvalue=-20, PowerRampStep=2, PreambleRetransMax=20;

RANFeature Activation Guide 18 Configuring Open Loop Power Control


18-3

19 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502Downlink Power Balance.





l License


Context

In soft handover, error codes in a TPC command may lead to downlink transmit power drift.The downlink power balance feature solves the problem of power imbalance between links,thereby achieving best gain in soft handover. The greater the downlink transmit power drift, thesmaller the macro diversity gain. Downlink power balance adjusts power drift and improvesperformance of soft handover.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Power Control Switch toPC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH.


1. On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Trace > UMTS Services and double-click UuInterface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

2. Set Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then click Submit.3. Move a UE from cell 1 to cell 2 to ensure that the UE performs a soft handover.

4. Check whether the active cell set update is complete in the traced Uu-interfacemessages. Figure 19-1 shows the expected result.

RANFeature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Downlink Power Balance


19-1

Figure 19-1 RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message traced in Uu interface messagetracing

5. Start Iub interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Check the value of theinformation element dedicatedMeasurementType in theNBAP_DEDIC_MEAS_INIT_REQ message.

Expected result: the value of dedicatedMeasurementType is transmitted-code-power(2) shown in Figure 19-2.

19 Configuring Downlink Power BalanceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 19-2 Information element dedicatedMeasurementType

RANFeature Activation Guide 19 Configuring Downlink Power Balance


19-3

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,

set PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH to 0.

----End

Example//Activating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-0;

19 Configuring Downlink Power BalanceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

20 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503Outer Loop Power Control.





l License


Context

Outer loop power control guarantees the satisfying quality of services by adjusting the SIR targetof the inner loop power control. Outer loop power control is performed on the DCHs carryingthe same RRC connection. When the moving speed of a UE or the multi-path environmentchanges, the SIR target needs to be adjusted to ensure a desirable service quality. Otherwise, theservice quality may be too high or too low. This will accordingly lead to severe interference andpower waste.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to activate theOLPC function.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC to set theparameters related to OLPC according to network plan.

l Verification Procedure1. Click the Monitor on the BSC6900 LMT main page. On the Monitor Navigation

Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection PerformanceMonitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Inthe displayed dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL SIR and OLPC, and enter thecorresponding IMSI. And then click Submit to initiate the trace.

RANFeature Activation Guide 20 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control


20-1

2. Use a UE to initiate a PS service.3. Check whether the values of UL SIR and OLPC are changed. If the values are

changed, this feature is activated.

Figure 20-1 UL SIR

Figure 20-2 OLPC

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to deactivate

the OLPC function.

----End

Example//Activating outer loop power controlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-1;MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=11, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH,

20 Configuring Outer Loop Power ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

DelayClass=1, BLERQuality=-20;MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=55, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_10MS, DelayClass=1, EdchTargetLittleRetransNum=10, EdchTargetLargeRetransNum=1100;MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC: RabIndex=55, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_10MS, Ul16QamInd=FALSE, UlL2EnhanceInd=FALSE, EdPwrInterpolationInd=FALSE, MaxSirtarget=192, MinSirtarget=112, UlEcBoostingInd=FALSE;//Deactivating outer loop power control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 20 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control


20-3

21 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504Inner Loop Power Control.





ContextInner loop power control is also known as fast close loop power control. It is applied for dedicatedchannels only. It is used to adjust the transmit power based on the feedback from the physicallayer of the peer end. The UE and Node B can adjust transmit power according to the SIR sentby each other. In this way, radio link fading can be reduced.


1. The feature does not need to be activated.l Verification Procedure

1. Click the Monitor on the BSC6900 LMT main page. On the Monitor NavigationTree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection PerformanceMonitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. Inthe displayed dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL SIR and UE Tx Power, and enterthe corresponding IMSI. And then click Submit to initiate the trace.

2. UE 1 calls UE 2. UE 2 rings, answers and starts the conversation.3. Observe the variation of UL SIR and UE Tx Power in the UL SIR and UE Tx

Power Connection Performance Monitoring window.4. UE 1 moves in the cell to change radio link quality.5. When you move UE 1 away from the cell center, UE_1 transmit power increases.

RANFeature Activation Guide 21 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control


21-1

6. When you move UE_1 towards cell center, UE_1 transmit power decreases.

Figure 21-1 UL SIR Tracing

Figure 21-2 UE Tx Power Tracing


----End

21 Configuring Inner Loop Power ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

22 Configuring Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101Admission Control.


– This feature does not depend on the hardware.



l License


Context

This feature enables the BSC6900 to perform admission control on UEs requesting R99 servicesby considering the status of various resources. It helps ensure the QoS and optimize the allocationof system resources.


1. Activating code resource admissionRun the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC with Dl handover creditand code reserved SF set to an appropriate value.

2. Activating power resource admission

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, select associated cell-oriented power admission control algorithms from theCell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list, and select an appropriate algorithmfrom both the Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithmswitch drop-down lists according to the network plan.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set power resourceadmission parameters to appropriate values.

3. Activating NodeB credit resource admission

RANFeature Activation Guide 22 Configuring Admission Control


22-1

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,select NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithm switchdrop-down list to turn on the NodeB-level CE admission switch.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, select CRD_ADCTRL from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-downlist to turn on the NodeB-level credit admission switch.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set ULhandover credit reserved SF to an appropriate value.

4. Activating Iub resource admissionThis feature does not need to be activated.

l Verification ProcedureThe procedure for verifying downlink admission control on R99 non-real-time PS servicesbased on the number of equivalent subscribers is as follows:

1. Enable a UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11.

2. Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL totalequivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 1.

4. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service.Expected result: The UE fails to initiate the PS service. In the Iu Interface Tracewindow, an RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNBMENT_RESP message sent from the RNC tothe CN is displayed, containing the cause value no-radio-resources-available-in-target-cell.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL totalequivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 80.

6. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service.Expected result: The data service is set up successfully.


1. Deactivating code resource admissionThis feature does not need to be deactivated.

2. Deactivating power resource admission

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, setUplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch toALGORITHM_OFF.

3. Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithmswitch drop-down list.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, deselect CRD_ADCTRL from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-downlist.

4. Deactivating Iub resource admissionThis feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

22 Configuring Admission ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Example//Activating code resource admissionMOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlNonCtrlThdForAMR=75, UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR=75, UlNonCtrlThdForOther=60, DlConvAMRThd=80, DlConvNonAMRThd=80, DlOtherThd=75, UlNonCtrlThdForHo=80, DlHOThd=85, UlCellTotalThd=83, DlCellTotalThd=90, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32;//Activating power resource admissionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1&HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1;MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, MaxHsdpaUserNum=64, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24;//Activating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1;MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16;//Deactivating power resource admissionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF;//Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 22 Configuring Admission Control


22-3

23 Configuring Load Measurement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102Load Measurement.





l License


Context

This feature is used to measure the load for the load control feature.


1. The function of measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power is alwaysactivated. Therefore, this feature does not need to be activated.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select HSDPA_PBR_MEAS and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS from the Cell CACalgorithm switch drop-down list to activate the cell-level load measurement forHSDPA and HSUPA.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM. In this step, set loadmonitoring parameters, including the uplink/downlink load reshuffling (LDR)algorithm trigger/release thresholds and uplink/downlink overload congestion (OLC)algorithm trigger/release thresholds to appropriate values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDM. In this step, set parametersassociated with load measurement, report period, and smoothing filter lengthaccording to the network plan.


RANFeature Activation Guide 23 Configuring Load Measurement


23-1

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor page. In the Monitor navigation tree,double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring, and create tasksof monitoring Cell DL Carrier TX Power and RTWP.

2. Check whether the uplink full-bandwidth RX power of the cell is displayed in theRTWP monitoring window.

3. Check whether the downlink carrier TX power is displayed in the Cell DL CarrierTX Power monitoring window.

l Deactivation Procedure1. The measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power has been activated and

cannot be deactivated.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,

deselect HSDPA_PBR_MEAS and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS from the Cell CACalgorithm switch drop-down list to deactivate the cell-level load measurement forHSDPA and HSUPA.

----End

Example//Activating load measurementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-1;MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85, DlOlcTrigThd=95, DlOlcRelThd=85, HsupAuRetrnsLdTrigThd=70, HsupAuRetrnsLdRelThd=50;SET ULDM: UlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6, ChoiceRprtUnitForUlBasicMeas=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForUlBasicMeas=100, DlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6;//Deactivating load measurementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-0&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-0;

23 Configuring Load MeasurementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

24 Configuring Load Reshuffling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106Load Reshuffling.





ContextThis feature provides multiple load reshuffling policies for a cell in the basic congestion stateto decrease the cell load and increase the access success rate. The load reshuffling policies areinter-frequency load handover, code reshuffling, BE service rate reduction, uncontrolled real-time traffic QoS renegotiation, CS domain inter-RAT load handover, PS domain inter-RAT loadhandover, downsizing the bit rate of AMR voice, and MBMS power downgrading.


NOTE

The following section provides the related parameters and commands. The parameter settings dependon the network plan.

1. Enable the related load reshuffling algorithms.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, turn on the following switches of Cell LDC algorithm switch:– UL_UU_LDR: UL UU load reshuffling algorithm– DL_UU_LDR: DL UU load reshuffling algorithm– CELL_CODE_LDR: Code reshuffling algorithm– CELL_CREDIT_LDR:Credit reshuffling algorithm

RANFeature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Load Reshuffling


24-1

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA. In this step,turn on the following switches of NodeB LDC algorithm switch:– IUB_LDR: NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm– NODEB_CREDIT_LDR: NodeB-level credit reshuffling algorithm– LCG_CREDIT_LDR: cell-group-level credit reshuffling algorithm

2. Set the related thresholds.– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM to set LDR thresholds

(UL/DL LDR Trigger/release threshold and DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold).– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set code LDR threshold

(Cell LDR SF reserved threshold) and LDR actions.– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR to set the cell-group-

level or NodeB-level LDR thresholds (Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold).– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set the cell-level credit

LDR thresholds (Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold).3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD to set the LDR period (LDR

period timer length).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable the

functions used in the LDR actions.– Inter-frequency load handover

Set HandOver Switch to HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH.– BE service rate reduction

Set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.– Uncontrolled real-time traffic QoS renegotiation

Set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch toDRA_IU_QOS_RENEG_SWITCH.

– CS domain inter-RAT load handoverSet HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH.

– PS domain inter-RAT load handoverSet HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

– Downsizing the bit rate of AMR voiceSet CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH.

l Verification ProcedureThe following section takes R99 non-real-time data services as examples to verify BEservice rate reduction in the basic congestion state.1. Enable a UE in idle mode to camp on CELL_A11.2. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. In the Monitor Navigation

Tree tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring.In the displayed dialog box, create a Cell DL Throughput monitoring task.

3. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a data service. Checkthe rb-mappinginfo information element (IE) contained in the RRC_RB_SETUPmessage traced over the Uu interface. The value of rrc-Stateinditator isCELL_DCH.

4. Use the UE to log in to the FTP server and then start FTP downloading. Datadownloading is normal.

24 Configuring Load ReshufflingRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

5. To simulate the scenario where power load reaches 75%, run the NodeB MMLcommand STR DLSIM. The RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed in the UuInterface Trace dialog box. In the Cell DL Throughput of the ConnectionPerformance Monitoring dialog box, you can view the downlink RB rate decreaseconfigured on the RNC.

6. To stop simulating power load, run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM. In theUu Interface Trace dialog box, the RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed. In theCell DL Throughput of the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, you canview the downlink RB rate increase configured on the RNC.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,

deselect the following switches from Cell LDC algorithm switch:– UL_UU_LDR: UL UU load reshuffling algorithm– DL_UU_LDR: DL UU load reshuffling algorithm– CELL_CODE_LDR: Code reshuffling algorithm– CELL_CREDIT_LDR:Credit reshuffling algorithm

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA. In this step,deselect the following switches from NodeB LDC algorithm switch:– IUB_LDR: NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm– NODEB_CREDIT_LDR: NodeB-level credit reshuffling algorithm– LCG_CREDIT_LDR: cell-group-level credit reshuffling algorithm

----End

Example//Activating Load Reshuffling//Enabling load reshuffling algorithmsMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CODE_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-1;MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1;//Setting load reshuffling thresholdsMOD UCELLLDM: CellId=100, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85, DlOlcTrigThd=95, DlOlcRelThd=85, DlLdTrnsHysTime=1000;//Setting code reshuffling thresholdsMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj, DlLdrSecondAction=InterFreqLDHO, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8;//Setting NodeB-level credit reshuffling thresholdsMOD UNODEBLDR: NodeBName="nodeb1", UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8;//Setting cell-level credit reshuffling thresholdsMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8;//Setting load reshuffling periodSET ULDCPERIOD: LDRPERIODTIMERLEN=10;//Turning on load reshuffling function switchesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_IU_QOS_RENEG_SWITCH-1,CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 24 Configuring Load Reshuffling


24-3

//Deactivating Load ReshufflingMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CODE_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-0;MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

24 Configuring Load ReshufflingRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

25 Configuring Overload Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107Overload Control.





ContextThis feature provides load adjustment means to quickly lower the load in overloaded cells.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enable the airinterface OLC algorithm. Select the UL_UU_OLC and DL_UU_OLC check boxesunder the parameter Cell CAC algorithm.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA to enable the OLCalgorithm. Select the IUB_OLC check box under the parameter NodeB LDCalgorithm.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM to set UL OLC triggerthreshold, DL OLC trigger threshold, UL OLC release threshold, and DL OLC releasethreshold.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD to set the OLC period (OLCperiod timer value).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLOLC to set the parameter relatedto OLC-related actions.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the following BSC6900 MML commands to verify whether the activation is

successful.

RANFeature Activation Guide 25 Configuring Overload Control


25-1

– LST UCELLALGOSWTICH– LST UCELLLDM– LST UNODEBALGOPARA– LST ULDCPERIOD– LST UCELLOLC

NOTE

Consult Huawei engineers about the verification solution to obtain professional technical support.

NOTE

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to dienable the

air interface OLC algorithm. Clear the UL_UU_OLC and DL_UU_OLC check boxesunder the parameter Cell CAC algorithm.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA to disenable theOLC algorithm, Clear the IUB_OLC check box under the parameter NodeB LDCalgorithm.

----End

Example//Activating Overload ControlMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-1&DL_UU_OLC-1;MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-1;SET ULDCPERIOD: OlcPeriodTimerLen=3000;ADD UCELLOLC: CellId=111;//Deactivating Overload ControlMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-0&DL_UU_OLC-0;MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-0;

25 Configuring Overload ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

26 Configuring Code ResourceManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108Code Resource Management.





l License


Context

This feature provides downlink code tree allocation and reshuffling. Through this, the coderesources can be rationally allocated, therefore increasing the utilization efficiency of theresources.


NOTEThe code allocation function is always activated. The activation procedure applies to only the codereshuffling function.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH, and then enablethe required LDR algorithm switches for resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(CodeLDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell LDC algorithm switch parameter.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set code LDR threshold(Cell LDR SF reserved threshold) and set CodeAdj(Code adjust) as one of the DLLDR actions.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD to set the length of LDRperiod (LDR period timer length).

RANFeature Activation Guide 26 Configuring Code Resource Management


26-1

l Verification Procedure1. Enable the UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11.2. Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR with Cell LDR SF reserved

threshold set to SF8 and Max user number for code adjust to 1.4. Connect the UE to a laptop on the USB port and enable the UE to initiate a data service.

Expected result: Services are set up on the DCH successfully. You can view the rb-mappinginfo information element (IE) in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced overthe Uu interface. In the Cell Code Tree Monitor window, you can view that theservice occupies code SF32(4).

5. Enable the UE to log in to the FTP Internet server and then enable FTP download.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status.

The status of cell code congestion is displayed as basic congestion.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URESERVEOVSF to release the service

that occupies code SF32(1).8. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status.

The status of cell code congestion is displayed as not congested.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH, and thendeactivate the required LDR algorithm switches for resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell LDC algorithm switch parameter.

----End

Example//Activating Code Resource ManagementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-1;MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8;SET ULDCPERIOD: LdrPeriodTimerLen=10;//Verifying Code Resource ManagementMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8, MaxUserNumCodeAdj=1;DSP UCELLCHK: CHECKSCOPE=CELLID, CELLID=111;RMV URESERVEOVSF: CellId=111, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=1;//Deactivating Code Resource ManagementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-0;

26 Configuring Code Resource ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

27 Configuring Shared Network Support inConnected Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301Shared Network Support in Connected Mode.





– The CN supports the shared network area (SNA) function.

ContextThis feature enables the RAN and CN together to perform UE access restriction in specifiedlocation areas.


1. For the CS service, configure two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSC.2. For the PS service, run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA,

SNA1, and SNA2.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO to modify the RACs of

CELL1 and CELL2.4. Set up a cell. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command to turn on the soft handover switch.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function.

l Verifying the SNA Function of the CS Service

RANFeature Activation Guide 27 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode


27-1

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click IuInterface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

2. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function.4. Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be

displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.5. Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE

message from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMPmessage from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data.

6. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function.8. Add a mapping relation between IMSI of UE1 and SNA1 on the MSC.9. Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be

displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.NOTE

CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message sent fromthe RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not in the monitoring cell.

10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does notbelong to SNA_2.

11. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1.l Verifying the SNA Function of the PS Service

1. Run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA information.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function.3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.4. Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1

should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESSinformation IE.

5. Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATEmessage from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMPmessage from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data.

6. End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function.8. Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1

should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESSinformation IE.

9. CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL messagesent from the RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not inthe monitoring set.

10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does notbelong to SNA_2.

11. End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to disable theSNA function.

----End

27 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected ModeRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Example//Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSCADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_1", LAI="460020001";ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_1", SNAC=1;ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="1", SNAC=1; ADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_2", LAI="460020002";ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_2", SNAC=2;ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="2", SNAC=2;//Activating the SNA function of the CS ServiceMOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;//Verifying the SNA function of the CS ServiceSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;///Add a mapping relation between IMSI and SNA1 on the MSCADD IMSIGRP: IMSIPRE=K'460071104008338, MCCMNC1=K'46002, SNAGRPN1="1";MOD RNC: RNCID=1, CAPABILITY=SNA-1;//Deactivating the SNA functionSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;//Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the SGSNADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="1", SNAC=1;ADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="2", SNAC=2;//Activating the SNA function of the PS ServiceMOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;//Adding SNA information on the SGSNADD SNAA: BEGIMSI="460071104008338", ENDIMSI="460071104008338", PLMN="46002", SNAC=1;//Verifying the SNA function of the PS ServiceSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating the SNA functionSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 27 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode


27-3

28 Configuring Intra NodeB SofterHandover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201Intra NodeB Softer Handover.





l License


Context

This feature enables softer handover within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softer handover is one typeof soft handover. To perform softer handover, multiple RLs need to be established. In this way,the uplink resources of a cell in the same uplink resource group can be fully shared. In contrastto soft handover, softer handover does not consume additional transmission resources on the Iubinterface. Therefore, softer handover can provide higher combination gain and require lesstransmission resources on the Iub interface.

Softer handover may occur within the same uplink resource group.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable softhandover.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM to set Softer handovercombination indicator switch to MAY or MUST.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL to add an intra-frequency neighboring cell.

RANFeature Activation Guide 28 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover


28-1

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO to set the parameterrelated to handover.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu

Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,

click Submit.3. UE is in idle mode and camps on the CELL1.4. UE initiates PS Dial-up, and service is set up successfully.5. UE moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed RNC

sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE and UE sends theRRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC.

6. The data transmission remains normal while UE is moving to CELL2.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM to set Softer handovercombination indicator switch to MUST_NOT.

----End

Example//Activating Intra NodeB Softer HandoverSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;SET UHOCOMM: DivCtrlField=MAY;ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203, NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO, PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000;//Deactivating Intra NodeB Softer HandoverSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

28 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

29 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202Intra RNC Soft Handover.





Context

Intra-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement intra-RNC soft handover,multiple RLs need to be established between NodeBs or within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softerhandover and intra-RNC soft handover differ in the place where macro diversity combining isperformed. For intra-RNC soft handover, macro diversity combining, which is in selective mode,is performed within the RNC. In such a case, each RL on the Iub interface carries transmissiondata independently. Compared with intra-NodeB softer handover, the intra-RNC soft handovercan be applied to more scenarios.






Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

RANFeature Activation Guide 29 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover


29-1

2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,click Submit.

3. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.4. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear.5. UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that

RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends theRRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to set Softer

handover combination indicator to disable the soft handover.

----End

Example//Activating Intra RNC Soft HandoverSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203, NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO, PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000;//Deactivating Intra RNC Soft HandoverSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

29 Configuring Intra RNC Soft HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

30 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203Inter RNC Soft Handover.





– The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context

Inter-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement inter-RNC soft handover,multiple RLs need to be established between different RNCs. In such a case, macro diversitycombining is performed by the SRNC connected through the Iur interface. The SRNC sends theDRNC the radio link establishment signaling over the Iur interface. Based on the signaling, theDRNC establishes a radio link in the new NodeB. Other procedures are similar to those of intra-RNC soft handover. This feature enables telecom operators to provide seamless connectionservices to subscribers. Inter-RNC soft handover has wider application scenario than softhandover in other forms, as it can be applied to the RNCs connected through the Iur interface.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRNC or MOD UNRNC to enable cross-Iur soft handover.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL to add a neighboring RNCcell.

RANFeature Activation Guide 30 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover


30-1




Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,

click Submit.3. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.4. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear.5. UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that

RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends theRRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC to disable the cross-Iur soft

handover.

----End

Example//Activating Inter RNC Soft HandoverSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1;ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=2381, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="2222", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE;ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=221, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=222, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;//Deactivating Inter RNC Soft HandoverMOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0;

30 Configuring Inter RNC Soft HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

31 Configuring Intra Frequency HardHandover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301Intra Frequency Hard Handover.





Context

When hard handover is performed, the existing connection is interrupted before new connectionis set up. Intra-frequency hard handover is performed between cells on the same frequency.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to selectHO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver switch list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL to add an intra-frequency or inter-RNC neighboring cell.

3. If cross-Iur hard handover is required, add the neighboring RNC and neighboring RNCcell. Run the RNC BSC6900 command ADD UNRNC to add a neighboring RNC.Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL to add a neighboring RNCcell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL to set theneighboring cell relations.



RANFeature Activation Guide 31 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover


31-1



3. Both UE1 and UE2 are subscribed in HLR to support speech service.4. 4. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1.5. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation is clear.6. UE1 moved from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Date, it can be observed

RRC_MEAS_RPRT message with 1D event that UE1 sends to RNC1.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to deselectHO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the Handover switch list.

----End

Example//Activating Intra Frequency Hard HandoverSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1;ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=211, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;ADD UNRNC: NRncId =2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0, HHOTRIG=ON, SERVICEIND=SUPPORT_CS_AND_PS, IurExistInd=TRUE, DPX=1, RNCPROTCLVER=R5, STATEINDTMR=20, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS;ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=2, CellId=311, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="311", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=H'2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE;ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=311, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;//Deactivating Intra Frequency Hard HandoverSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

31 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

32 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801Intra RNC Cell Update.





ContextCell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UElocation or behavior is changed. Intra-RNC cell update means cell update within the RNC.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on theRNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set theparameters BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] and BE FACH or E_FACH toPCH Transition Timer[s] to 30s and 60s respectively.


4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER to set the periodiccell update timer to 5 minutes.

5. Set CELL1 and CELL2 of the RNC as intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details,see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

l Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click

Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.

RANFeature Activation Guide 32 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update


32-1


3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.

4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.

5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should bedisplayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should beCELL_DCH.

6. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should performUE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and thevalue of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH.

7. Cause the UE to reselect a new cell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should sendthe RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of cellreselection, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRMmessage to the UE.

l Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Uplink Data Transmission

1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-clickUu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.





6. Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side shouldperform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message,and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.

7. Use the UE to transmit data so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send theRRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause ofuplinkdatatransmission, and the RNC should send theRRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.

l Verifying Periodic Cell Update

1. Run the MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set the parameter BEFACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer[s] to 65535.

For example,

SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535;





32 Configuring Intra RNC Cell UpdateRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


7. Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes so as to trigger periodic cell update.The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cellupdate cause of periodiccellupdate, and the RNC should send theRRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.

l Deactivation Procedure1. None

----End

Example//Activating intra-RNC cell updateSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30, BeF2PStateTransTimer=60;SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

RANFeature Activation Guide 32 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update


32-3

33 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802Inter RNC Cell Update.





Context

Cell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UElocation or behavior is changed. Inter-RNC cell update means cell update between RNCs.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set theparameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer to 30s.


4. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells controlled by different BSC6900s. Fordetails, see the Configuring an Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC to set the parameter IUR CCHsupport flag to ON.

NOTE

IUR CCH support flag is also turned on neighboring BSC6900.

l Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection

RANFeature Activation Guide 33 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update


33-1



3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL.4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be



7. Cause the UE to perform cell reselection from local cell to intra-frequency neighboringcell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATEmessage to neighboring BSC6900, with the cell update cause of cell reselection, andlocal BSC6900 should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to theUE.


----End

Example//Activating inter-RNC cell updateSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30;SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES;

33 Configuring Inter RNC Cell UpdateRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

34 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901Intra RNC URA Update.





l License


Context

The UTRAN registration area (URA) update procedure updates the URA of a UE when an RRCconnection exists and the location of the UE is known on the URA level in the UTRAN. Intra-RNC URA update means URA update within the RNC.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO to set CELL1 andCELL2 as the intra-frequency neighboring cells that belong to the same location area,route area, and service area.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA to configure CELL1 andCELL2 to make them belong to different URAs.


4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set the CellReselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH orE_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively.


RANFeature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update


34-1


7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER to set the periodiccell update timer to 5 minutes.

8. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTSInitial Configuration Guide.

l Verifying URA Update Triggered by URA Reselection1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click

Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.2. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then,

click Submit.3. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1.4. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.5. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be



7. Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side shouldperform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message,and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.

8. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Make UE1perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Searchfor the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value ofthe rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH.

9. Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send theRRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause ofchangeofURA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRMmessage to the UE.

l Verifying Periodic URA Update1. Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes, to trigger periodic URA update.

The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cellupdate cause of URA reselection, and the RNC should send theRRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE.


----End

Example//Activating intra-RNC URA updateMOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=111, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=121, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1;ADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0;ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10,

34 Configuring Intra RNC URA UpdateRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

BeF2PStateTransTimer=10;SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1;SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

RANFeature Activation Guide 34 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update


34-3

35 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902Inter RNC URA Update.





l License


Context

Inter-RNC URA update means URA update between RNCs.


1. Configure the Iur interface. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial ConfigurationGuide.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA to configure CELL1 andCELL2 to make them belong to different URAs.

NOTECell1 belongs to RNC_1, Cell2 belongs to RNC_2.

3. On the RNC1 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service statetransition switch.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set the CellReselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH orE_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively.


RANFeature Activation Guide 35 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update


35-1


7. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTSInitial Configuration Guide.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC to enable the setup of commandchannels on the Iur interface.








7. Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side shouldperform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message,and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH.

8. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Make the UEperform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Searchfor the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in Uu trace data. The valueof rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH.

9. Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send theRRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of CHANGEOF URA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM messageto the UE.



----End

Example//Activating inter-RNC URA updateADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0;ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10, BeF2PStateTransTimer=10;SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1;SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SuppIurCch=YES;

35 Configuring Inter RNC URA UpdateRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

36 Configuring Direct SignalingConnection Re-establishment (DSCR)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR).





Context

During a DSCR procedure, the RNC autonomously releases the RRC connection carrying non-real-time RABs and then immediately requests the UE to re-establish an RRC connection forservice setup. The RRC connection re-establishment procedure is triggered by an RRCCONNECTION RELEASE message with the cause value of Directed Signaling Connectionre-establishment sent from the RNC to the UE. A routing area update follows the RRCconnection re-establishment immediately.

The DSCR feature is supplementary to the feature WRFD-020605 SRNS RelocationIntroduction Package. When the Iur resources are insufficient or SRNS relocation fails, theDSCR feature ensures uninterrupted PS services.

Only background and interactive services support this feature. The DSCR re-establishes a servicethrough the routing area update procedure. Therefore, this feature is applicable only to PSservices.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC. In this step, set Handover Typefor PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR.




36-1

NOTE

The default value of Handover Type for PS BE Traffic isCORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC. You can modify the value according to the actualrequirements.

2. If the Iur interface exists, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on the switches related to SRNS relocation.

3. If the UE is not in the CELL_DCH state, run the BSC6900 MML command SETURRCTRLSWITCH to turn on the DSCR switch for the DRNC.

l Verification Procedure1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 36-1 and Figure

36-2.

Figure 36-1 Uu interface tracing dialog box




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 36-2 RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

2. Use the UE to establish a PS BE service. Perform a handover by adding a cell underthe DRNC and then removing the source cell.

3. View the RRC_RRC_CONN_REL message traced on the Uu interface. Check thevalue of the IE releaseCause in the rrcConnectionRelease of the message. If thevalue is Directed Signaling Connection re-establishment, this feature has beenactivated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC. In this step, set Handover Type

for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.

----End

Example//Activating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_IUR_RESRCE_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_LOC_SEPRAT_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_SEPRAT_DUR_SWITCH-1;SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=DRNC_DIRECT_DSCR-1;//Deactivating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;




36-3

37 Configuring NodeB Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501NodeB Clock.


– Ensure that a clock link is available before configuring the LINE clock source.– Ensure that the GPS card is configured before configuring the GPS card clock source.– Ensure that the USCU is configured before configuring the BITS clock source.



ContextIn normal operation, the base station needs to track an external clock to calibrate its main clockfrequency. The synchronization of the base station clock provides the basis for the framesynchronization.

The base station can work in multiple clock synchronization modes:l Synchronization with the Iub clock (default mode)l Synchronization with GPSl Synchronization with the BITS clock

In addition to the preceding three synchronization modes, the MBTS internal clock can work infree-run mode to keep the MBTS running.

Procedurel NodeB V200R013

Activation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of thereference clock source.

RANFeature Activation Guide 37 Configuring NodeB Clock


37-1

Table 37-1 Parameters

ClockSynchronizationModes

Parameter Name Parameter Value

Synchronization with theIub clock (default mode)

Selected Clock Source LINECLK(Line Clock)

Synchronization withGPS

GPS(GPS Clock)

Synchronization with theBITS clock

BITS(BITS Clock)

Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the currentclock source.

Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.

Deactivation Procedure

This feature does not need to be deactivated.

l NodeB V100R013



Table 37-2 Parameters

ClockSynchronizationModes

Parameter Name Parameter Value

Synchronization with theIub clock (default mode)

Clock Source Type LINE(LINE clocksource)

Synchronization withGPS

GPSCARD(GPS cardclock source)

Synchronization with theBITS clock

BITS(BITS clock source)


1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the currentclock source.

Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.


37 Configuring NodeB ClockRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


----End

Examplel NodeB V200R013

//Activation procedure//Synchronization with the Iub clockSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINECLK;//Synchronization with GPSSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;//Synchronization with the BITS clockSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Verification procedureDSP CLKSTAT: SN=7;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure//Synchronization with the Iub clockSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE;//Synchronization with GPSSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPSCARD;//Synchronization with the BITS clockSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Verification procedureDSP CLKSTAT:;

RANFeature Activation Guide 37 Configuring NodeB Clock


37-3

38 Configuring Dynamic AAL2Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface.


– BTS3902E does not support this feature.


– The feature WRFD-050301 ATM Transmission Introduction Package must beconfigured before this feature is activated.

l License


l Other Prerequisites

– The RAN is based on ATM transmission.

Context

In ATM transmission mode, the ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) path is used to carry theuser plane data on the Iub/Iur/Iu-CS interface. The AAL2 path is provided according to servicetype (conversational, streaming, interactive, and background) and bearer type (R99, HSDPA,and HSUPA). Physical bandwidth resources are dynamically allocated to delay-sensitiveservices and delay-insensitive services, which improves the utilization of transmission links onthe Iub interface.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE to add an adjacent node. Setthe parameter Adjacent Node Type to IUB, IUR, or IUCS, and the parameterTransport Type to ATM. If the node is the lowest leaf node of the switching network,set the parameter Is Root Node to YES; otherwise, set the parameter Is Root Nodeto NO.


38 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/IurInterface


38-1

NOTEFor an adjacent node on the Iur or Iu-CS interface, the parameter Adjacent Node Type of its upper-level hub node must be NNI_AAL2SWITCH; for an adjacent node on the Iub interface, theparameter Adjacent Node Type of its upper-level hub node must be UNI_AAL2SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path. Theparameters CARRYVPI and CARRYVCI must be consistent with those of the AAL2path configured on the peer end.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to query the status of the AAL2

path on the Iub interface.

Expected result: The value of Operation state is Available.2. In the Iub/Iu-CS ATM transmission scenario, a UE in idle state camps on CELL1 and

the control plane is correctly configured. Originate the speech and data services. If theservice access is normal, the AAL2 path on the Iub/Iu-CS interface is set upsuccessfully.

3. Optional: In the ATM transmission scenario on the Iur interface, a UE in idle statecamps on CELL1 and the control plane is correctly configured. Originate a cross-Iurhandover. If the handover is successful, the AAL2 path on the Iur interface is set upsuccessfully.


----End

Example//Activating Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface//Adding an adjacent nodeADD ADJNODE: ANI=2, NAME="MSC1", NODET=IUCS, DPX=1, TRANST=ATM, IsROOTNODE=YES;//Adding an AAL2 pathADD AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=111, RXTRFX=111, AAL2PATHT=R99;

//Verifying Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur InterfaceDSP AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1;

38 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/IurInterface



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

39 Configuring Permanent AAL5Connections for Control Plane Traffic

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic.


– BTS3902E does not support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



– The equipment data has been configured for the ATM transmission on the Iub/Iu/Iurinterface.

NOTEFor details about how to configure the equipment data, see section Configuring the EquipmentData of the BSC6900UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

ContextIn the RAN in ATM transmission mode, AAL5 connections are used to bear the Iub/Iur/Iusignaling and the Iub OAM traffic. As specified by 3GPP, User-Network Interface SAAL (UNI-SAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iub interface and Network-NetworkInterface SAAL (NNI-SAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iur/Iu interface.AAL5 connections on the Iub/Iur/Iu interface are all set up by configuring Signaling ATMadaptation layer (SAAL) links.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link. If theinterface is Iub, set the parameter Interface type to UNI. If the interface is Iu or Iur,set Interface type to NNI.


39 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for ControlPlane Traffic


39-1

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNCP to add a NodeB ControlPort (NCP) link.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCCP to add a CommunicationControl Port (CCP) link.

NOTE

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to perform step 2 orstep 3 based on the actual situation.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SAALLNK to query the status of the SAAL

link.

Expected result: The value of SAAL link state is AVAILABLE.l Deactivation Procedure

NOTE

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to remove the NCP or CCPlink carried by the SAAL link, based on the actual situation.

1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UNCP to remove the NCP linkcarried by the SAAL link.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCCP to remove the CCP linkcarried by the SAAL link.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SAALLNK to remove the SAAL link.

----End

Example//Activating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane TrafficADD SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYSRN=0, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=2, CARRYVPI=10, CARRYVCI=55, TXTRFX=100, RXTRFX=100, SAALLNKT=UNI;ADD UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0, CARRYLNKT=SAAL, SAALLNKN=10;//Verifying Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane TrafficDSP SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10;//Deactivating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane TrafficRMV UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0;RMV SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10;

39 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for ControlPlane Traffic



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

40 Configuring Call Admission Based onUsed AAL2 Path Bandwidth

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth.





l License


Context

With the Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth (AAL2 CAC) feature, admissionrequests are accepted or rejected selectively. This feature maximizes the usage of transmissionresources in addition to ensuring the QoS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF to set parameters to appropriatevalues. For example, set Service type to NRTVBR, Peak cell rate to 100, andSustainable cell rate to 80.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an ATM AdaptationLayer type 2 (AAL2) path. In this step, set TXTRFX and RXTRFX in accordancewith the settings in step 1.


1. Assume that the verification is based on the preceding parameter settings and the peerend is configured with the corresponding AAL2 path link. Originate a PS interactiveservice. If the data rate is 64 kbit/s, the UE successfully accesses the network.


40 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 PathBandwidth


40-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to view that the used bandwidthof the path is about 37 kbit/s, which is the admission bandwidth of the control plane.

3. Originate a PS interactive service. If the data rate is 128 kbit/s, the UE fails to accessthe network.


----End

Example//Activation procedureADD ATMTRF: TRFX=100, ST=NRTVBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=100, SCR=80;ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=0, PATHID=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=100, RXTRFX=100, AAL2PATHT=R99;

40 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 PathBandwidth



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

41 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBRATM QoS Classes

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature"WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes".





ContextHuawei RAN supports service type of ATM :l Constant Bit Rate (CBR)l Real time Variable Bit Rate (rt-VBR)l Non-real time Variable Bit Rate (nrt-VBR)l Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)l Enhanced unspecified Bit Rate (UBR+)

Configuring UBR+ QoS Class feature, please refer to Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class.

The traffic volume on the VCC depends on the parameters (SCR, PCR, and CDVT) associatedwith each type of ATM service. Generally, rt-VBR is applicable to delay-sensitive services andnrt-VBR is applicable to delay-insensitive services. In addition, UBR and nrt-VBR are applicableto None Delay Sensitive service mapping on the HSDPA/HSUPA.

It is recommended for configuring service type of ATM shown as Figure 41-1.


41 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoSClasses


41-1

Figure 41-1 Service type of ATM


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF to add an ATM traffic record.To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic

configuration. The expected result is that the query result is consistent with theconfiguration information.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ATMTRF to delete an ATM traffic record.

To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.

----End

Example//Activating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS ClassesADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=CBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=1000;//Verifying CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS ClassesLST ATMTRF: TRFX=105;Deactivating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS ClassesRMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

41 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoSClasses



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

42 Configuring F5

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110F5.


– VCL CC is applicable to the AEUa, AOUa, AOUc, UOIa(ATM), and UOIc boards ofthe BSC6900.

– VCL PM is applicable to the AOUc and UOIc boards of the BSC6900.




l License


l The basic information about the BSC6900 is configured. For details, see the Configuringthe Basic Data.

l The SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, or IPOAPVC link exists.

Context

This feature supports:

l ATM CC provides E2E continuity detection on the VCL.

l PM function provides performance monitoring on the VCL.

l It is recommended to activate VCL CC before activating VCL PM.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLCC to activate the VCL CC or loopbackfunction for a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this commandrepeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, andIPOAPVC.

RANFeature Activation Guide 42 Configuring F5


42-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLPM to activate the VCL PM functionfor a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly.There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLCC to query the CC result of a VCL.

– If the VCL CC is activated and the PVC is functional, the SINK activated stateand SOURCE activated state are UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state isnormal.

– If the loopback is activated and the PVC is functional, the loopback query resultis UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state is normal.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLPM to query the PM result of a VCL.– If the VCL PM is activated, the SINK activated state and SOURCE activated

state are PM_UP, and PM Active Fail Alarm is Normal.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLCC to deactivate the VCL CC orloopback function for a link. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run thiscommand repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH,and IPOAPVC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLPM to deactivate the VCL PM for alink. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. Thereare three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.

----End

Example//Activating F5ACT VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0, VCLTYPE=CC;ACT VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;//Verifying F5DSP VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;DSP VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;//Deactivating F5DEA VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;DEA VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;

42 Configuring F5RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

43 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305UBR+ ATM QoS Class".





l License



– The basic information about the BSC6900 is configured. For details, see the Configuringthe Basic Data.

Context

Huawei RAN supports the UBR+ ATM service class. UBR+ is the enhanced UBR feature. Itadds the Minimum Desired Cell Rate (MDCR) indication. UBR+ is particularly applicable tothe OAM channels over the Iub interface. The MDCR of UBR+ ensures the reliability of theOAM connection in case of transmission channel congestion, and the BE service of the UBR+fully utilizes transmission bandwidth.


1. Run the MML command ADD ATMTRF to add an ATM traffic record of the UBR+ class. To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.


1. Run the MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic configuration.Expected result: The query result is consistent with the configuration information.


RANFeature Activation Guide 43 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class


43-1

1. Run the MML command RMV ATMTRF to delete an ATM traffic record of the UBR+ class. To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.

----End

Example//Adding UBR+ ATM QoS ClassADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=UBR_PLUS, UT=CELL/S, MCR=100;//Verifying UBR+ ATM QoS ClassLST ATMTRF: TRFX=105;//Deactivating UBR+ ATM QoS ClassRMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

43 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS ClassRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

44 Configuring Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100Flow Control.


– NodeB RRC link priority based flow control is depended on WMPT and WBBP boards.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextFlow control is implemented by regulating the input transmission rate. This mechanism is calledfeedback flow control mechanism.

The flow control measures are as follows:l Board flow controll Control-plane load sharingl User-plane load sharingl Flow control based on RRC request queuingl Flow control based on MPU loadl Flow control based on traffic growth


– Activating board flow control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW to switch on the flow control andrelated flow control items.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD to configure the CPU usagethreshold for each flow control item according to the network plan.

RANFeature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Flow Control


44-1

NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the CPU usage exceeds the related threshold.

l The CPU usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 ≥ Critical threshold≥ Threshold for a flow control item ≥ Restore threshold for a flow control item

l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect onlywhen the CPU usage is lower than the critical threshold.

l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent.The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCMSGQTHD to configure the packetusage threshold for each flow control item according to the network plan.

NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the packet usage exceeds the related threshold.

l The packet usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 ≥ Critical threshold≥ Threshold for a flow control item ≥ Restore threshold for a flow control item

l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect onlywhen the packet usage is lower than the critical threshold.

l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent.The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.

– Activating control-plane load sharing

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, setProcess switch to RNC_SHARE_SWITCH to switch on load sharing.

2. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCTRLPLNSHAREPARA. In this step, set Control Plane Sharing OutThreshold to 40 so that the control-plane load sharing function can be triggeredeasily. The default value of Control Plane Sharing Out Threshold is 50.

NOTE

l If the CPU usage is higher than this threshold and lower than the overload threshold, newcalls will be assigned to other SPUs. Overload threshold is set by the MML command SETSHARETHD.

l Max capability middle load> Max capability normal load> Sharing out capabilitymiddle load.

– Activating user-plane load sharing

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA. In this step,set Percentage of User Plane Sharing Out threshold according to the networkplan. Inter-subrack user-plane load sharing is triggered when the user plane loadon one subrack exceeds this threshold.

– Activating flow control based on RRC request queuing

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,select RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Activating flow control based on MPU load

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, selectRSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Activating flow control based on traffic growth

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL. In this step,select CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch to switch on the cell-levelflow control based on traffic growth.

44 Configuring Flow ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

l Verification Procedure– Verifying board flow control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCSW to query the state of the flowcontrol switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCCPUTHD to query the CPU usagethreshold for flow control.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCMSGQTHD to query the packet usagethreshold for flow control.

– Verifying control-plane and user-plane load sharing

1. On the LMT, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > CPU/DSP UsageMonitoring to observe the CPU usage of each subsystem. If the CPU usage ofeach subsystem is almost the same, load sharing takes effect.

– Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuing

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCACALGOSWITCH to query thestate of the switch for flow control based on RRC request queuing.

– Verifying flow control based on MPU load

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST URRCTRLSWITCH to query the stateof the switch for flow control based on MPU load.

– Verifying flow control based on traffic growth

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCALLSHOCKCTRL to query thestate of the switch for flow control based on traffic growth.

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivating board flow control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW to switch off flow control.– Deactivating control-plane load sharing

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to deselectRNC_SHARE_SWITCH in Process switch.

– Deactivating user-plane load sharing

1. User-plane load sharing does not need to be deactivated.– Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuing

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Deactivating flow control based on MPU load

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step,deselect RSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1.

– Deactivating flow control based on traffic growth

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL. In this step,deselect CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch.

----End

Example//Activating board flow control//Switching on XPU load control

RANFeature Activation Guide 44 Configuring Flow Control


44-3

SET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=ON, PRINTSW=ON, TRACESW=ON, PMSW=ON, LOGSW=ON;//Setting CPU usage threshold for DPU flow controlSET FCCPUTHD:BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=6, FDWINDOW=2, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60, PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50;//Setting packet usage threshold for DPU flow controlSET FCMSGQTHD: BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=9, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60, PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50;

//Activating control-plane load sharingSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-1;SET UCTRLPLNSHAREPARA: CtrlPlnSharingOutThd=40;SET SHARETHD: BT=XPU, SMRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, CRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, CRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, LRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, LRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, SMRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70, CRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, CRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70, LRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, LRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70;

//Activating user-plane load sharingSET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA: UserPlnSharingOutThd=90;

//Activating RRC Shaping and QueuingSET UCACALGOSWITCH:RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-1;

//Activating flow control based on MPU loadSET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-1;

//Activating flow control based on traffic growthSET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-1;//Verifying board flow control LST FCSW: LstFormat=VERTICAL;LST FCCPUTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL;LST FCMSGQTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL;

//Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuingLST UCACALGOSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL;

//Verifying flow control based on MPU loadLST URRCTRLSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL;

//Verifying flow control based on traffic growthLST UCALLSHOCKCTRL: LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL;

//Deactivating board flow controlSET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=OFF;

//Deactivating control-plane load sharingSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-0;

//Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuingSET UCACALGOSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-0;

//Deactivating flow control based on MPU loadSET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-0;

//Deactivating flow control based on traffic growthSET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-0;

44 Configuring Flow ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

45 Configuring BOOTP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with theBSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function.


– The transmission equipment is in the connected state.

– BOOTP applies only to ATM networking scenarios.



l License


ContextThis feature enables NodeB to set up the OM channel to the RNC automatically withoutconfiguration data. The maintenance staff can download the data and software to the NodeBthrough the OM channel at the far end. The feature decreases the operation and maintenancecosts and enhances the network maintainability and maintenance quality. NodeB willautomatically set up the OM channel using the BOOTP protocol. In addition, NodeB monitorsthe OM channel. When the OM channel is broken, NodeB can rebuild it.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add the logical IP address for theinterface board of the BSC6900. This IP address serves as the local address of theIPoA at the BSC6900.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC to add the IPoA PVC for bearingthe OM channel.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP to add the IP address for theOM channel of the NodeB.


RANFeature Activation Guide 45 Configuring BOOTP


45-1

If the BOOTP configurations at the BSC6900 are completed but no configuration at theNodeB and the NodeB can be maintained on the M2000, it indicates that the NodeB hassuccessfully set up the OM channel by using the BOOTP feature.


----End

Example//Activation procedureADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=14, DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, IPADDR="131.131.131.132", MASK="255.255.255.0";ADD IPOAPVC: IPADDR="131.131.131.132", PEERIPADDR="131.131.131.131", CARRYT=IMA, CARRYIMAGRPN=0, CARRYVPI=83, CARRYVCI=80, TXTRFX=100;ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=ATMTRANS_IP, NBATMOAMIP="131.131.131.131", NBATMOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", ATMSRN=0, ATMSN=14;

45 Configuring BOOTPRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

46 Configuring NodeB Self-discoveryBased on IP Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode.


– The transmission device is connected properly.

– DHCP applies only to IP networking scenarios.

– Only 3900 series base stations support the DHCP+AACP function.



l License


Contextl If the configuration file of the NodeB is incorrect, the DHCP feature enables the NodeB to

set up the OM channel for its remote maintenance.

l No configuration is required on the NodeB side. If Hub NodeB networking is used, relevantconfigurations are required on the Hub NodeB side. Relevant configurations are requiredat the DHCP server, which is BSC6900 or M2000. The following example describes theconfigurations at the BSC6900.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBESN to add the NodeB ESN inresponse to the DHCP request reported by the NodeB.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP to add the IP address for theOM channel of the NodeB. In the case that DHCP response is made, the BSC6900will send the IP address to the NodeB.

RANFeature Activation Guide 46 Configuring NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode


46-1

3. Optional: If Hub NodeB is applied, run the NodeB MML command ADDDHCPSVRIP to add a DHCP server IP address. Therefore, a lower-level NodeB canobtain an IP address automatically by using the DHCP.


In the case that the DHCP configurations are completed at the BSC6900 (if Hub NodeBnetworking is used, the IP address for the DHCP server is configured at the Hub NodeB),if the NodeB can be maintained on the M2000, it indicates that the NodeB has successfullyset up the OM channel by using this feature.

l Deactivation ProcedureThis feature need not be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activation procedure //Running the following command at the BSC6900ADD UNODEBESN: NODEBID=0, NBLB1="020GKV1082000126", USENBLB2=Disable, NODEBPT=ETH/TRUNK, PTIP="131.131.131.132", PTIPMASK="255.255.255.0";ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=IPTRANS_IP, NBIPOAMIP="131.131.131.131", NBIPOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", IPSRN=0, IPSN=18, IPLOGPORTFLAG=NO;//(Optional) Running the following command at the NodeBADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="13.13.13.13";

46 Configuring NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP ModeRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

47 Configuring License Control for Urgency

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300License Control for Urgency.


– Since RAN13.0, both BSC6900 and NodeB support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



Context

CAUTIONThis feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, forexample, in a disaster.It can be enabled only three times for each R version by BSC6900 MML command SETLICENSECTRL and it can be enabled only fifteen times by WRFD-040202 RNC NodeRedundancy and it is valid only for seven days each time.After this function is enabled, a network can reach its maximum capacity that is supported bythe hardware. This documentation describes the procedure of enabling the feature byBSC6900 MML command .


1. On the BSC6900 side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. Inthis step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).

2. On the NodeB V200R013 side: Run the NodeB MML command SETLICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to ON.

RANFeature Activation Guide 47 Configuring License Control for Urgency


47-1

3. On the NodeB V100R013 side: Run the NodeB MML command SETLICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON).

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 Side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to view resource items ofthe license.Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the settingof Grace Protection Period Switch State.Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and RemainingGrace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection PeriodSwitch State is ON.

2. On the NodeB V200R013 side or NodeB V100R013 side

(1) Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to view resource items of thelicense.Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting ofGrace Protection Period Switch State.Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and RemainingGrace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection PeriodSwitch State is ON.

l Deactivation Procedure1. On the BSC6900 Side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL.

In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).2. On the NodeB V200R013 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET

LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to OFF.3. On the NodeB V100R013 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET

LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

47 Configuring License Control for UrgencyRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

48 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000Intelligently Out of Service.





ContextInsufficient battery voltage or NodeB reset may lead to service disruption. When the precedingproblems occur, this feature enables the NodeB to automatically reduce the pilot transmit powerand hand over the UE to other cells, preventing service disruption.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRSWTCH. In this step, set SmoothPower Change Function Switch to OPEN(Open).

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRPARA. In this step, set Smartdefault step(0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRSWTCH. In this step, check

whether Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN.2. Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRPARA. In this step, check whether

Smart default step(0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms) are set correctly.l Deactivation Procedure


----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 48 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service


48-1

Example//Activation procedureSET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN;SET SMTHPWRPARA: STEP=10, PERIOD=1;//Verification procedureLST SMTHPWRSWTCH:;LST SMTHPWRPARA:;

48 Configuring Intelligently Out of ServiceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

49 Configuring OCNS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator).





l License


Context

With the OCNS feature, multiple downlink analog channels are set up on the Uu interface tosimulate the interference of multiple codes. In this way, the simulated downlink load test of acell can be performed.


1. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to start downlink load simulation. Inthis step, set Local Cell ID and Load Ratio (%).

NOTE

l This command can be successfully executed only when the corresponding logical cell exists.

l The downlink network load simulation uses the channelization codes from 112 to 127 whoseSF = 128.

l If you start the downlink network load simulation, it is advised to reserve the channelizationcodes in the RNC.

l After starting the DL load simulation, new service can not be built in the channel resourceoccupied by the simulation.


RANFeature Activation Guide 49 Configuring OCNS


49-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP DLSIM to query the downlink load simulationresult. In this step, specify Local Cell ID. The execution result displayed on the LMTshows the simulated load rate.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM to stop the downlink load simulation.

In this step, specify Local Cell ID.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSTR DLSIM: LOCELL=1, LR=80;//Verification procedureDSP DLSIM: LOCELL=1;//Deactivation procedureSTP DLSIM: LOCELL=1;

49 Configuring OCNSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

50 Configuring Power Off the EquipmentLevel by Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400Power Off the Equipment Level by Level.


– Cabinets providing AC input power such as APM30, APM100, and APM200. Thesecabinets can be used for outdoor NodeBs.



l License


Context

After the mains supply is cut off, the NodeB powers off devices by level when certain DC voltagethresholds are reached. Intelligent shutdown of RF units and NodeBs can prolong the workingtime of the system by making efficient use of the available storage batteries.



1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU. In this step, set Load ShutdownFlag to ENABLE(Enable) and set Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.

2. Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY. In this step, set Low VoltageShutdown Flag to ENABLE and set Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST PMU and query the values of Load ShutdownFlag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V).

RANFeature Activation Guide 50 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level


50-1

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST BATTERY and query the values of LowVoltage Shutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V).


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY and set Low Voltage ShutdownFlag to DISABLE(Disable).

2. Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU and set Load Shutdown Flag toDISABLE(Disable).

l NodeB V100R013


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA. In this step, set Load ShutdownFlag to ENABLE(Enable), set Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed, set LowVoltage Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(Enable), set Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) ifneeded.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SDPA, query the values of Load ShutdownFlag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),, query the values of Low VoltageShutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA. In this step, set Load ShutdownFlag to DISABLE(Disable), and set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).

----End


//Activation procedure MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=430;MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360;//Verification procedure LST PMU: CN=1;LST BATTERY: CN=1;//Deactivation procedure MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=DISABLE;MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=DISABLE;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=440, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360, CSLSDF=DISABLE;//Verification procedure LST SDPA: CN=1;//Deactivation procedure SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=DISABLE, LVSDF=DISABLE, CSLSDF=DISABLE;

50 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by LevelRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

51 Configuring Solar Power DeviceManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500Solar Power Device Management.


– Only 3900 series base stations support the feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextAs green energy, solar power is being gradually introduced for supplying power for the NodeB.This feature enables the NodeB to communicate with a solar controller through the 485 serialport, therefore managing a solar power device, which makes the NodeB an eco-friendly basestation.


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PMU to add a PMU. In this step, set PowerSystem Type to SC48200.

2. Optional: If a diesel generator is required, run the NodeB MML command ADDDIESELGEN.– Set Intelligent Control Flag to ENABLE(Enable).– Set Rated Power(0.1kVA) based on the rated power specified on the nameplate

of the diesel generator.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP PMU to query the configuration informationabout the PMU.

RANFeature Activation Guide 51 Configuring Solar Power Device Management


51-1

Expected result: The value of Power System Type is SC48200.2. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command LST DIESELGEN to query the

configuration information about the diesel generator.Expected result: The value of Intelligent Control Flag is ENABLE.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV DIESELGEN to remove a dieselgen.2. Run the NodeB MML command RMV PMU to remove a PMU.

----End

Example//Activation procedure ADD PMU: CN=0, PTYPE=SC48200, MPN=0, LSDF=ENABLE;ADD DIESELGEN: CN=0, ICF=ENABLE, POWER=500;//Verification procedure DSP PMU: CN=0;LST DIESELGEN: CN=0;//Deactivation procedure RMV DIESELGEN: CN=0;RMV PMU: CN=0;

51 Configuring Solar Power Device ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

52 Configuring Connection with TMA(Tower Mounted Amplifier)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier).


– The base station is connected to the Antenna Line Device (ALD) normally.



l License



– The TMA is loaded with basic software for its normal operation.

ContextThe gain range supported by the Smart Tower-Mounted Amplifier (STMA) varies with modelsand vendors.



1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD PowerSwitch to ON.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan the Device Name, VendorCode and Serial No..

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD TMA to add a TMA.

4. If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command MODTMASUBUNIT to set the TMA gain.


52 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower MountedAmplifier)


52-1

NOTEIt is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the DSPTMADEVICEDATA command before adjusting the gain.

5. Run the NodeB MML command MOD RXBRANCH to modify the RX channel ofan RRU.


1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP TMA to query the dynamic information abouta TMA.


This feature does not need to be deactivated.l NodeB V100R013


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to set Power Supply Switch toON(On).

2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan Device Name, Vendor Code andSerial No..

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add a TMA.4. If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command SET TMAGAIN

to set the TMA gain.

NOTEIt is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the DSPTMAFUN command before adjusting the gain.

5. Run the NodeB MML command SET RXATTEN to set the attenuation of the RXchannel.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST TMAGAIN to query the TMA gain.2. Run the NodeB MML command LST RXATTEN to query the RX attenuation value.



----End


//Activation procedureMOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON;SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0;ADD TMA: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="TMA1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, SUBUNITNUM=1;MOD TMASUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, CONNPN=R0A, MODE=NORMAL, GAIN=48;MOD RXBRANCH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0;//Verification procedureDSP TMA: DEVICENO=0;

l NodeB V100R013




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Activation procedureSET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=TMA12DB_ONLY_NON_AISG, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON;SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=STMA, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, SUBUNIT=1;SET TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, GAIN=48;SET RXATTEN: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0;//Verification procedureLST TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;




52-3

53 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602Remote Electrical Tilt.


– The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly.– The remote control unit (RCU) is compatible with the RET antenna. The RCU is loaded

with a configuration file designated for the RET antenna.– The RCU is loaded with the basic software.



ContextWith this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimizenetwork performance.

l Calibrating the RET antenna may affect its coverage for a short period of time.l Calibrating an RET antenna takes up to 4 minutes.



1. If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MODANTENNAPORT. In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON.

2. If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MOD RETPORT.In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON.

3. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD.4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RET to add an RET antenna.

RANFeature Activation Guide 53 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt


53-1

NOTEFor vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

5. Run the NodeB MML command CLB RET to calibrate the RET antenna.6. Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETSUBUNIT to modify parameters

concerning an RET antenna subunit.7. Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETDEVICEDATA to modify parameters

concerning the attributes of an RET device.8. Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETTILT to modify the tilt of the RET

antenna.


1. If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTENNAPORTto query the power switch status for the port.Expected result: ALD Actual Power Switch is ON.

2. If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP RETPORT toquery the power switch status for the port.Expected result:ALD Actual Power Switch is ON.

3. Run the NodeB MML command DSP RET to query information about the RETantenna.

4. Run the NodeB MML command DSP RETSUBUNIT to query the dynamicinformation on an RET antenna subunit and an RET antenna's tilt.


This feature does not need to be deactivated.l NodeB V100R013


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW. In this step, set Power SupplySwitch to ON.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD.3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add an antenna device.

NOTEFor vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

4. Run the NodeB MML command CLB ANT to calibrate the antenna device.5. Run the NodeB MML command SET ANTTILT to set the tilt of antenna device.


1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTCON to query the power switch status forthe antenna port.Expected result: Power Supply Switch Run Status is ON.

2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTTILT to query the tilt of the RET antenna.Expected result: Current Tilt (0.1 degree) is set to the specified value.



----End

53 Configuring Remote Electrical TiltRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


//Activation procedure MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON;SCN ALD:;ADD RET: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="RET1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, RETTYPE=SINGLE_RET, POLARTYPE=SINGLE, SCENARIO=REGULAR;CLB RET: OPMODE=SUBUNIT, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;MOD RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;MOD RETDEVICEDATA: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;MOD RETTILT: OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45;//Verification procedure DSP ANTENNAPORT:;DSP RET: DEVICENO=0;DSP RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=RET_ONLY_COAXIAL, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON;SCN ALD:;ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;CLB ANT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET;SET ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET, TILT=20;//Verification procedure DSP ANTCON:;DSP ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;

RANFeature Activation Guide 53 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt


53-3

54 Configuring Same Band AntennaSharing Unit (900 MHz)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz).





Contextl The introduction of the feature enables UMTS900 and GSM900 to share the same antenna.l The feature helps to share an antenna in the same band and causes little uplink division

loss. Compared with the traditional combiner and diplexer, the feature achieves a 3 dB gain.



1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD PowerSwitch to ON.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain theserial number of the SASU.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SASU to configure the SASU and set theantenna DC power switch state of the SASU.

4. Run the NodeB MML command MOD SASUSUBUNIT to set the SASU workingmode and the gain of the SASU.


RANFeature Activation Guide 54 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)


54-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASU to query the antenna DC power switchstate of the SASU.

2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASUSUBUNIT to query the SASU workingmode and the gain of the SASU.

l NodeB V100R013


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to turn on the power supplyswitch of the SASU (Same band Antenna Sharing Unit) port.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain theserial number of the SASU.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to configure the SASU.4. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUMODE to set the SASU working mode.5. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUGAIN to set the gain of the SASU.6. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCSW to set the antenna DC power

switch state of the SASU.7. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCLD to set the DC load of the SASU.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST ALD to query the configuration informationabout the SASU.

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUMODE to query the SASU workingmode.

3. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUGAIN to query the gain of the SASU.4. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCSW to query the antenna DC power

switch state of the SASU.5. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCLD to query the DC load of the SASU.


This feature need not be deactivated.

----End


//Activation procedureMOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON, THRESHOLDTYPE=UER_SELF_DEFINE, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200, OCTHD=1150;SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0;ADD SASU: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, DCSWITCH=UMTS;MOD SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, MODE=NORMAL, BSGAIN=12, UMTSGAIN=12, DCLOAD=20;//Verification procedure DSP SASU: DEVICENO=0;DSP SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=CUSTOM, PSP=R0A,

54 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

PWRSW=ON, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200, OCTHD=1150;SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;ADD ALD: NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SASU, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;SET SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", MODE=BYPASS;SET SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CHTP=UMTS, GAIN=12;SET SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCSWITCH=UMTS;SET SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCLOAD=20;//Verification procedure LST ALD:;LST SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";LST SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";LST SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";LST SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";

RANFeature Activation Guide 54 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)


54-3

55 Configuring Multiple RAB Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010615Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).




– The license controlling this feature has been activated.l Other Prerequisites

– The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

ContextWith the Multiple RAB feature, operators have relatively diversified choices of service solutions.If the Multiple RAB feature is enabled, a large quantity of services can be provided for the upperlayers. Huawei products support the following solutions with more than one PS RAB:l Combination of two PS servicesl Combination of one CS service and two PS servicesl Combination of three PS servicesl Combination of one CS service and three PS servicesl Combination of four PS services


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to select theCFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH check box under the Channel configurationstrategy switch parameter.

l Verification Procedure1. Details see the verification procedure of following features: 56 Configuring

Combination of Two PS Services, 57 Configuring Combination of One CS Service

RANFeature Activation Guide 55 Configuring Multiple RAB Package


55-1

and Two PS Services, 58 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services, 59Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services and 60Configuring Combination of Four PS Services.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to clear the

CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH check box under the Channel configurationstrategy switch parameter.

----End

Example//Activating Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

55 Configuring Multiple RAB PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

56 Configuring Combination of Two PSServices

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS Services.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB ≥2).

l License– The license controlling this feature has been activated.

l Other Prerequisites– The UE supports the combination of two PS services.– The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

ContextWith the Multiple RAB feature, operators have relatively diversified choices of service solutions.



l Verification Procedure1. Connect the UE to the portable computer so as to use the UE as a modem.2. Visit the Internet on the UE. Verify that web pages are displayed normally.3. On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify that

the data is downloaded normally.

RANFeature Activation Guide 56 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services


56-1



----End

Example//Activating Combination of Two PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Combination of Two PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

56 Configuring Combination of Two PS ServicesRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

57 Configuring Combination of One CSService and Two PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.





l Other Prerequisites– The UE supports the combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.– The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.




l Verification Procedure1. Have two UEs ready: UE 1 and UE 2.2. Connect UE 1 to the portable computer so as to use the UE 1 as a modem.3. Visit the Internet on UE 1. Verify that web pages are displayed normally (a PS

Service).


57 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PSServices


57-1

4. On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify thatthe data is downloaded normally (a PS Service).

5. Use UE 2 to call UE 1. Verify that UE 1 rings and the speech quality is acceptable (aCS Service).



----End

Example//Activating Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

57 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PSServices



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

58 Configuring Combination of Three PSServices

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS Services.





l License

– The license controlling this feature has been activated.


– The UE supports the Combination of Three PS Services.

– The CN node and UE must have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Context

With the Multiple RAB feature, operators have relatively diversified choices of service solutions.




1. Connect UE to the portable computer so as to use the UE as a modem.

2. Visit the Internet on UE. Verify that web pages are displayed normally.

3. Visit the Multimedia service on the UE. Verify that this service is played normally.

RANFeature Activation Guide 58 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services


58-1

4. On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify thatthe data is downloaded normally.



----End

Example//Activating Combination of Three PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Combination of Three PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

58 Configuring Combination of Three PS ServicesRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

59 Configuring Combination of One CSService and Three PS Services

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services.





l Other Prerequisites– The UE supports the combination of one CS service and three PS services.– The CN node and UE have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.




l Verification Procedure1. Have two UEs ready: UE 1 and UE 2.2. Connect UE 1 to the portable computer so as to use the UE 1 as a modem.3. Visit the Internet on UE 1. Verify that web pages are displayed normally (a PS

Service).


59 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and ThreePS Services


59-1

4. Visit the Multimedia service on the UE 1. Verify that this service is played normally(a PS Service).

5. On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify thatthe data is downloaded normally (a PS Service).

6. Use UE 2 to call UE 1. Verify that UE 1 rings and the speech quality is acceptable (aCS Service).



----End

Example//Activating Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

59 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and ThreePS Services



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

60 Configuring Combination of Four PSServices

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS Services.





l License



– The UE supports the combination of Four PS Services.

– The CN node and UE have the corresponding multi-RAB support capability.

Context

RAN11.0 supports up to four PS RABs per user. A typical application of Multi-RAB is VoIPplus BE service where VoIP may need up to three RABs to transmit SIP signaling, Real-TimeTransport Protocol (RTP) (voice), and Real-Time Control Protocol (RTCP) (media monitoring)respectively, as shown in Figure 60-1.

Figure 60-1 VoIP service

RANFeature Activation Guide 60 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services


60-1

RAN11.0 supports four PS RABs per user, and the service combination VoIP + BE is supported.Other service combination like 4PS BE is also supported.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA command to setthe VOIP channel type parameter to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).

NOTEThe BSC6900 defines the default value of the VOIP channel type parameter. Retain the default valuein normal situations.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.2. Connect the UE to the portable computer so as to use the UE as a modem.3. Establish a VoIP service on the UE. View the

“RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ” message traced on the Iu interface. If youfind that the CN assigns three RABs at the same time, you can infer that the VoIPservice is established successfully. (If RTCP is assigned, SIP signaling and RTP mustbe assigned at the same time.)

4. On the portable computer, connect to an FTP server and download data. Verify thatthe data is downloaded normally.



----End

Example//Activating Combination of Four PS ServicesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-1;SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=DCH;//Deactivating Combination of Four PS ServicesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_MULTI_RAB_SWITCH-0;

60 Configuring Combination of Four PS ServicesRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

61 Configuring HSDPA IntroductionPackage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010610HSDPA Introduction Package.


– NDLP and NBBI in the NodeB do not support this feature.


– HSDPA provides a number of methods to increase system throughput. It has tocoordinate with other features, such as admission control, load control, and mobilitymanagement.

l License



– The UE is HSDPA-capable.

Context

High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is one of the important features defined in 3GPPspecifications. HSDPA can significantly increase the downlink peak rate per user, shorten theround trip delay, and expand the system capacity. This feature package provides the basicfunctions of HSDPA to meet the requirements for test or trial operation of HSDPA services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA to set HSDPA-relatedparameters based on the network plan.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSDPA to activate this feature.

3. Configure Iub transport for HSDPA.

– In an ATM network:

RANFeature Activation Guide 61 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package


61-1

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF to configure new recordsof ATM traffic based on network planning requirements.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to query thetransmission resource mapping.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to set associatedparameters according to the network plan. TX traffic record index and RXtraffic record index of the AAL2 path to be added must be the same as thoseset in the ADD ATMTRF command. In addition, AAL2 Path Type shouldbe set according to the mapping between service types and AAL paths.

(4) Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to configure an AAL2path for HSDPA based on network planning requirements.

– In an IP network:

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ADJMAP to query whetherresource management mapping is configured for the adjacent node.– If configured, check the TRMMAP index of the adjacent node.– If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to

query the default TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node based on thesettings of Interface Type and Transport Type. For example, ifInterface Type is set to Iub Interface, then TRMMAP ID is 1.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to check whether the IPpath mapping to the HSDPA service is configured according to the TRMMAPID used by the adjacent node.– If configured, no further action is required.– If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to

configure the IP path mapping to the HSDPA service.NOTE

To ensure that HSDPA services can be set up successfully, HSDPA services must be mapped to thecorresponding AAL2 paths or IP paths. To avoid the affect on ongoing services, you can add newAAL2 paths or IP paths.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether this feature is

activated. If HSDPA Operational State is set to Enabled, this feature has beenactivated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA to deactivate this feature.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the HSDPA

feature is deactivated. If HSDPA Operational State is set to Disabled, this featurehas been deactivated.

----End

Example// Setting HSDPA-related parametersADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, HsPdschMaxCodeNum=4, HsPdschMinCodeNum=1, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON;//Activating HSDPA Introduction PackageACT UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000;//Configuring Iub transport for HSDPA//ATM network

61 Configuring HSDPA Introduction PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=118, ST=RTVBR, UT=KBIT/S, PCR=5150, SCR=5149, REMARK="5M-for-HSDPA";ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=10, PATHID=2, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=0, CARRYIMAGRPN=1, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=13, VCI=71, TXTRFX=118, RXTRFX=118, AAL2PATHT=HSPA;//Adding an AAL2 pathADD AAL2PATH: PATHID=2, SN=12, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, VPI=13, VCI=71, ST=RTVBR, PCR=5150, SCR=5149, RCR=5150, NT=LOCAL, PAT=H_NRT;//IP networkADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP,PATHT=BE, IPADDR="80.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="10.161.0.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000;//Verifying HSDPA Introduction PackageDSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=3000, LstFormat=VERTICAL;//Deactivating HSDPA Introduction PackageDEA UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000;DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=3000, LstFormat=VERTICAL;

RANFeature Activation Guide 61 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package


61-3

62 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.


ContextThis feature provides code resources occupied by Huawei HSDPA services. An HS-PDSCH canuse up to 15 SF16 codes in a cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA to configure 1 HS-SCCHs.

RANFeature Activation Guide 62 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell


62-1

NOTE

l The BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA fails to be executed when HSDPA isactivated. Therefore, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA to deactivateHSDPA before configuring this feature and run the BSC6900 MML command ACTUCELLHSDPA to reactivate HSDPA after configuring this feature.

l The BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA fails to be executed when CELL-FACHenhancement is activated. Therefore, run the BSC6900 MML command DEAUCELLEFACH to deactivate enhanced CELL-FACH before configuring this feature and runthe BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLEFACH to reactivate enhanced CELL-FACH afterconfiguring this feature.

l By default, the number of HS-SCCH codes for each cell is 4. If the default number is used, theHS-PDSCH can use only 14 SF16 codes. To enable the HS-PDSCH to use all 15 SF16 codes,run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA to set the value of Code Numberfor HS-SCCH to 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA to set Allocate CodeMode to Manual(Manual) and Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 15.

l Verification Procedure1. Initialize UMTS monitoring on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 62-1. Click

Submit. A real-time monitoring window is displayed.

Figure 62-1 Cell Performance Monitoring

2. Check whether 15 SF16 codes are occupied by the HS-PDSCH in the CellPerformance Monitoring window.Expected result: The HS-PDSCH occupies 15 SF16 codes.


----End

Example//Verifying 15 Codes per CellMOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, HsScchCodeNum=1;MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=15;

62 Configuring 15 Codes per CellRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

63 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCHCodes Multiplex

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex.





ContextThis feature enables the allocation of different codes in the same TTI to different users or themultiplexing of the same code in different TTIs for different users to increase the code resourceutilization and system throughput.


This feature does not need to be activated.l Verification Procedure

This feature does not need to be verified.l Deactivation Procedure


----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 63 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex


63-1

64 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ &Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).





l License


Context

Huawei provides multiple HSDPA scheduling algorithms such as maximum C/I (MAXCI),round-robin (RR), proportional fair (PF), and Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF).Before theHSDPA feature is enabled, HARQ must be enabled and HSDPA scheduling algorithms must beset.


NOTE

l HSDPA H-ARQ is activated automatically without any configuration.

l This section describes how to set Max C/I, RR, and PF scheduling algorithms. For details on how toset the EPF scheduling algorithm, see the description of the feature WRFD-01061103 Schedulingbased on EPF and GBR.

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA to set the parameterScheduling Method to MAXCI(Max C/I Algorithm), RR(Round RobinAlgorithm) or PF(PF Algorithm).



64 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I,RR, and PF)


64-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the settings of theparameter Scheduling Method.


----End

Example//Activation procedureSET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=MAXCI;//Verification procedureLST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0;

64 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I,RR, and PF)



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

65 Configuring HSDPA Static CodeAllocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code

Allocation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic CodeAllocation.




– The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License


Context

This feature provides two code allocation strategies: HSDPA static code allocation and RNC-controlled dynamic code allocation. When R99 and HSDPA services co-exist, this featureenables full use of channelization code resources to expand system capacity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA. In this step, set AllocateCode Mode to Manual or Automatic.

– If Allocate Code Mode is set to Manual, set Code Number for HS-PDSCH tospecify the number of HS-PDSCH codes.

– If Allocate Code Mode is set to Automatic, set Code Max Number for HS-PDSCH to specify the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes and set Code MinNumber for HS-PDSCH to specify the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes.


65 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation


65-1

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLHSDPA to query code allocation

mode.2. On the BSC6900 LMT, click to display Cell Performance Monitoring. Set Monitor

Item to Cell Code Tree Monitor and click Submit. The Cell Performance Monitoringtab page is displayed.

3. View the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH in the cell. If Allocate CodeMode is set to Manual, the monitoring window of cell code tree usage shows that thenumber of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH remains unchanged. If Allocate CodeMode is set to Automatic, the monitoring window of cell code tree usage shows thatthe number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH varies with service access requestsin the cell. For example, the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH increaseswith the increase of HSDPA access requests and decreases with the decrease ofHSDPA access requests.


----End

Example//Activating HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code AllocationMOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5, HsScchCodeNum=4;MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, HsPdschMaxCodeNum=5, HsPdschMinCodeNum=1;

65 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

66 Configuring HSDPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control.




– The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured beforethis feature is configured.

l License


Context

After an HSDPA service is introduced, the total downlink transmit power of each cell is classifiedinto common channel power, dedicated physical channel (DPCH) power, and power of HSDPAphysical channels (HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH). To achieve high HSDPA performance, powerresources except those reserved for common channels are dynamically allocated to DPCHs andHSDPA physical channels. For R99 services, the DPCH power can be adjusted by means ofinner-loop and outer-loop power control. HSDPA channel power resources can be dynamicallyallocated and adjusted among users by using the NodeB scheduling algorithm.

HS-PDSCH power is controlled by the transport format and resource combination (TFRC)algorithm and therefore does not require power control.

This feature enables operators to configure the appropriate power control mode of the HS-SCCH,increasing the power efficiency and system capacity and improving the user experience.


1. Activating the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the channel qualityindicator (CQI)

RANFeature Activation Guide 66 Configuring HSDPA Power Control


66-1

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA. In this step, setAllocate Code Mode to Manual, Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5, and CodeNumber for HS-SCCH to 1.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set HS-SCCH Power Control Method in CELL DCH state to CQI.

2. Activating the fixed HS-SCCH power control

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA. In this step, setAllocate Code Mode to Manual, Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5, and CodeNumber for HS-SCCH to 1.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set HS-SCCH Power Control Method in CELL DCH state to FIXED.

l Verification Procedure1. Verifying the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the CQI

(1) Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the HS-SCCH.(2) Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge to view the power change

on HS-SCCHs. Expected result: The HS-SCCH power changes with the CQI.2. Verifying the fixed HS-SCCH power control

(1) Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the HS-SCCH.(2) Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge to view the power change

on the HS-SCCH. Expected result: The HS-SCCH power remains unchanged.l Deactivation Procedure


----End

Example//Activating HSUPA Power Control //Setting the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the CQIMOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=111, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5, HsScchCodeNum=1;SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=111, HSSCCHPWRCMINDCH=CQI, HSSCCHFERTRGTINDCH=10;

//Setting the fixed HS-SCCH power control MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=111, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5, HsScchCodeNum=1;SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=111, HSSCCHPWRCMINDCH=FIXED, SCCHPWR=0;

66 Configuring HSDPA Power ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

67 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control.





l License


Context

This feature implements admission control over HSDPA users in the aspects such as the numberof HSDPA users, remaining power resources, Iub interface resources, and service rate thresholds.This feature can ensure the QoS of existing HSDPA users while fully utilizing the resources.


1. Activate power resource admission.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switchaccording to the network planning.

– For HSDPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, select related admission algorithms in theCell CAC algorithm switch parameter. The available admission algorithms areHSDPA_GBP_MEAS, HSDPA_PBR_MEAS, and HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set power resourceadmission related parameters and the maximum number of HSDPA users.

RANFeature Activation Guide 67 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control


67-1

NOTE

If HSDPA_PBR_MEAS is selected in Cell CAC algorithm switch, set Hsdpa streaming PBRthreshold and HSDPA best effort PBR threshold in this step.

2. Activate NodeB credit resource admission.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,select NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH in CAC algorithm switch.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select CRD_ADCTRL in Cell CAC algorithm switch.

3. Activate Iub interface resource admission.

The Iub interface resource admission is mandatory and is activated automatically.

NOTE

The Iub interface bandwidth can be changed by running the BSC6900 MML command MODIPPATH or MOD AAL2PATH.


1. Enable two UEs UE1 and UE2 in idle mode to camp on the test cell, and the test cellmust support HSDPA.

2. On the HLR, set PS service type to background or interactive.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the maximum numberof HSDPA users to 1.

4. Use UE1 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. After the service is set up successfully,check the RRC_RB_SETUP message over the Uu interface. You can view that thenew-H-RNTI IE is under the rb-mappinginfo IE, and the value of the dl-TransportChannel-Type IE is hsdsch.

5. Use UE2 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. The service should fail to set up. Checkthe RRC_RB_SETUP message over the Uu interface. You can view that the new-H-RNTI IE is not under the rb-mappinginfo IE, and the value of the dl-TransportChannel-Type IE is dch.

6. Release all the PS services.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set MaximumHSDPA user number of the test cell to 64.

8. Use UE1 and UE2 to initiate an HSDPA PS service.Expected result: Services are set up successfully on UE1 and UE2.


1. Deactivate power resource admission.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, setUplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch toALGORITHM_OFF.

2. Deactivate NodeB credit resource admission.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH in Cell CAC algorithm switch.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select CRD_ADCTRL in Cell CAC algorithm switch.

3. Deactivate Iub interface resource admission.

67 Configuring HSDPA Admission ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

The Iub interface resource admission is mandatory and does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activating power resource admissionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1&HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1;MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, HsdpaStrmPBRThd=70, HsdpaBePBRThd=30, MaxHsdpaUserNum=64, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24;//Activating NodeB credit resource admissionSET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1;MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32;//Deactivating power resource admissionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF;//Deactivating NodeB credit resource admissionSET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 67 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control


67-3

68 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control.





ContextFor each MAC-hs queue, HSDPA Flow Control calculates the pre-allocated Iub bandwidth basedon the Uu transmission rate and the amount of data buffered in the NodeB. The Uu transmissionrate of the MAC-hs queue is determined by the scheduling algorithm. For each MAC-hs queue,if the Iub transmission rate is higher than the Uu transmission rate, the data packets are buffered.Too much data buffered in the NodeB leads to transmission delay and even packet loss.Therefore, each MAC-hs queue should not have too much data buffered in the NodeB. However,it should retain a certain amount of data to prevent wasting the Uu resources due to not havingdata to transmit.

The procedure for HSDPA Flow Control is briefly described as follows:

1. The NodeB measures the buffered data amount of each MAC-hs queue and the average Uutransmission rate.

2. The NodeB estimates the buffering time based on the measurements.3. The NodeB adjusts the Iub bandwidth pre-allocated to the MAC-hs queue.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA to set theparameter Flow Control Switch to enable the NodeB HSDPA flow control function.The adaptive flow control algorithm is recommended.

RANFeature Activation Guide 68 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control


68-1

There are four types of HSDPA flow control algorithm as follows:

– When Flow Control Switch is set to STATIC_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB doesnot adjust the available bandwidth for HSDPA users based on delay and packetloss on the Iub interface. Then, subtracting Iub bandwidth used by R99 from Iubbandwidth configured, the NodeB performs Iub shaping and distributes flow toHSDPA users.

– When Flow Control Switch is set to DYNAMIC_BW_SHAPING, the NodeBadjusts the available bandwidth for HSDPA users based on delay and packet losson the Iub interface. Then, considering the data rate on the air interface, the NodeBperforms Iub shaping and distributes flow to HSDPA users.

– When Flow Control Switch is set to NO_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB does notadjust the bandwidth based on delay and packet loss on the Iub interface. TheNodeB reports the conditions about the air interface to the RNC, and then the RNCallocates the bandwidth.

– When Flow Control Switch is set to BW_SHAPING_ONOFF_TOGGLE, theflow control policy for the ports of the NodeB is eitherDYNAMIC_BW_SHAPING or NO_BW_SHAPING in accordance with thecongestion detection mechanism of the NodeB. This flow control algorithm isrecommended.

l Verification Procedure1. Choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring on

the BSC6900 LMT. Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL ThroughputBandwidth tasks.

2. Assume that the current Iub bandwidth is 4 MHz and the bandwidth usage is 100%.Enable an HSDPA-capable UE1 to access the network and originate a PS service.Record the throughput of UE1.

Expected result:

The throughput of UE1 is 4 Mbps.3. Enable an HSDPA-capable UE2 to access the network (with the same configuration

as UE1) and originate a download service. Record the throughput of the two UEs.

Expected result:

The throughput of UE1 decreases after UE2 accesses the network. When thethroughput of the two UEs is stable, the total bandwidth of the two UEs is 4 MHz. Ifuser priority, service type and Security Parameter Index (SPI) of the two UEs are thesame, the final ratio of the two UEs' throughput is 1:1.


You can deactivate the current algorithm by selecting one of the other flow controlalgorithms.

----End

Example//Activating HSDPA Flow Control and setting the flow control mode to adaptive flow controlSET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA: SRN=0, SN=6, BEAR=ATM, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, PN=0, SWITCH= BW_SHAPING_ONOFF_TOGGLE, TD=2, DR=1, ITM=TERRESTRIAL;

68 Configuring HSDPA Flow ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

69 Configuring HSDPA MobilityManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management.





ContextThis feature enables an HSDPA-capable UE to be handed over to an R99 cell or another HSDPAcell.

This feature also enables an HSDPA-capable UE to change cells with a small probability ofservice interruption.


1. The methods of activating intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT handoversare the same for HSDPA users and R99 users. For details, see the following sections:– 31 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover– 139 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage– 140 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS– 152 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance– 144 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage– 145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

RANFeature Activation Guide 69 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management


69-1

– 153 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service– 154 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

l Verification ProcedureNone


----End

69 Configuring HSDPA Mobility ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

70 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28.





ContextThis feature can provide proper HSDPA services for the UEs of category 1 to category 28.





----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 70 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28


70-1

71 Configuring Improvement of UserExperience in Low Traffic Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service.


– Only BSC6900 supports this function.– The BTS3812E is configured with the EBBI or EDLP board.– The DBS3800 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board.– The DBS3900/BTS3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.– The UE supports HSPA.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package– WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package


l Other Prerequisites– The BSC6900 software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.– The NodeB protocol version configured at the BSC6900 should not be earlier than R8.– The NodeB software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.

Contextl The NodeB detects HSPA services with low traffic, such as gaming services and instant

messaging services (such as MSN).l The NodeB enables low traffic services to obtain more resources based on the scheduling

and flow control principles of HSPA, which reduces delay in low traffic services.



71 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in LowTraffic Service


71-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA to set the burstpacket sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users according to the actual conditions.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST UEQOSENHANCEPARA to query the burst

packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA. In this step, setthe burst packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users to 0.

NOTE

When the burst packet size of a user is set to 0, it indicates that the NodeB stops identifyingthe low traffic services of the user.

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA: ULGOLDUEBPS=10, ULSILVERUEBPS=11, ULCOPPERUEBPS=12, DLGOLDUEBPS=13, DLSILVERUEBPS=14, DLCOPPERUEBPS=15;//Verification procedureLST UEQOSENHANCEPARA:;//Deactivation procedureSET UEQOSENHANCEPARA: ULGOLDUEBPS=0, ULSILVERUEBPS=0, ULCOPPERUEBPS=0, DLGOLDUEBPS=0, DLSILVERUEBPS=0, DLCOPPERUEBPS=0;

71 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in LowTraffic Service



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

72 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01062916QAM Modulation.



– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Packagel License


– UE should support the demodulation of 16QAM.

ContextCompared with QPSK, 16QAM is a higher-order downlink data modulation scheme. This featureenables the peak rate on the Uu interface to reach 14.4 Mbit/s.

l The HS-PDSCH is used to carry the HS-DSCH data. The HS-PDSCH may use QPSK or16QAM modulation symbols.

l When the UE is in poor radio environment, the transmission can adopt the low-order QPSKmodulation mode and small transport blocks to ensure communication quality.

l When the UE is in good radio environment, the transmission can adopt the high-order16QAM modulation mode and large transport blocks to achieve high peak rate.

l The UE of category 10 can support a maximum of 15 HS-PDSCH codes and 16QAMmodulation mode. The supported peak rate on the air interface can reach 14.4 Mbit/s.


NOTEHSDPA Introduction Package must be activated before activating this feature. For the method ofactivating HSDPA Introduction Package, see the section "Configuring HSDPA IntroductionPackage."

RANFeature Activation Guide 72 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation


72-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set 16QAMSwitch to OPEN(open).


NOTE

l For the 16QAM modulation of the HSDPA UE, the NodeB license control item must be enabled.

l As defined in 3GPP 25.306, the UE in category 8 can support both QPSK and 16QAM modulationschemes. Only 16QAM modulation, however, enables the throughput of category 8 UE to reach5 Mbit/s.

NOTEOnly in case of good environment quality of the channel, the throughput of category 8 UE canreach 5 Mbit/s.

Perform the following steps to check whether the download rate can reach 5 Mbit/s.

1. Use the UE to start a PS interactive service of DL 7200 kbit/s. The PS service is carriedon the HS-DSCH. The UE keeps in Cell-DCH state.

2. Start FTP (10 threads) to download given files, which are larger than 1 GB. Bymonitoring the DL throughput and bandwidth, you find that the PS downloadingservice is normal and the bit rate is higher than 5 Mbit/s.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set 16QAM

Switch to CLOSE(close).

----End

Example//Activating procedure SET MACHSPARA: CME16QAMSW=OPEN;//Deactivating procedure SET MACHSPARA: CME16QAMSW=CLOSE;

72 Configuring DL 16QAM ModulationRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

73 Configuring Dynamic Code AllocationBased on NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010631Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.





ContextThis feature implements dynamic code allocation on the NodeB side. The NodeB adjusts theallocation of code resources in each TTI according to available code resources and schedulingalgorithms. This feature can further improve the utilization of code resources.


NOTEHSDPA Introduction Package must be activated before activating this feature. For the method ofactivating HSDPA Introduction Package, see the section "Configuring HSDPA IntroductionPackage."

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set DynamicCode Switch to OPEN(open).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set Dynamic

Code Switch to CLOSE(close).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA.

– set Allocate Code Mode to Manual.

RANFeature Activation Guide 73 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB


73-1

– set Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5.3. Use a UE that belongs to category 8 or is capable of higher HSDPA performance to

download 200 MB files from the FTP server in the serving cell.4. Select Service > Trace Management > Interface Trace Task > User from the

navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, select (DL)Hsdpa UserEnhanced Schedule Data message, as shown in Figure 73-1.

Figure 73-1 User Tracing

5. To query the ucMaxPdschCodeNum is 5, as shown in Figure 73-2.

73 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeBRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 73-2 Message Browser

6. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set DynamicCode Switch to OPEN(open).

7. Trace (DL)Hsdpa User Enhanced Schedule Data message,ucMaxPdschCodeNum is less than the value of 5, it indicates the feature has beenenabled. as shown in Figure 73-3.

RANFeature Activation Guide 73 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB


73-3

Figure 73-3 Message Browser

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set Dynamic

Code Switch to CLOSE(close).

----End

Example//Activation procedure//Operations on the NodeB sideSET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=OPEN;//Verification procedure//Operations on the NodeB sideSET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=CLOSE;//Operations on the BSC6900 sideMOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=0, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5;//Operations on the NodeB sideSET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=OPEN;//Deactivation procedure//Operations on the NodeB sideSET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=CLOSE;

73 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeBRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

74 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010611HSDPA Enhanced Package.





l License



– UE should support the functions connected with HSDPA Enhanced package.

Context

HSDPA enhanced package is introduced on the basis of WRFD-010610 HSDPA IntroductionPackage, and provides enhancement features to meet the QoS and HSDPA networkrequirements. Related features include:

l WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

l WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition

l WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD

l WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

Procedurel For details about activate, verify, and deactivate procedures, see the following sections:

– 75 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

– 76 Configuring HSDPA State Transition

– 77 Configuring HSDPA DRD

RANFeature Activation Guide 74 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package


74-1

NOTEHS-DPCCH Preamble Support does not need to be activated, verified, or deactivated.

----End

74 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

75 Configuring Scheduling based on EPFand GBR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.





Context

The operator can set different QoS parameters such as priority, weight, and Guaranteed Bit Rate(GBR) for different users. Based on the QoS parameters, the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF)algorithm can accurately allocate resources by proportion. This feature allows different users toobtain accurate differentiated experiences.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set SchedulingMethod to EPF(Enhanced PF).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to check that Scheduling

Method is set to EPF.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set SchedulingMethod to an option other than EPF(Enhanced PF).

----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 75 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR


75-1

Example//Activation procedureSET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF;//Verification procedureLST MACHSPARA;//Deactivation procedureSET MACHSPARA: SM=PF;

75 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBRRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

76 Configuring HSDPA State Transition

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition.




– The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package has been configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License


Contextl This feature enables the switching between the DCH and HS-DSCH and makes it possible

for UEs to enjoy high-speed services.

l This feature also enables a UE with an ongoing BE service or streaming service to moveto the CELL_FACH state to save system resources when the UE does not have datatransmission for a long period.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select the DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH andDRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterDynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

l Verification Procedure1. Log in to the BSC6900 LMT and initiate Uu interface message tracing.2. Set up an HSDPA BE service, and do not perform any data operation for a period of

time. Then, search for the RRC_RB_RECFG in the traced Uu interface message.Check the traced data to ensure that the value of the IE rrc-StateIndicator is cell-FACH(1), as shown in Figure 76-1.

RANFeature Activation Guide 76 Configuring HSDPA State Transition


76-1

Figure 76-1 RRC_RB_RECFG message


deselect the DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH andDRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterDynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

----End

Example//Activating HSDPA State TransitionSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating HSDPA State TransitionSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0;

76 Configuring HSDPA State TransitionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

77 Configuring HSDPA DRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD.



– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-020400 DRD IntroductionPackage.


ContextThis feature enables HSDPA-suitable services to be established on the HS-DSCH cell as muchas possible if a UE is HS-DSCH capable, achieving better service performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Direct retry switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH andDR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to check

whether DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH orDR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH is set to ON.Expected result: The value of DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH orDR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH is ON.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERFREQNCELL to query the inter-frequency neighboring cells of cell 1 and whether Blind handover flag is set toTRUE. If Blind handover flag is set to FALSE, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UINTERFREQNCELL. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag of cell 2 (inter-

RANFeature Activation Guide 77 Configuring HSDPA DRD


77-1

frequency neighboring cell of cell 1) to TRUE. If Blind handover flag is set toTRUE, go to Step 3.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, setDL BE traffic threshold on HSDPA to an appropriate value.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set MaximumHSDPA user number of cell 1 to 0.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, setHSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) to CellCAC algorithm switch.

6. Enable the UE in cell 1 to originate a PS FTP download service. The value ofMaximum HSDPA user number in cell 1 is 0; therefore, the UE is handed over tocell 2 by using directed retry. The Uu message tracing or the UE CDT tracing showsthat the RRC_RB_RECFG/RRC_RB_SETUP message is sent to the UE in cell 1 andthe RRC_RB_RECFG_CMP/RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message is sent to the RNC incell 2.

NOTE

This feature also supports the following scenario: If a UE in an R99 cell (cell 1) originates HSDPAstreaming services or BE services, the UE can camp on an HSDPA cell (cell 2) through directedretry. In this scenario, cell 2 is the inter-frequency neighboring cell for blind handover of cell 1 andadmission to cell 2 is allowed.

l Deactivation Procedure1. The feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activating HSDPA DRDSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch= DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch= DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH-1;//Verifying HSDPA DRDMOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=2, BlindHoFlag=TRUE;SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D384;MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsdpaUserNum=0;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1;

77 Configuring HSDPA DRDRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

78 Configuring Interactive and BackgroundTraffic Class on HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010630Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPA.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package.


ContextThis feature enables the streaming services to be mapped onto the HS-DSCH, which improvesthe utilization of cell resources.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to selectMAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH from the drop-down list Servicemapping strategy switch.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 78-1.


78 Configuring Interactive and Background Traffic Class onHSDPA


78-1

Figure 78-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2. Establish an HSDPA streaming service on the UE. To check whether the establishmentis successful, view the RRC_RB_SETUP message and check whether the dl-TransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfo information element (IE) is set tohsdsch in the Uu interface trace data.

3. Check whether the service can receive the data successfully.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to clearMAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH from the drop-down list Servicemapping strategy switch.

----End

Example//Activating Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPASET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPASET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-0;

78 Configuring Interactive and Background Traffic Class onHSDPA



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

79 Configuring HSDPA over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010651HSDPA over Iur.





l Other Prerequisites– The neighboring RNC supports this feature.

ContextThis feature enables HSDPA services to be carried on the Iur interface and provides continuousHSDPA services for UEs moving between BSC6900s.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL to configure theneighboring RNC's cell with HSDSCH and Fractional-Dedicated Physical ControlChannel (F-DPCH). In this step, select the HSDSCH support indicator and F-DPCHsupport indicator check boxes under the parameter Cell Capability Container.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC. In this step, set Hsdpa cap indover IUR for NRNC to ON.

l Verification Procedure1. Verify that the feature HSDPA over Iur has been activated by performing the following

operations:– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UNRNC to query the configuration of

the neighboring RNC.

RANFeature Activation Guide 79 Configuring HSDPA over Iur


79-1

– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT3GCELL to query theconfiguration of the neighboring RNC's cell.

2. Verify that an HSDPA service has been set up by performing the following operations:– Configure the neighboring RNC and its cell with the HSDPA function.– Establish an HSDPA service under the serving RNC.– The serving cell changes to a cell under the neighboring RNC.– If the RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iur interface contains

HSDPA-related information elements, an HSDPA service has been set upsuccessfully.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC. In this step, set Hsdpa cap ind

over IUR for NRNC to OFF.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL. In this step, deselect the

HSDSCH support indicator and F-DPCH support indicator check boxes under theparameter Cell Capability Container.

----End

Example//Activating HSDPA over IurMOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1, CellCapContainerFdd=HSDSCH_SUPPORT-1&FDPCH_SUPPORT-1;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurHsdpaSuppInd=ON;//Deactivating HSDPA over IurMOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurHsdpaSuppInd=OFF;MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1, CellCapContainerFdd=HSDSCH_SUPPORT-0&FDPCH_SUPPORT-0;

79 Configuring HSDPA over IurRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

80 Configuring SRB over HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010652SRB over HSDPA.


– Requirement for the BSC6900


– Requirements for the NodeB

– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI,or EDLP board.

– The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3806C isconfigured with the EBBM board.

– The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.


– The WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package feature must be configured beforethis feature is configured.

l License


l Others

– The UE complies with the specifications of 3GPP Release 6 or higher versions andsupports fractional DPCH (F-DPCH) or E-FDPCH.

Context

Using F-DPCH multiplexing, this feature enables downlink signaling radio bearers (SRBs) ofmultiple users to be carried over HSDPA. This helps reduce downlink code resourceconsumption and call setup delay.

During radio access bearer (RAB) setup, SRBs can be carried over HSDPA only when all thedownlink services of the UE are carried on the HSDPA channels. During radio resource control(RRC) connection setup, this feature can be activated by performing the following operations:

RANFeature Activation Guide 80 Configuring SRB over HSDPA


80-1


1. Run the MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA on the BSC6900. In this step,set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSDPA or HSPA.

2. Run the MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA on the BSC6900 to set thephase at which this feature is activated by means of the Effective Flag of SignalingRB Channel Type parameter.

NOTE

l If Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type is set to False, this feature is activated duringRAB setup. Recommended Value is False.

l If Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type is set to TRUE, this feature is activated duringRRC connection setup.

3. Run the MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH on the BSC6900 to set theE_F_DPCH is activated by means of the Cell Hspa Enhanced function switchparameter.

NOTE

l If Cell Hspa Enhanced function switch is set to E_F_DPCH_ON, E_F_DPCH is enabled.

l If Cell Hspa Enhanced function switch is set to E_F_DPCH_OFF, E_F_DPCH is disabled.


1. Log in to the BSC6900 LMT to enable Uu interface tracing. In the displayed dialogbox, select RRC_RB_SETUP, as shown in Figure 80-1.


2. To verify whether this feature is activated , view the information element (IE) dl-TransportChannelType and rb-Identity in the RRC_RB SETUP message from theUu interface trace data.

80 Configuring SRB over HSDPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

– If the value of dl-TransportChannelType is hsdsch, as shown in Figure 80-2,and the value of rb-Identity is less than or equal to 4, as shown in Figure 80-3,this feature is activated.

Figure 80-2 Value of the dl-TransportChannelType IE

Figure 80-3 Value of the rb-Identity IE

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA on the BSC6900. In this step,

set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSUPA or DCH.

----End

Example//Activating SRB over HSDPA

//Activating LICENSESET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH3=SRB_OVER_HSDPA-1;

//Setting the type of channel on which SRBs are preferably carried with SrbChlType set to HSDPASET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSDPA;

//Setting the type of channel on which SRBs are preferably carried with SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag set to FalseSET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=False;

//setting the E_F_DPCH function MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaEnhSwitch=E_F_DPCH_ON;

RANFeature Activation Guide 80 Configuring SRB over HSDPA


80-3

//Deactivating SRB over HSDPA

//Setting the type of channel on which SRBs are preferably carried with SrbChlType set to DCHSET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH;

80 Configuring SRB over HSDPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

81 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based onDynamic BLER Target

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030010CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.


– The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE are configured with the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board.– The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board.– The BBU3806C is configured with the EBBM board.– The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

l License– The license that supports this feature is activated.

ContextWith this feature, the NodeB can dynamically select the optimum BLER target value based onthe channel quality fluctuation of HSDPA users. The NodeB then adjusts the Channel QualityIndicator (CQI) accordingly, improving user throughput and cell throughput.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set CQI AdjustAlgorithm Switch of non-Conversational Service to CQI_ADJ_BY_DYN_BLER(CQI Adjusted by Dynamic BLER).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA. In this step, check that CQI

Adjust Algorithm Switch of non-Conversational Service is set toCQI_ADJ_BY_DYN_BLER.

2. Query the CQI and TBS reported by UEs in the NodeB log. If the data buffer hassufficient space and a CQI corresponds to multiple TBSs, this feature has been


81 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLERTarget


81-1

activated. If the data buffer has sufficient space and a CQI corresponds only to oneTBS, this feature has not been activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set CQI Adjust

Algorithm Switch of non-Conversational Service to NO_CQI_ADJ(Not CQIAdjust Algorithm).

----End

Example//Activating CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER TargetSET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, CQIADJALGOFNONCON=CQI_ADJ_BY_DYN_BLER;//Verifying CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER TargetLST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0;//Deactivating CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER TargetSET MACHSPARA: CQIADJALGOFNONCON=NO_CQI_ADJ;

81 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLERTarget



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

82 Configuring HSUPA IntroductionPackage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010612HSUPA Introduction Package.


– The NBBI and the NULP do not support this feature.

– The UE supports the HSUPA function.



l License


Context

This feature enables the system to process HSUPA services, therefore increasing the uplink rateand system throughput. It provides basic functions of HSUPA.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSUPA to add HSUPA functionsof a cell.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSUPA to activate the HSUPAfunction of the cell.


1. Ensure that the HSUPA function of the cell is activated.Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to verify that the HSUPA functionof the cell is activated.

2. Establish a PS service.

RANFeature Activation Guide 82 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package


82-1

The IE E-DCH FDD information in the RL SETUP message on the Iub interface andthe IE rb-mappinginfo in the RRC_RB_SETUP message on the Uu interface shouldindicate that the service has been set up and carried on the E-DCH.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA to deactivate the HSUPA

function of the cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLHSUPA to remove the HSUPA

functions of a cell.

----End

Example//Activating HSUPA Introduction PackageADD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111;ACT UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111;//Verifying HSUPA Introduction PackageDSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=111;//Deactivating HSUPA Introduction PackageDEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111;RMV UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111;

82 Configuring HSUPA Introduction PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

83 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control.




– The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License


Context

This feature enables HSUPA and R99 services to simultaneously access the network by usingthe remaining uplink cell load and other resources, improving the utilization of system resourcesand ensuring QoS of admitted users.


1. Activating Power Resource Admission

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, select an uplink Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm through theparameter Uplink CAC algorithm switch and a downlink CAC algorithmthrough the parameter Downlink CAC algorithm switch.

(2) For HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, select the corresponding admissionalgorithm switches from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list, suchas HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm),HSUPA_EDCH_RSEPS_MEAS(HSUPA EDCH RSEPS Meas Algorithm),and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission ControlAlgorithm).

RANFeature Activation Guide 83 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control


83-1

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set power resourceadmission parameters.

2. Activating NodeB Credit Resource Admission

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,set CAC algorithm switch to NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH(NodeBCredit CAC Switch).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to CRD_ADCTRL(Credit AdmissionControl Algorithm) to turn on the cell-oriented credit resource admissionswitch.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set theNodeB credit resource admission parameters Ul handover credit reserved SFand Dl handover credit and code reserved SF to appropriate values.

3. Activating Iub Resource Admission

Iub resource admission is unconditionally performed and does not need to be activated.

NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH or MOD AAL2PATH to modify the Iubbandwidth.

l Verification Procedure1. UE1 and UE2 are in idle state and camp on CELL_A11. CELL_A11 supports HSUPA.2. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the maximum number

of HSUPA users supported by CELL_A11 to 1.4. Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE1, and then check the rb-mappinginfo

information element in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface.The value of ul-TrCH-Type is e-dch.

5. Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE2, and then check the rb-mappinginfoinformation element in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface.The value of rrc-Stateinditator is CELL_DCH.

6. Release all PS services.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set Maximum HSUPA

user number of CELL_A11 to 20.8. Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE1 and UE2 respectively.

Expected result: An HSUPA PS service is successfully established on UE1 and UE2respectively.

9. Run the following command to check whether Iub resource admission is activated.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH or DSP AAL2PATH to checkwhether any bandwidth is occupied.

l Deactivation Procedure1. To disable Power Resource Admission, do as follows:

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to set thecell-oriented power resource admission switches (Uplink CAC algorithmswitch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch) to ALGORITHM_OFF.

2. To disable NodeB Credit Resource Admission, do as follows:

83 Configuring HSUPA Admission ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect the NodeB credit resource admission switchNODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH(NodeB Credit CAC Switch) from theCAC algorithm switch drop-down list.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, deselect the cell-oriented credit resource admission switchCRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CACalgorithm switch drop-down list.

3. Deactivating Iub Resource AdmissionIub resource admission is unconditionally performed and does not need to bedeactivated.

----End

Example//Activating power resource admissionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-1&HSUPA_EDCH_RSEPS_MEAS-1;MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24, MaxHsupaUserNum=20;//Activating NodeB credit resource admissionSET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1;MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32;//Deactivating power resource admissionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF;//Deactivating NodeB credit resource admissionSET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 83 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control


83-3

84 Configuring HSUPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control.




– The features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package and WRFD-020504 InnerLoop Power Control must be configured before this feature is activated.

l License


Context

This feature increases the system power efficiency, reduces the uplink and downlinkinterference, and improves the system capacity by controlling the power on HSUPA physicalchannels.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA. In this step, set E-AGCH HPCParameters, E-RGCH HPC Parameters for Service Radio Links Set, and E-HICH HPC Parameters for Service Radio Links Set to YES.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA. In this step, set E-AGCH HPCMode, E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links Set, and E-HICH HPC Modefor Service Radio Links Set to FOLLOW_TPC.

3. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA. In this step, set E-AGCHPower Offset(0.25dB), E-RGCH Power Offset for Service Radio Links Set(0.25dB), E-HICH Power Offset for Service Radio Links Set(0.25dB), and E-HICH Power Offset for Single Radio Link(0.25dB) to appropriate values accordingto the network plan.

RANFeature Activation Guide 84 Configuring HSUPA Power Control


84-1

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC to modify powercontrol parameters related to HSUPA services. In this step, set E-RGCH 2-Index-Step Threshold to 9 and E-RGCH 3-Index-Step Threshold to 12.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC. In this step, change thenumber of target retransmissions for large and small retransmissions related toHSUPA services according to the network plan.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor page. Then, double-click Connection

Performance Monitoring under UMTS Monitoring. In the displayed dialog box,select OLPC and specify the IMSI.

2. Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the enhanced DCH (E-DCH).3. Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge.4. View the monitor items related to the number of E-DCH retransmissions in the

OLPC area. The values of the monitor items change with UE movement.5. View the power change on each HSUPA channel.

– If static power control is used, the channel power remains unchanged.– If dynamic power control is used:

– When the UE is moving away from the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH increases.

– When the UE is moving towards the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH decreases.


----End

Example//Activating HSUPA Power Control //Setting the power control modeSET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPCPARA=YES, SERGCHPCPARA=YES, SEHICHPCPARA=YES;SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC, SERGCHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC, SEHICHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC;SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPWROFFSET=142, SERGCHPWROFFSET=100, SEHICHPWROFFSET=96, SRLEHICHPWROFFSET=88;

//Modifying power control parameters related to HSUPA services MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC: RabIndex=48, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, Ul16QamInd=FALSE, UlL2EnhanceInd=FALSE, EdPwrInterpolationInd=FALSE, ERgch2IndStpThs=9, ERgch3IndStpThs=12, UlEcBoostingInd=FALSE;

//Changing the number of target retransmissions for large and small retransmissions related to HSUPA servicesMOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=48, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, DelayClass=1, EdchTargetLittleRetransNum=12, EdchTargetLargeRetransNum=20;

84 Configuring HSUPA Power ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

85 Configuring HSUPA MobilityManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management.





ContextThis feature enables an HSUPA-capable UE to be handed over to an R99 cell or another HSUPAcell.

This feature also enables an HSUPA-capable UE to change cells with a small probability ofservice interruption.


1. The methods of activating intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT handoversare the same for HSUPA users and R99 users. For the activation procedures forconfiguring HSUPA Mobility Management, see the following sections:– 31 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover– 139 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage– 140 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS– 152 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance– 144 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

RANFeature Activation Guide 85 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management


85-1

– 145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS– 153 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service– 154 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

2. Verification ProcedureNone.

3. Deactivation ProcedureThis feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

85 Configuring HSUPA Mobility ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

86 Configuring HSUPA DCCC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC.




– The features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package and WRFD-021101Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC) must be configured before thisfeature is activated.

l License


Context

HSUPA DCCC can dynamically adjust the minimum spreading factor (SF) code of HSUPAbased on the user throughput and flexibly switch the UE state based on the user traffic, whichimproves the Channel Element (CE) resource utilization and system efficiency.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource AllocationSwitch drop-down list.

2. Optional: If the NodeB does not enable dynamic CE, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UNODEBALGOPARA. In this step, set HSUPA Credit ConsumeType to MBR.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC. In this step, selectRATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH from the HSUPA DCCC Strategy drop-down list so that the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH can increase ordecrease.

RANFeature Activation Guide 86 Configuring HSUPA DCCC


86-1

NOTE

After the preceding optional step is performed, the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH canincrease or decrease as required. If the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH is expected toincrease only, select RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH from the HSUPA DCCC Strategy drop-down list.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET.In this step, set HSUPA Uplink Rate Adjust Set to a data rate set for rate adjustmentby the HSUPA DCCC algorithm.

NOTE

The preceding optional step sets the available data rate set of the HSUPA DCCC algorithm. Afterthe step is performed, HSUPA services can be of any data rate in the data rate set by using the HSUPADCCC algorithm.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, display the Monitor page. In the Monitor Navigation

Tree, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring.Select UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth respectivelyfrom the Monitor Item drop-down list to create two monitoring tasks.

2. Make the UE establish an HSUPA Best Effort (BE) service. After the service isestablished, layer 3 of the RNC sends an uplink throughput measurement controlmessage to layer 2.

3. Upload a large file for a period of time. Then, view the RRC_RB_RECFG messageon the Uu interface and check that the data rate increases. In UL ThroughputBandwidth of Connection Performance Monitoring, the bandwidth increases.

4. Stop the data upload and wait for a period of time. Then, view the RRC_RB_RECFGmessage on the Uu interface and check that the data rate decreases. In UL ThroughputBandwidth of Connection Performance Monitoring, the bandwidth decreases.


deselect DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource AllocationSwitch drop-down list.

----End

Example//Activating HSUPA DCCCSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1;MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", HsupaCeConsumeSelection=MBR;SET UDCCC: HsupaDcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH;SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_8KBPS-0&RATE_16KBPS-0&RATE_32KBPS-0&RATE_64KBPS-0&RATE_128KBPS-1&RATE_144KBPS-0&RATE_256KBPS-1&RATE_384KBPS-0&RATE_608KBPS-1&RATE_1280KBPS-0&RATE_2048KBPS-0&RATE_2720KBPS-0&RATE_5440KBPS-0&RATE_11480KBPS-0;//Deactivating HSUPA DCCCSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch= DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-0;

86 Configuring HSUPA DCCCRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.





ContextThis feature enables a single HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 20 HSUPA userssimultaneously. After the maximum is reached, the cell attempts to establish services on DCHsto accommodate additional users.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission ControlAlgorithm) and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission ControlAlgorithm) from the drop-down list of Cell CAC algorithm switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the maximum numberof HSUPA users supported by the cell to 20.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Monitor. Then, double-click Cell Performance

Monitoring in the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. In the displayed CellPerformance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to Cell User Number.

2. Use UEs to access the cell one by one. Then, make UEs establish PS services, forexample, upload files through FTP.Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully.

RANFeature Activation Guide 87 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell


87-1

– If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 20, uplink services are carried onHSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels.

– If the number of UEs is greater than 20, HSPA services of the excessive UEs arecarried on R99 channels.

3. View the maximum number of users indicated by the counterVS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.

NOTE

The 20 HSUPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.


----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interfaceMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0;

//Setting the maximum number of HSUPA users supported by the cell to 20 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=20;

87 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per CellRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

88 Configuring E-AGCH Power Control(Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061401 E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH).


– This feature does not depend on hardware.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPAIntroduction Package.


ContextThis feature enables the RAN to use the channel quality indicator (CQI) and HS-SCCHinformation reported by UEs as a reference, therefore effectively reducing the powerconsumption of the E-AGCH.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters withthe following parameter settings:– E-AGCH HPC Parameters is set to YES(YES).– E-AGCH HPC Mode is set to CQI_BASED(Tx Pwr Ctr based on CQI) or

HSSCCH_BASED(Tx Pwr Ctr based on HS-SCCH).– E-AGCH Power Offset(0.25dB), E-AGCH Max Power(0.1dB), and E-AGCH

Min Power(0.1dB) are set to values that comply with the data plan.l Verification Procedure

1. Use an HSUPA-capable UE to perform PS services over the E-DCH.


88 Configuring E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI orHS-SCCH)


88-1

2. Move the UE and observe power changes on each channel carrying HSUPA services.Expected result:– When the UE moves away from the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH

increases.– When the UE moves towards the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH

decreases.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA. In this step, set E-AGCH HPCParameters to NO(NO).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET MACEPARA: SCHEDULEPARA=NO, EAGCHPCPARA=YES, EAGCHPCMOD=CQI_BASED, EAGCHPWROFFSET=100, MAXAGCHPOWER=100, MINAGCHPOWER=-200, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;//Deactivation procedure SET MACEPARA: SCHEDULEPARA=NO, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

88 Configuring E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI orHS-SCCH)



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

89 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI.


– Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware

– This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware.

– Dependencies on NodeB Hardware

– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI,EULP, or EULPd board.




– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA.

l License



– The UE is of HSUPA category 6, 7, 8, or 9.

Context

This feature enables a single user to obtain a higher uplink throughput and a shorter delay.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameterService Mapping Strategy Switch.

RANFeature Activation Guide 89 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI


89-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, set Rate Threshold ofStreaming Services on 2ms TTI of HSUPA and Ratethreshold of BE on 2ms TTIof HSUPA to appropriate values based on the network plan.

3. Configure SRB over HSPA by referring to 95 Configuring SRB over HSUPA.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to verify thatthe MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box is selected.

2. Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish an HSUPA service. If theRRC_RB_SETUP message shown in Figure 89-1 is traced on the Uu interface, anHSUPA service with 2 ms TTI has been set up on the E-DCH.

Figure 89-1 HSUPA service with 2 ms TTI carried on the E-DCH


deselect the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameterService Mapping Strategy Switch.

----End

Example//Activating HSUPA 2ms TTI

SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1;SET UFRC: StreamHsupa2msTtiRateThs=D64, BeHsupa2msTtiRateThs=D64;

//Configuring SRB over HSPASET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA;//Deactivating HSUPA 2ms TTI

SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-0;

89 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTIRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

90 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTIHandover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.


– Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware– This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware.

– Dependencies on NodeB Hardware– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI,

EULP, or EULPd board.– The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3806C is

configured with the EBBM board.– The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is

activated.l License


ContextThis feature enables 2 ms TTI UEs to obtain the best performance.


This feature is license controlled. It takes effect after its license is activated. For detailsabout how to activate the license, see 3.1 Activating the BSC6900 License.

l Verification ProcedureThis feature does not need to be verified.

RANFeature Activation Guide 90 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover


90-1


----End

Example//Activating HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI HandoverSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH3=HSUPA_2ms_10ms-1;

90 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

91 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User.


– Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

– Dependencies on NodeB Hardware– BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE are configured with the EBBI, EBOI,

EULP, or EULPd board.– The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3806C is

configured with the EBBM board.– The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA has been configured before this feature

is activated.l License


– The CN supports the UE rate of 5.74 Mbit/s or higher in the uplink.– The UE is of HSUPA category 6, 7, 8, or 9.

ContextThis feature enables the HSUPA rate at the MAC layer to reach a maximum of 5.74 Mbit/s,which is the HSUPA peak rate defined in 3GPP technical specifications.


1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD TRMMAP to configure theTRM mapping table based on the network plan. The TRM mapping table contains themapping relationship between the transmission mode and the service type.

RANFeature Activation Guide 91 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User


91-1

NOTEThe BSC6900 provides a default TRM mapping table. Use an appropriate mapping policy whenconfiguring the TRM mapping table. For example, if Transport Type is set to ATM, all HSUPAservices, including signaling services, must be carried by AAL2PATH that supports HSUPAservices.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enableHSUPA services to use the 2 ms TTI. In this step, set Service Mapping StrategySwitch to MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to enable SRBsto be carried on HSPA channels. In this step, set Type of Channel PreferablyCarrying Signaling RB to HSPA (Uplink is preferably carried on E-DCH anddownlink is preferably carried on HS-DSCH).

l Verification Procedure1. Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish a PS service on the E-DCH and HS-DSCH.2. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. The RRC_RB_SETUP message

shows that the 2 ms TTI is used in the uplink and the maximum channelization codeIE is 2SF2+2SF4.

3. The real-time monitoring result of UL Throughput & Bandwidth on the BSC6900side shows that the bandwidth is 5440 kbit/s and that upload through FTP is normal.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to prohibit the

2 ms TTI from being used on HSUPA channels. In this step, deselect theMAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the Service MappingStrategy Switch parameter.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to prohibit SRBsfrom being carried on HSPA channels. In this step, set Type of Channel PreferablyCarrying Signaling RB to DCH(Both uplink and downlink are preferably carriedon DCH).

----End

Example//Activating HSUPA 5.74Mbps per UserSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1;SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA;//Deactivating HSUPA 5.74Mbps per UserSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-0;SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH;

91 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per UserRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

92 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class onHSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010632Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA.




– The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package has been configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License



– The UE supports streaming services.

Context

This feature allows PS streaming services to be carried on E-DCHs, thereby increasing theutilization of cell resources.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under theparameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, setUL streaming traffic threshold on HSUPA to an appropriate value. The defaultvalue is 256 kbit/s.


RANFeature Activation Guide 92 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA


92-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH. Ensure thatthe MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under the parameterService Mapping Strategy Switch is selected.

2. Use the UE to establish a PS service.3. Expected result: The traffic type in the RAB assignment message is streaming, and

the RB setup message traced on the Uu interface indicates that the PS service isestablished on an E-DCH.


deselect the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under theparameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

----End

Example//Activating Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPASET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-1;SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: UlStrThsOnHsupa=D256;//Deactivating Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPASET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-0;

92 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)





– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2, andWRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA.

l License


Context

This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 60 HSUPA userssimultaneously. After the maximum number of users is reached, the cell attempts to establishservices on DCHs to accommodate additional users.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission ControlAlgorithm) and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission ControlAlgorithm) from the drop-down list of Cell CAC algorithm switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to enable SRBover HSPA.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA to allocate code resourcesto E-AGCHs and E-RGCHs.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to stop reserving uplink anddownlink credit resources and set the maximum number of HSUPA users to 60.




93-1

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Monitor. Then, double-click Cell PerformanceMonitoring in the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. In the displayed CellPerformance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to Cell User Number.

2. Use UEs to access the cell one by one. Then, make UEs establish PS services, forexample, upload files through FTP.Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully.– If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 60, uplink services are carried on

HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels.– If the number of UEs is greater than 60, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are

carried on R99 channels.3. View the maximum number of users indicated by the counter

VS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.

NOTE



----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interfaceMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0;

//Enabling SRB over HSPASET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA, SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=TRUE;

//Allocating code resources to E-AGCHs and E-RGCHsMOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111, EagchCodeNum=3, ErgchEhichCodeNum=3;

//Stopping reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSUPA users to 60MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF, MaxHsupaUserNum=60;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

94 Configuring HSUPA over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010635HSUPA over Iur.


– The neighboring RNC supports this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextThis feature enables HSUPA services to be carried on the Iur interface so that continuous HSUPAservices can be provided for UEs moving between BSC6900s.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL to configure a neighboringRNC's cell with the E-DCH function. In this step, set Cell Capability Container toan appropriate value.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC to configure data about theneighboring RNC. In this step, set Hsupa cap ind over IUR for NRNC to ON toenable HSUPA services to be carried on the Iur interface.

l Verification Procedure1. Verify that the feature HSUPA over Iur has been activated by performing the following

operations:– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UNRNC to query the configuration of

the neighboring RNC.– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT3GCELL to query the

configuration of the neighboring RNC's cell.

RANFeature Activation Guide 94 Configuring HSUPA over Iur


94-1

2. Verify that an HSUPA service has been established on the Iur interface by performingthe following operations:– Configure the neighboring RNC and its cell with the HSUPA function.– Establish an HSUPA service under the serving RNC.– Add a cross-Iur soft handover link.– If the RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iur interface contains

HSUPA-related information elements, an HSUPA service has been set upsuccessfully.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC. In this step, set Hsupa cap ind

over IUR for NRNC to OFF.

----End

Example//Activation procedureMOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=2, CellId=2, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1&EDCH_2SF4_SUPPORT-1&EDCH_HARQ_IR_COMBIN_SUPPORT-1;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1, ServiceInd=SUPPORT_CS_AND_PS, IurExistInd=TRUE, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, Dpx=2, IurHsupaSuppInd=ON;//Deactivation procedureMOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurHsupaSuppInd=OFF;

94 Configuring HSUPA over IurRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

95 Configuring SRB over HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010636SRB over HSUPA.


– BSC6900


– Requirements for the NodeB

– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI,or EDLP board.




– The WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package feature must be configured beforethis feature is configured.

l License


Context

This feature provides high signaling rate and shortens call setup delay. Compared with thefunction of carrying SRBs on DCHs, this feature saves code resources and reduces cell load.


1. Run the MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA on the BSC6900. In this step,set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH) or HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).


RANFeature Activation Guide 95 Configuring SRB over HSUPA


95-1

1. Run the MML command LST UFRCCHLTYPEPARA on the BSC6900 to querywhether the SRBs are carried over HSUPA.

2. Use a UE with the HSPA function to set up an RRC connection on the enhanced DCH(E-DCH).

View the RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP message from the Uu interface trace data. Ifthe EDCH information is contained in the message, this feature is activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA on the BSC6900. In this step,

set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) and Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type toFALSE.

----End

Example//Activating SRB over HSUPASET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSUPA, SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=TRUE;//Verifying SRB over HSUPALST UFRCCHLTYPEPARA:;//Deactivating SRB over HSUPASET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH, SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=FALSE;

95 Configuring SRB over HSUPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

96 Configuring HSUPA AdaptiveTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010641HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.


– The uplink resource group of the cells that support this feature must be established ona board other than the HBBI or WBBPa.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before

this feature is activated.l License


ContextConsidering cell uplink power load, CE resources, and limited uplink coverage, this featureenables the BTS to adjust the target number of uplink retransmissions to increase the throughputper user and cell uplink capacity.


1. To enable the message containing NodeB private interface data to be transmitted tothe NodeB over the Iub interface, run the BSC6900 MML command SETURRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, set Process switch toNODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH from the PowerControl Switch drop-down list to activate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.

3. Run the NodeB MML command SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH to activate HSUPAAdaptive Transmission on the NodeB side.


RANFeature Activation Guide 96 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission


96-1

1. Enable the UE to establish an HSUPA BE service. Then, check whether theNBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message over the Iub interface carries the target numberof HSUPA adaptive retransmissions, as shown in Figure 96-1.

Figure 96-1 IE information


deselect PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH from the PowerControl Switch drop-down list to deactivate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.

2. Run the NodeB MML SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH to deactivate HSUPA AdaptiveTransmission on the NodeB side.

----End

Example//Activating HSUPA Adaptive Transmission (BSC6900 MML command)SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH-1;//Activating HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission (NodeB MML command)SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH: SWITCH =OPEN;//Deactivating HSUPA Adaptive Transmission (BSC6900 MML command)SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH-0;//Deactivating HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission (NodeB MML command)SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH: SWITCH=CLOSE;

96 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

97 Configuring TTI Switch for BE ServicesBased on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010690TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.




– The feature WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 has been configured before this feature isactivated.

l License


Context

This feature dynamically adjusts transmission time intervals (TTIs) based on UE transmit powerand uplink service throughput. The TTI of UEs in the cell center is switched to 2 ms to increasethe service rate, whereas the TTI of UEs at the cell edge is switched to 10 ms to expand thecoverage.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on theswitch for this feature. In this step, select theDRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under theparameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

2. Optional: If the Uplink Enhanced L2 feature is used, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, select theDRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH check box under theparameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.


97 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based onCoverage


97-1

NOTE

DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH can be selected only whenDRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH has been selected.

l Verification Procedure1. In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the

displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On theunfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu InterfaceTrace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG to trace Uuinterface signaling messages, as shown in Figure 97-1.


2. Adjust the distance between the UE and the NodeB to trigger a switching of the TTIfrom 2 ms to 10 ms.

3. Analyze the traced messages shown in Figure 97-2 and Figure 97-3. The TTI hasswitched from 2 ms to 10 ms.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 97-2 2 ms TTI

Figure 97-3 10 ms TTI

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn off the

switch for this feature. In this step, deselect theDRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under theparameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

----End




97-3

Example//Activating TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage//Turning on the switch for the feature TTI Switch for BE Services Based on CoverageSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1;//Turning on the switch for TTI L2+ for BE services based on coverageSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH-1;

//Deactivating TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage//Turning off the switch for the feature TTI Switch for BE Services Based on CoverageSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-0;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

98 Configuring HSUPA CoverageEnhancement at UE Power Limitation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020138HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation.


– There is no requirement for BSC6900 or NodeB.– The UE supports this feature.



ContextCompared with the traditional power compression technology, this feature provides an enhancedpower compression function. This feature optimizes the size of a data block and the E-DPDCHpower offset, improving the HSUPA performance at cell edge.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to selectPC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH check box from PowerControl Switch to activate the feature.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC to set MinimumReduced E-DPDCH Gain Factor.


Start Uu Interface Trace on the LMT to trace messages on the Uu interface.

View the RRC_RB_SETUP message, as shown in Figure 98-1. If the e-DPDCH-infomessage contains the minReduced-E-DPDCH-GainFactor information element (IE), it


98 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UEPower Limitation


98-1

indicates that this feature takes effect, and the BSC6900 sends the UE the transmit powerof the data channel.

Figure 98-1 Viewing the minReduced-E-DPDCH-GainFactor IE

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to clear

PC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH check box from PowerControl Switch to deactivate the feature.

----End

Example//Activation procedure

//Enabling the featureSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the Minimum Reduced E-DPDCH Gain Factor parameterMOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC:RABINDEX=0, SUBFLOWINDEX=0, TRCHTYPE=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, UL16QAMIND=FALSE, ULL2ENHANCEIND=FALSE, EDPWRINTERPOLATIONIND=FALSE, ULECBOOSTINGIND=FALSE, BETAEDMIN=4;//Deactivation procedure

//Disabling the featureSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_COVER_EN_AT_POLIMIT_SWITCH-0;

98 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UEPower Limitation



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

99 Configuring Adaptive Configuration ofTraffic Channel Power

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010712Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power.





l License


Context

As the HSPA/HSPA+ becomes an increasingly popular mainstream technology, uplink systemperformance needs to be enhanced to adapt to the ever-refreshed HSUPA peak rate. Based onthe changes in subscriber behaviors and network status, this feature adaptively configures theparameters related to power control on the optimum uplink data channel, increasing the HSUPAsystem capacity.

NOTE

l This feature applies only to HSUPA Best Effort (BE) services whose Transmission Timing Interval (TTI)is 10 ms.

l This feature is applicable to the scenarios where dynamic channel configuration control (DCCC) takes effectand the scenarios where dynamic channel element (CE) takes effect (DCCC does not take effect).

l This feature is highly dependent on parameter settings. The relevant parameters must retain the defaultvalues. This feature may fail to take effect if these parameter settings are changed.



99 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic ChannelPower


99-1

CAUTIONBefore activating this feature, check the settings of the following two parameters: ifReference E-TFCI Index1 is set to 4 and Reference E-TFCI Power Offset1 is set to12, you are advised to set Reference E-TFCI Power Offset1 to 8.

1. Activation Procedure in the Scenario Where DCCC Takes Effect

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, select the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCHcheck box under the parameter Power Control Switch, and clear theMAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter ServiceMapping Strategy Switch.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enableHSUPA DCCC. In this step, select the DRA_DCCC_SWITCH andDRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter DynamicResource Allocation Switch.

(3) (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SETUEDCHRATEADJUSTSET to select adjustable rates for EDCH. In this step,select RATE_128KBPS, RATE_256KBPS, RATE_608KBPS, andRATE_2048KBPS check boxes under the parameter HSUPA UpLink RateAdjust Set.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, set Initial rate ofHSUPA BE traffic to D256.

(5) Disable dynamic CE on the NodeB side.2. Activation Procedure in the Scenario Where Dynamic CE Takes Effect

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, select the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCHcheck box under the parameter Power Control Switch.


NOTE

l In dynamic CE scenarios, the service rate assigned by the core network (CN) is 2048 kbit/s, and theBSC6900 configures the Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) power offset (PO) based on therealtime service rate. In the scenarios where DCCC takes effect, the actual service rate is variable, andthe BSC6900 configures the HARQ PO based on the realtime service rate.

l The HARQ PO is one of the variable that determines the power offset on the E-DPDCH comparedwith the DPCCH.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UTYPRABHSUPAPC to check theparameters related to power offset for typical services. Figure 99-1 shows aninteractive BE service with the CN-assigned rate of 2048 kbit/s, whose Serviceparameter index is set to 55, Traffic Subflow Index to 0, Transport channeltype to TRCH_EDCH_10MS, and the Ul 16QAM Used Indication, Ul enhancedL2 Used Indication, EdPower Interpolation Priority Used Indication, and UL E-DPCCH Boosting Indication parameters all set to FALSE. As shown in Figure99-1, HARQ PO for Large Retransmission is set to 0, HARQ PO for small Retransat Low Speed is set to 4, and HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed is set to0.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 99-1 PO parameters of typical services

2. Establish a PS interactive BE service over HSUPA, for example, upload files to theFTP server.

NOTE

l In multi-user scenarios where the target load is limited and the realtime service rate of a singleuser is lower than a low-rate threshold (such as 150 kbit/s), the user is in the small retransmissionstate at a low speed. The HARQ PO is the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at LowSpeed.

l If the realtime service rate of a single user is higher than a high-rate threshold (such as 300 kbit/s), the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed. The HARQ PO is the value ofHARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed.

3. Check the realtime rate of the new BE service and the CN-assigned rate by referringto Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth, as shown in Figure 99-2.




99-3

Figure 99-2 Rate of the new BE service

4. Verification Procedure in the Scenario Where DCCC Takes Effect

(1) Check the uplink throughput and bandwidth by referring to Monitoring ULThroughput and Bandwidth. The data rate of the HSUPA service whenaccessing the network is 256 kbit/s. Trace messages over the Uu interface byreferring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The value of the HARQPO in the RRC_RB_SETUP message shows that the user is in the smallretransmission state at a high speed. The HARQ PO is equal to the value ofHARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed, as shown in Figure 99-3.

Figure 99-3 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed (256kbit/s)

(2) After the file upload on the FTP is complete, check the uplink data rate of theUE by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. When thedata rate is 608 kbit/s, check the value of HARQ PO in theRRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for small Retrans at HighSpeed for 256 kbit/s to that for 608 kbit/s, as shown in Figure 99-4.

Figure 99-4 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed

5. Verification Procedure in the Scenario Where Dynamic CE Takes Effect

(1) Trace messages over the Uu interface by referring to Tracing Messages on theUu Interface. The value of the HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_SETUP messageshows that the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed whenaccessing the network. The HARQ PO is equal to the value of HARQ PO forsmall Retrans at High Speed, as shown in Figure 99-5.




99-5

Figure 99-5 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed

(2) Simulate a situation that the uplink load is limited by changing the target uplinkload to 10%. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA. In thisstep, set Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor to 10. After the uplink load islimited, check the uplink throughput and bandwidth by referring to MonitoringUL Throughput and Bandwidth. HARQ PO reconfiguration is triggered whenthe uplink throughput of the UE is lower than the low-rate threshold. Check thevalue of HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to TracingMessages on the Uu Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO forsmall Retrans at High Speed to HARQ PO for small Retrans at LowSpeed, as shown in Figure 99-6.

Figure 99-6 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed

(3) If the feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission takes effect, useanother UE to perform a PS interactive service with an uplink rate of 2048 kbit/s and downlink rate of 7200 kbit/s in the cell. There is a possibility that the UE




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

switches from small retransmission state to large retransmission state if the cellload increases to a certain value. Check the HARQ PO in theRRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the UuInterface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for Small Retrans at LowSpeed to HARQ PO for Large Retransmission, as shown in Figure 99-7.

Figure 99-7 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for large retransmission at a low speed


switch for this feature. In this step, clear thePC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH check box under theparameter Power Control Switch.

----End

Example//Activation procedure in the scenario where DCCC takes effectSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1;SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_128KBPS-1&RATE_256KBPS-1&RATE_608KBPS-1&RATE_2048KBPS-1;SET UFRC: HsupaInitialRate=D256;

//Activation procedure in the scenario where dynamic CE takes effectSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-1;

//Verification procedureLST UTYPRABHSUPAPC: QueryType=QUERY_BY_PROPERTY, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, MaxBitRate=256000, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_10MS, Ul16QamInd=FALSE, UlL2EnhanceInd=FALSE, EdPwrInterpolationInd=FALSE, UlEcBoostingInd=FALSE;




99-7

//Verification procedure in the scenario where dynamic CE takes effectMOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=x, MaxTargetUlLoadFactor=10

//Deactivation procedureSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-0;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

100 Configuring HSUPA Iub FlowControl in Case of Iub Congestion

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010637HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.





l License


Context

By monitoring Iub transmission resources, this feature dynamically adjusts the uplink Uuthroughput and thereby greatly improves resource utilization.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, selectthe NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH check box under the parameterProcess switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA. In this step, set HSUPACongestion Control Switch to ON(ON).


NOTE

l UE is in idle mode and supports the HSUPA and HSDPA functions.

l The bandwidth between the BSC6900 and the NodeB is 1 MHz.


100 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of IubCongestion


100-1

1. UE is of HSUPA category 5 and is correctly registered at the HLR. That is, trafficclass is set to background, the maximum bit rates are set to UL 2048 kbit/s and DL7200 kbit/s.

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, start Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth.3. The uplink throughput of UE is stable and is about 1M.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA. In this step, set HSUPA

Congestion Control Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;SET UDPUCFGDATA: HsupaTnlSwitch=ON;//Deactivation procedureSET UDPUCFGDATA: HsupaTnlSwitch=OFF;

100 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of IubCongestion



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

101 Configuring Dynamic CE ResourceManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010638Dynamic CE Resource Management.




– When this feature and “WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC” are activated at the NodeBat the same time, “WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC” automatically becomesineffective at the NodeB.

l License


Context

To improve utilization efficiency of channel element (CE) resources, Huawei RAN introducesthe Dynamic CE Resource Management feature. This feature helps to quickly adjust CEallocation by considering the Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) and the actual rate of a UE. Duringpreemption of CE resources, this feature is used to allocate CE resources in a reasonable way,therefore ensuring preemption fairness.


1. The feature does not need to be activated.


1. Start Tracing Messages on the Iub Interface on BSC6900 LMT and check whether thevalue of dynamic-CE-Switch-Private in NBAP_AUDIT_RSP is 1.If the value is 1, it indicates the feature is activated. Else, it indicates the feature is notactivated. When the value of dynamic-CE-Switch-Private is 1, see Figure 101-1.

RANFeature Activation Guide 101 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management


101-1

Figure 101-1 dynamic-CE-Switch-Private


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA to deactivate HSUPA forthe cell.

2. Set NodeB license control item the number of NodeBs with dynamic CE functionenabled to 0 on M2000 client . Details see Allocating a License to NodeBs.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSUPA to activate HSUPA for thecell.

----End

Example//Deactivation procedureDEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=80;ACT UCELLHSUPA: CellId=80;

101 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

102 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink28Mbps per User



– BSC6900– This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware.

– NodeB– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EBBI,

EBOI or EDLP board.– The BBU3806 should be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board; the

BBU3806C should be configured with the EBBM board.– The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.– For the RF part, the RF module of Huawei Node B supports one TX channel each,

and two interconnected RF modules can provide two TX channels to support 2 x 2MIMO.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This

feature depends on the feature:– WRFD-010684 2 x 2 MIMO or WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA– WRFD-010650 HSDPA 13.976 Mbps per User


l Other Prerequisites– CN support user rate of 28Mbps or above.– The UE category must support cat16, cat18(or later).

RANFeature Activation Guide 102 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User


102-1

ContextThis feature enables the theoretical HSPA+ MIMO rate per user to reach a maximum of 28Mbps. This feature enhances the user experience for high-speed data services.


The theoretical UE peak rate reaches 28 Mbps when the UE services are carried on 2 x 2MIMO and the following conditions are met:

1. Activate the feature WRFD-010684 2 x 2 MIMO by referring to 111 Configuring2x2 MIMO.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to turn on the license switch forthe HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User feature.

3. Enable the UE to subscribe to this feature by referring to CN documents.l Verification Procedure

1. Enable a UE in a 2 x 2 MIMO cell to download a 500 MB file from the FTP server.Then, detect the download transmission rate. At this time, the UE initiates BE servicesin the 2 x 2 MIMO cell and the RNC establishes services on the 2 x 2 MIMO.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to deactivate the associated

license.

----End

Example//Activating HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User.SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=HSPA_DOWN28_PER_USER-1;//Deactivating HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User.SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=HSPA_DOWN28_PER_USER-0;

102 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per UserRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)





– This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware.


– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE are configured with the EBBI, EBOI,or EDLP board.



– Dependencies on UE Hardware

– The UE supports 64QAM, that is, the UE is of category 13, 14, 17, or 18, as definedin 3GPP specifications.


– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM, WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2.

l License


Context

This feature enables the theoretical HSPA+ 64QAM rate per user to reach a maximum of 21Mbps. It provides users with high-speed data services.




103-1

The theoretical peak rate of a UE can reach 21 Mbps when 64QAM is used and the followingconditions are met:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to activate the license controllingthe HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User feature.

2. Use the UE to subscribe to this feature by referring to CN documents.3. Activate the feature WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM by referring to 110

Configuring Downlink 64QAM.l Verification Procedure

1. Use the UE in a 64QAM cell to download a 500 MB file from the FTP server. Then,check the downloading rate.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to deactivate the feature HSPA

+ Downlink 21Mbps per User.

----End

Example//Activating HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per UserSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=HSPA_DOWN21_PER_USER-1;//Deactivating HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per UserSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=HSPA_DOWN21_PER_USER-0;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

104 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010685Downlink Enhanced L2.





l Others– The UE is of 3GPP R7 or later and supports this feature.

ContextThe Downlink Enhanced L2 feature eliminates contradictions between high-rate transmissionthat requires a large PDU size and cell-edge coverage that requires a small PDU size by usingflexible Protocol Data Unit (PDU) sizes. This feature enables dynamic adjustment of the PDUsize. This improves transmission efficiency on the Iub and Uu interfaces and increases the cell-edge throughput and coverage radius.

This feature is a prerequisite for the features DL 64QAM, 2x2 MIMO, and EnhancedCELL_FACH.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to set the RNC-level downlink layer2 enhancement parameters. In this step, set Cell_DCH DL L2 enhance max PDUsize and Cell_FACH L2 enhance max PDU size.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, setCell Hspa Plus function switch to DL_L2ENHANCED to turn on the cell-levellayer 2 enhancement switch.

RANFeature Activation Guide 104 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2


104-1

l Verification Procedure1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 104-1.


2. Use the UE to establish an HSDPA service. Check whether the value of the IE dl-TransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfo of the RRC_RB_SETUP messageis hsdsch.

3. View the value of the IE dL RLC PDU size in the RRC_RB_SETUP message.– If the value of the IE dL RLC PDU size is flexibleSize, as shown in Figure

104-2, this feature has been activated.– If the value of the IE dL RLC PDU size is fixedSize, this feature is not activated.

Figure 104-2 Value of the IE dL RLC PDU size


104 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect DL_L2ENHANCED from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch drop-downlist box.

----End

Example//Activating Downlink Enhanced L2//Enabling the cell-level downlink L2 enhancementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DL_L2ENHANCED-1;//Deactivating Downlink Enhanced L2//Disabling the cell-level downlink L2 enhancementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DL_L2ENHANCED-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 104 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2


104-3

105 Configuring Downlink EnhancedCELL_FACH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010688Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2.


l Other Prerequisites– The UE should support this feature.– HBBI and HDLP on BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support this feature, EBBI, EDLP

is needed.– BBU3806 does not support this feature, EBBC or EBBCd is needed. EBBM is needed

by BBU3806C to support this feature.– 3900 series NodeB: WBBPa does not support this feature, and WBBPb or WBBPd is

needed.

ContextThis feature enables the FACH to be carried on the HS-DSCH. Based on this feature, the UEcan receive data at a higher rate in CELL_FACH state.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to selectE_FACH and DL_L2ENHANCED from the drop-down list Cell Hspa Plusfunction switch.

RANFeature Activation Guide 105 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH


105-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA to add HUDPA parametersof a cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLEFACH to add enhancedCELL_FACH state parameters of a cell.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSDPA to activate HSDPAfeature.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLEFACH to activate this feature.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether EFACH isavailable.The value of Status of EFACH is EFACH available.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to clear

E_FACH and DL_L2ENHANCED from the drop-down list Cell Hspa Plusfunction switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLEFACH to deactivate this feature.

----End

Example//Activating Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH

MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_FACH-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1;ADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON;ADD UCELLEFACH: CellId=11;ACT UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11;ACT UCELLEFACH: CellId=11;//Deactivating Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACHMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_FACH-0&DL_L2ENHANCED-0;DEA UCELLEFACH: CellId=11;

105 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACHRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

106 Configuring Uplink EnhancedCELL_FACH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010701Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH.


– Dependencies on the NodeB:– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE are configured with the EULPd,

EBBI, EBOI, or EULP board. To support the E-AI, the BTS3812E, BTS3812A, andBTS3812AE are configured with the EULPd board.

– The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC/EBBCd board. To support the E-AI,the BBU3806 is configured with the EBBCd board.

– The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb/WBBPd board. To support the E-AI,the BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPd board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:

– WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH– WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement– WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA– WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA


l Other Prerequisites– The UE is of release 8 or a later version. It supports Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH.– The NodeB is of release 8 or a later version.

ContextThis feature enables the random access channel (RACH) to be mapped onto the E-DCHDedicated Physical Data Control Channel (E-DPDCH). With this feature, UEs in theCELL_FACH state can transmit uplink data at higher rates.

RANFeature Activation Guide 106 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH


106-1


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UERACHBASIC to add basic informationabout the Enhanced RACH (ERACH) function, namely Uplink EnhancedCELL_FACH in a cell. In this step, set TTI for Common E-DCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UERACHASC to add information aboutresources available for one Access Service Class (ASC) in Uplink EnhancedCELL_FACH to the cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UERACHACTOASCMAP to addmapping of Access Classes (ACs) to an ASC for Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLERACH to activate this feature.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the ERACH isavailable.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLERACH to deactivate this feature.

----End

Example//Activating Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACHADD UERACHBASIC: CellId=11, CommonEdchTTISelect=TTI_10MS;ADD UERACHASC: CellId=11;ADD UERACHACTOASCMAP: CellId=11;ACT UCELLERACH: CellId=11;//Verifying Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACHDSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=11;//Deactivating Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACHDEA UCELLERACH: CellId=11;

106 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACHRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

107 Configuring Enhanced DRX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010702Enhanced DRX.


– NodeB:

– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EULPd, EBBI,EBOI, or EULP board.




– Configurations of other features, on which this feature depends, are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010688 Enhanced CELL_FACH.

l License



– The UE must be of 3GPP Release-8 or later and support Enhanced DRX.

Context

The enhanced discontinuous reception (DRX) feature enables UEs in the enhanced downlinkfor CELL_FACH state to receive the HS-SCCH discontinuously. After this feature is enabled,the RAN and UEs in the enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH state transmit and receive dataat a specified time. The UE detects the HS-SCCH at regular intervals instead of detecting theHS-SCCH continuously. When there is no data to transmit, the UE shuts down the receiver. Asa result, the power consumption of the UE decreases.


RANFeature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Enhanced DRX


107-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to selectE_DRX(Enhanced Discontinous Reception Function Switch) for Cell Hspa Plusfunction switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether enhanceddownlink for CELL_FACH is activated. If the enhanced downlink for CELL_FACHis already activated, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLEFACH todeactivate enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH. If enhanced downlink forCELL_FACH is not activated, go to Step 3.

NOTE

The BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLEDRX fails to be executed in an active cell enabledwith enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH. Therefore, you need to deactivate enhanced downlinkfor CELL_FACH before configuring the related parameters.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLEDRX to set parameters related toenhanced DRX based on network planning requirements.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLEFACH to activate this feature.l Verification Procedure

1. Start Uu Interface Trace on the LMT to trace messages on the Uu interface.2. If the UE is not enabled with enhanced uplink for CELL_FACH, the information

element DRX Interruption by HS-DSCH data in the system information messageSIB5/5bis should be set to TRUE, as shown in Figure 107-1. If the UE is enabledwith enhanced uplink for CELL_FACH, the information element Common E-DCHsystem info is carried in the system information message SIB5/5bis.

Figure 107-1 Information element in the system information message of enhancedDRX

3. Start Cell Trace on the LMT to trace messages of a cell.4. When the UE is in the enhanced downlink for CELL_FACH state, the RNC carries

the E-DRX indication in the HS-DSCH DATA FRAME type2 to the NodeB on theDCCH or DTCH. If enhanced DRX is enabled, you can view that the E-DRX bit is1 in Cell Trace, as shown in Figure 107-2. If enhanced DRX is not enabled, the E-DRX bit is 0.

107 Configuring Enhanced DRXRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 107-2 Indication sent from the RNC to the NodeB on the DCCH or DTCH

5. If the UE is enabled with enhanced uplink for CELL_FACH, the HS-DSCH DATAFRAME type2 carries New IE Flag, H-RNTI, and E-RNTI, which can be viewed inCell Trace, as shown in Figure 107-3.

Figure 107-3 HS-DSCH DATA FRAME type2


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to deselectE_DRX(Enhanced Discontinous Reception Function Switch) for Cell Hspa Plusfunction switch.

----End

Example//Activating enhanced DRX MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_DRX-1;DEA UCELLEFACH: CellId=11;ADD UCELLEDRX: CellId=11, EDRXT321=EDRXT321_100, EDRXCycle=EDRXCYCLE_8, EDRXBurst=EDRXBURST_1, EDRXInterruptbyHSDSCHData=INTERRUPTION_CFG;ACT UCELLEFACH: CellId=11;//Deactivating enhanced DRX MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, HspaPlusSwitch=E_DRX-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 107 Configuring Enhanced DRX


107-3

108 Configuring MIMO Prime

This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030011MIMO Prime.


– Only the 40 W RRU3801C, RRU3804, RRU3806, RRU3808, WRFU, RRU3805, and850 MHz/900 MHz/1900 MHz RRU3908 V1support this feature.

– Two RF units, each with a TX channel, are configured.– The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.– The BTS3812E/AE does not support this feature.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

l License– The license that supports this feature is activated.

Contextl When the feature WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO has been activated, this feature is

activated by default and therefore does not require license activation or other operations.l MIMO Prime can increase the capacity of the cell in which MIMO has not been

implemented by 5% to 10%. The increase in the overall cell throughput helps to greatlyimprove the experience of users in medium and bad radio conditions. MIMO Prime isapplicable to various services such as HSDPA and 64QAM, whereas it does not have anyspecial requirement for the capabilities of UEs and will not affect the performance of UEsthat do not support MIMO.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set MIMO PrimeSwitch to OPEN(open).

NOTEBefore activating this feature for a cell, enable virtual antenna mapping for the cell.

RANFeature Activation Guide 108 Configuring MIMO Prime


108-1

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA. In this step, check that MIMO

Prime Switch is set to Open.2. Observe the counters VS.APCPhase0CQI.MEAN and VS.APCCQI.MEAN.

Before this feature is activated, the values of both counters are 0. After this feature isactivated, the values of both counters differ from 0.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set MIMO Prime

Switch to CLOSE(close).

----End

Example//Activating MIMO PrimeSET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, MIMOPRIMESW=OPEN;//Verifying MIMO PrimeLST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0;//Deactivating MIMO PrimeSET MACHSPARA: MIMOPRIMESW=CLOSE;

108 Configuring MIMO PrimeRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)




– It is recommended that the BSC6900 be configured with the Data Processing UnitREV:e (DPUe) board to support more peak-rate users.

– On the NodeB side:

– BBU3806 is configured with the Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) or EnhancedBase Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) board.

– BBU3806C is configured with the Enhanced Baseband Module (EBBM) board.

NOTE

BBU3806C that is configured with the EBBM board supports the HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbpsper User feature only in 64QAM+DC HSDPA mode, rather than in 2x2 MIMO+64QAMmode.

– In the case of BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE, the NodeB EnhancedHSDPA Supported Baseband Processing and Interface Unit (EBBI) , NodeBEnhanced HSDPA Supported Baseband Processing and Optical Interface Unit(EBOI), or NodeB Enhanced Downlink Processing Unit (EDLP) board isconfigured. In addition, the uplink service cannot be established on the NodeBHSDPA supported Baseband processing and Interface Unit (HBBI) or NodeBHSUPA supported Uplink Processing Unit (HULP) board.

– BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.

– To enable the 2x2 MIMO feature, either two interconnected RF modules with oneTX channel or one RF module with two TX channels is configured.


– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:

– WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User, WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA,and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package



109-1

– Or WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User, WRFD-010680 HSPA+Downlink 28Mbps per User, WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO, andWRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package


l Other Prerequisites– The CN supports the UE rate of 42 Mbit/s or higher.– The UE is of HSDPA category 19 or higher in the range from 19 to 28.

ContextAs indicated in 3GPP Release 8, the downlink peak rate per user reaches up to 42 Mbit/s byusing the 2x2 MIMO+64QAM or 64QAM+DC-HSDPA technologies and by using enhancedfunctions of the related NEs.


1. This feature does not need to be activated.l Verification Procedure

1. Set the BE service rate of the UE at the Home Location Register (HLR) to 42 Mbit/s.

2. Enable a UE in an HSDPA cell to download a 500 MB file from the FTP server. Then,check whether the download transmission rate is 42 Mbit/s. If yes, this feature hasbeen activated. At this time, the UE initiates BE services in the HSDPA cell and theBSC6900 establishes services on the HS-DSCH.

3. Start Monitoring DL Throughput and Bandwidth on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown inFigure 109-1.

Figure 109-1 Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box

The connection performance monitoring result indicates that the BSC6900 assigns a42.1 Mbit/s bandwidth to the UE, that is, this feature has been activated.


----End

ExampleN/A




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

110 Configuring Downlink 64QAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010683Downlink 64QAM.


– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE need to be configured with the EBBI,EBOI, or EDLP board.

– The BBU3806 needs to be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3806Cneeds to be configured with the EBBM board.

– The BBU3900 needs to be configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package– WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2


l Other Prerequisites– The UE category supports 64QAM.

ContextThe 16QAM modulation scheme, which was introduced in 3GPP R5 specifications, provides ahigher peak rate per user and system capacity than Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK). The64QAM modulation scheme, which was introduced in 3GPP R7 specifications, provides a higherpeak rate per user and system capacity than the 16QAM modulation scheme.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select CFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH from the Channel ConfigurationStrategy Switch list.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to configure preferentialuse of 64QAM.

RANFeature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Downlink 64QAM


110-1

– Set Preferred MIMO or 64QAM character to 64QAM.

– Set HSPA Technologies Retried by UEs to 64QAM.

NOTE

l If the switch parameter is set to 64QAM, the network preferentially configures 64QAMfor the UE. Otherwise, the network preferentially configures MIMO for the UE.

l Before commissioning the feature, you need to set the switch parameter to 64QAM. Afterthe commissioning, you can set the parameter according to the actual network planning.

l For UEs to 3GPP R7 specifications, MIMO and 64QAM cannot be used together.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to turn on thecell-level 64QAM switch and enhanced downlink layer 2 function switch. In this step,select 64QAM(Cell 64QAM Function Switch) and DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DLL2ENHANCED Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL to set neighboringBSC6900 cell support 64QAM. Set parameter Cell Capability Container and selectHSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT (downlink 64QAM support indicator).


1. As Figure 110-1 shows, start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

Figure 110-1 Uu interface tracing

2. Establish an HSDPA service on the UE. Check the RRC_RB_SETUP message andcheck that the value of the dl-TransportChannelType information element in rb-MappingInfo is hsdsch.

3. In the Uu interface tracing data, check the value of the dl-64QAM-Configuredinformation element under dl-HSPDSCH-Information in the RRC_RB_SETUPmessage.

110 Configuring Downlink 64QAMRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

– If the value of dl-64QAM-Configured is true as Figure 110-2 shows, you caninfer that this feature has been activated.

– Otherwise, you can infer that this feature has not been activated.

Figure 110-2 Checking the dl-64QAM-Configured information element


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect 64QAM(Cell 64QAM Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus functionswitch list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL to cancel neighboringBSC6900 cell support 64QAM. Set parameter Cell Capability Container anddeselect HSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT (downlink 64QAM supportindicator).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH-1;SET UFRC: MIMOor64QAMSwitch=64QAM, RetryCapability=64QAM-1;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1;MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=0, CellId=0, CellCapContainerFdd=HSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT-1;//Deactivation procedureMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-0;MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=0, CellId=0, CellCapContainerFdd=HSPAPLUS_DL_64QAM_SUPPORT-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 110 Configuring Downlink 64QAM


110-3

111 Configuring 2x2 MIMO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-0106842x2 MIMO. Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is a multi-antenna technology, whichenables multiple antennas to receive and transmit data. This increases the data transmission rate.


– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI,EBOI, or EDLP board.

– The BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3806Cmust be configured with the EBBM board.

– The BBU3900 must be configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package– WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2– WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation


l Other Prerequisites– The software version must be RAN11.0 or later.– The UE is of HSDPA category 15 or higher.– Logical cells have been established on the BSC6900 side.– For details about the hardware deployment related to MIMO, see "2x2 MIMO

Configuration" in the NodeB Technical Description.

RANFeature Activation Guide 111 Configuring 2x2 MIMO


111-1

Context

CAUTIONBefore enabling this feature in an activated cell, you need to:

l Deactivate the cell. This will interrupt services in the cell. Therefore, enable the feature whenthe traffic of the cell is light.

l Ensure that there are sufficient baseband resources on the baseband processing board.Otherwise, this feature cannot be activated.

2x2 MIMO is introduced to HSDPA in 3GPP R7. To support this feature, the NodeB use twoantennas to transmit signals, and UEs use two antennas to receive signals. When 2x2 MIMO isenabled, the theoretical peak rate of HSDPA users increases from 14 Mbit/s to 28 Mbit/s.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on theBSC6900-level MIMO algorithm switch. In this step, set Channel ConfigurationStrategy Switch to CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to set common parameters amongthe fundamental resource configuration (FRC) parameters. In this step, set PreferredMIMO or 64QAM character to MIMO.

NOTE

l MIMO and 64QAM cannot be enabled together for UEs of 3GPP R7.

l If Preferred MIMO or 64QAM character is set to MIMO, MIMO is preferentiallyconfigured for the UE.

l Before verifying the feature, set Preferred MIMO or 64QAM character to MIMO. Afterthe verification, set this parameter to a proper value according to the network plan.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH turn on the cell-level MIMO switch and enhanced L2 function switch. In this step, set Cell Hspa Plusfunction switch to MIMO, DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCEDFunction Switch), and UL_L2ENHANCED(Cell UL L2ENHANCED FunctionSwitch).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the cell.

5. Configure the related data on the NodeB according to the MIMO hardwareconfiguration scheme. The following procedure takes the RRU3804 as an example todescribe how to configure data for the change from one RRU3804 to two cascadingRRU3804s.

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRUCHAIN to create an RRU chain.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU to add an RRU to the chain.

6. On the NodeB, modify Diversity Mode of the sector and Two Tx Way of the cell.

(1) Run the NodeB MML command RMV LOCELL to remove the local cell.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command RMV SEC to remove the sector.

111 Configuring 2x2 MIMORAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(3) Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC to add a sector. In this step, setDiversity Mode to COMMON_MODE and configure the antenna data basedon the MIMO hardware deployment scheme.

(4) Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add a local cell. In this step,set Two Tx Way to TRUE and configure the antenna data based on the MIMOhardware deployment scheme.

NOTETransit diversity can be classified into PSP and Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD). Step 7describes the method of configuring STTD. Step 8 describes the method of configuring PSP.

7. Configure STTD on the BSC6900.Modify the transmit diversity mode of a cell on the BSC6900.

(1) If UPRACH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UPRACH toremove the PRACH.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHBASIC to add PRACHbasic information.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHTFC to add TFC of PRACH.(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHASC to add ASC Of

PRACH.(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHACTOASCMAP to Add

AC-ASC mapping information of PRACH.(6) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHSLOTFORMAT to add

slot format of PRACH.(7) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URACH to add RACH.(8) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URACHDYNTFS to add dynamic

TFS of RACH.(9) If AICH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UAICH to remove

AICH.(10) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UAICH to add AICH. Set STTD

Indicator to TRUE.(11) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UPRACH to activate PRACH.(12) If an SCCPCH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USCCPCH to

remove the SCCPCH.(13) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHBASIC to add an

SCCPCH. In this step, set STTD Indicator to TRUE.(14) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHTFC to add the Calculated

Transport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCH.(15) If a PICH exists, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UPICH to remove

the PICH.(16) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPICH to add a PICH. In this step,

set STTD Indicator to TRUE.(17) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH to add a FACH.(18) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACHDYNTFS to add the transport

format set (TFS) of the FACH.(19) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACHLOCH to add a logical

channel mapped to the FACH.



111-3

(20) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPCH to add a PCH.(21) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPCHDYNTFS to add the transport

format set (TFS) of the PCH.(22) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT USCCPCH to activate the SCCPCH.(23) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP to set the transmit

diversity mode of an MIMO-enabled cell to STTD.– Set TX Diversity Indication to TRUE.– Set STTD Support Indicator to STTD_Supported.– Set CP1 Support Indicator to CP1_not_Supported.– Set DPCH Tx Diversity Mode for Other User to STTD.– Set DPCH Tx Diversity Mode for MIMO User to STTD.– Set FDPCH Tx Diversity Mode for Other User to STTD.– Set FDPCH Tx Diversity Mode for MIMO User to STTD.

8. Configure PSP on the BSC6900.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP. In this step, set TXDiversity Indication to FALSE.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCPICH to add an S-CPICH for thecell.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLMIMO to activate the MIMO-

related parameter settings.l Verification Procedure

1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 111-1.





Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

2. Use the UE to establish an HSDPA service. Check whether the value of the information

element (IE) dl-TransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfo of theRRC_RB_SETUP message is hsdsch.

3. In the traced Uu interface data, check whether the RRC_RB_SETUP messagecontains the IE mimoParameters.– If the RRC_RB_SETUP message contains the IE mimoParameters, as shown in

Figure 111-2, this feature has been activated.– If the RRC_RB_SETUP message does not contain the IE mimoParameters, as

shown in Figure 111-2, this feature is not activated.

Figure 111-2 IE mimoParameters

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLMIMO to deactivate the MIMO-

related parameter settings.

NOTETransit diversity can be classified into PSP and STTD. Step 3 describes the method of deactivatingSTTD. Step 4 describes the method of deactivating PSP.

3. Optional: When STTD is used,

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USCCPCH to remove the SCCPCH.(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP. In this step, set TX

Diversity Indication to FALSE.4. Optional: When PSP is used, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USCPICH

to remove the S-CPICH of the cell.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,

clear MIMO from the HspaPlusSwitch drop-down list.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.

----End


//Activation procedure//Operations on the BSC6900 side//Turning on the BSC6900-level MIMO algorithm switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1;//Setting MIMO as the preferred functionSET UFRC: MIMOor64QAMSwitch=MIMO;



111-5

//Enabling the cell-level MIMO and L2 enhancementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1;//Deactivating the HSDPA cellDEA UCELL: CellId=1;

//Activation operation when STTD is usedRMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;ADD UPRACHBASIC: CellId=1, PreambleSignatures=SIGNATURE0-1&SIGNATURE1-1&SIGNATURE2-1&SIGNATURE3-1&SIGNATURE4-1&SIGNATURE5-1&SIGNATURE6-1&SIGNATURE7-1, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1&SUBCHANEL3-1&SUBCHANEL4-1&SUBCHANEL5-1&SUBCHANEL6-1&SUBCHANEL7-1&SUBCHANEL8-1&SUBCHANEL9-1&SUBCHANEL10-1&SUBCHANEL11-1, Constantvalue=-20, PowerRampStep=3;ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=0, PowerOffsetPpm=-3, GainFactorBetaC=13, GainFactorBetaD=15;ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=1, PowerOffsetPpm=-2, GainFactorBetaC=10, GainFactorBetaD=15;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC0;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC1;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC2, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC3, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC4, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC5, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC6, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC7, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHACTOASCMAP: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;ADD UPRACHSLOTFORMAT: CellId=1, SlotFormatNum=D4;ADD URACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, TrChId=1;ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1;ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=360, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1;ADD UAICH: CellId=1, PRACHPhyChId=4, PhyChId=6, STTDInd=TRUE;ACT UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8;ADD USCCPCHBASIC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, ScrambCode=0, STTDInd=TRUE, SlotFormat=D8, TFCIpresence=EXISTS;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=0;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=1;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=2;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=3;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=4;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=6;ADD UPICH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, STTDInd=TRUE;ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=4, ToAWS=20, ToAWE=10, SigRbInd=FALSE, ChCodingType=CONVOLUTIONAL;ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=5, RateMatchingAttr=220, ToAWS=30, ToAWE=10, MaxCmchPi=D13, MinCmchPi=D0, ChCodingType=TURBO;ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=4, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D3;ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=5, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D2;ADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=1, TrChId=4;ADD UPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8;ADD UPCHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=240, TFsNumber=D2;ACT USCCPCH:CELLID=1, PHYCHID=8;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=TRUE, STTDSupInd=STTD_Supported, CP1SupInd=CP1_not_Supported, DpchDivModforOther=STTD, FdpchDivModforOther=STTD, DpchDivModforMIMO=STTD,




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

FdpchDivModforMIMO=STTD;

//Activation operation when PSP is usedMOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE;ADD USCPICH: CellId=1, ScpichPhyId=5, ScpichPower=0;

//Activating a cellACT UCELL: CellId=1;//Activating the MIMO-related parameter settingsACT UCELLMIMO: CellId=1;//Operations on the NodeB sideADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSN=2, HPN=0;ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF;ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF;//Removing a local cell and a sectorRMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1;RMV SEC: STN=0, SECN=2;//Adding a sector and setting the transmit diversity modeADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=61, ANT2N=R0A;//Adding a local cell and setting 2-way transmit diversityADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTA, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE;//Deactivation procedureDEA UCELL: CellId=1;DEA UCELLMIMO: CellId=1;

//Deactivation operation when PSP is usedRMV USCPICH: CellId=1;//Deactivation operation when STTD is usedRMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE;

MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-0;ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure//Activation procedure//Operations on the BSC6900 side//Turning on the BSC6900-level MIMO algorithm switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1;//Setting MIMO as the preferred functionSET UFRC: MIMOor64QAMSwitch=MIMO;//Enabling the cell-level MIMO and L2 enhancementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1;//Deactivating the HSDPA cellDEA UCELL: CellId=1;

//Activation operation when STTD is usedRMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;ADD UPRACHBASIC: CellId=1, PreambleSignatures=SIGNATURE0-1&SIGNATURE1-1&SIGNATURE2-1&SIGNATURE3-1&SIGNATURE4-1&SIGNATURE5-1&SIGNATURE6-1&SIGNATURE7-1, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1&SUBCHANEL3-1&SUBCHANEL4-1&SUBCHANEL5-1&SUBCHANEL6-1&SUBCHANEL7-1&SUBCHANEL8-1&SUBCHANEL9-1&SUBCHANEL10-1&SUBCHANEL11-1, Constantvalue=-20, PowerRampStep=3;ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=0, PowerOffsetPpm=-3,



111-7

GainFactorBetaC=13, GainFactorBetaD=15;ADD UPRACHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, CTFC=1, PowerOffsetPpm=-2, GainFactorBetaC=10, GainFactorBetaD=15;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC0;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC1;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC2, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC3, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC4, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC5, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC6, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHASC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, AccessServiceClass=ASC7, PersistScalingFactor=D0.9;ADD UPRACHACTOASCMAP: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;ADD UPRACHSLOTFORMAT: CellId=1, SlotFormatNum=D4;ADD URACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, TrChId=1;ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1;ADD URACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=360, TFsNumber=D1, TbNumber1=1;ADD UAICH: CellId=1, PRACHPhyChId=4, PhyChId=6, STTDInd=TRUE;ACT UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8;ADD USCCPCHBASIC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, ScrambCode=0, STTDInd=TRUE, SlotFormat=D8, TFCIpresence=EXISTS;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=0;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=1;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=2;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=3;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=4;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, CTFC=6;ADD UPICH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, STTDInd=TRUE;ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=4, ToAWS=20, ToAWE=10, SigRbInd=FALSE, ChCodingType=CONVOLUTIONAL;ADD UFACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8, TrChId=5, RateMatchingAttr=220, ToAWS=30, ToAWE=10, MaxCmchPi=D13, MinCmchPi=D0, ChCodingType=TURBO;ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=4, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D3;ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=1, TrChId=5, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D2;ADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=1, TrChId=4;ADD UPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8;ADD UPCHDYNTFS: CellId=1, RLCSize=240, TFsNumber=D2;ACT USCCPCH:CELLID=1, PHYCHID=8;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=TRUE, STTDSupInd=STTD_Supported, CP1SupInd=CP1_not_Supported, DpchDivModforOther=STTD, FdpchDivModforOther=STTD, DpchDivModforMIMO=STTD, FdpchDivModforMIMO=STTD;

//Activation operation when PSP is usedMOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE;ADD USCPICH: CellId=1, ScpichPhyId=5, ScpichPower=0;

//Activating a cellACT UCELL: CellId=1;//Activating the MIMO-related parameter settingsACT UCELLMIMO: CellId=1;//Operations on the NodeB sideADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HSN=0, HPN=0;ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO, ALMPROCSW=OFF;//Removing a local cell and a sectorRMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1;RMV SEC: STN=0, SECN=2;//Adding a sector and setting the transmit diversity modeADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=61, ANT2N=R0A;//Adding a sector and setting the transmit diversity mode (assuming that DBS3800 is used)ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTB, ULFREQ=9630, DLFREQ=10580, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE;//Deactivation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1;DEA UCELLMIMO: CellId=1;

//Deactivation operation when PSP is usedRMV USCPICH: CellId=1;//Deactivation operation when STTD is usedRMV UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=4;RMV USCCPCH: CellId=1, PhyChId=8;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE;

MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=MIMO-0;ACT UCELL: CellId=1;



111-9

112 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010693DL 64QAM+MIMO.


– In the case of the 3900 series base station, the WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, WBBPb4,WBBPd1, or WBBPd2 board needs to be configured.

– In the case of the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and DBS3900, the WBBPb1, WBBPb2,WBBPb3, WBBPb4, or WBBPd1 board needs to be configured.

– In the case of the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE, the EBBI or EDLP board needs to beconfigured.

– Two RRUs (for example RRU3804) with single TX channels, or one RRU (for examplethe RRU3805 or RRU3808) with a dual TX channel needs to be configured.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package– WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2– WRFD-010684 2×2 MIMO– WRFD-010683 Downlink 64 QAM


l Other Prerequisites– The CN supports 3GPP Release 8.– The BSC6900 software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.– The NodeB software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.– The UE is of HS-DSCH category 19 or 20, as specified by the 3GPP specifications.

ContextIn 3GPP Release 8, MIMO and 64QAM can be used in combination to increase the peakthroughput of a single user.

RANFeature Activation Guide 112 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO


112-1

With 64QAM+MIMO, the peak throughput of a single user can reach 42Mbit/s, compared to28Mbit/s with MIMO or 21Mbit/s with 64QAM only.

NOTE

l The SRB, CS service, IMS signaling, and PS conversational services are not carried on MIMO,64QAM, or MIMO+64QAM because the data flow is small and the gain is insignificant.

l The PS streaming service, PS interactive service, PS background service, and the combined serviceswith previous services can be carried on MIMO+64QAM.

Data Planning

Parameter Example Source

Local Cell ID 1 Network planning

Cell ID 1 Network planning

DL streaming trafficthreshold on HSDPA

D64 Network planning

DL BE traffic threshold onHSDPA



1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify a local cell. In this step,set DL 64QAM MIMO to TRUE.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on thefollowing three BSC6900-level switches: In this step, selectCFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH, CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH, andCFG_HSDPA_MIMO_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH from the ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch list.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to configure preferential use of64QAM+MIMO. In this step, select MIMO_64QAM from the PreferedMIMO_64QAM or DC_HSDPA character list.

4. Optional: If the streaming service needs to use HSDPA, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, selectMAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH from the Service MappingStrategy Switch list.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In thisstep, set DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA and DL BE traffic thresholdon HSDPA according to the actual network planning.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to turn on thefollowing four cell-level switches: In this step, select 64QAM(Cell 64QAM FunctionSwitch), MIMO(Cell MIMO Function Switch), DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DLL2ENHANCED Function Switch), and 64QAM_MIMO(Cell 64QAM+MIMOFunction Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configuration

information of the local cell. In this step, set Query Mode to LOCALCELL(Query

112 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMORAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Localcell by ID) and then specify Local Cell ID. The execution result displayed onthe LMT shows the DL 64QAM+MIMO capability.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLALGOSWITCH to verify theconfiguration result of the cell algorithm switch.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to verify theconfiguration result of the connection-oriented algorithm switch.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check that the cell supports64QAM+MIMO.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to turn off the

cell-level 64QAM+MIMO switch. In this step, deselect 64QAM_MIMO(Cell64QAM+MIMO Function Switch) from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn off theBSC6900-level 64QAM+MIMO switch. In this step, deselectCFG_HSDPA_MIMO_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH from the ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch list.

----End

Example//Activation procedure//Operations on the NodeB sideMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, DL64QAM_MIMO=TRUE;//Operations on the BSC6900 sideSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_64QAM_SWITCH-1&CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1&CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH-1;SET UFRC: MIMO64QAMorDCHSDPASwitch=MIMO_64QAM;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D64, DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D64;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-1&MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1&64QAM_MIMO-1;//Verification procedure//Operations on the NodeB sideLST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1;//Operations on the BSC6900 sideLST UCELLALGOSWITCH:CellId=1;LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL;DSP UCELLCHK:CellId=1;//Deactivation procedure//Operations on the BSC6900 sideMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM_MIMO-0;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_WITH_64QAM_SWITCH-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 112 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO


112-3

113 Configuring PerformanceImprovement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010700Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA.


This feature is only supported by 40W RRU3801C, RRU3804, RRU3806, RRU3808,WRFU, RRU3805, WRFUd, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929, MRFUd,MRFUe, and 850M/900M/1900M RRU3908V1.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package– WRFD-010685 Enhanced L2– WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO


l Other Prerequisites– The software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.– The UE is of category 15, 16, 17, or 18, as specified by the 3GPP protocols.

Context

CAUTIONBefore enabling the feature in an existing cell, you need to deactivate the cell. This, however,will interrupt services in the cell. Therefore, you should enable the feature when the traffic ofthe cell is low.

The feature adopts MIMO in Primary/Secondary common Pilot (PSP) mode, Virtual AntennaMapping (VAM), and Intelligent Interference Control (ICC), improving performance of MIMOand HSDPA co-carrier.


113 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO andHSDPA Co-carrier


113-1

Data Planning

Parameters Example Source

Site Number 0 Network planning

Sector number 2 Network planning

Local cell ID 1 Network planning

Cell ID 1 Network planning

SCPICH ID 5 Network planning

Transmit power of SCPICH[0.1 dB]

0 Network planning


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate MIMO cells.

2. Modify values of VAM for the cells.


(2) Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add a local cell. Set VAMto TRUE(TRUE).

3. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. Set IIC Switch to OPEN(open).

4. Configure the PSP function on the BSC6900 side.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP to modify the cell basicinformation. In this step, set TX Diversity Indication to FALSE.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCPICH to add a secondary commonpilot channel (SCPICH).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL and check whether the value ofVAM is TRUE.

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA and check whether the valueof IIC Switch is OPEN.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USCPICH and check whether an SCPICHis already configured.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate MIMO cells.

2. Modify values of VAM for the cells.


(2) Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add a local cell. Set VAMto FALSE(FALSE).




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

3. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. Set IIC Switch to CLOSE(close).

4. Disable the PSP function on the BSC6900 side.– Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV USCPICH to remove a secondary

common pilot channel (SCPICH).– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP to modify the cell basic

information. In this step, set TX Diversity Indication to TRUE.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.

----End


//Activation procedure //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1;

//Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1;//Adding a local cell and setting Two Tx Way and VAM ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTA, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=TRUE;//Turing on the IIC switch SET MACHSPARA: IICSW=OPEN;

//Operations at the BSC6900 //Configuring the PSP function MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE;ADD USCPICH: CellId=1, ScpichPhyId=5, ScpichPower=0;//Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1;//Verification procedure //Operations at the NodeB //Checking parameter settings of VAM of the local cell LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1;//Checking whether IIC switch is turned on LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1;

//Operations at the BSC6900 //Checking configuration information about an SCPICH LST USCPICH: CellId=1;//Deactivation procedure //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1;

//Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1;//Adding a local cell and setting VAM ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTA, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, MXPWR=460, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE;




113-3

//Turing off the IIC switch SET MACHSPARA: IICSW=CLOSE;

//Operations at the BSC6900 //Removing an SCPICH RMV USCPICH: CellId=1;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=TRUE;//Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1;

//Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1;//Adding a local cell and setting Two Tx Way and VAM (assuming that DBS3800 is used)ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTB, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, HISPM=FALSE, MXPWR=460, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=TRUE;

//Turing on the IIC switchSET MACHSPARA: IICSW=OPEN;

//Operations at the BSC6900 //Configuring the PSP function MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=FALSE;ADD USCPICH: CellId=1, ScpichPhyId=5, ScpichPower=0;//Activating a cell ACT UCELL: CellId=1;//Verification procedure //Operations at the NodeB //Checking parameter settings of VAM of the local cell LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1;//Checking whether IIC switch is turned on LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1;

//Operations at the BSC6900 //Checking configuration information about an SCPICH LST USCPICH: CellId=1;//Deactivation procedure //Operations at the BSC6900 //Deactivating an MIMO cell DEA UCELL: CellId=1;

//Operations at the NodeB //Removing a local cell RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=1;//Adding a local cell and setting VAM (assuming that DBS3800 is used)ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=2, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ANT2N=ANTB, ULFREQ=9845, DLFREQ=10795, HISPM=FALSE, MXPWR=460, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE;//Turing off the IIC switchSET MACHSPARA: IICSW=CLOSE;

//Operations at the BSC6900 //Removing an SCPICH RMV USCPICH: CellId=1;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=TRUE;//Activating a cellACT UCELL: CellId=1;




113-5

114 Configuring Flexible HSPA+Technology Selection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010704Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection.


– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBI,EBOI, and EDLP boards. In addition, the uplink service cannot be established on theHBBI or HULP board.

– In DBS3800, the BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board, andthe BBU3806C must be configured with the EBBM board.

– The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA and RFD-010684 2×2 MIMO.

– This feature is mutually exclusive to the features WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO(trial).


l Other Prerequisites– In 2×2 MIMO mode, two RF units must be interconnected.– The UE has the HSDPA Category21 or higher capability, including HSDPA category

21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, and 28.

ContextDC-HSDPA and MIMO can achieve gains under different conditions. DC-HSDPA ensures acomparatively high throughput for the UEs when few HSDPA-capable UEs camp on a cell thathas a light load. MIMO ensures a comparatively high throughput for the UEs when a largenumber of HSDPA-capable UEs camp on an overloaded cell.

When one or two carriers in DC-HSDPA networking support MIMO, Flexible HSPA+Technology Selection dynamically selects DC-HSDPA or MIMO for newly accessing UEs,

RANFeature Activation Guide 114 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection


114-1

based on the current number of HSDPA-capable UEs and downlink load of the carriers thatsupport MIMO. This ensures an optimum service bearing mode.


1. Turn off the RNC-oriented DC+MIMO algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH withCFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH deselected in the Channel ConfigurationStrategy Switch drop-down list.

2. Optional: Turn on the HSDPA algorithm switch for streaming services if HSDPA isrequired for streaming services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH with MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCHselected in the Service Mapping Strategy Switch drop-down list.

3. Set HSDPA thresholds for downlink streaming services and HSDPA thresholds fordownlink BE services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETUFRCCHLTYPEPARA with DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA and DLBE traffic threshold on HSDPA set to appropriate values based on network planning.

l Verification Procedure1. Set the TX power threshold and HSDPA user number threshold of the secondary cell

for the DC/MIMO dynamic selection algorithm. Run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UFRC with DL TX Power Threshold of Secondary Cell and Threshold ofHSDPA Users in Secondary Cell set to appropriate values.

2. Have a UE access the secondary cell and initiate an HSDPA service.3. Query the DL power load of the secondary cell covered by the DC carrier group. On

the BSC6900 LMT, choose Monitor > Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > CellPerformance Monitoring and select Cell DL Carrier TX Power in the MonitorItem: drop-down list.

4. Check whether the value of the IE dl-TransportChannelType in the rb-MappingInfoof the RRC_RB_SETUP message is hsdsch.Expected result: As shown in Figure 114-2, the RRC_RB_SETUP message in theUu tracing result contains the mimoParameters IE when the downlink power of thesecondary cell covered by the DC carrier group is greater than or equal to DL TXPower Threshold of Secondary Cell set in Step 1 and the number of HSDPA usersis greater than or equal to Threshold of HSDPA Users in Secondary Cell set in Step1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message in the Uu tracing result contains the dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD IE when the downlink power of the secondary cell coveredby the DC carrier group is smaller than DL TX Power Threshold of SecondaryCell set in Step 1 and the number of HSDPA users is smaller than Threshold ofHSDPA Users in Secondary Cell set in Step 1.

114 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology SelectionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 114-1 mimoParameters message

Figure 114-2 dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD IE


1. Turn off the DC/MIMO dynamic selection algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH withCFG_DC_MIMO_DYNAMIC_SELECT_SWITCH deselected in the ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch drop-down list.

----End

Example//Activation procedure//Turning off the RNC-oriented DC+MIMO algorithm switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH-0;//(Optional) Enabling the HSDPA algorithm switch for streaming services if HSDPA is required for streaming servicesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;//Setting the HSDPA threshold for downlink streaming services and HSDPA threshold for downlink BE services SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D64, DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D64;//Verification procedureSET UFRC: SecCellTcpThd=10, SecCellHUserNumThd=1;//Deactivation procedureSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_DC_MIMO_DYNAMIC_SELECT_SWITCH-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 114 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection


114-3

115 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010686CPC - DTX /DRX.





– The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI,EULP/EULPd (supporting DTX), and EDLP (supporting DRX) boards.




– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010610 SRB over HSUPA and WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA.

l License



– The UE is of 3GPP Release 7 or later and supports this feature.

Context

This feature is related to DTX and DRX. It can reduce the interference between UEs, improvethe HSPA+ user capacity per cell and save the battery consumption of the UE.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select DTX_DRX from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch drop-down list.

RANFeature Activation Guide 115 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX


115-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select CFG_HSPA_DTX_DRX_SWITCH from the Channel ConfigurationStrategy Switch drop-down list.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, selectHSPA (Uplink is preferably carried on E-DCH and downlink is preferablycarried on HS-DSCH) from the Type of Channel Preferably Carrying SignalingRB drop-down list.

l Verification Procedure1. Create a Uu tracing task on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 115-1.

Figure 115-1 Uu interface tracing task

2. Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish a new service.3. Check whether the following IEs are included in the RRC_RB_SETUP message, as

shown in Figure 115-2.

Figure 115-2 IE information

– dtx-drx-TimingInfo– dtx-drx-Info


115 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRXRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect DTX_DRX from the Cell Hspa Plus function switch drop-down list.

----End

Example//Activating CPC - DTX /DRXMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSPA_DTX_DRX_SWITCH-1;SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA;//Deactivating CPC - DTX /DRXMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 115 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX


115-3

116 Configuring CPC-HS-SCCH LessOperation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010687CPC-HS-SCCH Less operation.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA, WRFD-010636 SRBover HSUPA.

l License


– The UE must be Release-7 (or later) to support this feature.

Context

This feature supports the HS-SCCH less operation function. With this feature, UE can receivedata from HS-PDSCH without sending data on HS-SCCH. This increases the capacity ofdownlink data services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH in the Channelconfiguration strategy switch parameter to switch on the HS-SCCH less operationfunction.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION in the Cell Hspa Plus function switchparameter to activate the HS-SCCH less operation function at the cell level.

RANFeature Activation Guide 116 Configuring CPC-HS-SCCH Less Operation


116-1

l Verification Procedure1. Use an HSPA-supportive UE to initiate a PS service. The service is carried on E-DCH

and HS-DSCH.

NOTE

How to make the service on E-DCH, see section 82 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package.

2. Check the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. You can find thehs-scch-LessInfo IE which contains the parameters related to CPC-HSSCCH lessoperation, as shown in Figure 116-1.

Figure 116-1 RRC_RB_SETUP Information


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH in the Channelconfiguration strategy switch parameter to switch off the HS-SCCH less operationfunction.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION in the Cell Hspa Plus function switchparameter to deactivate the HS-SCCH less operation function at the cell level.

----End

116 Configuring CPC-HS-SCCH Less OperationRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Example//Activating CPC-HS-SCCH Less operationSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH-1;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION-1;//Deactivating CPC-HS-SCCH Less operationSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSPA_HSSCCH_LESS_OP_SWITCH-0;MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, HspaPlusSwitch=HS_SCCH_LESS_OPERATION-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 116 Configuring CPC-HS-SCCH Less Operation


116-3

117 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users perCell



– In order to support this feature, EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd is needed for BTS3812Eand BTS3812AE. EBBC, EBBCd is needed for BBU3806. EBBM is needed forBBU3806C. WBBPb, WBBPd is needed for BBU3900.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:

WRFD-010623 64 HSDPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX.l License


ContextThis feature enables an HSDPA cell to serve a maximum of 96 users performing VoIP or otherlow-rate services, increasing capacity of voice services or other low-rate services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect the HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission ControlAlgorithm) and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission ControlAlgorithm) check boxes under the parameter Cell CAC algorithm switch, and selectthe DTX_DRX(Cell DTX_DRX Function Switch) check box under the parameterCell Hspa Plus function switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to disableHSPA state transition.


RANFeature Activation Guide 117 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell


117-1


5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to stop reserving uplink anddownlink credit resources and set the maximum number of HSDPA users per cell to96.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Monitor. Then, double-click Cell Performance

Monitoring in the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. In the displayed CellPerformance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to Cell User Number.

2. Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example,download files through FTP.Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully.– If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 96, uplink services are carried on

HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels.– If the number of UEs is greater than 96, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are

carried on R99 channels.3. Check the maximum number of users through the counter

VS.HSDPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.

NOTE

The 96 HSDPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.


----End

Example/*Activating 96 HSDPA Users per Cell*///Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interface and enabling the DTX-DRX functionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-1;

//Disabling HSPA state transitionSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0;



//Stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSDPA users to 96MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsdpaUserNum=96, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;

117 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per CellRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

118 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users perCell



– In order to support this feature, EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd is needed for BTS3812Eand BTS3812AE. EBBC, EBBCd is needed for BBU3806.EBBM is needed forBBU3806C. WBBPb, WBBPd is needed for BBU3900.


– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users perCell.

l License


Context

This feature enables an HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 96 users performing VoIP or otherlow-rate services, increasing the capacity of voice services or other low-rate services per cell.






118-1



5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to stop reserving uplink anddownlink credit resources and set the maximum number of HSUPA users per cell to96.



2. Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example,upload files through FTP.Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully.



3. Check the maximum number of users indicated by the counterVS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.

NOTE




----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interface and enabling the DTX-DRX functionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-1;




//Stopping reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSUPA users to 96MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=96, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

119 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users perCell



– The feature is only available for 3900 series NodeB, 3900 series NodeB (exceptBTS3902E) requires WBBPd2/WBBPd3 board which is one type of WBBPd.


WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA Users perCell.


ContextThis feature can increase the capacity of voice services in a cell, especially in cells with VoIPusers or a large number of low-rate users.

This feature enables an HSDPA cell to serve a maximum of 128 users performing VoIP or otherlow-rate services. Note that these users must adopt the CPC-DTX/DRX mode.




RANFeature Activation Guide 119 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell


119-1



5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to stop reserving uplink anddownlink credit resources and set the maximum number of HSDPA users per cell to128.



2. Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example,download files through FTP.Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully.



3. Check the maximum number of users through the counterVS.HSDPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.

NOTE

The 128 HSDPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.



----End

Example/*Activating 128 HSDPA Users per Cell*/

//Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interface and enabling the DTX-DRX functionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-1;




//Stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSDPA users to 128MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsdpaUserNum=128, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;

119 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per CellRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

120 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users perCell



– The feature is only available for 3900 series NodeB, 3900 series NodeB (exceptBTS3902E) requires WBBPd2/WBBPd3 board which is one type of WBBPd.


WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA Users per Cell and WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users perCell.


ContextThis feature can increase the capacity of voice services in a cell with a large number of low-rateusers, such as VoIP users.

This feature enables an HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 128 users performing VoIP or otherlow-rate services. Note that these users must adopt the CPC-DTX/DRX mode.






120-1



5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to stop reserving uplink anddownlink credit resources and set the maximum number of HSUPA users to 128.



2. Use UEs to access the cell successively and then establish PS services, for example,upload files through FTP.Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully.



3. Check the maximum number of users indicated by the counterVS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.

NOTE




----End

Example/*Activating 128 HSUPA Users per Cell*/

//Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interface and enabling the DTX-DRX functionMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0, HspaPlusSwitch=DTX_DRX-1;




//Stop reserving uplink and downlink credit resources and setting the maximum number of HSUPA users to 128MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=128, UlHoCeResvSf=SFOFF, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SFOFF;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

121 Configuring HSUPA UL InterferenceCancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010691HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.


– In the case of the DBS3800, the EBBCd board needs to be configured.– In the case of the BTS3812E or BTS3812AE, the EULPd board needs to be configured.

– When configured with EBBI/EDLP+EULPd, the base station can support HSUPAUL Interference Cancellation. In this case, the EULPd board must be included in theuplink resource group, and the downlink resource group must be set up on the EBBIor EDLP board.

– When configured with HBBI/HDLP+EULPd, the base station does not supportHSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.

– In the case of the 3900 series base station, the WBBPb board needs to be configured.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.l License


– The NodeB software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.– The BSC6900 software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.

Context

CAUTIONActivate this feature when the traffic volume in a cell is low. The reason is that the cell must bedeactivated before this feature is activated; after the cell is deactivated, the services in this cellare disrupted.

RANFeature Activation Guide 121 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation


121-1

Interference Cancellation (IC) is performed to cancel the interference caused by the uplink highrate E-DPDCH data of other users, improving the demodulation signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) andincreasing the uplink capacity of the UMTS network.

NOTE

l For 3900 series base stations, the WBBPd must be configured on slot 2 or slot 3 on the BBU3900 tosupport the uplink data IC integrated interference cancellation function. The uplink resource groupmust contain the WBBPd. Therefore, cell of the group can support the IC feature. For details, seeAdding a Baseband Board to a 3900 Series Base Station.

l If the DBS3800 is configured with two EBBCd boards, it is recommended that two uplink resourcegroups be allocated to the two boards separately. In this way, both the boards support HSUPA uplinkinterference cancellation. For details about how to configure the active and standby BTSs, see Addingan EBBC or EBBCd Board.

l If the BTS3812E or BTS3812AE is configured with two EULPd boards, it is recommended that twouplink resource groups be allocated to the two boards separately. In this way, both the boards supportHSUPA uplink interference cancellation. For details about how to configure the active and standbyBTSs, see Adding a Baseband Board to BTS3812E or BTS3812AE.


1. If the UMTS cell has been activated, run the BSC6900 MML command DEAUCELL to deactivate the cell.

2. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify the local cell. In thisstep, set IC to TRUE.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the status of a specified

local cell.Expected result: The value of IC MODE is ENABLED.

2. Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigationtree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 121-1. The column1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled, the column 1-4 indicates the state ofthis feature enabled. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3,it indicates the feature has been enabled.

Figure 121-1 Cell RTWP 1


121 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference CancellationRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify the local cell. In thisstep, set IC to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activation procedureDEA UCELL: CellId=1;MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, IC_MODE=TRUE;ACT UCELL: CellId=1;//Verification procedureDSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1;//Deactivation procedureMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, IC_MODE=FALSE;

RANFeature Activation Guide 121 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation


121-3

122 Configuring Dual-ThresholdScheduling with HSUPA Interference

Cancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020137Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation.


– The BTS3812E or BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board.

– The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board.

– The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd board in slot 2 orslot 3. For detailed installation steps, see the BBU3900 Installation Guide.


– WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

– WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

l License


Context

This feature is applicable in cells enabled with the WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL InterferenceCancellation feature.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters.

– Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES.

– Set the Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 2.



122 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPAInterference Cancellation


122-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. SetMax Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 0.

2. Use multi users to carry out upload service.3. Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation

tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 122-1. The column1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled, the column 1-4 indicates the state ofthis feature enabled. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3,it indicates HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation feature has been enabled.


4. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. SetMax Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 2.

5. Check the Cell RTWP window. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value ofcolumn 1-3, and the values of column 1-4 and column 1-3 increase by 10, it indicatesdual-threshold scheduling with HSUPA interference cancellation feature has beenenabled.

NOTEThe prerequisite of the foregoing result is the cell power limit does not over.


l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. Set

Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 0.2. Reallocate the license of this feature on M2000 LMT, and set Allocated to 0.

----End




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Example//Activation procedureSET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=2, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;//Verification procedureSET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=0, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=2, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;//Deactivation procedureSET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=0, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;




122-3

123 Configuring Anti-InterferenceScheduling for HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020136Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA.


– The BTS3812E/BTS3812AE must be configured with the HBBI/HULP/EBBI/EBOI/EULP or EULPd board. Downlink services can be established only on the EBBI/EBOIor EDLP board.

– The BBU3806 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board; the BBU3806Cmust be configured with the EBBM board.

– The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd board.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Packagel License


Context

In commercial networks, the uplink data transmission of HSUPA at some sites is affectedrandomly by strong external interference. When a site is strongly interfered, the HSUPAthroughput of the site is significantly reduced and user experience is affected.

This feature can eliminate the strong external interference and maintain high HSUPAthroughput, improving user experience.

NOTEThis feature is not proposed for multi-RRU cells.



RANFeature Activation Guide 123 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA


123-1

(1) Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES).(2) Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to ON(ON).(3) Own Cell UL Load Ratio

– In indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 90.– In non-indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 60.

(4) It is recommended to set the Min UL Cover Load Threshold(dB) to 13.

NOTEIf Local Cell ID is not specified, the Mac-e scheduling parameters of all local cells under theNodeB will be set.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA, it is recommended to setthe Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor to 75.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to display license information.

Exception result: the value of Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA Function(per Cell) is bigger than 0.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters.– Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES).– Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to OFF(OFF).

3. Make interference.For example: Run the NodeB MML command SET DESENS, set DesensitizationIntensity to 6.

4. Use a UE to carry out HSUPA upload task.5. Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation

tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 123-1. The column1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled.

Figure 123-1 Cell RTWP (feature disabled)

123 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


(1) Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to ON(ON).(2) Own Cell UL Load Ratio

– In indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 90.– In non-indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 60.

(3) It is recommended to set the Min UL Cover Load Threshold(dB) to 13.

NOTEIf Local Cell ID is not specified, the Mac-e scheduling parameters of all local cells under theNodeB will be set.

7. Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigationtree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 123-1. The column1-3 indicates the state of this feature enabled. If the values of column 1-3 in Figure123-1 are bigger than the values of 1-3 in Figure 123-2, it indicates the feature hasbeen enabled.

Figure 123-2 Cell RTWP (feature enabled)

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters.

– Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES).– Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=ON, OWNCELLULLOADRATIO=60, LOADTHRESH4MINULCOV=13, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;MOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=0, MaxTargetUlLoadFactor=75;

RANFeature Activation Guide 123 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA


123-3

//Verification procedure DSP LICENSE:;SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=OFF, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;SET DESENS: LOCELL=0, DI=6;SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=ON, OWNCELLULLOADRATIO=60, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;//Deactivation procedure SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=OFF, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

123 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

124 Configuring HSUPA FrequencyDomain Equalization

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature HSUPAFrequency Domain Equalization.


– In the case of the 3900 series base stations, the WBBPd board needs to be configured.– In the case of the DBS3800, the EBBCd board needs to be configured.– In the case of the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE, the EULPd board needs to be configured.

– When configured with EBBI/EDLP+EULPd, the base station can support HSUPAfrequency domain equalization (FDE). In this case, the EULPd board must beincluded in the uplink resource group, and the downlink resource group must be setup on the EBBI or EDLP board.

– When configured with HBBI/HDLP+EULPd, the base station does not supportHSUPA FDE.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.– WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI.


l Other Prerequisites– The BSC6900 software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.– The NodeB software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.– The UEs must belong in E-DCH categories 6 or 7, as specified by the 3GPP

specifications.

ContextHSUPA FDE equalizes the spectrum in the frequency domain on the HSUPA E-DPDCH throughthe UL receiver of the NodeB, therefore suppressing the inter-path interference on the E-DPDCH. In this manner, the SNR on the EDPDCH is increased and the UL system capacity of

RANFeature Activation Guide 124 Configuring HSUPA Frequency Domain Equalization


124-1

the HSUPA network is expanded. The rate of HSUPA services is also increased in multipathenvironment.

NOTE

For UEs of category 6 and category 7 at a transmission rate higher than 2 Mbit/s, the feature brings notablegains if multipath channels are used in the uplink.


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify the local cell. In thisstep, set FDE to TRUE.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the configuration

information about the local cell.Expected result: The value of FDE MODE is ENABLED.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify the local cell. In this

step, set FDE to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activation procedureMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, FDE_MODE=TRUE;//Verification procedureDSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1;//Deactivation procedureMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, FDE_MODE=FALSE;

124 Configuring HSUPA Frequency Domain EqualizationRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

125 Configuring Uplink 16QAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010694Uplink 16QAM.


– In the case of the 3900 series base station, the WBBPd1 or WBBPd2 board needs to beconfigured.

– In the case of the DBS3800, the EBBCd board needs to be configured.

– In the case of the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE, the EULPd and EBBI/EDLP boards needto be configured.

– For the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE, the uplink resource groups are set up on the EULPdboard, and the downlink cells are set up on the EBBI or EDLP board.


– WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

– WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA

– WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI

l License



– The CN supports the "peak rate per user" introduced by UL 16QAM.

– The BSC6900 software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.

– The NodeB software version should not be earlier than RAN12.0.

– The UE is of E-DCH category 7, as specified by the 3GPP specifications.

Contextl This feature can help increase the system capacity in the uplink so that HSUPA users can

obtain a higher peak rate.

l It is recommended that the feature WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE be activated to helpincrease the data throughput on the Uu interface.

RANFeature Activation Guide 125 Configuring Uplink 16QAM


125-1


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify a local cell. In this step,set UL 16QAM to TRUE.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the configuration

information of the local cell.2. As Figure 125-1 shows, start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

Figure 125-1 Uu Interface tracing

3. Use the UE to perform a dialing test of the PS service. Ensure that an HSUPA service

is established.4. Analyze the trace messages. In the Uu interface trace data, view the EDCH

information information element (IE) in the RRC_RB_SETUP message.– As shown in Figure 125-2, if the EDCH information IE contains the indicator of

uplink 16QAM, you can infer that this feature has been activated.– If the EDCH information IE does not contain the indicator of uplink 16QAM,

you can infer that this feature has not been activated.

125 Configuring Uplink 16QAMRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 125-2 Indication of uplink 16QAM


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify the local cell. In thisstep, set UL_16QAM to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activation procedureMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, UL_16QAM=TRUE;//Verification procedureDSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1;//Deactivation procedureMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, UL_16QAM=FALSE;

RANFeature Activation Guide 125 Configuring Uplink 16QAM


125-3

126 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010697E-DPCCH Boosting.


– The BTS3812E/BTS3812AE is configured with the Enhanced NodeB HSPA supportedUplink Processing unit REV:d (EULPd) board.

– The DBS3800 is configured with the Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) board.– 3900 series base stations are configured with WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d

(WBBPd) boards.l Dependencies on Other Features



l The UE is of 3GPP Release-7 or later and supports this feature.

ContextAn E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) is used for channel estimation toimprove the estimation accuracy when the HSUPA service data is demodulated. In this way, therequirement for Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH) power is lowered, increasingthe HSUPA service rate.


NOTE

When this feature is enabled together with the feature WRFD-010694 Uplink 16QAM, you areadvised to configure the network bandwidth over the Iub interface to 16 Mbit/s or higher if ATMtransmission is applied and to 15 Mbit/s or higher if IP transmission is applied.

1. Configure the bandwidth over the Iub interface in ATM transmission mode.

(1) Configure the type of primary and secondary paths required by various services:Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP. In this step, specify

RANFeature Activation Guide 126 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting


126-1

TRMMAP ID, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) and TransportType to ATM(ATM), and specify SRB primary path and SRB secondarypath.

(2) Add an activation factor table: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADDTRMFACTOR. In this step, specify Factor table index and Remark, andchange the activation factor.

(3) Add the TRM mapping to an adjacent node: Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD ADJMAP. In this step, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) andTransport Type of the adjacent node and interface type to ATM(ATM), andspecify Gold user TRMMAP index, Silver user TRMMAP index, Bronzeuser TRMMAP index, and Factor table index.

(4) Add ATM traffic records corresponding to the type of the primary and secondarypaths set in 1.1 (you are advised to configure the network bandwidth over theIub interface to 16 Mbit/s or higher): Run the BSC6900 MML command ADDATMTRF. In this step, specify Traffic index, Service type, Rate unit, andPeak cell rate.

(5) Add an AAL2 path: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH. Inthis step, specify TX traffic record index and RX traffic record index.

(6) Add an AAL2 route: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2RT.2. Configure the bandwidth over the Iub interface in IP transmission mode.

(1) Configure the type of primary and secondary paths required by various services:Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP. In this step, specifyTRMMAP ID, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) and TransportType to IP(IP), and specify SRB primary path and SRB secondary path.

(2) Add an activation factor table: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADDTRMFACTOR. In this step, specify Factor table index and Remark, andchange the activation factor.

(3) Add the TRM mapping to an adjacent node: Run the BSC6900 MML commandADD ADJMAP. In this step, set Interface Type to IUB (Iub Interface) andTransport Type of the adjacent node and interface type to IP(IP), and specifyGold user TRMMAP index, Silver user TRMMAP index, Bronze userTRMMAP index, and Factor table index.

(4) Add an IP path (you are advised to configure the network bandwidth over theIub interface to 15 Mbit/s or higher): Run the BSC6900 MML command ADDIPPATH. In this step, specify Interface Type, Transport Type, IP pathtype, Forward Bandwidth, and Backward Bandwidth.

(5) Set the mapping from the PHB to the DSCP based on the service type: Run theBSC6900 MML command SET PHBMAP.

3. Configure the E-DPCCH Boosting function.

(1) Turn on the E-DPCCH Boosting algorithm switch: Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch toCFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH.

(2) If streaming services are to be enabled with E-DPCCH Boosting, run theBSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, setService Mapping Strategy Switch toMAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH to ensure that streamingservices are carried over HSUPA.

126 Configuring E-DPCCH BoostingRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(3) Set the rate threshold for BE services and streaming services carried overHSUPA: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. Inthis step, specify UL streaming traffic threshold on HSUPA and UL BE trafficthreshold on HSUPA.

(4) Configure HSUPA-related parameters for a cell: Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD UCELLHSUPA.

NOTE

Retain the default values of Code Number for E-AGCH, Code Number for E-RGCH/E-HICH, Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor, and Target Non-serving E-DCHto Total E-DCH Power Ratio.

(5) Activate the HSUPA function for a cell: Run the BSC6900 MML command ACTUCELLHSUPA.

(6) Enable the E-DPCCH Boosting function for a cell: Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Cell Hspa Plusfunction switch to EDPCCH_BOOSTING.

(7) Turn on the E-DPCCH Boosting retry algorithm switch: Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UFRC. In this step, set HSPA Technologies Retried by UEs toEDPCCH_BOOSTING.

(8) Enable the E-DPCCH Boosting function for a cell on the NodeB side: Run theNodeB MML command MOD LOCELL.

l Verification Procedure1. Establish PS BE HSUPA services with the uplink rate higher than 1 Mbit/s.2. Trace messages over the Uu interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu

Interface to check whether the RRC_RB_SETUP message carries the e-TFC-Boost-Info information element (IE) that includes the e-TFCI-Boost and delta-T2TP fields,as shown in Figure 126-1.

Figure 126-1 Tracing messages over the Uu interface

3. Trace messages over the Iub interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Iub

Interface to check whether the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message carries the e-TFCI-Boost-Information IE that includes the e-TFCI-BetaEC-Boost and uL-Delta-T2TP fields, as shown in Figure 126-2.



126-3

Figure 126-2 Tracing messages over the Iub interface

– If the messages described in the preceding two steps carry the corresponding IEs,

the E-DPCCH Boosting function has taken effect.– If either of the messages described in the preceding two steps does not carry the

corresponding IEs, the E-DPCCH Boosting function has not taken effect.l Deactivation Procedure

1. To disable the E-DPCCH Boosting function of all cells under the BSC6900, do asfollows: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. Inthis step, deselect the CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH check box under theparameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

2. To disable the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a single cell, do as follows:

(1) Method 1: Run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, deselect the EDPCCH_BOOSTINGcheck box under the parameter Cell Hspa Plus function switch to disable theE-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the BSC6900 side.

(2) Method 2: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to disable the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the NodeB side.

----End

Example/*Activating E-DPCCH Boosting */

/*Configuring the network bandwidth over the Iub interface in ATM transmission mode*/

//Configuring the type of the primary and secondary paths required by various servicesADD TRMMAP: TMI=15, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM, SRBPRIPATH=RT_VBR, SRBSECPATH=UBR;

//Adding an activation factor tableADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=20, REMARK="Iub";

//Adding the TRM mapping to an adjacent nodeADD ADJMAP: ANI=4, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=15, TMISLV=15, TMIBRZ=15, FTI=20;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Adding ATM traffic records corresponding to the type of the primary and secondary paths required by various servicesADD ATMTRF: TRFX=150, ST=RTVBR, UT=KBIT/S, PCR=16000, SCR=15000; ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=151, ST=UBR, UT=KBIT/S, PCR=16000;

//Adding AAL2 pathsADD AAL2PATH:ANI=4, PATHID=1, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYF=2, CARRYSN=14, CARRYIMAGRPN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=7, VCI=71, TXTRFX=150, RXTRFX=150, OWNERSHIP=LOCAL, TIMERCU=10, TRMLOADTHINDEX=0, AAL2PATHT=SHARE;

ADD AAL2PATH:ANI=4, PATHID=2, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYF=2, CARRYSN=14, CARRYIMAGRPN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=7, VCI=72, TXTRFX=151, RXTRFX=151, OWNERSHIP=LOCAL, TIMERCU=10, TRMLOADTHINDEX=0, AAL2PATHT=SHARE;

//Adding AAL2 routesADD AAL2RT: NSAP="H'45020304050607088F0000000000000000000000", ANI=4, RTX=1, OWNERSHIP=YES;ADD AAL2RT: NSAP="H'45020304050607088F0000000000000000000000", ANI=4, RTX=2, OWNERSHIP=YES;

/*Configuring the network bandwidth over the Iub interface in IP transmission mode*/

//Configuring the type of the primary and secondary paths required by various servicesADD TRMMAP: TMI=16, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, SRBPRIPATH=AF11, SRBSECPATH=AF12;

//Adding an activation factor tableADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=21, REMARK="Iub";

//Adding the TRM mapping to an adjacent nodeADD ADJMAP: ANI=0, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=16, TMISLV=16, TMIBRZ=16, FTI=21;

//Adding IP pathsADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=2, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=AF11, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.255", TXBW=45000, RXBW=30000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=2, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=AF12, IPADDR="1.1.1.2", PEERIPADDR="1.1.1.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.255", TXBW=45001, RXBW=30001, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;

//(Optional) Setting the mapping from the PHB to the DSCPSET PHBMAP: SRN=0, SN=14, PHB=AF11, DSCP=40;SET PHBMAP: SRN=0, SN=14, PHB=AF12, DSCP=41;

/*Configuring the E-DPCCH Boosting function*/

//Turning on the E-DPCCH Boosting algorithm switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch= CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH-1;

//(Optional) Setting streaming services to ensure that they are carried over HSUPASET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the rate threshold for BE services and streaming services carried over HSUPASET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: UlStrThsOnHsupa=D64, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D64;



126-5

//Configuring the HSUPA function for a cellADD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1, EagchCodeNum=1, ErgchEhichCodeNum=1, MaxTargetUlLoadFactor=75, NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio=0;

//Activating the HSUPA function for a cellACT UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1;

//Enabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function for a cellMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch= EDPCCH_BOOSTING-1;

//Turning on the E-DPCCH Boosting retry algorithm switchSET UFRC: RetryCapability=EDPCCH_BOOSTING-1;

//Enabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the NodeB sideMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, Boosting=TRUE;/*Deactivating E-DPCCH Boosting */

//Disabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in all cells on the RNC sideSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch= CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH-0;

//Disabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the BSC6900 sideMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch= EDPCCH_BOOSTING-0;

//Disabling the E-DPCCH Boosting function in a cell on the NodeB sideMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, BOOST=FALSE;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

127 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink11.5Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010698HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User.


– The BTS3812E/BTS3812AE needs to be configured with the EULPd board.– The DBS3800 needs to be configured with the EBBCd board.– 3900 series base stations need to be configured with the WBBPd board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:

WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM, WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2, and WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting.


l Others– The UE supports the feature WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting, and the UE belongs

to class 7, 8, or 9 in terms of HSUPA capability classification.– The CN supports this feature, and the UE uplink registration rate reaches 11.5 Mbps or

higher.

ContextWith the original HSUPA peak rate of 5.74 Mbps, the UE increases its uplink peak rate to 11.5Mbps by using the technologies introduced in 3GPP Release 7, including 16QAM and E-DPCCHBoosting.


1. To enable the SRB to carry over HSUPA, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUFRCCHLTYPEPARA with Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling

RANFeature Activation Guide 127 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User


127-1

RB set to HSUPA(Uplink is preferably carried on E-DCH, and downlink ispreferably carried on DCH).

2. To enable the 2 ms TTI switch, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH with Service Mapping Strategy Switch set toMAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH.

3. To enable the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML commandSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with Channel Configuration Strategy Switch setto CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH.

4. To enable the algorithm switch for RNC-level E-DPCCH Boosting, run theBSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch set to CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH.

5. To enable the switch for cell-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH with Cell Hspa Plus function switch set toUL_16QAM .

6. To enable the switch for cell-level UL Layer 2 Improvement, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH with Cell Hspa Plus function switch setto UL_L2ENHANCED.

7. To enable cell-level Boosting, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLALGOSWITCH with Cell Hspa Plus function switch set toEDPCCH_BOOSTING.

8. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL with UL_16QAM set to TRUE,UL_L2ENHANCED to TRUE, and EDPCCH_BOOSTING to TRUE.

l Verification Procedure1. Enable a UE of 3GPP Release 7 or later versions and supporting UL 16QAM to access

the network and to establish PS services on the E-DCH and HS-DSCH.2. Create a task under UL Throughput and Bandwidth on the BSC6900 LMT.

Upload by FTP is normal. Ideally, the uplink throughput of the UE in MAC layer canreach 11.5 Mbps.

l Deactivation Procedure1. To disable the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML command

SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with Channel Configuration Strategy Switchdeselect to CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH .

2. To disable the switch for cell-level UL 16QAM, run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH with Cell Hspa Plus function switch deselect toUL_16QAM .

----End

Example/* Activating the HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User feature*/

//Enabling the SRB to carry over HSUPASET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSUPA;

//Enabling the 2ms TTI switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAMSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH-1;

127 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per UserRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Enabling the algorithm switch for RNC-level BoostingSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch= CFG_EDPCCH_BOOSTING_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling the switch for cell-level UL 16QAMMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1,HspaPlusSwitch=UL_16QAM-1;

//Enabling the switch for cell-level UL Layer 2 ImprovementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=UL_L2ENHANCED-1;

//Enabling the algorithm switch for cell-level BoostingMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch= EDPCCH_BOOSTING-1;

//Setting the UL Layer 2 Improvement, UL 16QAM, and Boosting functionsMOD LOCELL: CellId=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, UL_L2+=TRUE, UL_16QAM=TRUE, Boosting=TRUE;

/* Deactivating the HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User feature*/

//Disabling the switch for RNC-level UL 16QAMSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSUPA_16QAM_SWITCH-0;

//Disabling the switch for cell-level UL 16QAMMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1,HspaPlusSwitch=UL_16QAM-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 127 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbps per User


127-3

128 Configuring UL Layer 2Improvement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010695UL Layer 2 Improvement.


– In the case of the BTS3900, BTS3900A, or DBS3900, the WCDMA Baseband ProcessUnit REV:b (WBBPb) board (including WBBPb1, WBBPb2, WBBPb3, and WBBPb4)or the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d (WBBPd) board (including WBBPd1or WBBPd2) is configured.

– In the case of the DBS3800, the Base Band Processing Unit 3806 (BBU3806) andEnhanced Base Band Card (EBBC), or the BBU3806 and Enhanced Base Band CardREV:d (EBBCd) are configured.

– In the case of the BTS3812E or BTS3812AE, the NodeB Enhanced HSDPA SupportedBaseband Processing and Interface Unit (EBBI), NodeB Enhanced DownlinkProcessing Unit (EDLP), NodeB Enhanced Uplink Processing Unit (EULP), or NodeBEnhanced Uplink Processing Unit REV:d (EULPd) board is configured.


– The WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package feature has been configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License



– The BSC6900 version is RAN12.0 or later.

– The NodeB version is RAN12.0 or later.

– The UE supports UL Layer 2 Improvement.

Context

This feature enables the radio link layer to use a flexible Protocol Data Unit (PDU) size for datatransmission based on the radio transmission environment on the Uu interface.

RANFeature Activation Guide 128 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement


128-1

l When the UE is located at the cell edge, data is transmitted in a small PDU size, reducingthe bit error rate (BER) caused by power limitation and improving the data transmissionefficiency.

l When the UE is located in the cell center, data is transmitted in a large PDU size, meetingthe high-speed data transmission requirement and increasing the data transmissionefficiency. As a result, the effective throughput of the entire system is increased.


1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to set parameters relatedto UL Layer 2 Improvement at the BSC6900 level. In this step, set Cell_DCH UL L2enhance max RLC PDU size and Cell_DCH UL L2 enhance min RLC PDU sizeto appropriate values.

NOTE

Generally, use the default values of Cell_DCH UL L2 enhance max RLC PDU size andCell_DCH UL L2 enhance min RLC PDU size of the BSC6900.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enable ULLayer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, select the DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) check box under the parameter CellHspa Plus function switch.

3. NodeB V100R013: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to enable ULLayer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL_L2+ to TRUE.

4. NodeB V200R013: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to enable ULLayer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL L2 Enhanced to TRUE.

l Verification Procedure1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 128-1.


128 Configuring UL Layer 2 ImprovementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

2. Use an UE to establish an HSUPA service.NOTE

The type of services that use this feature is limited by the HSUPA rate threshold.

3. In the Uu interface tracing data, check the value of the information element (IE) rlc-PDU-Size in the RRC_RB_SETUP message.– If the value of the IE rlc-PDU-Size is flexibleSize, as shown in Figure 128-2, this

feature has been activated.– If the value of the IE rlc-PDU-Size is fixedSize, this feature is not activated.

Figure 128-2 Value of the IE rlc-PDU-Size

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to disable UL

Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, deselect the DL_L2ENHANCED(Cell DL L2ENHANCED Function Switch) check box under the parameter CellHspa Plus function switch.

2. NodeB V100R013: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to disable ULLayer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL_L2+ to FALSE.

3. NodeB V200R013: Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to disable ULLayer 2 Improvement at the cell level. In this step, set UL L2 Enhanced toFALSE.

----End

Example//Activation procedure//Turning on the cell-level switch for UL Layer 2 Improvement on the BSC6900 sideMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=UL_L2ENHANCED-1;//Enabling UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level on the NodeB side//NodeB V100R013MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2+=TRUE;//NodeB V200R013MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2PLUS=TRUE;//Deactivation procedure//Turning off the cell-level switch for UL Layer 2 Improvement on the

RANFeature Activation Guide 128 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement


128-3

BSC6900 sideMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: HspaPlusSwitch=UL_L2ENHANCED-0;//Disabling UL Layer 2 Improvement at the cell level on the NodeB side//NodeB V100R013MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2+=FALSE;//NodeB V200R013MOD LOCELL: CellId=1, UL_L2PLUS=FALSE;

128 Configuring UL Layer 2 ImprovementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

129 Configuring DC-HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010696DC-HSDPA.


– For 3900 series base station, BBU3900 needs to be configured with the WBBPb orWBBPd.

– For DBS3800 base station, the BBU3806 needs to be configured with the EBBC orEBBCd, the BBU3806C needs to be configured with the EBBM.

– The BTS3812E or BTS3812AE needs to be configured with the EBBI or EDLP board,and the UL baseband resources of DC-HSDPA cells cannot be carried on the HBBI orHULP board. They can be carried on the EBBI or EULP board.

– For the BSC6900, DPUe boards are recommended because the downlink 42 Mbit/sthroughput of DC-HSDPA users may be affected if the BSC6900 is configured withDPUb boards.


– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package

– WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation

– WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2l License


– One local cell can belong to only one DC group.

– The two cells must belong to the same DL resource group.

– The two cells must belong to the same sector.

– For distributed cells, two local cells of the same DC group should be served by the sameRRU or by two cascaded RRUs respectively.

– The BSC6900 software version is RAN12.0 or later.

– The NodeB software version is RAN12.0 or later.

– The UEs must belong in categories 21 or later, as specified by the 3GPP specifications.

RANFeature Activation Guide 129 Configuring DC-HSDPA


129-1

Context

CAUTIONActivate this feature when the traffic volume in a cell is low. The reason is that the cell must bedeactivated before this feature is activated; after the cell is deactivated, the services in this cellare disrupted.

Dual Cell-HSDPA (DC-HSDPA) allows an UE to establish downlink connectionssimultaneously to two inter-frequency co-coverage cells that are configured with consecutivefrequencies and controlled by one NodeB. The two cells can schedule the UE simultaneously,therefore increasing the downlink peak throughput of the UE.

The gain of downlink throughput is higher when the UE is located at the cell edge.

NOTE

l The CS service, IMS signaling, SRB signaling, or PS conversational service is carried on a single carrierinstead of DC-HSDPA because the amount of data is small and the gain is insignificant when DC-HSDPA is used.

l The BE or streaming service can be carried over the DC-HSDPA. The BE/streaming combined serviceis carried over the DC-HSDPA preferentially.

Data Configuration Plan

Parameters Example Source

ID of local cell 1 1 Network planning

ID of local cell 2 2 Network planning

Cell ID 1 and 2 Network planning

DL streaming trafficthreshold on HSDPA


DL BE traffic threshold onHSDPA



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the logical cell oflocal cell 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the logical cell oflocal cell 2.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select CFG_HSDPA_DC_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration StrategySwitch list.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, set PreferedMIMO_64QAM or DC_HSDPA character to DC_HSDPA.

129 Configuring DC-HSDPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

NOTE

If the switch parameter is set to DC_HSDPA, the network preferentially configuresDC_HSDPA for the UE.

Set this parameter to DC_HSDPA before the verification. After the verification is complete,set this parameter according to actual network planning.

5. Optional: If streaming services need to use HSDPA, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, selectMAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH from the Service MappingStrategy Switch list.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA.

– The parameter DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA is rate threshold forthe decision to set up a PS domain background/interactive service on the DCH inthe uplink.

– The parameter DL BE traffic DCH decision threshold rate threshold for thedecision to set up a PS domain background/interactive service on the DCH in thedownlink.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select DC_HSDPA and DL_L2ENHANCED from the Cell Hspa Plus functionswitch list.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA.

– Set Allocate Code Mode to Automatic.

– Set Code Adjust Switch for HSDPA to ON.

– Set User Number for Code Adjust for HSDPA.

9. Ensure that the two cells in the DC-HSDPA work in the neighboring frequencies. Runthe BSC6900 MML command LST UCELL to view the UARFCNDownnlink of thetwo cells.

NOTE

With neighboring frequencies, the UARFCNDownnlinks of the two cells differ in the range ofa value that is greater than or equal to 19 to a value that is smaller than or equal to 25.

10. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLFREQUENCY tomodify one of the two UARFCNDownnlink parameters.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELL to query the parameter Time Offset(TCELL) of the two cells. Ensure that the parameter is set to the same value.

12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP to change thetime offset of a cell.

13. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DUALCELLGRP to add a DC group of localcell 1 and local cell 2. In this step, set First Local Cell ID and Second Local CellID respectively to the ID of local cell 1 and local cell 2.

14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the logical cell of localcell 1.

15. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the logical cell of localcell 2.


1. Click Uu Interface Trace on the LMT, as shown in Figure 129-1.



129-3

Figure 129-1 Uu Interface Trace dialogue box

2. For cells with Cell DC-HSDPA Function Switch turned on, traceRRC_RB_SETUP messages on the Uu interface.

3. Perform dialing tests on FTP services for a UE to ensure that data is transmitted onHSDPA channels.

4. On the Trace tab page of the LMT, check whether RRC_RB_SETUP messagescontain the dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD information element.

– If the dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD information element is contained, as shown inFigure 129-2, it indicates that the feature is activated.

– If the dl-SecondaryCellInfoFDD information element is not contained, itindicates that the feature is not activated.

Figure 129-2 RRC_RB_SETUP message


129 Configuring DC-HSDPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect CFG_HSDPA_DC_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration StrategySwitch list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the logical cell of thelocal cell 1.

3. Run the NodeB MML command RMV DUALCELLGRP to remove the DC-HSDPAcell group.

NOTE

To remove a DC-HSDPA cell group, you only need to remove one local cell in the group.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the logical cell of thelocal cell 1.

----End

Example//Activation procedure //To deactivate cells, run the following command repeatedly: DEA UCELL: CellId=1;DEA UCELL: CellId=2;//Setting channel configuration strategy switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DC_SWITCH-1;//Setting preferred MIMO_64QAM or DC_HSDPA character SET UFRC: MIMO64QAMorDcHSDPASwitch= DC_HSDPA;//Setting service mapping strategy switch SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;//Setting DL streaming traffic threshold on HSDPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D64, DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D64;//Setting Cell Hspa Plus function switch MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DL_L2ENHANCED-1&DC_HSDPA-1//Setting allocate code modeMOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON, CodeAdjForHsdpaUserNumThd=3;//Querying the UARFCN of the cell LST UCELL: LstType=ByCellId, CellId=1;////Querying the parameter Time Offset (TCELL) of the cell LST UCELL: LstType=ByCellId, CellId=1;//Modifying the time offset of the cell MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TCell=CHIP512;//Configuring local cell 1 and local cell 2 as a DC-HSDPA cell group ADD DUALCELLGRP: FIRSTLOCELL=1, SECONDLOCELL=2;//Activating the cells ACT UCELL: CellId=1;ACT UCELL: CellId=2;//Deactivation procedure//To set Channel Configuration Strategy Switch, run the following command: MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DC_HSDPA-0;//To deactivate cell, run the following command: DEA UCELL: CellId=1;//To remove the DC-HSDPA cell group, run the following command: RMV DUALCELLGRP: LOCELL=1;//To activate cell, run the following command: ACT UCELL: CellId=1;



129-5

130 Configuring Traffic-BasedActivation and Deactivation of the

Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010713Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier.



– WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPAl License


– The UE must be of HS-DSCH category 21, 22, 23, 24 to support DC-HSDPA or HS-DSCH category 25, 26, 27, 28 to support DC-HSDPA+MIMO.

ContextFor a user that uses DC-HSDPA/DC-HSDPA+MIMO in the downlink and DCH/SC-HSUPAin the uplink, the feature has the following functions:l Disables the downlink secondary carrier function when the downlink traffic is light but the

buffer has been occupied by a large amount of data. In this case, the user becomes a single-carrier user.

l Re-activate the downlink secondary carrier function when the buffer can accommodate alarge amount of data and throughput is high. In this case, the user becomes a dual-carrieruser.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA to set the Mac-hs schedulingparameters with the DC HSDPA Cell Act Deact Switch set to ON(ON).


130 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivationof the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier


130-1

NOTEIf the Mac-hs scheduling parameters of two DC-HSDPA cells must be set, set DC HSDPACell Act Deact Switch to ON(ON) for each cell.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the Mac-hs scheduling

parameters. Check whether the Secondary DC HSDPA Cell Act Deact Switch isturned on.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,clear DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH,DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH, andDRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH from the Dynamic ResourceAllocation Switch list.

3. Use a DC-HSDPA UE to perform PS services in a DC-HSDPA cell. Do not uploador download data after required connections are established. Five seconds later, theUE becomes an SC UE, which indicates that the feature has been activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA to set the Mac-hs scheduling

parameters with the Secondary DC HSDPA Cell Act Deact Switch set to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, SECCELLACTDEASW=ON;SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=2, SECCELLACTDEASW=ON;//Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1;LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=2;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0;//Deactivation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=1, SECCELLACTDEASW=OFF;SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=2, SECCELLACTDEASW=OFF;

130 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivationof the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

131 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO(trial)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010699DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial).


– The HBBI and HDLP boards in the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support the DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature. To support this feature, the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE must beconfigured with the EBBI and EDLP boards.

– To support DC-HSDPA+MIMO, the DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC orEBBCd boards. In addition, the maximum capability of the DBS3800 is DC+MIMOx1.That is, only one frequency in a dual cell (DC) group can be configured with MIMO.

– 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPb or WBBPd boards.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA and WRFD-010684 2×2 MIMO.

l License

– The license controlling this feature has been activated.l Others

– This feature is dependent on the UE capability (class 25, 26, 27, and 28 on the HS-DSCH).

Context

Introduced in the R9 protocol, the DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature combines the DS-HSDPAfeature in the R8 protocol and the MIMO feature in the R7 protocol. This feature allows twointer-frequency co-coverage neighboring carriers under a NodeB that use the same frequencyband to simultaneously transmit HSDPA data to a UE.


RANFeature Activation Guide 131 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial)


131-1

1. To enable the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO, runtheBSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch set to CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH andCFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH.

2. Optional: If HSDPA is required for streaming services, you need to enable thealgorithm switch for streaming services carried over HSDPA: Run theBSC6900 MMLcommand SET UCORRMALGOSWITC with Service Mapping StrategySwitch set to MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH.

3. To set the HSDPA threshold for downlink streaming services and for downlink BEservices, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA with DLstreaming traffic threshold on HSDPA and DL BE traffic threshold on HSDPAset to appropriate values according to the network plan.

4. To enable the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO and the algorithm switch forDL Layer2 Improvement, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLALGOSWITCH with Cell Hspa Plus function switch set toDL_L2ENHANCED and DCMIMO_HSDPA.

5. To add the HSDPA parameters for a cell, run the BSC6900 MML command ADDUCELLHSDPA with related parameters set to appropriate values according to thenetwork plan.

6. To activate the HSDPA function for a cell, run the BSC6900MML command ACTUCELLHSDPA.

7. Optional: When the DC-HSDPA+MIMO feature is used, you need to activate thelicense controlling the downlink peak rate of 84 Mbit/s if the downlink throughputper user is expected to reach 84 Mbit/s. Run the BSC6900 MML command SETLICENSE with Function Switch5 set to HSPA_DL84M_PER_USER.


1. To check the number of online DC-HSDPA+MIMO users, query the counterVS.HSDPA.UE.Mean.CAT25.28 to obtain the average number of HSDPA users ofCAT25 to CAT28 in a cell, and query the counter VS.HSDPA.UE.Max.CAT25.28to obtain the maximum number of HSDPA users of CAT25 to CAT28 in a cell.

2. To check DC-HSDPA+MIMO service setup, query the counterVS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.AttEstab to obtain the number of DC-HSDPA-MIMORAB setup attempts on the primary carrier in a DC group, and query the counterVS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.SuccEstab to obtain the number of successful DC-HSDPA-MIMO RAB setups on the primary carrier in a DC group.

3. To check DC-HSDPA+MIMO call drops, query the counterVS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.NormRel to obtain the number of DC-HSDPA-MIMORABs normally released on the primary carrier in a DC group, and query the counterVS.HSDPA.RAB.DCMIMO.AbnormRel to obtain the number of DC-HSDPA-MIMO RABs abnormally released on the primary carrier in a DC group (includingRF Failure).

4. Enable UE tracing and establish HSPA BE services. Then, check whether the valuesof HS-DSCH FDD Secondary Serving Information and MIMO Activation Indicatorare contained in the RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION READY message overthe Iub interface and whether the values of Downlink secondary cell info FDD andSecondary cell MIMO parameters are contained in the RADIO BEARER SETUPmessage over the Uu interface.


131 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. To disable the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO, run theBSC6900MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch not set to CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH.

2. To disable the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH with Cell Hspa Plus function switch notset to DCMIMO_HSDPA.

----End

Example/*Activating DC-HSDPA+MIMO*/

//Enabling the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMOSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH-1&CFG_HSDPA_MIMO_SWITCH-1;

//(Optional) Enabling the algorithm switch for streaming services over HSDPA If HSDPA is required for streaming servicesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;

//Setting HSDPA thresholds for downlink streaming services and for downlink BE services SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D64, DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D64;

//Enabling the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMO and the algorithm switch for DL Layer2 ImprovementMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=64QAM-1&MIMO-1&DL_L2ENHANCED-1&64QAM_MIMO-1&DC_HSDPA-1&DCMIMO_HADPA-1

//Adding the HSDPA parameters for a cellADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON;

//Activating the HSDPA function for a cellACT UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1;

//Activating the downlink peak rate of 84 Mbit/sSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH5=HSPA_DL84M_PER_USER-1;

/*Deactivating DC-HSDPA+MIMO*/

//Disabling the algorithm switch for RNC-level DC-HSDPA+MIMOSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_HSDPA_DCMIMO_SWITCH-0;

//Disable the switch for cell-level DC-HSDPA+MIMOMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, HspaPlusSwitch=DCMIMO_HSDPA-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 131 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO (trial)


131-3

132 Configuring Queuing andPreemption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010505Queuing and Preemption.


– This feature requires the CN to bring the information element allocation/retentionpriority (ARP) to BSC6900 during RAB assignment so that BSC6900 can obtain servicepriorities with RAB parameters.


– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPAIntroduction Package.

l License


Context

This feature supports queuing and preemption to implement service differentiation in congestednetworks, providing better service for high-priority users.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT to turn on the queuingand preemption switches. In this step, set Preempt algorithm switch to ON and setQueue algorithm switch to ON.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UQUEUEPREEMPT to check whether thequeuing and preemption switches are turned on.


RANFeature Activation Guide 132 Configuring Queuing and Preemption


132-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT to turn off thequeuing and preemption switches. In this step, set Preempt algorithm switch toOFF and set Queue algorithm switch to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating Queuing and PreemptionSET UQUEUEPREEMPT: PreemptAlgoSwitch=ON, QueueAlgoSwitch=ON;//Deactivating Queuing and PreemptionSET UQUEUEPREEMPT: PreemptAlgoSwitch=OFF, QueueAlgoSwitch=OFF;

132 Configuring Queuing and PreemptionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

133 Configuring Access Class Restriction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021103Access Class Restriction.


– BSC6900 supports NACC RAN Information Management (RIM) and PS handover.

– The UE supports NACC and PS handover.

– The CN SGSN supports NACC and PS handover.



l License


Context

When the cell or system is overloaded, this feature can restrict user access based on the allowedservice class by broadcasting system information, controlling potential load requirements of thesystem.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UACALGO. In this step, set AC RestrictionSwitch to ON and other parameters to appropriate values.


– Verifying Access Class Restriction based on CPU overload

1. Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCCPUTHD to query the settings ofAC control threshold and AC restore threshold.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD. In this step, set AC controlthreshold and AC restore threshold to appropriate values.

RANFeature Activation Guide 133 Configuring Access Class Restriction


133-1

4. Enable a large number of UEs to access a cell until the CPU usage exceeds the ACrestore threshold.

5. Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT and selectRRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 as the message type. If the value of barred IE in theRRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message is 0, as shown in Figure 133-1, the featurehas been activated. If the value is not 0, the feature is not activated.

Figure 133-1 RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message

6. Reduce the number of UEs in the cell until the CPU usage is lower than the ACrestore threshold.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD. In this step, set AC controlthreshold and AC restore threshold to their original values.

– Verifying Access Class Restriction based on the access failure on the Iu interface

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, setProcess switch to SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST andBARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RST UIU. In this step, set CN Domain ID toCS_DOMAIN.

3. Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT and selectRRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 as the message to be traced. If the tracedRRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message indicates that the cell is barred, as shown inFigure 133-2, the feature has been activated. If the traced message does notindicate that the cell is barred, the feature is not activated.

133 Configuring Access Class RestrictionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 133-2 RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3 message

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UACALGO. In this step, set AC Restriction

Switch to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating Access Class RestrictionSET UACALGO: AcRstrctSwitch=ON, AcRstrctPercent=5, AcIntervalOfCell=1, AcRstrctIntervalLen=6;//Verifying Access Class Restriction based on CPU overloadSET FCCPUTHD: BRDCLASS=XPU, ACCTHD=40, ACRTHD=35;STR CPUUSAGETST: SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1, ACU=45, STPMODE=MANULSTP;STP CPUUSAGETST: SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1;SET FCCPUTHD: BRDCLASS=XPU, ACCTHD=80, ACRTHD=70;//Verifying Access Class Restriction based on the access failure on the Iu interfaceSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-1&BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-1;RST UIU: CnOpIndex=0, CNDOMAINID=CS_DOMAIN, RSTCNTYPE=ALL_NODES;//Deactivating Access Class RestrictionSET UACALGO: AcRstrctSwitch=OFF;

RANFeature Activation Guide 133 Configuring Access Class Restriction


133-3

134 Configuring Traffic PriorityMapping onto Transmission Resources

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050424Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources.





l License


Context

This feature enables the dynamical mapping of the services onto the transport bearers accordingto the TC, ARP, and THP of the user. Operators can flexibly configure the mapping to providedifferentiated services while guaranteeing the QoS.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP to add the transport resourcemapping.

NOTE

l Before setting the type of a mapping path for a service, ensure that this type of path isavailable. Otherwise, the service may fail to be set up.

l The primary path and the secondary path for the same service type must be different.

l The default 14 transport resource mappings (indexed from 0 to 13) are added when thesystem is initialized, and you cannot modify them.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP to add the TRM mapping to theadjacent node.


134 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto TransmissionResources


134-1

NOTE

Before running this command, ensure that the adjacent node or the NodeB is added by runningthe BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE or ADD UNODEB.


This feature can be verified only by running the LST commands.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to check whether the transportresource mapping is correct.

2. If the mapping is incorrect, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD TRMMAP tomodify the mapping.

NOTE

Do not modify Interface Type and Transport Type in the MOD TRMMAP command.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ADJMAP to remove the TRM mapping to

the adjacent node.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV TRMMAP to remove the transport resource

mapping.

----End

Example//Activating Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission ResourcesADD TRMMAP: TMI=15, REMARK="15", ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, VOICEPRIPATH=AF11;ADD ADJMAP: ANI=10, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=15, TMISLV=15, TMIBRZ=15, FTI=13;

//Verifying Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission ResourcesLST TRMMAP: TMI=15;MOD TRMMAP: TMI=15, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, CCHSECPATH=RT_VBR;

//Deactivating Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission ResourcesRMV ADJMAP: ANI=10,ITFT=IUB,CNMNGMODE=SHARE;RMV TRMMAP: TMI=15;

134 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto TransmissionResources



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

135 Configuring Differentiated ServiceBased on SPI Weight

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020806Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight.



– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:– WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR has been configured before

this feature is applied in the downlink over the Uu interface.– WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling or WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE

Resource Management has been configured before this feature is applied in theuplink over the Uu interface. When this feature is enabled together with the optionalfeature WRFD-01061402 Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling, only uplink Uu interfaceresources can be differentially scheduled. When this feature is enabled together withthe optional feature RFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management, both uplinkUu interface resources and CE resources can be differentially scheduled.

– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-050405 Overbooking onATM Transmission, or WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package andWRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP Transmission have been configured before thisfeature is applied in the downlink over the Iub interface.

– WRFD-010637 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion has beenconfigured before this feature is applied in the uplink over the Iub interface.


ContextWhen Uu interface resources, CE resources, and Iub transmission resources do not meet theGBR requirements of all online users, this feature enables the RAN to preferentially guaranteethe GBR of high-priority users. The RAN can thereby provide differentiated services under acertain level of fairness.

RANFeature Activation Guide 135 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight


135-1


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERPRIORITY to configure gold,silver, and copper users.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UTHPCLASS to set priorities of PSinteractive services to appropriate values.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USCHEDULEPRIOMAP to set thescheduling priority mapping information.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCAPARATERANGE to set RNC-specificreference rates and rate thresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlink.

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADDUOPERCAPARATERANGE to set operator-specific reference rates and ratethresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlink.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USPIWEIGHT to set RNC-specificscheduling priority weight.

7. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOPERSPIWEIGHT to setoperator-specific scheduling priority weight.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, setProcess switch to NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH.

l Verification Procedure1. Establish services on UE A and UE B. Assume that the SPI and SPI weight of UE A

are 7 and 50 respectively and the SPI and SPI weight of UE B are 7 and 100respectively. In the traced Iub interface messages, check the information element (IE)schedulingPriorityIndicator in the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message to obtainthe SPI value; check the IE schedule-Prior-Indication-Weight-Private to obtain theSPI weight, which is the actual SPI value for the NodeB, as shown in Figure 135-1,Figure 135-2, Figure 135-3, and Figure 135-4.

135 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI WeightRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 135-1 SPI and SPI weight of UE A in the uplink



135-3

Figure 135-2 SPI and SPI weight of UE A in the downlink

Figure 135-3 SPI and SPI weight of UE B in the uplink




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 135-4 SPI and SPI weight of UE B in the downlink

2. Check the real-time throughput of UEs by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput

and Bandwidth and Monitoring DL Throughput and Bandwidth.Generally, if the throughput of users with higher SPI weight is higher than that of userswith lower SPI weight, this feature has taken effect. The throughput of UE B isapproximately twice the throughput of UE A, as shown in theNBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message. If the throughput of users with higher SPIweight is lower than that of users with lower SPI weight, this feature has not takeneffect.


----End

Example/*Activating Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight*/

//Configuring gold, silver, and copper usersSET UUSERPRIORITY: ARP1Priority=Gold, ARP2Priority=Gold, ARP3Priority=Gold, ARP4Priority=Gold, ARP5Priority=Gold, ARP6Priority=Silver, ARP7Priority=Silver, ARP8Priority=Silver, ARP9Priority=Silver, ARP10Priority=Silver, ARP11Priority=Copper, ARP12Priority=Copper, ARP13Priority=Copper, ARP14Priority=Copper, ARP15Priority=Copper, PriorityReference=ARP, CarrierTypePriorInd=NONE;

//Setting the priorities of PS interactive servicesSET UTHPCLASS: THP1Class=High, THP2Class=High, THP3Class=High,



135-5

THP4Class=High, THP5Class=High, THP6Class=Medium, THP7Class=Medium, THP8Class=Medium, THP9Class=Medium, THP10Class=Medium, THP11Class=Low, THP12Class=Low, THP13Class=Low, THP14Class=Low, THP15Class=Low;

//Setting the scheduling priority mapping informationSET USCHEDULEPRIOMAP: TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, UserPriority=GOLD, THPClass=High, SPI=7;

//Setting the RNC-specific reference rates and rate thresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlinkSET UCAPARATERANGE: DlCapacitySelect=MBR, DlRateThreshold1=128, DlRateThreshold2=256, DlRateThreshold3=512, DlRateThreshold4=1000, DlRateThreshold5=4000, DlRateThreshold6=8000, DlRateThreshold7=10000, DlRateThreshold8=20000, DlRateThreshold9=45000, UlCapacitySelect=MBR, UlRateThreshold1=128, UlRateThreshold2=256, UlRateThreshold3=512, UlRateThreshold4=1000, UlRateThreshold5=4000, UlRateThreshold6=8000, UlRateThreshold7=10000, UlRateThreshold8=20000, UlRateThreshold9=45000;

//Setting the operator-specific reference rates and rate thresholds of all levels in the uplink and downlinkADD UOPERCAPARATERANGE: CnOpIndex=0, DlRateThreshold1=128, DlRateThreshold2=384, DlRateThreshold3=512, DlRateThreshold4=1000, DlRateThreshold5=2000, DlRateThreshold6=4000, DlRateThreshold7=8000, DlRateThreshold8=16000, DlRateThreshold9=32000, UlRateThreshold1=128, UlRateThreshold2=384, UlRateThreshold3=512, UlRateThreshold4=768, UlRateThreshold5=1000, UlRateThreshold6=1500, UlRateThreshold7=2500, UlRateThreshold8=5500, UlRateThreshold9=7500;

//Setting the RNC-specific scheduling priority weightSET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=7, SpiWeight=100, RateRangeSPIWeightInd=TRUE, DlRateRange1SPIWeight=10, DlRateRange2SPIWeight=20, DlRateRange3SPIWeight=30, DlRateRange4SPIWeight=40, DlRateRange5SPIWeight=50, DlRateRange6SPIWeight=60, DlRateRange7SPIWeight=70, DlRateRange8SPIWeight=80, DlRateRange9SPIWeight=90, DlRateRange10SPIWeight=100, UlRateRange1SPIWeight=10, UlRateRange2SPIWeight=20, UlRateRange3SPIWeight=30, UlRateRange4SPIWeight=40, UlRateRange5SPIWeight=50, UlRateRange6SPIWeight=60, UlRateRange7SPIWeight=70, UlRateRange8SPIWeight=80, UlRateRange9SPIWeight=90, UlRateRange10SPIWeight=100;

//Setting the operator-specific scheduling priority weightADD UOPERSPIWEIGHT: CnOpIndex=0, SPI=7, RateRangeSPIWeightInd=TRUE;//Enabling the switch for a NodeB private interfaceSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

136 Configuring Web BrowsingAcceleration

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020132Web Browsing Acceleration.


– BTS3812E and BTS3812AE series base stations are configured with EBBI or EDLPboards. HBBI and HDLP boards do not support this feature.

– DBS3800 series base stations are configured with EBBC or EBBCd boards. The HBBUboard does not support this feature.

– 3900 series base stations are configured with WBBPb or WBBPd boards. The WBBPaboard does not support this feature.

– The Network Intelligence Unit REV:a (NIUa) board is ready. The NIUa board can behoused in the same slot as the DPUb or DPUe board. For details of inserting a NIUaboard, see Inserting a Board.



ContextThis feature enables the RNC to identify web browsing services by parsing packets and therebyto preferentially allocate higher bandwidth to these services. As a result, web browsing servicestake shorter time and the user experience is improved.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a NIUa board. In this step, setthe Board Class to NIU, and set the Board Type to NIUa.

2. Set the initial Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI) weight on the BSC6900 LMT.

RANFeature Activation Guide 136 Configuring Web Browsing Acceleration


136-1

– If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on, run the BSC6900MML command SET USPIWEIGHT to configure weight of each SPI. In thisstep, set Scheduling Priority Indicator and SPI Weight to appropriate valuesbased on the network plan.

– If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on, run theBSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to set Default SPI Weight to anappropriate value based on the network plan.


4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIPSERVICEQOS to add the prioritymapping of HTTP services.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA to set scheduling priorityweight that corresponds to services of each priority to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Verify that the value of the counter VS.IuPS.BytesPayldHTTP.Rx is not 0. If it is not

0, this feature has been activated.l Deactivation Procedure


----End

Example//Activating Web Browsing Acceleration

//ADD a NIUa BoardADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=8, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

//Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on SET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=4, SPIWEIGHT=10;

//Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on SET UFRC: DefaultSPIWeight=10;

//Turning on the switch for a NodeB private interfaceSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;

//Adding the priority mapping of HTTP services ADD UIPSERVICEQOS: CnOpIndex=0, TrafficType=HTTP, TrafficPriority=HIGH;

//Setting scheduling priority weight that corresponds to services of each prioritySET UDPUCFGDATA: ServPriAdjCoefHigh=100, ServPriAdjCoefMiddle=10, ServPriAdjCoefLow=1;

136 Configuring Web Browsing AccelerationRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

137 Configuring P2P Downloading RateControl during Busy Hour

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020133P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour.


– BTS3812E and BTS3812AE series base stations are configured with EBBI or EDLPboards. HBBI and HDLP boards do not support this feature.

– DBS3800 series base stations are configured with EBBC or EBBCd boards. The HBBUboard does not support this feature.

– 3900 series base stations are configured with WBBPb or WBBPd boards. The WBBPaboard does not support this feature.

– The Network Intelligence Unit REV:a (NIUa) board is ready. The NIUa board can behoused in the same slot as the DPUb or DPUe board. For details of inserting a NIUaboard, see Inserting a Board.




Context

This feature restricts point to point service (P2P) traffic during busy hours, thereby improvingthe user experience of other delay-sensitive services and reducing operating costs. During non-busy hours, P2P downloads are not restricted, thereby improving the user experience of P2Pusers and full utilizing network resources.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add a NIUa board. In this step, setthe Board Class to NIU, and set the Board Type to NIUa.


137 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during BusyHour


137-1

2. Set the initial Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI) weight on the BSC6900 LMT.

– If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on, run the BSC6900MML command SET USPIWEIGHT to configure weight of each SPI. In thisstep, set Scheduling Priority Indicator and SPI Weight to appropriate valuesbased on the network plan.

– If the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on, run theBSC6900 MML command SET UFRC to set Default SPI Weight to anappropriate value based on the network plan.


4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIPSERVICEQOS to add the prioritymapping of P2P services.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA to set scheduling priorityweight that corresponds to services of each priority to appropriate values.


1. Verify that the value of the counter VS.IuPS.BytesPayldP2P.Rx is not 0. If it is not 0,this feature has been activated.



----End

Example//Activating P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour

//ADD a NIUa BoardADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=NIU, BRDTYPE=NIUa, SN=8, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;

//Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on SET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=4, SPIWEIGHT=10;

//Setting the initial SPI weight value if the switch for the license control item of the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on SET UFRC: DefaultSPIWeight=10;

//Turning on the switch for a NodeB private interfaceSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;

//Adding the priority mapping of P2P services ADD UIPSERVICEQOS: CnOpIndex=0, TrafficType=P2P, TrafficPriority=LOW;

//Setting scheduling priority weight that corresponds to services of each prioritySET UDPUCFGDATA: ServPriAdjCoefHigh=100, ServPriAdjCoefMiddle=10, ServPriAdjCoefLow=1;

137 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during BusyHour



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

138 Configuring Intelligent Inter-CarrierUE Layered Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020135Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.




– The feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package must be configured before thisfeature is activated.

l License


Context

This feature allows the RAN to intelligently distinguish between UEs and data cards in multi-carrier scenarios and to separately set up services on different carriers.


The following methods assume that cell F1 and cell F2 are used.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, set Device TypeSteering DRD Switch to ON.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLICENSE twice to enable thelayered terminal management function for cell F1 and cell F2 respectively. In this step,set FuncSwitch1 to INTELLIGENT_INTERFREQ_UE_TYPE_STEERING.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Direct Retry Switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UDEVICETYPEIMSI. In this step, setIMSI Segment Choice to MultiIMSI and specify the IMSI number range by setting


138 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE LayeredManagement


138-1

IMSI Segment Start Value and IMSI Segment End Value. If the IMSI of a terminalfalls into the IMSI number range, the terminal is regarded as a data card.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UDEVICETYPEPRIOGROUP to addterminal type priorities.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLSETUP twice to bind a terminaltype priority to cell F1 and cell F2 respectively.

7. Optional: Configure preferred camping. Cell F1 is a preferred camping frequency,and cell F2 is a services balancing frequency.

NOTE

This feature does not depend on the camping policy setting of an existing network. When thisfeature is activated and cell F2 provides discontinuous coverage, you must configure inter-frequency neighboring cells for cell F2 during network optimization so that this feature can beenabled.

– Method 1

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSELRESEL to make itdifficult for UEs in idle mode to trigger inter-frequency measurement. In thisstep, set Inter-freq cell reselection threshold for idle mode of cell F1 to0.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSELRESEL to make UEsin idle mode keep triggering inter-frequency measurement. In this step, setInter-freq cell reselection threshold for idle mode of cell F2 to 127.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL to setinter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F1 to cell F2).

– Set SIB11 Indicator to TRUE(Send).

– Set IdleQoffset1sn and IdleQoffset2sn to 20.

– Set SIB12 Indicator to FALSE(Do not send).(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL to set

inter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F2 to cell F1).

– Set SIB11 Indicator to TRUE(Send).

– Set IdleQoffset1sn and IdleQoffset2sn to -20.

– Set SIB12 Indicator to FALSE(Do not send).(5) For cell F2 that provides discontinuous coverage, it is recommended to run

the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSELRESEL to prevent UEsin idle mode from camping on the edge of cell F2. In this step, set Min QualityLevel to -10 and Min RX level to -48.

(6) When the UE state transition function is enabled, it is recommended to turnon the SIB4 message switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLSIBSWITCH to turn on the SIB4 message switch of cell F2. In thisstep, select the SIB4 check box under the parameter SIB Switch.

– Method 2

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT to forbidUE access to cell F2. Set the parameters according to the network condition.


1. On the Trace tab page of the BSC6900 LMT, initiate Uu interface tracing, as shownin Figure 138-1.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 138-1 Uu interface tracing task


3. Check that data card A is in idle mode and camps on cell F2. The priority of data cardsin cell F1 (the cell ID is 11013) is higher than that of data cards in cell F2 (the cell IDis 11014).

4. Use data card A to establish an R99 PS service, and check the messages traced on theUu interface.The BSC6900 sends an RRC_RB_SETUP message to data card A in cell F2. Datacard A responds to the BSC6900 with an RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message in cellF1. The R99 PS service is established in cell F1, as shown in Figure 138-2.

Figure 138-2 Message tracing





138-3

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, set Device TypeSteering DRD Switch to OFF.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLLICENSE to disable the layeredterminal management function for the cell.

----End

Example//Activating Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management//Turning on the layered terminal management switchSET UDRD: DPGDRDSwitch=ON;//Enabling the layered terminal management function for cell F1 and cell F2ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11013, INTELLIGENT_INTERFREQ_UE_TYPE_STEERING-1;ADD UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11014, INTELLIGENT_INTERFREQ_UE_TYPE_STEERING-1;//Turning on the single-service DRD switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1;//Configuring an IMSI number rangeADD UDEVICETYPEIMSI: IMSISegIndex=1, IMSISegChoice=MultiIMSI, IMSIStart="502808888800070", IMSIEnd="502808888800080";//Adding terminal type prioritiesADD UDEVICETYPEPRIOGROUP: DPGId=1, UEDP=1, DataCardDP=1, ReservedDP=1;ADD UDEVICETYPEPRIOGROUP: DPGId=2, UEDP=2, DataCardDP=2, ReservedDP=1;//Binding terminal type priorities to cellsADD UCELLSETUP: CellId=11013, CellName="Cell1", BandInd=Band1, PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=11014, CnOpGrpIndex=0, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9612, UARFCNDownlink=10562, TCell=CHIP256, PScrambCode=2, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, SpgId=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=0, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, DPGId=1;ADD UCELLSETUP: CellId=11014, CellName="Cell2", BandInd=Band1, PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=11013, CnOpGrpIndex=0, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9612, UARFCNDownlink=10562, TCell=CHIP256, PScrambCode=2, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, SpgId=8, NodeBName="NodeB2", LoCell=1, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, DPGId=2;

//Configuring cell reselection for cell F1MOD UCELLSELRESEL:CellId=11013, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, IdleSintersearch=0;//Configuring cell reselection for cell F2MOD UCELLSELRESEL:CellId=11014, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, IdleSintersearch=127, ConnSintrasearch=5, ConnSintersearch=2, SsearchRat=2;//Configuring co-coverage inter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F1 to cell F2)MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=3012, CellId=11013, NCellRncId=3012, NCellId=11014, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, IdleQoffset1sn=20, IdleQoffset2sn=20;//Configuring co-coverage inter-frequency neighboring cell parameters (cell F2 to cell F1)MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=3012, CellId=11014, NCellRncId=3012, NCellId=11013, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, IdleQoffset1sn=-20, IdleQoffset2sn=-20;//Turning on the SIB4 message switch for cell F2MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH: CellId=11014, SibCfgBitMap=SIB4-1;MOD UCELLSELRESEL: CellId=11014, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, Qqualmin=-10, Qrxlevmin=-48;//Deactivating Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management//Turning off the layered terminal management switchSET UDRD: DPGDRDSwitch=OFF;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Disabling the layered terminal management function for a cellRMV UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11013;RMV UCELLLICENSE: CellId=11014;




138-5

139 Configuring Inter Frequency HardHandover Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020302Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage.





– The UE supports relevant measurements and the handover procedure.

ContextThis feature introduces inter-frequency hard handover triggered by Active Set qualitymeasurement event 2D or by Uplink Radio Link Qos or emergency blind handover triggered byevent 1F.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver Switchdrop-down list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERFREQHOCOV (cell level)or SET UINTERFREQHOCOV (RNC level) to configure parameters related tocoverage-based inter-frequency hard handover.



139 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based onCoverage


139-1

1. Attenuate signals in the current cell that the UE accesses to trigger reporting of event2D by the UE.

2. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT.

3. Check whether the RNC has sent the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and thetraced message contains thresholds for triggering events 2D and 2F and the reportingmode.

4. Check whether the RNC has sent the UE an RRC_MEAS_RPRT message and thetraced message contains an event 2D measurement report shown in Figure 139-1.

Figure 139-1 Event 2D measurement report

5. After the event 2D measurement report is reported, check whether the RNC has sentthe UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and the traced message contains theinformation element interFrequencyMeasurement, as shown in Figure 139-2.

Figure 139-2 Inter-frequency measurement control message





Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from HandOver Switch.

----End

Example//Activating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on CoverageSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1ADD UINTERFREQNCELL:RncId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, CIOOffset=0, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, HOCovPrio=1, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE;ADD UCELLINTERFREQHOCOV: CellId=1, InterFreqReportMode=EVENT_TRIGGER, InterFreqMeasTime=60;//Deactivating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on CoverageSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-0;




139-3

140 Configuring Inter Frequency HardHandover Based on DL QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020304Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS.





l License


Context

When the load of services is high in a cell and downlink QoS decreases, this feature enables theUE to be handed over to an inter-frequency cell, guaranteeing QoS requirements.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to activate theinter-frequency hard handover.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERFREQHOCOV (cell level)or SET UINTERFREQHOCOV (BSC6900 level) to configure parameters relatedto DL-QoS-based inter-frequency hard handover.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to activate inter-frequency hardhandover based on downlink QoS for BE services.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to activate inter-frequency hardhandover based on downlink QoS for AMR and AMR-WB services.


140 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based onDL QoS


140-1

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to activate inter-frequency hardhandover based on downlink QoS for VP services.

l Verification Procedure1. Log in to the BSC6900 LMT and start Uu Interface Trace.2. Ensure that the BSC6900 sends to the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message, which

carries the 6A measurement control information, as shown in Figure 140-1.


3. Ensure that the UE reports to the BSC6900 an RRC_MEAS_RPRT message, which

carries the 6A1 report, as shown in Figure 140-2.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


4. Ensure that the BSC6900 sends to the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and startsinter-frequency measurement of the event or period type. Then, check that thecorresponding traced message indicates that the BSC6900 has sent the inter-frequencymeasurement control message to the UE, as shown in Figure 140-3.



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to deactivate inter-frequencyhard handover based on downlink QoS for BE services.




140-3

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to deactivate inter-frequencyhard handover based on downlink QoS for AMR and AMR-WB services.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to deactivate inter-frequencyhard handover based on downlink QoS for VP services.

----End

Example//Activating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoSSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;ADD UINTERFREQNCELL:RncId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, CIOOffset=0, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, HOCovPrio=1, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE;ADD UCELLQOSHO: CellId=111, DlRscpQosHyst=5, DLQosMcTimerLen=20, ULQosMcTimerLen=20;SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeDlAct1=InterFreqHO;SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=YES, DlQosAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=YES;SET UQOSACT: VPQosPerform=YES, DlQosVpInterFreqHoSwitch=YES;//Deactivating Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoSRMV UCELLQOSHO: CellId=111;SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=NO; or SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeDlAct1=None, BeDlAct2=None, BeDlAct3=None;SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=NO; or SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=YES, DlQosAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=NO, DlQosWAmrInterFreqHoSwitch=NO;SET UQOSACT: VPQosPerform=NO; or SET UQOSACT: VPQosPerform=YES, DlQosVpInterFreqHoSwitch=NO;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

141 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UENot Involved)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved).



– The feature WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction Package has beenconfigured before this feature is activated.


l Others Prerequisites– The CN supports this feature.– Both the SRNC and the DRNC support this feature.

ContextThis feature supports the SRNS relocation procedure based on the standard Iu interface definedby 3GPP specifications. The static SRNS relocation procedure does not involve the UE and radioconnections are not affected during the relocation. Therefore, static SRNS relocation is anoptimal relocation mode.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address to aninterface board.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC to add an Internet Protocol overATM (IPoA) permanent virtual circuit (PVC). In this step:– Set IP address to the device IP address of the interface board.– Set Peer IP address to the IP address of the serving GPRS support node (SGSN).

RANFeature Activation Guide 141 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)


141-1

– The VPI and VCI must be the same as those configured on the SGSN side. Youcan run the command LST IPOA on the SGSN maintenance terminal to query thesettings of the VPI and VCI on the SGSN side.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add a route from the BSC6900 tothe DRNC. In this step:– Set Subrack No. and Slot No. respectively to the subrack number and slot number

of the Iu-PS interface board carrying the IP path.– Set Destination IP Address to the IP address of the DRNC on the Iu interface.– Set Forward route address to the IP address of the SGSN gateway.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path for static SRNSrelocation. In this step:– Set Adjacent Node ID to the adjacent node ID of the SGSN.– Set Interface Type to IUR(Iur Interface).– Set Local IP address to the IP address of the SRNC on the Iu interface.– Set Peer IP address to the Iu IP address of the DRNC on the Iu interface.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL to add a cell to theneighboring RNC.


7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select the HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH check box under theparameter HandOver Switch and select theSRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH check box under the parameterSRNSR Algorithm Switch.

NOTE

SRNS relocation can be triggered by Iur transmission resource optimization, locationseparation, delay optimization, and separation time.

The preceding procedure takes delay optimization as an example to describe the dataconfiguration.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USRNSR. In this step, select the Allservice check box under the parameter SRNS Relocation-Allowed Traffic Type.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC. In this step, set SHO cross IURtrigger to an appropriate value based on the network plan, and set Handover Typefor PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.

l Verification Procedure1. The following procedure takes SRNS relocation from SRNC (RNC1) to DRNC

(RNC2) as an example. Initiate interface message tracing on both RNC1 LMT andRNC2 LMT. Configure Iu interface message tracing, as shown in Figure 141-1.Configure Iur interface message tracing, as shown in Figure 141-2.

141 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


Figure 141-2 Iur Interface Trace dialog box

Call drops do not occur during SRNS relocation if all the following messages aretraced:

– On the Iu interface of RNC1:

– RNC1->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED

– CN->RNC1 RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND

– On the Iu interface of RNC2:

– RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ

– CN->RNC2 RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK

– RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT

– RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE

– On the Iur interface between RNC1 and RNC2:

– RNC1->RNC2: RNSAP_RELOCATION_COMMIT



141-3

– On the Iu interface of RNC1:– CN->RNC1 RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND– RNC1->CN RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE


deselect the HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH check box under theparameter HandOver Switch and deselect theSRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH check box under the parameterSRNSR Algorithm Switch.

----End

Example//Activating SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

//Adding a device IP address to an interface boardADD DEVIP:IPADDR="172.12.10.181", SRN=0, SN=24, MASK="255.255.255.0", DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, MTU=1696;

//Adding an Internet Protocol over ATM (IPoA) permanent virtual circuit (PVC)ADD IPOAPVC:IPADDR="172.12.10.181", PEERIPADDR="172.12.10.254", CARRYT=NCOPT, CARRYNCOPTN=0, CARRYVPI=182, CARRYVCI=50, TXTRFX=105, RXTRFX=105, PEERT=IUPS;

//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the DRNCADD IPRT:SRN=0, SN=24, DSTIP="172.12.10.226", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="172.12.10.254", REMARK="Reloc route-RNC226", PRIORITY=HIGH;

//Adding an IP path for static SRNS relocationADD IPPATH:ANI=1, PATHID=3, IPADDR="172.12.10.181", PEERIPADDR="172.12.10.226", VLANFLAG=DISABLE, PATHT=EF, PEERMASK="255.255.255.255", TXBW=100000, RXBW=100000, PATHCHK=DISABLED, ITFT=IUPS, TRMLOADTHINDEX=2;

//Adding a cell to the neighboring RNCADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=2, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="111", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=0, BandInd=Band2, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=12, UARFCNDownlink=412, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=1, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, CellCapContainerFdd=DELAY_ACTIVATION_SUPPORT-0, OverLayMobilityFlag=FORBIDDEN, EFachSupInd=FALSE;

//Adding an intra-frequency neighboring cellADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=311, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;

//Setting the BSC6900-level algorithm switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1, SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the type of service that allows SRNS relocationSET USRNSR: SrnsRabCnDomainType=ALL;

//Setting the type of service that allows cross-Iur handoversMOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1,

141 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

//Deactivating SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

//Setting the BSC6900-level algorithm switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0, SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-0;



141-5

142 Configuring SRNS Relocation withHard Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package.


l Other Prerequisites– The SRNC and the DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.– The CN must support this feature simultaneously.

ContextWhen the Iur interface is unavailable, this feature enables the UE to move between RNCs.

This feature is enabled when the Iur interface does not exist, or the resources for the connectionsetup on the Iur interface are insufficient.



2. UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on Cell 111.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to select

HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH andHO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver switch list.

RANFeature Activation Guide 142 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover


142-1

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC to set HHO cross IUR triggerto ON and Handover Type for PS BE Traffic toCORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate standard interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT to perform the verifying

procedure. No call drops occur during the transition.

You can view the transition procedure on the Iu interface tracing pane of RNC1, asshown in Figure 142-1.

Take RNC1 as the SRNC, and RNC2 as the DRNC for example. When the Iur interfacebetween RNC1 and RNC2 is unavailable, this feature enables the UE to move betweenRNCs.

142 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 142-1 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover



----End

Example//Activating SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

//Add an intra-frequency neighboring cell

RANFeature Activation Guide 142 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover


142-3

ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=312, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE;

//Select HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver switch listSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;

//Turn on HHO cross IUR trigger, and set Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOCMOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, HHOTRIG=ON, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

142 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

143 Configuring SRNS Relocation withCell/URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction Package.


l Other Prerequisites– The CN and the DRNC must support this feature simultaneously.

ContextIf the Iur interface supports the Iur-CCH, inter-RNC cell/URA update normally does not triggerthe relocation. Instead, the relocation is triggered through the static relocation procedure. SNSRrelocation triggered by cell/URA update is performed when the following conditions are met:

l The cell update is complete.l The source cell and target cell belong to different RNCs.l Between the RNCs exist the Iur interface. The interface does not support the CCH, or the

Iur-CCH is not available.

The SNSR relocation can be triggered by cell reselection of UEs in the CELL_FACH,CELL_PCH, or URA_PCH state. The relocation is started after the Cell Update or URA Updatemessage from the UE is forwarded from the target RNC to the source RNC over the Iur interface.


RANFeature Activation Guide 143 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update


143-1

1. The Iur interface between RNC1 and RNC2 is working properly. On the HLR, set theUE to support background services of UL64K/DL 384K.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to set therelated switches so that the DCCC and state transition are supported.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to set thefollowing switches in the Dynamic resource allocation switch parameter:

– Set DRA_DCCC_SWITCH to 1.

– Set DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH to 1.

– Set DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH to 1.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set BE

DCH to FACH Transition Timer to 10.5. UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on Cell 111.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC to set IUR CCH support flag to

NO and Handover Type for PS BE Traffic toCORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate standard interface tracing on the RNC LMT to perform the verifying procedure

as follows:

If the following messages are displayed, you can infer that no call drops occur duringthe transition.

On the Iu interface tracing pane of RNC1

– RNC1->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED

– CN to RNC1: RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND

On the Uu interface tracing pane of RNC2

– CN->RNC2 RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ

– RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_REQ_ACK

– RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_DETECT

– RNC2->CN RANAP_RELOCATION_COMPLETE

On the Iur interface tracing between of RNC1 RNC2

– RNC1->RNC2: RNSAP_RELOCATION_COMMIT



----End

Example//Activating SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1;SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=10;MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=NO, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

143 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA UpdateRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

144 Configuring Inter-RAT HandoverBased on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020303Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage.






ContextThis feature supports measurement-based inter-RAT handover triggered by event 2D or uplinkUE QoS and urgent blind inter-RAT handover triggered by event 1F. This type of handover isapplicable to inter-RAT interworking based on coverage or caused by moving UEs.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH from the HandOver Switch list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add an inter-frequencyneighboring GSM cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERRATHOCOV (cell level)or SET UINTERRATHOCOV (RNC level) to configure parameters related tocoverage-based inter-RAT handover to GSM.


RANFeature Activation Guide 144 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage


144-1

1. Attenuate signals in the current cell that the UE accesses to trigger reporting of event2D by the UE.

2. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu MessageType, select RRC_MEAS_RPRT.

3. Check whether event 2D shown in Figure 144-1 has been reported in the tracedmessages.

Figure 144-1 Event 2D measurement report

4. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message

Type, select RRC_MEAS_CTRL.

5. Check in the traced messages whether the RNC has sent the UE an inter-RATmeasurement control message shown in Figure 144-2.



144 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on CoverageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to deactivatethis feature.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLINTERRATHOCOV (cell level)or SET UINTERRATHOCOV (RNC level) to remove or restore the parametersrelated to coverage-based inter-RAT handover to GSM.

----End

Example//Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on CoverageSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=&HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on CoverageSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch= HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 144 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage


144-3

145 Configuring Inter-RAT HandoverBased on DL QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020309Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS.






ContextWhen the load of voice and PS BE services is high in a cell and downlink QoS decreases, thisfeature enables the UE to be handed over to an inter-RAT cell, guaranteeing QoS requirements.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add an inter-RATneighboring cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSHO to set BSC6900-level parametersrelated to Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to turn on QoS switches fordifferent traffic classes.


RANFeature Activation Guide 145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS


145-1

1. Log in to the BSC6900 LMT and start Uu Interface Trace.2. Check that the BSC6900 sends to the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message, which

carries the 6A measurement control information, as shown in Figure 145-1.


3. Ensure that the UE sends to the BSC6900 an RRC_MEAS_RPRT message, which

carries the 6A1 report, as shown in Figure 145-2.

145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


4. Ensure that the BSC6900 sends to the UE an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message and startsinter-frequency measurement of the event or period type. Then, check that thecorresponding traced message indicates that the BSC6900 sends the inter-frequencymeasurement control message to the UE, as shown in Figure 145-3.



1. Run the BSC6900 command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, deselectHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH and

RANFeature Activation Guide 145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS


145-3

HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH from the drop-down list of HandOverSwitch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to turn off QoS switches fordifferent traffic classes.

----End

Example//Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoSSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, AMRQosPerform=YES, VPQosPerform=YES, BeDlAct1=InterRatHO, DlQosAmrInterRatHoSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrInterRatHoSwitch=YES, DlQosAmrInterRatHoSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrInterRatHoSwitch=YES;//Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoSSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0;SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=NO, AMRQosPerform=NO, VPQosPerform=NO;

145 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

146 Configuring Video TelephonyFallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO



– The CN complies with 3GPP Release 6 or later.l Dependencies on Other Features

– One or multiple of the following features must be configured before this feature isactivated:

– WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

– WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

– WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

– WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)l License


– The UE complies with 3GPP Release 6 or later.

Context

Before VP services are handed over to the 2G system, this feature enables the fallback of videotelephony to speech to ensure continuous calls. However, due to the limitation of UE and networksupport capability, the service may not be implemented. Therefore, Service Change and UDIFallback (SCUDIF) is introduced in 3GPP Release 6 to provide the mechanism to provide themechanism to fall back to speech without experiencing call drops in these scenarios.


The license controlling this feature has been activated.


146 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech(AMR) for Inter-RAT HO


146-1

l Verification Procedure1. Start Iu Interface Trace and Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT.2. After VP services are established, check in the Uu Interface Trace dialog box that

the UE sends to the BSC6900 an RRC_MEAS_RPRT message, which contains the3A report.

3. In the Iu Interface Trace dialog box, check that the BSC6900 sends anRAB_MODIFY_REQ message to the CN. In the RAB_MODIFY_REQ message,the value of the IE alternativeRABConfigurationRequest is alternative-RAB-configuration-Requested.


----End

146 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech(AMR) for Inter-RAT HO



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

147 Configuring Inter-RAT HandoverPhase 2



– BSC should support NACC RIM (RAN Information Management) and PS handoverprocedure.

l Dependencies on Other Features– This feature is required only when one or several of the following inter-RAT handover

features are introduced:– WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage– WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service– WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load– WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)


ContextThis feature provides the inter-RAT relocation procedure for NACC and PS services to shortenthe interruption time of PS services caused by inter-RAT handover.

The inter-RAT Handover Enhanced Package includes the following features:

l WRFD-02030801 NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)l WRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS

Procedurel For details about how to activate, verify, and deactivate this feature, see the following

sections:– 148 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)

RANFeature Activation Guide 147 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2


147-1

– 149 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS

----End

147 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

148 Configuring NACC(NetworkAssisted Cell Change)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change).




– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-020308 PS Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.

l License


Context

This feature supports the standard NACC procedure defined in 3GPP specifications.

The NACC refers to Network Assisted Cell Change from UTRAN to GERAN, which is differentfrom the normal cell change order procedure, because the network provides GERAN (P) SI forthe UE.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to open thefollowing switches in the HandOver switch parameter:

– HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH

– HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH

– HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH

NOTEWhen PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH is ON, this switch no longer takes effect.

RANFeature Activation Guide 148 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)


148-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL(for new neighboring cell)or MOD UEXT2GCELL (for the existing neighboring cell) to set Inter-RAT cellsupport RIM indicator to TRUE.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to check the

settings of the PS inter-RAT handover, NACC, and Relocation switches.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT2GCELL to check whether the inter-

RAT neighboring cell supports the RIM procedure.

NOTETo implement this feature, the UE should support NACC. Therefore, the NACC-supportive UEs arerequired for activation.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to set

HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in the HandOverswitch parameter to 0.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL to set Inter-RAT cellsupport RIM indicator to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activating NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)MOD UEXT2GCELL: SuppRIMFlag=FALSE;

148 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

149 Configuring PS Handover betweenUMTS and GPRS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-020308 PS Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.


Context

This feature enables the relocation of PS services (including non-real-time PS services and real-time PS services) between systems. In inter-system handover scenarios, this feature can greatlyimprove user perception, especially for real-time PS services.

The PS handover is different from NACC or normal cell change function, with which therelocation procedure between 3G and 2G is applied, just like the CS inter-system handover. Withthis feature, the service interruption for PS service inter-system handover is reduced by a greatextent.

In this feature, both the handover from UTRAN to GERAN and the handover from GERAN toUTRAN are supplied. If both the UE and the network support PS handover, handover betweenUTRAN and GERAN would be performed. Otherwise, either NACC or normal cell change orderwould be selected.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to open thefollowing switches in the HandOver switch parameter:

RANFeature Activation Guide 149 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS


149-1

– HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH– HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL to add a neighboring GSMcell to the UMTS coverage and to set the Inter-RAT cell support PS HOindicator parameter to TRUE.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add a neighboring GSMcell for the UMTS cell.

4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTERRATHOCOV to setinter-RAT handover measurement related parameters.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to check the

status of PS inter-RAT handover switch and the Relocation HO switch.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT2GCELL to ensure the inter-RAT

cell supports PS Handover.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERRATHOCOV to check inter-RAT

handover measurement related parameters.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to setHO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH in the HandOverswitch parameter to 0.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL to set theSuppPSHOFlag parameter to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activating PS Handover between UMTS and GPRSSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;ADD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=1, GSMCellName="GSMCELL1", NBscIndex=1, LdPrdRprtSwitch=ON, MCC="460", MNC="01", CnOpGrpIndex=1, LAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1, CID=1, NCC=1, BCC=1, BcchArfcn=512, RatCellType=GPRS, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, SuppPSHOFlag=TRUE;ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=100, GSMCellIndex=1;SET UINTERRATHOCOV: InterRatReportMode=PERIODICAL_REPORTING, FilterCoefOf2D2F=D4, InterRATFilterCoef=D6;//Deactivating PS Handover between UMTS and GPRSSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH-0;MOD UEXT2GCELL: SuppPSHOFlag=FALSE;

149 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

150 Configuring Mobility BetweenUMTS and LTE Phase 1

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020126Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1. For details about how to configure this feature onthe LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.


– The UE is a UMTS&LTE dual-mode terminal.l Dependencies on Other Features



– The UE supports both UMTS and LTE.– The LTE network supports this feature.

ContextThe feature Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 provides the following functions:

l Huawei UMTS supports bidirectional cell reselection between a UMTS cell and an LTEcell.

l Huawei UMTS supports PS handovers from an LTE cell to a UMTS cell

For details, see the RAN12.0 Optional Feature Description.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLSIBSWITCH or MODUCELLSIBSWITCH. In this step, set SIB Switch to SIB19.

After the information about the frequencies of neighboring LTE cells is configuredand SIB Switch is set to SIB19, the BSC6900 sends SIB19 messages to UEs. The

RANFeature Activation Guide 150 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1


150-1

SIB19 message contains the neighboring LTE cell list and LTE cell reselectionparameters.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLSELRESEL or MODUCELLSELRESEL. In this step, set Absolute priority level of the serving cell toan appropriate value.

Inter-RAT measurement is performed based on the settings of RSCP threshold forlow-prio-freq measurement initiation and Ec/No threshold for low-prio-freqmeasurement initiation. The measurement result provides a reference to cellreselection.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO or MODUCELLNFREQPRIOINFO to configure the information about the frequencies ofneighboring cells.

The UE makes cell reselection decisions based on the configured information aboutthe frequencies of neighboring cells.

4. Configure the related data, such as the neighboring cell relationships between cells,on the LTE side.For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the relateddocuments provided by the LTE equipment vendor. If the LTE equipment is providedby Huawei, see the LTE document Idle Mode Management Parameter Description.


displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On theunfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu InterfaceTrace dialog box, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE19 to trace Uu interface SIB19message.

150 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


2. Analyze the traced messages.

– If the SIB19 message has been traced on the Uu interface, as shown in Figure150-2, this feature has been activated.

– If the SIB19 message is not traced on the Uu interface, this feature is not activated.

Figure 150-2 SIB message tracing


NOTE

To deactivate this feature, you can either turn off the SIB19 switch or deactivate the license.

l To deactivate this feature in a specific cell, you are advised to turn off the SIB19 switch.

l To deactivate this feature in all cells under a BSC6900, deactivate the license. This method isnot recommended.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH. In this step,deselect the SIB19 check box under the parameter SIB Switch to turn off the SIB19switch in a cell. After the switch is turned off, the BSC6900 stops sending SIB19messages to UEs. In such a case, the configured absolute priority of the serving cell

RANFeature Activation Guide 150 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1


150-3

and the configured information about the frequencies of neighboring cells becomeineffective.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to deactivate the licensecontrolling the feature Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1.

----End

Example//Activating Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH: CellId=1, SibCfgBitMap=SIB19-1;MOD UCELLSELRESEL: CellId=1, QualMeas=CPICH_ECNO, QrxlevminExtSup=FALSE, NonhcsInd=NOT_CONFIGURED, ThdPrioritySearch1=2, ThdPrioritySearch2=2;MOD UCELLNFREQPRIOINFO: CellId=1, EARFCN=1, NPriority=2, BlacklstCellNumber=D0;//Deactivating Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1MOD UCELLSIBSWITCH: CellId=1, SibCfgBitMap=SIB19-0;SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH5=LQW1ULM01-0;

150 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

151 Configuring Service-Based PSService Redirection from UMTS to LTE (trial)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020129Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE (trial).


– There is no requirement for BSC6900 and NodeB.l Dependencies on Other Features


– The license controlling this feature has been activated.l Others

– The SGSN and UE support this feature.

ContextWith this feature, the operator can choose to hand over the high-speed PS services from theUMTS network to the LTE network. This helps fully utilize the UMTS and LTE networkresources, improving the user experience.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enableHO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ULTECELL. In this step, configure an LTEcell. Set LTE Cell Supporting PS HO Indicator to NotSupport and set BlackCellList Flag to False. After the UE reports a 3C measurement report of the LTE cell, theBSC6900 initiates a PS redirection procedure, not a PS handover procedure.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ULTENCELL to configure a neighboringLTE cell.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UU2LTEHONCOV to set RNC-OrientedNon-Coverage-Based UMTS-LTE Handover Measurement Algorithm


151 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection fromUMTS to LTE (trial)


151-1

Parameters. The BSC6900 sends these parameters to the UE by means of ameasurement control message.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLU2LTEHONCOV to set Cell-Oriented Non-Coverage-Based UMTS-LTE Handover Measurement AlgorithmParameters.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABBASIC to modify the basicconfiguration of a typical radio access bearer (RAB). In this step, set Service-BasedHandover to LTE Allowed to HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM.


Start Uu interface tracing on the LMT to trace messages on the Uu interface.

View the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message, as shown in Figure 151-1. If themeasurementCommand message contains the information element (IE) e-UTRA-FrequencyInfo, this feature takes effect. The measurement control message sent by theBSC6900 contains the LTE cell information.

After receiving the message, the UE measures the signal quality in the LTE cell. Themeasurement result serves as the basis for handover decision.

Figure 151-1 Viewing the IE e-UTRA-FrequencyInfo

View the RRC_CONN_REL message, as shown in Figure 151-2. If in the message therrcConnectionRelease message contains the IE EUTRA-TargetFreqInfo, the RRCconnection release message carries the LTE cell information.

After receiving this message, the UE is handed over to the LTE network and the UEreestablishes PS services in the LTE cell.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 151-2 Viewing the IE EUTRA-TargetFreqInfo

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to disable

HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

----End

Example//Activation procedure

//Enabling HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCHSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;

//Configuring an LTE cellADD ULTECELL: LTECellIndex=0, LTECellName="LTECELL", EUTRANCELLID=8, MCC="460", MNC="01", TAC=10, CnOpGrpIndex=1, CellPHYID=100, LTEBand=10, LTEArfcn=500;

//Configuring a neighboring LTE cellADD ULTENCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=2, LTECellIndex=1;

//Setting the parameters related to the RNC-oriented non coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement algorithmSET UU2LTEHONCOV: LTEMeasTypOf3C=MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D6, U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=2, TrigTime3C=D10, TargetRatThdRSRP=20, TargetRatThdRSRQ=30;

//Setting the parameters related to the cell-oriented non coverage-based UMTS-to-LTE handover measurement algorithmADD UCELLU2LTEHONCOV: CellId=1, LTEMeasTypOf3C=MeasurementQuantity, U2LTEFilterCoef=D6, U2LTEMeasTime=30, LTEMeasQuanOf3C=RSRP, Hystfor3C=2, TrigTime3C=D10, TargetRatThdRSRP=20, TargetRatThdRSRQ=30;

//Modifying the basic configuration of a typical RABMOD UTYPRABBASIC: RabIndex=1, EUTRANSHIND=HO_TO_EUTRAN_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM;

//Deactivation procedure

//Disabling HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH and HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCHSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_LTE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0&HO_LTE_SERVICE_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0;




151-3

152 Configuring Inter Frequency LoadBalance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020103Inter Frequency Load Balance.



– The two optional features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package andWRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this featureis activated.


ContextThis feature enables some UEs in a cell to be handed over to the inter-frequency same-coveragecells if the cell is in the primary congestion state. The purpose is to reduce the load of this cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enable therequired load reshuffling (LDR) algorithms:– UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm)– DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm)– CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)

2. Run the BSC6900 MML commands SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH and MODUCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set HandOver Switch toHO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH andHO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL to add an inter-frequency neighboring cell supporting blind handover, or to add an inter-frequency

RANFeature Activation Guide 152 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance


152-1

neighboring cell supporting measurement by setting the parameter DrdOrLdrFlagto an appropriate value.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERFREQHONCOV (celllevel) or SET UINTERFREQHONCOV (BSC6900 level) to set parameters relatedto load-based inter-RAT hard handover to appropriate values.

5. In the case of measurement-based inter-frequency handover, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UCELLLDR. In this step, set InterFreq Load Handover MethodSelection to MEASUREHO(MEASUREHO).

6. Set LDR-related thresholds as follows:– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM to set power LDR

thresholds (UL LDR trigger threshold, UL LDR release threshold, DL LDRtrigger threshold, DL LDR release threshold, and DL State Trans Hysteresisthreshold) to appropriate values.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set Cell LDR SFreserved threshold to an appropriate value.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR. In this step, set Codecongestion select inter-freq indication to TRUE(TRUE).

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD. In this step, set LDRperiod timer length to an appropriate value.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR. In this step, selectInterFreqLDHO(inter-freq load handover) as an LDR action and set otherparameters related to LDR actions to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the following BSC6900 MML commands to check whether this feature has been

activated.– LST UCELLALGOSWITCH– LST UCELLLDR– LST UCELLLDM– LST ULDCPERIOD– LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH– LST UINTERFREQNCELL– LST UCELLHOCOMM– LST UCELLINTERFREQHONCOV(cell level)– LST UINTERFREQHONCOV (BSC6900 level)

2. To check whether Inter Frequency Load Balance, which is one of LDR actions, hasbeen activated, see the verification procedure in 24 Configuring Load Reshuffling.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to deactivate the

following LDR algorithms:– UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm)– DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm)– CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)

2. Run the BSC6900 MML commands SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH and MODUCELLHOCOMM to deactivate the inter-frequency handover. In this step, close

152 Configuring Inter Frequency Load BalanceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH andHO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH through HandOver Switch.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR. In this step, set Codecongestion select inter-freq indication to FALSE(FALSE).

4. Restore the parameter settings modified in the activation procedure.

----End

Example//Activating Inter Frequency Load BalanceMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CODE_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=111, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERFREQ;ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=11, CellId=111, NCellRncId=22, NCellId=222, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;ADD UCELLINTERFREQHONCOV: CellId=111, InterFreqFilterCoef=D3, Hystfor2C=6, TrigTime2C=D640, InterFreqCovHOThdEcN0=-16, InterFreqMeasTime=60, PeriodFor2C=4, AmntOfRpt2C=5;MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection=MEASUREHO;MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=111, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, DlLdTrnsHysTime=1000;MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8;MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd=TRUE;SET ULDCPERIOD: LdrPeriodTimerLen=10;MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=InterFreqLDHO, DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd=20, DlInterFreqHoBWThd=200000;//Deactivating Inter Frequency Load BalanceMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CODE_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-0;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-0;MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=111, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERRAT;MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd= FALSE;

RANFeature Activation Guide 152 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance


152-3

153 Configuring Inter-RAT HandoverBased on Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020305Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.





l License


Context

This feature provides a mechanism for performing handover between GSM/GPRS and UMTSsystems on the basis of services. This feature forwards appropriate services in a UMTS systemto a GSM/GPRS system, balancing load between the two systems. This feature also preventsthe handover from adversely affecting services based on service attributes.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH from the HandOver Switch list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL to add a neighboring GSMcell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to set neighbor relation withthe neighboring GSM cell.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-RAT CS handover switch or Inter-RAT PS handover switch to ON.

RANFeature Activation Guide 153 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service


153-1

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERRATHONCOV (celllevel) or SET UINTERRATHONCOV (RNC level) to configure parameters relatedto non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover to GSM.

l Verification Procedure1. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message

Type, select RRC_MEAS_CTRL.

2. After services are set up, view in the traced messages whether the RNC has sent theUE an inter-frequency measurement control message shown in Figure 153-1.



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-RAT CS handover switch or Inter-RAT PS handover switch to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on ServiceSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=111, CSServiceHOSwitch=ON, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON;//Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on ServiceMOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=111, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=OFF;

153 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on ServiceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

154 Configuring Inter-RAT HandoverBased on Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020306Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load.



– If this feature is used for HSDPA or HSUPA load control, the feature WRFD-010610HSDPA Introduction Package or WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package hasbeen configured correspondingly before this feature is activated.


ContextThis feature is an important part of Load Reshuffling (LDR). It enables some UEs in a UMTScell to be blindly handed over to a GSM or GPRS cell to reduce the load of the UMTS cell.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to activate theinter-RAT handover. In this step, select theHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterHandOver Switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL to add the informationabout a GSM cell.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add the GSM cell as aneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLLDR to set the inter-RAT handoverpolicy for the UMTS cell. In this step, set DL LDR fourth action to

RANFeature Activation Guide 154 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load


154-1

CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should be load handover), DLLDR fifth action to PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should beload handover), UL LDR fourth action to CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(CSdomain inter-rat should be load handover), and UL LDR fifth action toPSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should be load handover).

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLINTERRATHONCOV (at the celllevel) or SET UINTERRATHONCOV (at the RNC level) to configure parametersrelated to non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover to GSM.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate Iu interface message tracing and Uu interface message tracing on the

BSC6900 LMT.2. Use a UE in the UMTS cell to call another UE in the same cell. The call is set up

successfully.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM to reduce the downlink LDR

threshold.The following messages can be traced on the Iu interface: theRANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message from the RNC to the CN, and theRANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND message from the CN to the RNC.The following message can be traced on the Uu interface: theRRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSM message from the RNC to the UE.The following messages can be traced on the Iu interface: theRANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message from the RNC to the CN, theRANAP_RELOCATION_COMMAND message from the CN to the RNC, theRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND message from the CN to the RNC, and theRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message from the RNC to the CN.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to deactivate the load-based

handover. In this step, set DL LDR fourth action, DL LDR fifth action, UL LDRfourth action, and UL LDR fifth action to NoAct.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to deactivatethe inter-RAT handover. In this step, deselect theHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterHandOver Switch.

----End

Example//Activating Inter-RAT Handover Based on LoadSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;ADD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=2, GSMCellName="2", NBscIndex=2, LdPrdRprtSwitch=OFF, MCC="460", MNC="07", CnOpGrpIndex=1, LAC=H'0012, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'01, CID=2, NCC=2, BCC=2, BcchArfcn=1000, RatCellType=GSM, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED;ADD U2GNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=2, GSMCellIndex=2, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, BlindHOPrio=1, NPrioFlag=FALSE;ADD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFourthAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrFifthAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrFourthAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrFifthAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO;

154 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on LoadRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ADD UCELLINTERRATHONCOV: CellId=1;//Deactivating Inter-RAT Handover Based on LoadMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, DlLdrFifthAction=NoAct, UlLdrFourthAction=NoAct, UlLdrFifthAction=NoAct;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-0&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 154 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load


154-3

155 Configuring DRD IntroductionPackage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020400DRD Introduction Package.





ContextThis feature supports co-coverage inter-frequency or inter-RAT directed retries and redirection.This feature consists of the following features:

l WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retryl WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retryl WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirectl WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

Procedurel For the procedures for activating, verifying, and deactivating the preceding features, see

the following sections:– 156 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry– 157 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry– 158 Configuring Inter-System Redirect– 159 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 155 Configuring DRD Introduction Package


155-1

156 Configuring Intra System DirectRetry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry.





ContextThis feature supports inter-RAT directed retries during RRC connection or radio resource bearer(RAB) assignment.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Direct retry switch to DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH,DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH, and DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, turn on the RNC-levelswitches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Load balance DRD switch for DCH, Loadbalance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code Balancing DRD Switch, Uplink loadbalance DRD Switch for DC-HSDPA, Measurement-Based DRD Switch, andDevice Type Steering DRD Switch.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDRD. In this step, turnon the cell-level switches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Load balance DRD switchfor DCH, Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code Balancing DRD Switch,Uplink load balance DRD Switch for DC-HSDPA, and Device Type Steering DRDSwitch.

RANFeature Activation Guide 156 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry


156-1

NOTEIf a cell is configured with both the RNC-level and cell-level parameters, the cell-level parametersettings take effect.

l Verification Procedure1. Method 1: Verifying this feature during RRC connection setup

(1) Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate a PSinteractive service.

(2) The UE sends an RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ message from cell 1 to theBSC6900. The BSC6900 sends the UE an RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUPmessage containing the scrambling code of cell 2.

(3) The UE sends an RRC_RRC_CONNECT_SETUP_CMP message from cell2 to the BSC6900. This indicates that this feature has been activated.

2. Method 2: Verifying this feature during radio bearer (RB) setup

(1) Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate a PSinteractive service.

(2) The BSC6900 sends an RRC_RB_SETUP message from cell 1 to the UE. TheUE sends an RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message from cell 2 to the BSC6900. Ifthe service is set up successfully in cell 2 and the data transmission is normal,this feature has been activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD to turn off the RNC-level switches.2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDRD to turn off the

cell-level switches.

----End

Example//Activating Intra System Direct RetrySET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH-1;

SET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON;

MOD UCELLDRD: CellId=10, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON;//Deactivating Intra System Direct RetrySET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF;

MOD UCELLDRD: CellId=10, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF;

156 Configuring Intra System Direct RetryRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

157 Configuring Inter System DirectRetry

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry.





ContextThis feature supports inter-RAT directed retries during RAB assignment.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Direct retry switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH,DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH, and DR_INTER_RAT_DRD_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, set the RNC-levelparameter Max inter-RAT direct retry number to a value other than zero, and turnon the following RNC-level switches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Load balanceDRD switch for DCH, Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code BalancingDRD Switch, Uplink load balance DRD Switch for DC-HSDPA, Measurement-Based DRD Switch, and Device Type Steering DRD Switch.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDRD. In this step, setthe cell-level parameter Max inter-RAT direct retry number to a value other thanzero. Turn on the following cell-level switches: Service Steering DRD Switch, Loadbalance DRD switch for DCH, Load balance DRD switch for HSDPA, Code

RANFeature Activation Guide 157 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry


157-1

Balancing DRD Switch, Uplink load balance DRD Switch for DC-HSDPA, andDevice Type Steering DRD Switch.


l Verification Procedure1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate a PS interactive

service.2. In the Uu Interface Trace dialog box, view the following procedure:

(1) The core network (CN) sends a RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message to theBSC6900.

(2) The BSC6900 responds to the CN with a RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RSP messagecontaining the cause value "direct retry."

(3) The BSC6900 sends the CN a RELOCATION REQUIRED messagecontaining the cause value "direct retry."

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, set Max Inter-RAT

direct retry number to 0. Turn off the RNC-level switches.2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDRD. In this step, set

Max inter-RAT direct retry number to 0. Turn off the cell-level switches.

----End

Example//Activating Inter System Direct RetrySET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH-1&DR_INTER_RAT_DRD_SWITCH;SET UDRD: DRMaxGSMNum=3, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON;MOD UCELLDRD: CellId=11, DRMaxGSMNum=3, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=ON, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=ON, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=ON, DPGDRDSwitch=ON;//Deactivating Inter System Direct RetrySET UDRD: DRMaxGSMNum=0, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF;MOD UCELLDRD: CellId=11, DRMaxGSMNum=0, ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchDCH=OFF, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=OFF, CodeBalancingDrdSwitch=OFF, ULLdbDRDSwitchDcHSDPA=OFF, DPGDRDSwitch=OFF;

157 Configuring Inter System Direct RetryRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

158 Configuring Inter-System Redirect

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect.





l License


Context

This feature allows inter-system redirection during RRC connection setup.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Direct Retry Switch to DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, setConnectFailRrcRedirSwitch to Allowed_To_Inter_RAT.


1. Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Use a UE to initiate an RRCconnection setup request.

2. The following procedure is traced on the Uu interface:

(1) The UE sends an RRC_SETUP_REQ message.

(2) The BSC6900 responds with an RRC_CONN_REJ message, carrying GSM-TargetCellInfo in the IE redirectioninfo.


RANFeature Activation Guide 158 Configuring Inter-System Redirect


158-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, set RRC redirectswitch to OFF or Only_To_Inter_Frequency.

----End

Example//Activating Inter-System RedirectSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-1;SET UDRD: ConnectFailRrcRedirSwitch=Allowed_To_Inter_RAT;//Deactivating Inter-System RedirectSET UDRD: ConnectFailRrcRedirSwitch=OFF;

158 Configuring Inter-System RedirectRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

159 Configuring Traffic Steering andLoad Sharing During RAB Setup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02040004 Service Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup.





Context

With this feature, service steering and load sharing among different frequencies or bands areimplemented during RAB setup based on the service type and cell load.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL. In this step, addan inter-frequency cell by setting the related parameters according to the network plan.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USPG. In this step, add a service prioritygroup and set the service priority of each type of service according to the networkplan.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP. In this step, set the cellservice priority by setting the related parameters according to the network plan.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Direct Retry Switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, turn on Servicedifferential drd switch and Measurement-Based DRD Switch.


159 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing DuringRAB Setup


159-1

l Verification Procedure1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.2. Use a UE in a cell to initiate a PS interactive service. This cell carries low-priority

services. The target inter-frequency neighboring cell has light load and carries high-priority services.

In the Uu Interface Trace dialog box, view the following procedure:

– After the UE in a cell sends an RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message, the BSC6900sends an RRC_PH_CH_RECFG message to the UE.

– The UE responds with an RRC_PH_CH_RECFG_CMP message.– The BSC6900 enters the compressed mode.– The UE in periodical mode sends an RRC_MEAS_CTRL message to the

BSC6900 to measure the signal quality of the target cell.– The BSC6900 sends the UE an RRC_RB_RECFG message containing the primary

scrambling code and frequency of the inter-frequency neighboring cell.– The UE sends an RRC_RB_RECFG_CMP message from the inter-frequency

neighboring cell.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD. In this step, turn off Servicedifferential drd switch and Measurement-Based DRD Switch.

----End

Example//Activating Service Steering and Load Sharing During RAB SetupADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=2, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;

ADD USPG: SpgId=1, PriorityServiceForR99RT=2, PriorityServiceForR99NRT=2, PriorityServiceForHSDPA=2, PriorityServiceForHSUPA=2, PriorityServiceForExtRab=1;

ADD USPG: SpgId=2, PriorityServiceForR99RT=1, PriorityServiceForR99NRT=1, PriorityServiceForHSDPA=1, PriorityServiceForHSUPA=1, PriorityServiceForExtRab=1;

MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, SpgId=1;

MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=2, SpgId=2;

SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1;

SET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=ON, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON;//Deactivating Service Steering and Load Sharing During RAB SetupSET UDRD: ServiceDiffDrdSwitch=OFF, BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF;

159 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing DuringRAB Setup



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

160 Configuring Inter-RAT RedirectionBased on Distance

This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature WRFD-020401 Inter-RATRedirection Based on Distance.



– The feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package has been configured before thisfeature is activated.


ContextIf a UE initiates a CS voice call with a long distance to the antenna of a 3G cell, the UE mayexperience call drops when the UE moves out of the pilot polluted area. To solve this problem,the RAN redirects a UE to a GSM cell based on the distance threshold when the UE initiates anRRC connection setup request.


1. This feature can be activated by using either of the following methods according tothe feature area:– To activate this feature in the entire BSC6900, run the BSC6900 MML command

SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION to set the BSC6900-level parameters.– Set Redirection Switch to ON.– Set Propagation delay threshold as specified in 3GPP TS 25.433– Set Redirection Factor Of LDR and Redirection Factor Of Normal to

appropriate values based on the network plan.– To activate this feature in a cell, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD

UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION to set the cell-level parameters.

RANFeature Activation Guide 160 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance


160-1

– Set Redirection Switch to ON.– Set Propagation delay threshold as specified in 3GPP TS 25.433.– Set Redirection Factor Of LDR and Redirection Factor Of Normal to

appropriate values based on the network plan.l Verification Procedure

1. Initiate Uu interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure160-1.


2. Simulate a scenario where pilot pollution occurs. Place the UE in a place where theUE is far away from the NodeB and pilot signals are strong. Then, use the UE toestablish a CS voice call.

3. Check the messages traced on the Uu interface.– As shown in Figure 160-2, if the RRC CONNECTION REJECT message

contains the information element (IE) GSM-Targetcellinfo, the RAN hasredirected the UE to the GSM network, and this feature has been activated.

– If the RRC CONNECTION REJECT message does not contain the IE GSM-Targetcellinfo, this feature is not activated.

160 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on DistanceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 160-2 GSM-Targetcellinfo IE

l Deactivation Procedure1. This feature can be deactivated by using either of the following methods according to

the feature area:– To deactivate this feature in the entire BSC6900, run the BSC6900 MML command

SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION. In this step, set Redirection Switch toOFF.

– To deactivate this feature in a cell, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION. In this step, set Redirection Switch toOFF.

----End

Example//Activating Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance//Activating this feature in the entire BSC6900SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION: RedirSwitch=ON, DelayThs=100, RedirFactorOfLDR=70, RedirFactorOfNorm=60;//Activating this feature in a specified cellADD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION: CellId=1, RedirSwitch=ON, DelayThs=100, RedirFactorOfLDR=80, RedirFactorOfNorm=60;//Deactivating Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance//Deactivating this feature in the entire BSC6900SET UDISTANCEREDIRECTION: RedirSwitch=OFF;//Deactivating this feature in a specified cellMOD UCELLDISTANCEREDIRECTION: CellId=1, RedirSwitch=OFF;

RANFeature Activation Guide 160 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance


160-3

161 Configuring Measurement-basedDirect Retry

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020402Measurement based Direct Retry.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package.


ContextAfter the setup of the UE RRC connection, the RNC can immediately initiate inter-frequencyor inter-system measurements. The RNC can then perform direct retries according to themeasurement results when the RAB assignment is received from the CN.

This feature can increase the success rate of DRD and reduce the drop rate caused by DRD withblind handover, improving the network performance.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ, turn on theswitch of Cell-Oriented inter-frequency measurement MBDR Switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBDRINTERRAT, turn on theswitch of Cell-Oriented inter-RAT measurement MBDR Switch.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL, set the Flag ofMBDR Cell to TRUE(send), according network planning to set the MBDR CellPeriority.


RANFeature Activation Guide 161 Configuring Measurement-based Direct Retry


161-1

1. When a large number of UEs access the cell, cell congestion occurs. At this time, ifhandover based on inter-frequency measurement is used to achieve load reshuffling(LDR), you can view the inter-frequency measurement control information on the Uuinterface. After the UE sends the inter-frequency measurement report, the UE will behanded over to another cell.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ, close the

MBDR Switch.

----End

Example//Activating Measurement based Direct Retry

//Turn on the switch of Cell-Oriented inter-frequency measurement ADD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ: CellId=1, InterFreqActiveType=CSAMR_INTERFREQ-1&CSNONAMR_INTERFREQ-1;&PSR99_INTERFREQ-1;&PSHSPA_INTERFREQ-1; InterFreqReportMode=EVENT_TRIGGER;

//Turn on the switch of Cell-Oriented inter-RAT measurement ADD UCELLMBDRINTERRAT: CellId=1, InterRatActiveType=CSAMR_INTERRAT-1;

//Set the Flag of MBDR Cell to TRUE(send), according network planning to set the MBDR Cell PeriorityADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=1, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=2, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, MBDRFlag=TRUE, MBDRPrio=2, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;//Deactivating Measurement based Direct RetryMOD UCELLMBDRINTERFREQ: InterFreqActiveType=CSAMR_INTERFREQ-0&CSNONAMR_INTERFREQ-0;&PSR99_INTERFREQ-0;&PSHSPA_INTERFREQ-0;

161 Configuring Measurement-based Direct RetryRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

162 Configuring Enhanced FastDormancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020500Enhanced Fast Dormancy.




– The license controlling this feature has been activated.The license can be activated by performing the following operation:Run the SET LICENSE command. In this step, set Fast Dormancy Enhancement-per PS Active User to an appropriate value.

l Other PrerequisitesWhen the network is a service-layered network as follows and RSVDBIT1_BIT29 in theSET URRCTRLSWITCH command has been set to 0, Wait RB reconfigurationresponse timer and RL restoration timer in the SET USTATETIMER command areset to 11000 and 15000 respectively.– Frequency F1 carries R99 services.– Frequency F2 carries HSPA services.– F2 cells are barred, and all users camp on F1 cells.

ContextAs the number of smart UEs keeps increasing in mobile networks, the networks face signalingstorms produced by these UEs. With rich experience in network optimization, Huawei providesa comprehensive end-to-end solution to respond to network challenges based on networkcharacteristics.

This feature is a component of the comprehensive solution. Deploying this feature only cannotsolve the signaling storm problem produced by smart UEs. Operators should use this featuretogether with professional services to optimize the quality of service of the entire network.

RANFeature Activation Guide 162 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy


162-1

CAUTIONl Consult Huawei engineers about the comprehensive solution to obtain professional technical

support.l Huawei engineers will recommend appropriate parameter settings for this feature based on

the network conditions.l Do not configure the parameters related to this feature without Huawei professional technical

support. Inappropriate parameter settings may lead to network failures.

Always on line can be provided for PS services of intelligent UEs to improve user experience.Always on line, however, will increase the power consumption of intelligent UEs. To prolongUE battery life, the Enhanced Fast Dormancy feature is introduced. When there is no PS datatransfer, the UE will send a signaling connection release indication (SCRI) message to requestthe BSC6900 to release the RRC connection and move the UE state to idle mode, CELL_PCH,or URA_PCH.

If this feature is not enabled, the BSC6900 will move the UE state to idle mode after theBSC6900 receives an SCRI message from the UE or the UE inactivity timer expires. If UEs arefrequently switched between RRC connection states and idle mode, signaling storms occur.

If this feature is enabled, the BSC6900 will move the UE to the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH stateinstead of the IDLE mode under either of the following conditions, reducing signaling processingcosts:

l The BSC6900 receives an SCRI message from the UE.l The CELL_FACH/CELL_DCH inactivity timer on the BSC6900 expires.


1. Run the MML commands ADD TRMFACTOR and MOD ADJMAP to change theIu-PS activity factor. The recommended value of the Iu-PS activity factor is 10%. Ifthe configured Iu-PS activity factor is smaller than 10%, retain the configured value.

NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state increasessharply. UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state consume a large number of Iu-PSbandwidth resources although they do not transmit any data.

Adjusting the Iu-PS activity factor can prevent PS service admission failures due to the increasein the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

CAUTIONThe Iu-PS activity factor of all services must be set to an appropriate value. Otherwise,a large number of PS service setups fail, and the CPU usage of the SPU boardsincreases sharply. Modifying the Iu-PS activity factor does not bring a negative effectto the entire network.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the featureEnhanced Fast Dormancy at the BSC6900-level.

162 Configuring Enhanced Fast DormancyRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable cell updateduring CS service setup. In this step, deselect the RSVDBIT1_BIT21 check box underthe parameter Reserved Parameter 1.

NOTE

After this feature is enabled, the number of CELL_DCH-to-CELL_FACH (D2F) proceduresperformed increases. If a CS service is initiated after the UE performs a D2F procedure, a cellupdate procedure may be initiated during the CS service setup. The switchRSVDBIT1_BIT21 specifies whether to allow cell update during CS service setup. When thisswitch is turned off, cell update is allowed during CS service setup.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the statetransition from CELL_PCH or URA_PCH to CELL_DCH triggered by FACHcongestion. In this step, deselect the RSVDBIT1_BIT20 check box under theparameter Reserved Parameter 1.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to disable the statetransition from CELL_DCH to CELL_PCH. In this step, deselect theRSVDBIT1_BIT29 check box under the parameter Reserved Parameter 1.

NOTE

The switch RSVDBIT1_BIT29 specifies whether to allow the state transition fromCELL_DCH to CELL_PCH. When this switch is turned on, the state transition fromCELL_DCH to CELL_PCH is allowed. When this switch is turned off, the state transition fromCELL_DCH to CELL_PCH is not allowed.

After this feature is enabled, the FACH will carry a large amount of data, which may lead toFACH congestion. Therefore, it is recommended that a new SCCPCH be added.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the value of theCELL_DCH inactivity timer.

The recommended value of the CELL_DCH inactivity timer is 4 seconds.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the value of the

CELL_FACH inactivity timer.

The recommended value of the CELL_FACH inactivity timer is 10 seconds.8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the value of the

CELL_PCH inactivity timer.

The recommended value of the CELL_PCH inactivity timer is 360 seconds.9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS. In this step, set Fast

Dormancy User FACH/E_FACH2DCH/HSPA 4A Threshold to D1k.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to enable the Type

Allocation Code (TAC) match function.11. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIMEITAC to add the IMEI

TACs of smart UEs to the whitelist. In this step, set Fast Dormancy Switch to ON.

The BSC6900 compares the queried UE IMEI with the configured IMEI TAC andthen performs operations as follows:



162-3

Table 162-1 Processing procedure after the comparison

Setting ofFD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCHin the MMLcommand SETURRCTRLSWITCH (RNClevel)

Setting ofIMEI TAC inthe MMLcommandADDUIMEITAC

Setting of FastDormancySwitch in theMMLcommandADDUIMEITAC(UE level)

ProcessingProcedure

ON Configured ON The BSC6900enables the EnhancedFast Dormancyfeature for the UEswith a matched TAC.

OFF Configured ON The BSC6900enables the EnhancedFast Dormancyfeature for the UEscomplying with 3GPPRelease 5 or later. TheBSC6900 does notenable this feature forthe UEs that are addedto the IMEI TAC listbut not contained inthe blacklist.You can set aprocedure forspecified UEs byrunning the MMLcommand ADDUIMEITAC.For example, you canconfigure UEs of acertain type to supportthe CELL_DCH-to-CELL_FACH-to-CELL_PCHprocedure rather thanthe CELL_DCH-to-CELL_PCHprocedure.

OFF Not configured Not involved The BSC6900enables the EnhancedFast Dormancyfeature for the UEscomplying with 3GPPRelease 5 or later.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Setting ofFD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCHin the MMLcommand SETURRCTRLSWITCH (RNClevel)

Setting ofIMEI TAC inthe MMLcommandADDUIMEITAC

Setting of FastDormancySwitch in theMMLcommandADDUIMEITAC(UE level)

ProcessingProcedure

OFF Configured OFF The BSC6900 doesnot enable theEnhanced FastDormancy feature forUEs with a matchedTAC.

12. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH toturn on the switch for the cell-level enhanced fast dormancy feature.

NOTE

By default, this switch is turned on.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to query the state of the licensefor this feature. If the result shown in Figure 162-1 is returned, the license for thisfeature has been configured.

Figure 162-1 Status of the Enhanced Fast Dormancy license

2. Initiate Uu interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

3. Use a smart UE to set up a PS service in the CELL_DCH state. For example, use theUE to browse a Web page.

If the RRC_RB_SETUP message shown in Figure 162-2 is traced, the UE is in theCELL_DCH state.

Figure 162-2 UE in the CELL_DCH state

4. Keep the UE in idle mode for a period. For example, perform no operation for fourseconds after a Web page is opened.



162-5

If the RRC_RB_RECFG message shown in Figure 162-3 is traced, the UE will movefrom the CELL_DCH state to the CELL_FACH state and then to the CELL_PCHstate.

Figure 162-3 State transition to the CELL_PCH state

5. Use the UE to continue PS services such as web page browsing. Cell update or channelreconfiguration occurs.

Check the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message as shown in Figure 162-4 and Figure162-5.

Figure 162-4 Cell update

Figure 162-5 Channel reconfiguration


To deactivate this feature, you need to restore the values of all related function switchesand parameters to their original values.

For details, see the script in the example.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

NOTE

If this feature must be deactivated when the SPUa or SPUb board is being reset, do as follows:

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET CFGDATAINEFFECTIVE to set the subrack to ineffectivemode.

2. Run the MML commands to deactivate this feature. For details, see the script in the example.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE to set the subrack to effectivemode.

----End

Example//Activating Fast Dormancy Enhancement

//Activating the license controlling Fast Dormancy EnhancementSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FastDormancyEnhancement=141120;

//Enabling the Enhanced Fast Dormancy feature at the BSC6900 levelSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling cell update during CS service setupSET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-0;

//Enabling the state transition from CELL_PCH or URA_PCH to CELL_DCH triggered by FACH congestionSET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT20-0;

//Disabling the state transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_PCH triggered by UEsSET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT29-0;

//Setting the value of the CELL_DCH inactivity timer to 4 secondsSET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmDch=4;

//Setting the value of the CELL_FACH inactivity timer to 10 secondsSET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmFach=10;

//Setting the value of the CELL_PCH inactivity timer to 360 secondsSET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForPreFstDrm=360;

//Setting the traffic threshold of event 4A during the state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH to D1kSET UUESTATETRANS: FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D1k;

//Enabling the IMEI Type Allocation Code (TAC) match functionSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCH-1;

//Adding the IMEI TACs of smart UEs to the whitelistADD UIMEITAC: TAC_FUNC=Fast_Dormancy, TAC=01177600, Description="Smart Phone", FastDormancy=ON;

//Enabling the Enhanced Fast Dormancy feature at the cell levelADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=FAST_DORMANCY_ADCTRL-1;

//Deactivating Fast Dormancy Enhancement

//Disabling the Enhanced Fast Dormancy feature at the BSC6900 levelSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FAST_DORMANCY_SWITCH-0;



162-7

//Setting the value of the CELL_DCH inactivity timer to 4 seconds SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmDch=4;

//Setting the value of the CELL_FACH inactivity timer to 10 secondsSET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForFstDrmFach=10;

//Setting the value of the CELL_PCH inactivity timer to 360 secondsSET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForPreFstDrm=360;

//Setting the traffic threshold of event 4A during the state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH to D1kSET UUESTATETRANS: FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D1k;

//Enabling the IMEI Type Allocation Code (TAC) match functionSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=FD_TAC_MATCH_SWITCH-1;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

163 Configuring Cell Barring

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102Cell Barring.





Context

If the cell barring feature is enabled, cells can be barred either automatically or manually tofacilitate operators' maintenance when the cells are running improperly.


– Setting automatic cell barring

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, selectSYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST andBARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch drop-down list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UIUTIMERANDNUM to enableinterruption protection by specifying CN protection timer.

– Setting manual cell barring

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCALLCELLBLK to configureparameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC in a network.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPALLCELLBLK to configureparameters related to operator-specific barring of all cells in a network.


RANFeature Activation Guide 163 Configuring Cell Barring


163-1

– Block the PS domain or the PS domain is disconnected, which prevents UEs from beingadmitted to PS services. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature isactivated:

NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when blocking the CS domain or the CS domain isdisconnected.

1. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu MessageType, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE1.

2. View whether information element (IE) information of the PS domain is containedin the traced messages. Expected result: PS domain IE information is not contained,as shown in Figure 163-1.


– Block CS and PS domains, CS and PS domains are disconnected, or block the CS domain

and turn on BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST. Perform the following stepsto verify whether this feature is activated:


2. View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in thetraced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shownin Figure 163-2.

163 Configuring Cell BarringRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


– Bar PS services of UEs served by an operator. Perform the following steps to verify

whether this feature is activated:

NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when barring CS services of UEs served by an operator.


2. View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in thetraced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shownin Figure 163-3.

RANFeature Activation Guide 163 Configuring Cell Barring


163-3



– Deactivating automatic cell barring

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step,deselect SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST andBARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch drop-down list.

– Deactivating manual cell barring

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URNCALLCELLBLK to removeparameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC in a network.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCNOPALLCELLBLK to removeparameters related to operator-specific barring of all cells in a network.

----End

Example//Activating Cell BarringSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-1;SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-1;SET UIUTIMERANDNUM: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=0, StateIndTmr=20000; //Deactivating Cell BarringSET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-0;SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-0;

163 Configuring Cell BarringRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

164 Configuring 3G/2G Common LoadManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-0203103G/2G Common Load Management.


– The CN should support this feature.

– The BSS should support this feature.


– This feature is required only when one of the following features is available:

– WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

– WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

– WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

– WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package

– WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

l License


Context

The 3G/2G Common Load Management applies to inter-RAT handover and inter system directretry. The load of source cell and target cell is considered during inter-RAT handover from 3Gto 2G or from 2G to 3G and inter system direct retry.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable theinter-RAT handover. In this step, select HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCHand HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH through the HandOver Switch.

RANFeature Activation Guide 164 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management


164-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTERRATHONCOV to enable the 3G/2G common load management function. In this step, select the Send Load Info toGSM Ind and NCOV Reloc Ind Based on GSM Cell Load.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT2GCELL to add a GSM cellneighboring to the UMTS coverage.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERRATHONCOV to check whether

the parameters Send Load Info to GSM Ind and NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSMcell load are set to ON.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST U2GNCELL to ensure the inter-RATneighboring cell for the GSM system is added correctly.

NOTE

Consult Huawei engineers about the verification solution to obtain professional technical support.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTERRATHONCOV to set the

parameter Send Load Info to GSM Ind to OFF and the parameter NCOV Reloc Indbased on GSM cell load to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating 3G/2G Common Load ManagementSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;SET UINTERRATHONCOV: SndLdInfo2GsmInd=ON, NcovHoOn2GldInd=ON;//Deactivating 3G/2G Common Load ManagementSET UINTERRATHONCOV: SndLdInfo2GsmInd=OFF, NcovHoOn2GldInd=OFF;

164 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

165 Configuring RAB Quality of ServiceRenegotiation over Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010506RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface.


– The NEs in the core network must support selective configuration of the maximum bitrate (MBR) and guaranteed bit rate (GBR).



l License


Context

This feature enables the BSC6900 to initiate Iu renegotiation on the MBR and GBR of PS real-time services to reduce the rate of real-time services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enable thecell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, set Cell LDC algorithm switch toUL_UU_LDR, DL_UU_LDR, and CELL_CREDIT_LDR.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA to enable theNodeB-level LDR algorithm. In this step, set NodeB LDC algorithm switch toIUB_LDR, LCG_CREDIT_LDR, and NODEB_CREDIT_LDR.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM to set the cell-level LDRtrigger threshold. In this step, set UL/DL LDR Trigger threshold and DL StateTrans Hysteresis threshold according to the network plan.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR to set the NodeB-levelLDR credit spreading factor (SF) reserved threshold. In this step, set Ul LDR Credit


165 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation overIu Interface


165-1

SF reserved threshold and Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold according to thenetwork plan.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set the NodeB credit LDRthreshold for the local cell. In this step, set Ul LDR Credit SF reserved thresholdand DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold according to the network plan.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD. In this step, set LDRperiod timer length according to the network plan.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to enable QoS renegotiationon real-time services. In this step, set DL LDR first action to QOSRENEGO.

l Verification Procedure1. Establish a PS streaming service.2. Trigger LDR in the cell according to the cell LDR threshold specified in the activation

procedure.3. If RAB MODIFY REQUEST is traced on the Iu interface, this feature has been

activated.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to disable thecell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, deselect UL_UU_LDR, DL_UU_LDR, andCELL_CREDIT_LDR from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA to disable theNodeB-level LDR algorithm. In this step, deselect IUB_LDR,LCG_CREDIT_LDR, and NODEB_CREDIT_LDR from the NodeB LDCalgorithm switch drop-down list box.

----End

Example/*Activating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/

//Enabling the cell-level LDR algorithmMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-1;

//Enabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithmMOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1;

//Enable QoS renegotiation on real-time servicesMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=QoSRenego;

/*Deactivating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/

//Disabling the cell-level LDR algorithmMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-0;

//Disabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithmMOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

165 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation overIu Interface



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

166 Configuring Rate Negotiation atAdmission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010507Rate Negotiation at Admission Control.





– For Iu QoS negotiation, the CN nodes must support this feature.– For RAB rate reduction, the CN nodes do not need to support this feature.

ContextThis feature supports the procedures for Iu QoS negotiation and RAB rate reduction.


– Activating QoS negotiation

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH, andset PS rate negotiation switch to PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH andPS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH.

– Activating RAB rate reduction

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH, andset PS rate negotiation switch to PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH.

RANFeature Activation Guide 166 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control


166-1


– Verifying QoS negotiation

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to querythe activation result.

2. Start Iu message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT and establish a PS service, as shownin Figure 166-1.

Figure 166-1 Iu message tracing

3. View the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. If it contains the IE "alt-RAB-Parameters", the CN supports Iu QoS negotiation, as shown in Figure166-2.

Figure 166-2 RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message on the Iu interface

166 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

– Verifying RAB rate reduction

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to querythe activation result.

2. Start Iu message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT and establish a PS service, as shownin Figure 166-3.

Figure 166-3 Iu message tracing

3. View the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RESP message. If it contains the IE"ass-RAB-Parameters", rate negotiation at admission control takes effect, and theMaxBitrate is the data rate negotiated by the RNC, as shown in Figure 166-4.

Figure 166-4 RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RESP message on the Iu interface


RANFeature Activation Guide 166 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control


166-3

– Deactivating QoS negotiation

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, deselect DRA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource AllocationSwitch drop-down list box, and deselect PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH andPS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH from the PS rate negotiationswitch drop-down list box.

– Deactivating RAB rate reduction

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, deselect DRA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource AllocationSwitch drop-down list box, and deselect PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCHfrom the PS rate negotiation switch drop-down list box.

----End

Example//Activating Rate Negotiation at Admission ControlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1, PsSwitch =PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-1&PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-1;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1, PsSwitch=PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH-1;

//Deactivating Rate Negotiation at Admission ControlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-0, PsSwitch =PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-0&PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-0;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-0, PsSwitch=PS_RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH-0;

166 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

167 Configuring Service Steering andLoad Sharing in RRC Connection Setup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020120Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup.





ContextWith this feature, service steering and load sharing among different frequencies, bands, or radioaccess technologies (RATs) can be achieved during radio resource control (RRC) connectionsetup based on the service type and cell load.


NOTEThe adaptive multirate (AMR) service that is redirected to an inter-RAT cell during RRC connection setupis used as an example.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable theRRC directed retry decision (DRD) function. In this step, set Direct Retry Switch toDR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UREDIRECTION. In this step, set RNC-level Traffic Type to AMR and Redirection Switch toONLY_TO_INTER_RAT.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLREDIRECTION. Inthis step, set cell-level Traffic Type to AMR and Redirection Switch toONLY_TO_INTER_RAT.


167 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRCConnection Setup


167-1


l Verification Procedure1. Use a UE complying with the 3GPP Release 5 to send an RRC_SETUP_REQ

message with the cause value "Originating Conversational Call."2. The BSC6900 responds with an RRC_CONN_REJ message. If "redirectioninfo" of

the message contains "GSM-TargetCellInfo," this feature has been activated.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to disable theRRC DRD function.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UREDIRECTION. In this step, setRedirection Switch to an appropriate value to disable the RNC-level RRC DRD basedon service steering.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLREDIRECTION. Inthis step, set Redirection Switch to an appropriate value to disable the cell-level RRCDRD based on service steering.

----End

Example/*Activating Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup*/

/*Enabling the RRC DRD function*/SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the RNC-level DRD switchSET UREDIRECTION: TrafficType=AMR, RedirSwitch=ONLY_TO_INTER_RAT, RedirFactorOfNorm=0, RedirFactorOfLDR=0, RedirBandInd=BAND1, ReDirUARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, ReDirUARFCNDownlink=10713;

//Setting the cell-level DRD switchMOD UCELLREDIRECTION: CellId=1, TrafficType=AMR, RedirSwitch=ONLY_TO_INTER_RAT, RedirFactorOfNorm=0, RedirFactorOfLDR=100, RedirBandInd=BAND1, ReDirUARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, ReDirUARFCNDownlink=10563;

/*Deactivating Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup*/

//Disabling the RRC DRD functionSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RRC_DRD_SWITCH-0;

//Setting the RNC-level DRD switchSET UREDIRECTION: TrafficType=PSHSPA, RedirSwitch=OFF;

//Setting the cell-level DRD switchMOD UCELLREDIRECTION: CellId=100, TrafficType=PSHSPA, RedirSwitch=OFF;

167 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRCConnection Setup



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

168 Configuring TCP Accelerator

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020123TCP Accelerator.





l License



– Downlink TCP accelerator requires that the BSC6900 version is RAN11.0 or later.

– Uplink TCP accelerator requires that the BSC6900 version is RAN12.0 or later.

Context

The TCP Accelerator feature in RAN11.0 optimizes the data transmission performance in thedownlink.

Based on this feature in RAN11.0, RAN12.0 introduces the TCP Accelerator feature to optimizethe data transmission in the uplink. In addition, the Acknowledgment (ACK) splittingtechnology, ACK splitting monitoring technology, and uplink data packet sequencingtechnology are adopted. These technologies aim at accelerating the slow start and restoreprocesses during uplink data transmission, reducing the impact of packet loss on the performanceof uplink TCP data transmission.

NOTE

Data configurations are required only at the BSC6900 to activate, verify, and deactivate this feature.


RANFeature Activation Guide 168 Configuring TCP Accelerator


168-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA to turn on the TCPaccelerator switch. In this step, select TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH orTPE_UPLINK_SWITCH from TPE switch according to the actual requirements.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UDPUCFGDATA to check whether the

TCP accelerator switch is turned on. If the switch is turned on, this feature has beenactivated.

2. Use a test terminal to download a file of 200 KB from the FTP server. Then, comparethe download time taken before and after the TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH is turnedon.

3. Use a test terminal to upload a file of 200 KB to the FTP server. Then, compare theupload time taken before and after the TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH is turned on.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA to turn off the TCP

accelerator switch. In this step, deselect TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH orTPE_UPLINK_SWITCH from TPE switch according to the actual requirements.

----End

Example//Activating TCP AcceleratorTurning on the TCP accelerator switch at the RNC SET UDPUCFGDATA: TpeSwitch=TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH-1&TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating TCP AcceleratorTurning off the TCP accelerator switch at the RNCSET UDPUCFGDATA: TpeSwitch=TPE_DOWNLINK_SWITCH-0&TPE_UPLINK_SWITCH-0;

168 Configuring TCP AcceleratorRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

169 Configuring Uplink Flow Control ofUser Plane

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020124Uplink Flow Control of User Plane.





l License


Context

The Uplink Flow Control of User Plane feature is a Huawei proprietary feature. This featuredetects uplink packet loss for R99 services by using private information elements (IEs) on theIub interface. In addition, this feature controls uplink traffic by sending Transport FormatCombination Control messages. By doing this, this feature prevents uplink packet loss causedby lack of flow control, and increases transmission efficiency.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH. In this step, setProcess switch to NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH.

NOTENODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH controls all the functions that are achievedby using the private messages on the Iub interface. Turn on other related switches if flow controlover the uplink user plane is required.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH to turn on the cell-level switch for uplink user plane flow control.


RANFeature Activation Guide 169 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane


169-1

1. Start an Iub interface tracing task on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 169-1.

Figure 169-1 Iub interface trace dialog box

2. Establish an R99 BE service on the UE. Observe the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREPmessage in the traced Iub data. Check the IE iE-Extensions in DCH-FDD-InformationItem. If there is an IE trafficClass-Private, as shown in Figure 169-2,the feature at the BSC6900 has been activated.

169 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User PlaneRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 169-2 TrafficClass-Private

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH to turn off the cell-

level switch for uplink user plane flow control.

----End

Example//Activating Uplink Flow Control of User Plane SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN, LOCELL=1;//Deactivating Uplink Flow Control of User Plane SET R99FLOWCTRLSWTCH: SWITCH=CLOSE, LOCELL=1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 169 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane


169-3

170 Configuring Videophone ServiceRestriction

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020130Videophone Service Restriction.





ContextThis feature disables the videophone (VP) function of a cell through cell-level configurations tomeet telecom operators' requirements for information security in restricted areas.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the cell. In this step,set Cell ID to an appropriate value.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP. In this step, set Cell VPLimit Indicator to TRUE.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLL to activate the cell. In this step,set Cell ID to an appropriate value.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL on another RNC thatcontrols the neighboring cell. In this step, set Cell VP Limit Indicator to TRUE.

l Verification Procedure1. Use two VP-capable UEs to camp on the same cell, and then use one UE to initiate a

VP to the other UE.2. Initiate Iu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT.

RANFeature Activation Guide 170 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction


170-1

The BSC6900 sends an RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_RSP message to the CN.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the cell. In this step,set Cell ID to an appropriate value.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP. In this step, set Cell VPLimit Indicator to FALSE.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLL to activate the cell. In this step,set Cell ID to an appropriate value.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL on another RNC thatcontrols the neighboring cell. In this step, set Cell VP Limit Indicator to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activating Videophone Service Restriction

DEA UCELL: CellId=1111;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=TRUE;ACT UCELL: CellId=1111;MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=TRUE;//Deactivating Videophone Service Restriction

DEA UCELL: CellId=1111;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=FALSE;ACT UCELL: CellId=1111;MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=1111, VPLimitInd=FALSE;

170 Configuring Videophone Service RestrictionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

171 Configuring Active QueueManagement (AQM)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011502Active Queue Management (AQM).





ContextThe AQM feature can improve user’s feeling when HTTP and download services simultaneouslyexist.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on theRNC-level AQM switch. In this step, select the Dynamic resource allocationswitch check box under the parameter DRA_AQM_SWITCH.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate UE tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. In the displayed UE Trace dialog box,

select the Debug Mode check box, as shown in Figure 171-1.

RANFeature Activation Guide 171 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)


171-1

Figure 171-1 UE Trace dialog box

2. Establish a BE service on the UE. Verify the value of the information element (IE)"ucAqmSwitch" contained in the message PdcpSetupInfo as follows:– If the value of the IE "ucAqmSwitch" is 1, this feature has been activated.– If the value of the IE "ucAqmSwitch" is 0, this feature is not activated.


deselect the DRA_AQM_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamicresource allocation switch.

----End

Example//Activating Active Queue Management (AQM)SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_AQM_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating Active Queue Management (AQM)SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_AQM_SWITCH-0;

171 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

172 Configuring Quality Improvementfor Subscribed Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020128Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.


– BTS3812E is configured with the Enhanced NodeB HSPA/HSPA+ supported Basebandprocessing and Interface unit (EBBI) or Enhanced NodeB HSPA supported DownlinkProcessing (EDLP) board.

– DBS3800 is configured with the Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) or Enhanced BaseBand Card REV:d (EBBCd) board.

– DBS3900 or BTS3900 is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b(WBBPb) or WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d (WBBPd) board.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package has been configured before


– The license controlling this feature has been activated.l Others Prerequisites

– Only BSC6900 supports this feature.– The BSC6900 version is RAN12.0 or later.– The NodeB software version is RAN12.0 or later.

ContextThis feature enables BSC6900 to adjust the user scheduling priority by identifying thecharacteristics of IP data streams and modifying the initial Scheduling Priority Indicator (SPI)Weight of downlink services.

The feature grants high scheduling priorities to specific services on which telecom operatorsfocus, such as services from specific servers or http services. By doing this, the bandwidthrequired for processing the services is guaranteed.


172 Configuring Quality Improvement for SubscribedService


172-1

In addition, the feature lowers the scheduling weight of some non-paying services that consumea large amount of bandwidth. By doing this, sufficient bandwidth is available for services withhigh scheduling priorities.


1. Set the initial SPI Weight on the BSC6900 LMT.– If the license controlling the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based

on SPI Weight has been activated, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUSPIWEIGHT. In this step, set the parameters Scheduling Priority Indicatorand SPI Weight based on the actual network plan.

– If the license controlling the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Basedon SPI Weight is not activated, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC.In this step, set Default SPI Weight based on the actual network plan.


3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select the DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH check box under the parameterDynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIPSERVICEQOS. In this step, set theparameters related to the Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service feature toappropriate values based on the network plan.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA. In this step, set ServicePriority Adjusting Coefficient to an appropriate value.

l Verification Procedure1. When the resources (for example, resources on the air interface) are limited, activating

this feature may increase the throughput of FTP services and shorten the network delayof HTTP services.


deselect the DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH check box under the parameterDynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

----End

Example//Activating Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

//Setting the initial SPI weight value if the license control switch for the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is turned on SET USPIWEIGHT: SPI=4, SPIWEIGHT=10;

//Setting the initial SPI weight value if the license control switch for the feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight is not turned on SET UFRC: DefaultSPIWeight=10;

//Turning on the switch for a NodeB private interface SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Turning on the switch for the Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service feature SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the parameters related to the Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service feature ADD UIPSERVICEQOS: CnOpIndex=0, RecIndex=1, TrafficType=SPI, MatchType=IPAndPort, IPAddress="192.168.0.100", IPMask="255.255.255.255", PortNum=8080, ProtocolType=TCP, TrafficPriority=HIGH;

//Setting the scheduling priority weight corresponding to high-priority services SET UDPUCFGDATA: ServPriAdjCoefHigh=100;

//Deactivating Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_IP_SERVICE_QOS_SWITCH-0;




172-3

173 Configuring Optimization of R99 andHSUPA Users Fairness

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020131Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness.


– The HBBI and HULP boards in the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE do not support this feature.To support this feature, the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE must be configured with the EBBIor EDLP board.

– The BBU3806 in the DBS3800 does not support this feature. To support this feature,the DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. If the BBU3806Cis configured, the EBBM board must be added.

– To support this feature, the 3900 series base stations must be configured with WBBPbor WBBPd boards. WBBPa boards in the 3900 series base stations do not support thisfeature.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before



ContextIn scenarios where R99 and HUSUPA users share the same TRX, this feature provides fairservices for the two types of users and improves HSUPA user experience by considering R99and HSUPA user satisfaction with throughput, that is, the ratio of effective rate to guaranteedbit rate (GBR).


1. To enable the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE services based onR99 and HSUPA user fairness, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD


173 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA UsersFairness


173-1

UCELLALGOSWITCH with BE rate reduction switch based on fairness set toON.

2. To set the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness, runthe BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD with Fairness period timerlength set to an appropriate value according to the network plan.

3. To set the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness in asatellite communications environment, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUSATLDCPERIOD with Fairness period timer length set to an appropriate valueaccording to the network plan.

4. To set the fairness threshold for R99 and HSUPA users, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UCELLLDM with Fairness threshold set to an appropriate defaultvalue according to the network plan.

5. To enable the DCCC algorithm switch for applying the dynamic channelreconfiguration control algorithm to the RNC, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH to select the DRA_DCCC_SWITCH from the drop-down list Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 173-1.

Figure 173-1 Iub interface tracing dialog box

2. Establish PS BE services on the HSUPA and R99 UEs.3. The BSC6900 side sends a COMMON MEASUREMENT INITIATION

REQUEST message to the NodeB side. The NodeB side submits fairness commonmeasurement reports to the BSC6900 side, as shown in Figure 173-2.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 173-2 fairness common measurement report


1. To disable the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE services based onR99 and HSUPA user fairness, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUCELLALGOSWITCH with BE rate reduction switch based on fairness set toOFF.

----End

Example/*Activating the Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness feature

//Enabling the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE services based on R99 and HSUPA user fairnessMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11011, BERateReductionOnFairnessSwitch=ON;Where, [PARA]CellId[/PARA] is set to the cell ID for the algorithm switch.

//Setting the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairnessSET ULDCPERIOD: FairnessPeriodTimerLen=11;

//Setting the common measurement period based on R99 and HSUPA user fairness in a satellite communications environment SET USATLDCPERIOD: FairnessPeriodTimerLen=11;

//Setting the fairness threshold for R99 and HSUPA users MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=11011,FairnessThd=150; Where, [PARA]CellId[/PARA] is set to the cell ID for the algorithm switch.

//Enable the DCCC algorithm switchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1;

/*Deactivating the Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness feature

//Disabling the algorithm switch for cell-level rate reduction for BE services based on R99 and HSUPA user fairnessMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11011, BERateReductionOnFairnessSwitch=OFF;Where, [PARA]CellId[/PARA] is set to the cell ID for the algorithm switch.




173-3

174 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011000Cell Broadcast Service.




– This feature and the feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast cannot be usedtogether.

l License


l Others

– The UE is capable of receiving cell broadcast messages.

Context

This feature supports the standard cell broadcast procedure specified in the related protocol andtherefore helps the cell broadcast center (CBC) implement cell broadcast services.


External CBCs are deployed in an ATM or IP network. The ATM network is used as anexample in this document.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URNCCBCPUID to disable theconfiguration of the built-in CBC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA to turn off CB Switch.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP to add the device IP address of theinterface board.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC to add an Internet Protocol overATM (IPoA) permanent virtual circuit (PVC).

RANFeature Activation Guide 174 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service


174-1

NOTE

The IP address is the device IP address (DEVIP) of the interface board.

The peer IP address is the IP address for interconnection between serving GPRS support node(SGSN) and RNC.

The VPI and VCI must be the same as those configured on the SGSN. To query the specificsettings, run the LST IPOA command on the SGSN maintenance terminal.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add a route from the interface boardto the CBC. The route passes the IP address of the SGSN.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSADDR to add the CBS socket IPaddress.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCTCH to add the common traffic channel(CTCH) to a cell.

NOTE

To set up a CTCH on FACH5, run the following commands:DEA USCCPCH: CellId=0, PhyChId=8;ADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=0, TrChId=5;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=0, PhyChId=8, CTFC=7;ACT USCCPCH: CellId=0, PhyChId=8;

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSDRX to add the CBSdiscontinuous reception (DRX) scheduling parameter.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSSAC to add a CBS area.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLCBS to enable the CBS function of

the cell.l Verification Procedure

1. Check whether the CBS function works properly.

(1) Ping the CBS IP address of the RNC on the CBC. If the ping operation issuccessful, it indicates that the data transmission from CBC to RNC is normal.

(2) Ping the CBC IP address on the RNC. The source IP address is the device IPaddress, that is, the IP address of the CBS. PING IP: SRN=0, SN=16,SIPADDR="12.12.12.12", DESTIP="11.11.11.11"; If the ping operation issuccessful, it indicates that the data transmission from RNC to CBC is normal.If the ping operation fails, check the configuration.

(3) Check whether the CBS socket is connected properly. To do this, trace messagesover the Iu interface and view whether the SABP_LOAD_QUERY is sent tothe RNC, as shown in Figure 174-1.

174 Configuring Cell Broadcast ServiceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 174-1 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY message

(4) As shown in Figure 174-2, the 0SABP_LOAD_QUERY_CMP messagereturned from the RNC contains the information element (IE) available-bandwidth.

Figure 174-2 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY_CMP message

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the CBSfunction works, as shown in Figure 174-3.



174-3

Figure 174-3 Viewing the CBS function

2. Check the broadcast messages sent.

(1) Use the MTC tool to send messages on the CBC. It is recommended that the timeinterval for sending messages be within 10s and the number of messages sent bemore than two (0 indicates infinity).

(2) Trace messages on the Iu interface to check whether theSABP_WRITE_REPLACE message is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure174-4.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 174-4 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE message

(3) As shown in Figure 174-5, the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE_CMP messagereturned from the RNC contains a broadcast message with the IE number-of-broadcasts-completed.



174-5

Figure 174-5 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE_CMP message

(4) Trace messages on the Uu interface to check whether theUU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01 is sent from the RNC, asshown in Figure 174-6.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 174-6 Viewing the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message

3. Stop the RNC from sending broadcast messages.

(1) On the CBC, select the message being sent and click delete.(2) Trace messages on the Iu interface to check whether the SABP_KILL message

is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure 174-7.



174-7

Figure 174-7 Viewing the SAB_KILL message

(3) Trace messages on the Iu interface, as shown in Figure 174-8. TheSABP_KILL_CMP message returned from the RNC contains the IE number-of-broadcast-completed.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 174-8 Viewing the SABP_KILL_CMP message

(4) It can be viewed from the Uu interface trace data that the RNC stops sending theUU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR to disable Cell Broadcast

Service.

----End

Example//Activating Cell Broadcast Service

//Configuring the license controlling Cell Broadcast ServiceSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH1=CBS-1;



174-9

//Removing the configuration of the built-in CBCRMV URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1;

//Disabling the inner CBS function for the RNCSET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=OFF;

//Configuring the device IP address of the interface boardADD DEVIP: SRN=5, SN=18, DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, IPADDR="12.12.12.12", MASK="255.255.255.0";

//Configuring the IPoA PVCADD IPOAPVC: IPADDR="12.12.12.12", PEERIPADDR="12.12.12.120", CARRYT=NCOPT, CARRYNCOPTN=0, CARRYVPI=255, CARRYVCI=32, TXTRFX=103, RXTRFX=103, PEERT=OTHER;

//Configuring a route from the interface board to CBCADD IPRT: SRN=5, SN=18, DSTIP="11.11.11.12", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="12.12.12.120", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="SGSN_CBS";

//Configuring the CBS socket IP addressADD UCBSADDR: SRN=5, SN=2, CnOpIndex=1, RNCIPADDR="12.12.12.12", CBCIPADDR="11.11.11.11", CBCMASK="255.255.255.0";

//Configuring the CTCH for a cellADD UCTCH: CellId=0, FachId=4;

//Configuring the CBS DRX scheduling parameterADD UCELLCBSDRX: CellId=0;

//Configuring a CBS areaADD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=OFF;

//Enabling the cell-level CBSACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Deactivating Cell Broadcast Service

//Removing the CBS socket IP addressRMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=1;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

175 Configuring Simplified CellBroadcast

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011001Simplified Cell Broadcast.




– This feature and the feature WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service cannot be usedtogether.

l License


l Others

– Only BSC6900 supports this feature.

– The UE is capable of receiving cell broadcast messages.

Context

This feature is used to send simple cell broadcast messages by running a BSC6900 MMLcommand on the M2000 or BSC6900 LMT when the cell broadcast center (CBC) is notconfigured.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR to remove the IP address ofthe external CBC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCCBCPUID to configure the SPUsubsystem of the built-in CBC.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA. In this step, set CBSwitch to ON(ON) to enable the built-in CBC for the RNC.

RANFeature Activation Guide 175 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast


175-1

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCTCH to add the common traffic channel(CTCH) to a cell.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSDRX to add the CBSdiscontinuous reception (DRX) scheduling parameter.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSSAC to add a CBS area and abroadcast message.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLCBS to enable the CBS functionfor a cell.

l Verification Procedure1. Check whether the CBS function works properly.

After activating the CBS function on the RNC, if the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPEmessage beginning with 01 is traced on the Uu interface, as shown in Figure 175-1,the CBS function works properly.

Figure 175-1 UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLCBS to disable the CBS function

for a cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA. In this step, set CB

Switch to OFF(OFF) to turn off the CBS switch for the BSC6900.

----End

Example//Activating Simplified Cell Broadcast

//Enabling the license controlling Simplified Cell BroadcastSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=SIMPLE_CELL_BORADCAST-1;

//Removing the IP address of an external CBSRMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=1;

//Configuring the SPU subsystem of the built-in CBCADD URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1, SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1;

//Enabling the built-in CBC for the RNCSET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=ON, RepeatPeriod=10, RepeatNum=0;

175 Configuring Simplified Cell BroadcastRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Configuring the CTCH for a cellADD UCTCH: CellId=0, FachId=4;

//Configuring the CBS DRX scheduling parameterADD UCELLCBSDRX: CellId=0;

//Configuring a CBS area and a broadcast messageADD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=ON, MsgContent="welcome! it is cell 0";

//Enabling the CBS function for a cellACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Verifying Simplified Cell Broadcast

//Modifying the CBS configuration for a cellMOD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=ON, MsgContent="HELLO,SIMPLE CBS";

//Activating the CBS function for a cellACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Deactivating Simplified Cell Broadcast

//Disabling the CBS function for a cellDEA UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Disabling the CBS function for the BSC6900SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=OFF;

RANFeature Activation Guide 175 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast


175-3

176 Configuring TFO/TrFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011600TFO/TrFO.





– The CN node supports this feature.– The UE supports this feature.

ContextThis feature helps implement the functions of TFO/TrFO by identifying the Iu user plane (IuUP)V2 core network (CN) and processing related services.

This feature can prevent speech quality deterioration caused by the interpretation betweendifferent coder and decoders (CODECs). The TrFO can also save the transmission resources.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on theIuUP V2 switch to support TFO/TrFO. SelectCS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH from the CS Algorithm Switch drop-downlist.

l Verification Procedure1. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.2. Enable UE1 to call UE2. UE2 answers and starts a conversation with UE1. When UE1

moves to the cell edge, you can view the RRC TFC CTRL message indicating rate

RANFeature Activation Guide 176 Configuring TFO/TrFO


176-1

reduction sent from RNC to UE1 over the Uu interface. This indicates that this featureis activated.


IuUP switch. Deselect CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH from the CSAlgorithm Switch drop-down list.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH-1;//Deactivation procedureSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH-0;

176 Configuring TFO/TrFORAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

177 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharingof Multi-Carriers

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020116Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers.





– The NodeB software version should be no earlier than RAN11.0.

ContextDynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers means that among multiple carriers, the carrierbearing HSPA service can dynamically share the unused power resource of another carrier. Thisfunction increases the utilization of the power amplifier as well as the HSPA service rate of thecell. For asymmetrical power configuration, the carrier with higher emitting power cannot sharethe unused power resource of the carrier with lower emitting power.


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PAGRP to add a power sharing group.

RANFeature Activation Guide 177 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers


177-1

NOTE

l Dynamic spectrum sharing cannot be configured with dynamic power sharing.

l A power sharing group consists of a source local cell and a destination local cell.

l The source local cell must support only R99 services, and the destination local cell mustsupport HSDPA services.

l The source local cell and the destination local cell must use the same RF module and beconfigured with the same maximum power.

l The maximum rate of idle power that the source local cell is allowed to share with thedestination local cell is recommended to set to default value. This rate is based on theconfigured maximum transmit power of the source local cell.

l The rate of idle power that must be reserved for the source local cell. This rate is based onthe configured maximum transmit power of the source local cell. Reserving the idle powerfor the source local cell helps avoid power fluctuation in the source local cell caused bypower sharing that is not timely.

l Verification Procedure1. Before configuring the power sharing group, increase the load in the destination local

cell to 90% by means of load simulation.2. Use multiple HSDPA UEs to perform high-speed downloading in the destination local

cell. Check the throughput of the destination local cell.3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PAGRP to add a power sharing group.4. Check the throughput of the destination local cell after the power sharing group is

configured. If the throughput is greatly increased after the power sharing group isconfigured, you can infer that the feature is enabled.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV PAGRP to remove the power sharing group.

----End

Example//Activation procedureADD PAGRP: SLOCELL=1, DLOCELL=2, MAXSHRTO=50, SHMGN=10;//Deactivation procedureRMV PAGRP: DLOCELL=2;

177 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-CarriersRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

178 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch offBased on Traffic Load

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020117Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load.





l License


Contextl The power consumption evaluation of the products in mobile networks shows that the

devices, particularly the base stations, in the radio access network are the principalcontributor of power consumption and CO2 emissions when they are functioning.

l If multiple carriers are used in the same coverage area, Huawei provides operators withadaptive carrier power management to reduce power consumption. The traffic volumevaries with time. For example, a base station in the Central Business District (CBD) has ahigher traffic volume in the daytime, which requires more than one carrier to serve all thesubscribers; the traffic volume becomes low from midnight to early morning of the nextday. From RAN10.0 on, during an idle period that is configurable by operators, the RNCdynamically shuts down the carriers on which there is no service and uses the other carriersin the same area. The carriers will be turned on again when the traffic on the other carriersbecomes congested or when the idle period ends. This reduces power consumption.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA. In thisstep, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch For RNC, Period Judge Timer Length


178 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on TrafficLoad


178-1

for Cell Dynamic Open, and Protect Timer Length for Cell DynamicShutDown to appropriate values.

2. Assume that the cell ID is 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LSTUCELLDYNSHUTDOWN to check whether Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch isturned on.– If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is turned off, run the BSC6900 MML

command ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN to turn on Cell Dynamic ShutDownSwitch, specify the shutdown period, and set the following parameters toappropriate values.– Cell Dynamic ShutDown Type– Cell Dynamic ShutDown Total User number Threshold– Cell Dynamic ShutDown Hsdpa User number Threshold– Cell Dynamic ShutDown Hsupa User number Threshold– Cell Dynamic ShutDown Neighbour Cell Load Remain threshold

NOTE

Default values of the above parameters are recommended.

– If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is turned on, run the MML command MODUCELLDYNSHUTDOWN to modify the related parameters.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERFREQNCELL to check whetheran inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell is configured for cell 1. Assume thatthe ID of the inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell is 2.– This feature takes effect only when cell 2 is served by the same NodeB as cell 1.– If the neighboring cell is not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD

UINTERFREQNCELL to add an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell.In this step, set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

– If the neighboring cell is configured, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUINTERFREQNCELL. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, setCell CAC algorithm switch to HSDPA_GBP_MEAS.

NOTE

This feature takes effect only when the GBP measurement switch for the inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell is turned on.

l Verification Procedure1. Start alarm browsing on the BSC6900 LMT.2. Ensure that the total number of users in cell 1 and cell 2 is 0. Alternatively, set up two

inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cells where no user is admitted.3. At a time during the period specified by running the BSC6900 MML command ADD

UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (for example, 09:10):– If an ALM-22202 UMTS Cell Unavailable is reported at cell 1 with the cause value

of cell dynamic shutdown, this feature has been activated.– If this alarm is not reported or is reported but the cause value is not cell dynamic

shutdown, this feature is not activated.4. Check whether this feature is activated by viewing the counter

VS.DynOpen.CellSetup and check whether this feature is deactivated by viewing thecounter VS.DynClose.CellDel on the M2000.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA to

deactivate this feature at the RNC. In this step, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown SwitchFor RNC to OFF(switch off).

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN todeactivate this feature for cell 1.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Turning on the RNC-level switch for dynamic shutdownSET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=ON;//Turning on the cell-level switch for dynamic shutdownADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=1, DynShutdownSwitch=ON_1, StartTime1=08&59, EndTime1=10&59, DynShutDownType=CONDITIONALSHUTDOWN;//Adding inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cells for the cell where this feature is activated (cell 1 and cell 2 in the following command are served by the same NodeB)ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=110, CellId=1, NCellRncId=110, NCellId=2, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;

//Turning on the GBP measurement switch for an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cellMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST;/*Deactivation procedure*///Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load at the RNCSET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=OFF;//Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load for cell 1RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=1;




178-3

179 Configuring Energy EfficiencyImproved

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020118Energy Efficiency Improved.


– MTRU of the BTS3812E/BTS3812AE does not support this feature.

– The RRU3801C of the NodeB does not support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



Contextl Based on efficient power amplifier (PA) techniques, the function dynamic adaptation of

PA parameters is introduced in the case of HSDPA services to further improve the PAefficiency under the condition of low load.When HSDPA services are performed, the NodeB adjusts the PA bias voltage based onoutput power that varies with the traffic load, improving the PA efficiency and reducingthe static PA power consumption.

l When there is no HSDPA service, the function is supported by the system as long as thelicense is activated.

l When HSDPA services are performed, the function is not supported by the system bydefault.To enable the system to support the function, perform the following operations to enabledevices to adjust PA parameters dynamically based on the traffic load during a specifiedperiod of time, improving the PA efficiency.


RANFeature Activation Guide 179 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved


179-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET OPTDYNADJPARA to set the dynamicvoltage adjustment parameters.– set Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Switch to ON.– Set Start Time and End Time as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST OPTDYNADJPARA to query the dynamic

voltage adjustment parameters. In the returned result, check that Dynamic VoltageAdjustment Switch is set to ON, which indicates that the function is activated. Checkthat Start Time and End Time are set to the required values.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command SET OPTDYNADJPARA to set the dynamic

voltage adjustment parameters. In this step, set Dynamic Voltage AdjustmentSwitch to OFF.

----End

Example//Activation procedure SET OPTDYNADJPARA: DYNADJSWITCH=ON, DYNADJSTARTTIME=0, DYNADJENDTIME=6;//Verification procedure LST OPTDYNADJPARA:;//Deactivation procedure SET OPTDYNADJPARA: DYNADJSWITCH=OFF;

179 Configuring Energy Efficiency ImprovedRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

180 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch offBased on QoS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020122Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS.





ContextThis feature guarantees the data rate for only DCH and high-priority HSDPA users. For low-priority HSDPA users, only Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) is guaranteed.

If the remaining bandwidth of neighboring cells can meet the preceding requirements for rate,this feature can be enabled to reduce the power consumption, and therefore increase profits ofoperators.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA. In thisstep, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch for RNC to ON(switch on).

2. Assume that the cell ID is 2003. Run the BSC6900 MML command LSTUCELLDYNSHUTDOWN to check whether Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch isset to ON for this cell.

(1) If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is set to OFF, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN. In this step, set Cell DynamicShutDown Switch to ON_1(switch on1), specify First Cell DynamicShutDown Interval Start Time, First Cell Dynamic ShutDown Interval End

RANFeature Activation Guide 180 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS


180-1

Time, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Type to QOSSHUTDOWN(QosShutDown), and specify High-Priority Scheduling Indicator.

(2) If Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switch is turned on, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN to modify the settings of thepreceding parameters to the specified settings.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERFREQNCELL to check whethercell 2003 is configured with an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell. Assumethat the ID of the inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell is 2004.

(1) This feature takes effect only when cell 2004 is under the same NodeB as cell2003.

(2) If the neighboring cell is not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADDUINTERFREQNCELL to add an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboringcell. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

(3) If the neighboring cell is configured, run the BSC6900 MML command MODUINTERFREQNCELL. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag set to TRUE.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, setCell CAC algorithm switch to HSDPA_GBP_MEAS(HSDPA GBP MeasAlgorithm).

NOTE

This feature takes effect only when the GBP measurement switches of both cell 2003 and cell2004 are turned on.

l Verification Procedure1. Start alarm browsing on the BSC6900 LMT.2. Ensure that the total number of users in cell 2003 and cell 2004 is 0. Alternatively,

add two inter-frequency co-coverage cells that have bidirectional neighboring cellrelationships, and these cells do not carry any services.

3. At a time during the period specified in the BSC6900 MML command ADDUCELLDYNSHUTDOWN (for example, 09:10):– If the alarm ALM-22202 UMTS Cell Unavailable is reported at cell 2003 with a

cause of cell dynamic shutdown, this feature has been activated.– If the alarm is not reported or is reported at cell 2003 but the cause is not cell

dynamic shutdown, this feature has not been activated.4. You can also view whether the feature is activated by checking certain counters on

the M2000: If the value of the counter VS.DynOpen.CellSetup is not 0, the featureis activated; If the value of the counter VS.DynClose.CellDel is not 0, the feature isnot activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA to

deactivate this feature for the RNC. In this step, set Cell Dynamic ShutDown Switchfor RNC to OFF(switch off).

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN. Inthis step, set Cell ID to 2003 to deactivate this feature for cell 2003.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*/

180 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Turning on the cell dynamic shutdown switch for the RNCSET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=ON;

//Turning on the cell dynamic shutdown switchADD UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=2003, DynShutdownSwitch=ON_1, StartTime1=11&50, EndTime1=11&55, DynShutDownType=QOSSHUTDOWN, HighPriSPI=SPI11-1&SPI12-1&SPI13-1;

//Adding an inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell (cell 2004) to a cell (cell 2003) whose TRXs are shut down (cells 2003 and 2004 are under the same NodeB)ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=110, CellId=2003, NCellRncId=110, NCellId=2004, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;

//Turning on the GBP measurement switches for a cell (cell 2003)and its inter-frequency co-coverage neighboring cell (cell 2004)ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2003, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST;

ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=2004, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST;/*Deactivation procedure*/

//Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS for the RNCSET URNCCELLSHUTDOWNPARA: DynCellShutDownSwitch=OFF;

//(Optional) Deactivating Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS for cell 2003RMV UCELLDYNSHUTDOWN: CellId=2003;

RANFeature Activation Guide 180 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS


180-3

181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch offBased on Power Backup

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020119Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup.


– This feature does not have special requirements for hardware.



l License


Context

In case of mains failure, the backup power system starts to operate. In this case, this feature canimplement hierarchical carrier shutdown based on the shutdown duration and cell priority.



1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL with Local Cell ID and SectorType specified in order to set reserved cells. For the cells that need to provide servicescontinuously during the level-1 shutdown period, set Reserved Cell to TRUE.

NOTE

It is recommended that at least one cell be reserved for a sector. In case of mains failure, thereserved cell continues to provide services for the users in this sector.

2. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOWPOWERPARA to set the intelligentpower shutdown switch with the NodeB ISD Switch set to ENABLE. Set Level 1power off Delay (s) and Level 2 power off Delay (s) based on the backup capabilityof the batteries.


181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on PowerBackup


181-1

3. If you need to use the smooth power change function, run the NodeB MML commandSET SMTHPWRSWTCH to set the intelligent power shutdown switch with theSmooth Power Change Function Switch set to OPEN.

NOTE

Before a cell is shut down, the smooth power change function reduces the TX power of the P-CPICH so that the services in the cell are handed over to neighboring cells. This prevents servicedisruption due to abrupt cell shutdown.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOWPOWERPARA to query theconfiguration information about the intelligent power shutdown switch. On the LMT,check whether the NodeB ISD Switch is set to ENABLE, and whether the Level 1power off Delay (s) and Level 2 power off Delay (s) are set correctly.

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configurationinformation about local cells. Check whether the value of Reserve Cell of each localcell is correct.

3. If the smooth power change function is already used, run the NodeB MML commandLST SMTHPWRSWTCH to check whether the intelligent power shutdown switchis turned on. If the Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN, itindicates that this function is enabled.


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOWPOWERPARA to turn off theintelligent power shutdown switch with the NodeB ISD Switch set to DISABLE.

l NodeB V100R013


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL with Local Cell ID and SectorType specified in order to set reserved cells. For the cells that need to provide servicescontinuously during the level-1 shutdown period, set Reserved Cell to TRUE.

NOTE

It is recommended that at least one cell be reserved for a sector. In case of mains failure, thereserved cell continues to provide services for the users in this sector.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET ITELSHUTDOWN to set the intelligent powershutdown switch with the ISD SWITCH set to ENABLE. Set LEVEL1 DELAYand LEVEL2 DELAY based on the backup capability of the batteries.

3. If you need to use the smooth power change function, run the NodeB MML commandSET SMTHPWRSWTCH to set the intelligent power shutdown switch with theSmooth Power Change Function Switch set to OPEN.

NOTE

Before a cell is shut down, the smooth power change function reduces the TX power of the P-CPICH so that the services in the cell are handed over to neighboring cells. This prevents servicedisruption due to abrupt cell shutdown.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST ITELSHUTDOWN to query the configurationinformation about the intelligent power shutdown switch. On the LMT, check whetherthe NodeB ISD Switch is set to ENABLE, and whether the Level 1 power off andLevel w power off are set correctly.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configurationinformation about local cells. Check whether the value of Reserve Cell of each localcell is correct.

3. If the smooth power change function is already used, run the NodeB MML commandLST SMTHPWRSWTCH to check whether the intelligent power shutdown switchis turned on. If the Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN, itindicates that this function is enabled.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET ITELSHUTDOWN to turn off the intelligentpower shutdown switch with the ISD Switch set to DISABLE.

----End


//Activation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, RSV=TRUE; MOD LOWPOWERPARA: ISD=ENABLE, LEVEL1=60, LEVEL2=120; SET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN;//Verification procedure LST LOWPOWERPARA:; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1; LST SMTHPWRSWTCH:;//Deactivation procedure MOD LOWPOWERPARA: ISD=DISABLE;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedureMOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, RSV=TRUE;SET ITELSHUTDOWN: ISD=ENABLE, LEVEL1=60, LEVEL2=120;SET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN;//Verification procedureLST ITELSHUTDOWN:;LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1;LST SMTHPWRSWTCH:;//Deactivation procedureSET ITELSHUTDOWN: ISD=DISABLE;




181-3

182 Configuring Intelligent PowerManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020121Intelligent Power Management.


– The NodeB type is BTS3900A or DBS3900.

– Huawei APM30 and batteries are used.l Dependencies on Other Features



Context

With this feature, certain Power Supply Units (PSUs) can be powered on or off according to thepower consumption of the NodeB, reducing the power consumption.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET PSUISS with the PSU Intelligent ShutdownSwitch set to ENABLE(ENABLE).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST PSUISS to check whether the PSU Intelligent

Shutdown Switch is set to ENABLE(ENABLE).l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET PSUISS with the PSU Intelligent ShutdownSwitch set to DISABLE(DISABLE).

----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 182 Configuring Intelligent Power Management


182-1

Example//Activation procedure SET PSUISS: PSUISS=ENABLE;//Verification procedure LST PSUISS:;//Deactivation procedure SET PSUISS: PSUISS=DISABLE;

182 Configuring Intelligent Power ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

183 Configuring AMR-WB (AdaptiveMulti Rate Wide Band)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010613AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band).


– The CN supports associated specifications.l Dependencies on Other Features



– The UE supports associated specifications.– The AMR-WB function is enabled on the MSC and UMG.

ContextThis feature provides AMR-WB services, which help improve the QoS of voice services whenresources are sufficient.

CAUTIONl This feature is an integrated solution. To enable this feature, specific parameters must be

configured based on the actual network conditions. Contact Huawei for technical support.l Do not configure relevant parameters without the assistance of Huawei technical personnel;

otherwise, the network capacity and KPI values may be affected.



183 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate WideBand)


183-1

1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRCWB to set the RNC-level speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLAMRCWB to set cell-level speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users.

l Verification Procedure1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UAMRCWB to query the AMR-

WB speech rates of the gold, silver, and bronze users.2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLAMRCWB to query the

AMR-WB speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users.3. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page, choose Monitor > Monitor >

UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring, and create a task of AMRMode.

4. Enable the AMR-WB function on UE1 and UE2, and enable the UEs to camp on thecell CELL_A11.

5. Use UE1 to initiate a voice call to UE2. The call is successfully established and thevoice is clear.

6. Check the AMR mode on the LMT and verify that the downlink rate of UE1 reachesthe specified value.

l Deactivation ProcedureRun the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to deactivate the license controllingthis feature.

NOTE

After deactivating the license controlling this feature, a WB-AMR cannot establish WB and NBservices. If the WB rate for the RNC is disabled, a WB-AMR UE still can establish NB services.

----End

Example//Activating AMR-WB//Setting RNC-level parameters for the WB-AMR speech rate control (WB-AMRC) algorithmSET UAMRCWB: GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K;//Setting cell-level parameters for the WB-AMRC algorithmADD UCELLAMRCWB: CellId=111, GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K;//Deactivating AMR-WBSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH2=WBAMR-0;

183 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate WideBand)



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

184 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR SpeechRates Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020701AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control.



– If this feature is to be applied to Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band (AMR WB), thisfeature depends on WRFD-010613 AMR-WB.


l Other Prerequisites– The UE supports TFC control processing.

ContextThis feature enables the adjustment of AMR/AMR-WB speech rates triggered by multiplefactors. This ensures uninterrupted services, expands the service coverage area, and reduces thecell load.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to turn on the QoS switches forAMR services.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUALITYMEAS or MODUTYPRABQUALITYMEAS to set the parameters for RNC-level AMR and AMR-WB speech rate control based on link stability.

4. Optional: Set the parameters for AMR and AMR-WB speech rate control.

RANFeature Activation Guide 184 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control


184-1

– Set the AMR speech rate control parameters.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA. In this step,deselect the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4 check box under parameterCORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0 to enable NB-AMRC.

NOTE

Select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4 check box to disable NB-AMRC whenthere are some NB-AMRC compatibility problems.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRC to set the RNC-level AMRspeech rate control parameters.

– Set the AMR-WB speech rate control parameters.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA. In this step,deselect the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3 check box under parameterCORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0 to enable WB-AMRC.

NOTE

Select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3 check box to disable WB-AMRC whenthere are some WB-AMRC compatibility problems.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRCWB to set the RNC-levelAMR-WB speech rate control parameters.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. In the Monitor tab page, double-

click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. In the displayeddialog box, set Monitor Item to AMR Mode and specify IMSI.

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Trace tab page. In the Trace tab page, double-clickUMTS Services > Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed dialog box, specify the IMSI,as shown in Figure 184-1.

184 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 184-1 Uu interface tracing

3. Two test UEs supporting AMR WB are available and camp on the cell namedCELL_A11. Use UE A to call UE B. The call is established.

4. Check whether the following information elements (IEs) are contained in the tracedRRC_MEAS_CTR message, as shown in Figure 184-2.

Figure 184-2 IEs contained in RRC_MEAS_CTRL

– event6a

– event6a

5. Place UE B in the center of the cell, and move UE A towards or away from UE B.Check whether the AMR mode changes during performance monitoring, as shown inFigure 184-3.

RANFeature Activation Guide 184 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control


184-3

Figure 184-3 AMR mode


set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH.

----End

Example//Activating AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates ControlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-1;SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=YES, UlQosAmrAdjSwitch=YES, UlQosWAmrAdjSwitch=YES, DlQosAmrAdjSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrAdjSwitch=YES;MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS: RabIndex=1, UlThd6a1=1, UlThd6a2=5, UlThd6b1=1, UlThd6b2=5, StaBlkNum5A=500, Thd5a=280, HangBlockNum5a=512, ThdEa=2, ThdEb=2;//Setting the AMR speech rate control parametersSET UCORRMPARA: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4-0;SET UAMRC: GoldMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K, SilverMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K, CopperMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K;//Setting the AMR-WB speech rate control parametersSET UCORRMPARA: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3-0;SET UAMRCWB: GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K;

//Deactivating AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates ControlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-0;

184 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

185 Configuring Overbooking on ATMTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050405Overbooking on ATM Transmission.


– The backpressure and VP shaping mechanism need the support of the ATM interfaceboard (AOU, UOI, or AEU for BSC6900) in the RNC.

– E1/T1 transmission is applied on the Iub interface.




l License


Context

This feature improves the resource usage and provides a method for greatly saving OPEX onATM transmission, especially on Iub interface, when deploying HSDPA services. Otherstrategies applied in overbooking are as follows:

l RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control

l Backpressure-based downlink congestion control

l VP shaping


– Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn on theflow control switch.

RANFeature Activation Guide 185 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission


185-1

– For R99 BE services, select DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH inDynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

– For HSDPA BE services, selectDRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic ResourceAllocation Switch.

– Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA. In thisstep, set Port protocol type to ATM and set other flow control parameters.

2. Turn on the flow control switch.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IMAGRP. In this step, set Flowcontrol switch to ON.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNILNK. In this step, set Flowcontrol switch to ON.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD FRALNK. In this step:

– Set Fractional link type to FRAATM.

– Set Flow control switch to ON.(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMLOGICPORT. In this step:

– Set Type of the logic port to Leaf.– Set Flow control switch to ON.

– Activating VP shaping

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMLOGICPORT. In this step, setType of the logic port to Leaf and Flow control switch to ON.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add a logical port. Inthis step, set Bearing type to ATMLOGICPORT.


Take RNC configured with the AOU interface board as an example to describe how toverify backpressure-based flow control.

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, start downlink traffic and bandwidth tracing tasks on the Uu,Iub, and Iu interfaces.

2. Register an R99 user UE1 in the HLR. Enable UE1 with streaming services and withboth highest uplink rate and highest downlink rate of 384 kbit/s.

3. Register an HSDPA user UE2 in the HLR. Enable UE2 with background services andwith highest uplink rate of 384 kbit/s and highest downlink rate of 1450 kbit/s.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP to map R99 services to the high-priority queue and HSDPA services to the low-priority queue.

5. All AAL2 paths of the RNC are carried on an IMA port. Enable the port flow controlwhen adding the IMA port.

6. Enable UE1 and UE2 to stay in idle mode and camp on the test cell. The test cell mustsupport HSDPA services.

7. Use UE1 to perform PS streaming services, that is, use UE1 to download files fromthe FTP server.Expected result: The IMA port is not congested and UE1 downloads data at the highestrate.

185 Configuring Overbooking on ATM TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

8. Use UE2 to perform PS BE services, that is, use UE2 to download files from the FTPserver.Expected result: The IMA port is congested and the backpressure function is triggered.The downloading rate of UE2 decreases and that of UE1 remains unchanged. This isbecause R99 services have a higher priority.

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn off theflow control switch.– For R99 BE services, deselect DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in

Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.– For HSDPA BE services, deselect

DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic ResourceAllocation Switch.

– Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IMAGRP. In this step, set Flow controlswitch to OFF.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNILNK. In this step, set Flow controlswitch to OFF.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD FRALNK. In this step, set Flow controlswitch to OFF.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD ATMLOGICPORT. In this step, setFlow control switch to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion controlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-1&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-1;

//Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion controlADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA: FCINDEX=10, PORTPROTYPE=ATM;MOD IMAGRP: SRN=1, SN=14, BT=AOUa, IMAGRPN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, FCINDEX=100;ADD UNILNK: SRN=1, SN=14, UNILNKN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;ADD FRALNK: SRN=1, SN=14, FRALNKN=12, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, FRALNKT=FRAATM, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;ADD ATMLOGICPORT: SRN=1, SN=14, LPNTYPE=Leaf, BT=AOUa, LPN=0, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, UPPERVP=0, TXBW=512, RXBW=512, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;

//Activating VP shapingADD ATMLOGICPORT: SRN=1, SN=14, LPNTYPE=Leaf, BT=AOUa, LPN=0, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, UPPERVP=0, TXBW=512, RXBW=512, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, CARRYF=0, CARRYSN=0, CARRYVPN=0, VPI=0, VCI=0, TXTRFX=0, RXTRFX=0, AAL2PATHT=HSPA;

//Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion controlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-0&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 185 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission


185-3

//Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion controlMOD IMAGRP: SRN=1, SN=14, BT=AOUa, IMAGRPN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF, FCINDEX=100;MOD UNILNK: SRN=1, SN=14, UNILNKN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;MOD FRALNK: SRN=1, SN=14, FRALNKN=12, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, FRALNKT=FRAATM, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;MOD ATMLOGICPORT: SRN=1, SN=14, LPNTYPE=Leaf, BT=AOUa, LPN=0, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYIMAGRPN=1, TXBW=512, RXBW=512, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF;

185 Configuring Overbooking on ATM TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

186 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+.


– This feature depends on the UE capability and the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).l Dependencies on Other Features

– – In the case of VoIP over HSPA, the following features have been configured beforethis feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package andWRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

– In the case of VoIP over HSPA, the WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX feature hasbeen configured before this feature is activated.


l The VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ feature requires the IMS, and the IMS signaling transmissionneeds to be configured on the BSC6900.

ContextVoIP services can be carried on the DCH or HSPA. When VoIP services are carried on the DCH,a large quantity of resources are consumed. When VoIP services are carried on the HSPA, thesystem capacity significantly increases. When the Robust Header Compression (RoHC)technique is used, the data transmission efficiency of VoIP services is greatly improved.

NOTE

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ feature.

l To increase the transmission efficiency of VoIP services, it is recommended that the WRFD-011501PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) feature be activated.

l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used. In thecase of HSDPA, it is recommended that the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated.The purpose is to reduce the delay of VoIP services.

RANFeature Activation Guide 186 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+


186-1


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, setVOIP channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH) and IMS channel typeto HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH toenable the RoHC algorithm. In this step, select theCFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter ChannelConfiguration Strategy Switch.

3. Optional: If VoIP services need to use the WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTIfeature, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In thisstep, select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameterService Mapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 4.

4. Optional:

(1) If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b(WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommendedthat 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UFRC. In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check boxunder the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

(2) If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d(WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 msor 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services.

a. To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UFRC to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box underthe parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

b. To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows:

1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, selectthe EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTItype of VOIP service.

2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH to select theDRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under theparameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

5. Optional: To use the WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTI HO feature, run theBSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, select theDRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter DynamicResource Allocation Switch.

6. To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SETMACHSPARA to set Scheduling Method to EPF(Enhanced PF).


1. In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In thedisplayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On theunfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu InterfaceTrace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown inFigure 186-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.

186 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)


2. Analyze the traced messages.– If data shown in Figure 186-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the

CELL_DCH state.– If data shown in Figure 186-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are

carried on HSPA/HSPA+.

Figure 186-2 UE in CELL_DCH state



186-3

Figure 186-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3. If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP orRRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, asshown in Figure 186-4.

Figure 186-4 Type of TTI carried in the message


NOTE

The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected.

The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, selectthe DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter VOIP channeltype, and select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter IMSchannel type.

----End

Example//Activating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+//Operations on the BSC6900 side

//Configuring VoIP/IMS to be carried on the E-DCH in the uplink and HS-DSCH in the downlinkSET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=HSPA, ImsChlType=HSPA;

//Enabling the RoHC algorithmSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1;

186 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithmSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTISET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTISET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms;//Turning off the switch of saving CE resourcesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice servicesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB sideSET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF;/*Deactivating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+*/

//Operations on the BSC6900 sideSET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=DCH, ImsChlType=DCH;



186-5

187 Configuring Optimized Schedulingfor VoIP over HSPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA.


– The CN and UE support voice over IP (VoIP).l Dependencies on Other Features

– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:– WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA

Introduction Package have been configured before this feature is activated for VoIPover HSPA.

– WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010686 CPC- DTX/DRXhave been configured before this feature is activated for VoIP over HSPA+.


ContextRAN10.0 supports VoIP over HSPA. To ensure the QoS of VoIP carried over HSPA, the non-scheduling method is used for the HSUPA scheduling, and the delay-sensitive (DS) schedulingalgorithm is used for optimized HSDPA scheduling.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set SchedulingMethod to EPF(Enhanced PF).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the configuration

result.l Deactivation Procedure

RANFeature Activation Guide 187 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA


187-1

1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set SchedulingMethod to MAXCI(Max C/I), RR(Round Robin), or PF(PF).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=EPF;//Verification procedureLST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0;//Deactivation procedureSET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=PF;

187 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

188 Configuring IMS Signaling overHSPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618IMS Signaling over HSPA.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package andWRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.


l Other Prerequisites– The CN and UE must support this feature.

Context

IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) signaling over HSPA can shorten the setup delay of IMSservices like VoIP to save network resources for the operator.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to set IMSchannel type to HSPA.


displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On theunfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu InterfaceTrace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown inFigure 188-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.

RANFeature Activation Guide 188 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA


188-1


2. Analyze the traced messages.– If data shown in Figure 188-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the

CELL_DCH state.– If data shown in Figure 188-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are

carried on HSPA/HSPA+.


188 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 188-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3. If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP orRRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, asshown in Figure 188-4.


l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to set IMS

channel type to DCH.

----End

Example//Activating IMS Signaling over HSPA.SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=HSPA;//Deactivating IMS Signaling over HSPA.SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=DCH;

RANFeature Activation Guide 188 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA


188-3

189 Configuring PDCP HeaderCompression (RoHC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501PDCP Header Compression (RoHC).


– The UE supports this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextPDCP header compression (RoHC) mainly applies to VoIP services to reduce IP overhead. Thisfeature provides an IP header compression mechanism, which aims to save the bandwidth overthe Uu interface, thereby reducing occupancy of radio resources.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameterChannel configuration strategy switch.

l Verification Procedure1. Initiate UE tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.2. Establish a PS service on the UE. Verify that the value of the information element (IE)

"bit1RfcInfo3095" contained in the message CRLC _SETUP_REQ by choosingpdcpSetupInfo > pdcpInfo > pdcpInfoBmp > bit1RfcInfo3095 as follows:– If the value of the IE "bit1RfcInfo3095" is 1, this feature has been activated.– If the value of the IE "bit1RfcInfo3095" is 0, this feature is not activated.


RANFeature Activation Guide 189 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)


189-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameterChannel configuration strategy switch.

----End

Example//Activating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-0;

189 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

190 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+.



– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:– WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA

Introduction Package, WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA, and WRFD-010636 SRBover HSUPA, in the case of CS voice over HSPA.

– WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX, in the case of CS voice over HSPA+.l License


– The UE is of 3GPP Release 8 or higher and CS voice services are capable of beingcarried on HSPA/HSPA+.

– The BSC6900 and NodeB versions are RAN11.0 or later.

ContextThe implementation of CS voice services over HSPA is introduced in 3GPP Release 8. In thecase of CS voice services over HSPA, uplink CS voice packets are carried on the E-DCH anddownlink CS voice packets are carried on the HS-DSCH.

CS Voice over HSPA is intended for CS conversational AMR and AMR WB. CS streamingservices are still carried on the DCH. The IMS for VoIP services is not required because the CSvoice services over HSPA are carried on the CS domain of the CN.

RANFeature Activation Guide 190 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+


190-1

NOTE

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+.

l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used, whichdoes not need to be configured. In the case of HSDPA, it is recommended that the EnhancedProportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated. The purpose is to reduce the delay of CS voice services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to configure theuplink EDCH and downlink HSDSCH as the channels carrying HSPA CS services.In this step, select the HSPA(UL EDCH,DL HSDSCH) check box under theparameter CS voice channel type.

2. Optional: If CS voice services need to be carried on the 2 ms Transmission TimeInterval (TTI), run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, select theMAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter ServiceMapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 3.

3. Optional: Configure the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service.

(1) If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b(WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommendedthat 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UFRC. In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check boxunder the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

(2) If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d(WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 msor 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services.

a. To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand SET UFRC to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box underthe parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service.

b. To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows:

1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, selectthe EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTItype of VOIP service.

2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH to select theDRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under theparameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

4. Optional: If the dynamic adjustment of CS voice services over HSUPA from 2 msTTI to 10 ms TTI is required, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, select theDRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter DynamicResource Allocation Switch.

5. To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SETMACHSPARA to set Scheduling Method to EPF(Enhanced PF).


displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the

190 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu InterfaceTrace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown inFigure 190-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.


2. Analyze the traced messages.

– If data shown in Figure 190-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is inCELL_DCH state.

– If the data traced on the Uu interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 190-3, CSvoice services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+.


Figure 190-3 CS voice services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3. If CS voice services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP orRRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, asshown in Figure 190-4.

RANFeature Activation Guide 190 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+


190-3



NOTE

The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected.

The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, selectthe DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter CS voice channeltype.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*///Operations on the BSC6900 side

//Configuring CS voice services to be carried on the EDCH in the uplink and HS-DSCH in the downlinkSET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType =HSPA;

//Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithmSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTISET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms;

//Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTISET UFRC: CSVoiceHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms;

//Turning off the switch of saving CE resourcesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1;

//Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice servicesSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1;

//Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB sideSET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF;

/*Deactivating CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+*///Operations on the BSC6900 sideSET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH;

190 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

191 Configuring Cell ID + RTT FunctionBased LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020801Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.


– If SAS-CENTRIC locating is required, SAS equipment has been configured.



l License


l Others Prerequisites

– The NodeB and the BSC6900 software versions are RAN3.0 or later, and theBSC6900 supports the Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS function.

– The UE supports at least one of the following locating methods:

– UE-assisted CELLID+RTT locating or UE-based CELLID+RTT locating in RNC-CENTRIC mode

– UE-assisted CELLID+RTT locating in the SAS-CENTRIC mode

Context

The simplest CELLID + Round Trip Time (RTT) locating method is to directly use thegeographical center of the coverage area of the reference cell as the locating result.

To achieve high locating accuracy, the BSC6900 demands RTT measurement in all cells in theactive set and requests the UE to perform locating measurement on the corresponding cells. Bymeans of the two types of measurement, the BSC6900 calculates the time of arrival (TOA) ofsignal from the cell antenna to the UE. By multiplying the TOA by the velocity of light, theBSC6900 obtains the distance between a certain cell and the UE. If three TOA circles intersect,the BSC6900 can obtain the accurate location of the UE.

RANFeature Activation Guide 191 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS


191-1


1. Optional: If inter-RNC locating is required, the Iur interface needs to be configured.For details, see 195 Configuring LCS over Iur.

2. Optional: If SAS-CENTRIC mode needs to be supported, the Iupc interface isrequired. For details, see 196 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to set the parameters of the SMLCalgorithm. In this step, set UE Positioning Method, CELLID+RTT Method Type,and Location Working Mode to appropriate values.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL to set the following locationinformation parameters of the cell:

– Cell location configuration type

– Geographical location information about the antenna:

– Cell Antenna Latitude

– Cell Antenna Altitude

– Cell Antenna Longitude

– Cell coverage information:

– Cell Antenna Max Coverage

– Cell Antenna Orientation

– Cell Antenna Opening


1. Initiate Iu, Iub, and Uu interface message tracing, as shown in Figure 191-1, Figure191-2, and Figure 191-3 respectively.


191 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)



2. Use a UE to access the cell and enable the CN to send a locating request message.3. The message LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL and LOCATION

REPORT are traced on the Iu interface, as shown in Figure 191-4 and Figure191-5.



191-3

Figure 191-4 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 191-5 LOCATION REPORT

4. The messages traced on the Iub interface show that the procedure DedicatedMeasurement Initiation is performed on all links in the active set and that the valueof Dedicated Measurement Type is Round Trip Time, as shown in Figure 191-6and Figure 191-7.



191-5

Figure 191-6 Dedicated Measurement Type

Figure 191-7 Round Trip Time

5. From the traced Uu interface messages, you can see the information about the UE Rx-Tx time difference measurement, which is a type of internal measurement (if the UEsupports UE Rx-Tx time difference type 2 measurement, the locating method for Rx-Tx time difference type 2 measurement is adopted), as shown in Figure 191-8 andFigure 191-9.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 191-8 UE Rx-Tx time difference

Figure 191-9 UE Rx-Tx time difference type 1

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to deactivate the CELLID+RTT

locating method. In this step, deselect the CELLID_RTT check box under parameterUE Positioning Method.

----End

Example//Activating Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS//Setting the parameters of the SMLC algorithmSET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-1&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0, CELLIDRTTMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, ForcedSHOSwitch=ON, IntraRelThdFor1A=2, IntraRelThdFor1B=2, TrigTime1A=D10, TrigTime1B=D10, SHOQualmin=-20, LcsWorkMode=RNC_CENTRIC;

//Setting the location information parameters of the cell

ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567,



191-7

MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789;//Deactivating Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCSSET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

192 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020802OTDOA Based LCS.


– The NodeB is configured with the Universal Satellite Card and Clock Unit (USCU)board that is equipped with a GPS card.



l License



– BSC6900 supports this feature.

– The CN can initiate positioning requests.

– The UE supports at least one of the following positioning methods:

– UE-based OTDOA positioning method

– UE-assisted OTDOA positioning method

Context

Huawei UTRAN supports IPDL-OTDOA location services. In this feature, the NodeB isconfigured with a GPS card and supports cell frame timing measurement. In addition,BSC6900 initiates and traces the SFN-SFN observed time difference measurement. BSC6900calculates the relative time difference (RTD) of the cell related to positioning based on the latestmeasurement reports (MRs).

After BSC6900 receives a LOCATON REPORT CONTROL message, it requests the UE toperform SFN-SFN observed time difference measurement if the IPDL-OTDOA positioningmethod is used. After receiving the corresponding MRs, BSC6900 calculates the location of theUE. For accurate location calculation, BSC6900 may request the NodeB to perform RTTmeasurement and request the UE to perform Rx-Tx time difference measurement.

RANFeature Activation Guide 192 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS


192-1


1. Optional: Configure the Iur interface if inter-RNC locating is required. For details,see 195 Configuring LCS over Iur.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to set the SMLC algorithmparameters. In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Modeto appropriate values.

NOTE

Location Working Mode must be set to RNC_CENTRIC(RNC CENTRIC Mode).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL to add the locationinformation about a cell. In this step, set the following parameters to appropriatevalues:– Cell Location Setting Type– Parameters associated with the geographical location information about the

antenna system– Cell Antenna Longitude– Cell Antenna Latitude– Cell Antenna Altitude

– Parameters associated with the cell coverage information– Cell Antenna Max Coverage– Cell Antenna Opening– Cell Antenna Orientation

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING to set theparameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement. In this step, setCell ID and GPS Frame Timing Active Flag to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Check whether the parameters required for positioning are correctly set.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USMLC to query SMLC algorithmparameter settings.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USMLCCELL to query the settings ofthe location parameters of a cell.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLGPSFRMTIMING to query theparameter settings related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to deactivate the OTDOA-based

location service.

----End

Example//Activating OTDOA Based LCS //Setting the parameters for the SMLC algorithm SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=OTDOA-1, OTDOAMethodType=UE_BASED, LcsWorkMode=RNC_CENTRIC;

//Setting the location information parameters of the cell

192 Configuring OTDOA Based LCSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789;//Setting parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING: CellId=80, StartFlag=ACTIVE;//Deactivating OTDOA Based LCS SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=OTDOA-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 192 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS


192-3

193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020803A-GPS Based LCS.


– When the RNC-CENTRIC locating service is required:– If a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver is configured on the BSC6900 side,

the BSC6900 must be configured with the General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a(GCGa) board.

– If a GPS receiver is configured on the NodeB side, the NodeB must be configuredwith the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU) and WCDMA GPSReceiving Unit (WGRU), and all the equipment (including the GPS antenna system)must be properly installed and connected.

– When the SAS-CENTRIC locating service is required, the BSC6900 must be configuredwith a Stand-Alone SMLC (SAS) device. SMLC refers to Serving Mobile LocationCenter.

NOTE

If A-GPS positioning is required, the GPS receiver does not need to be installed in BSC6900 sideor NodeB side.



l Other Prerequisites– NodeB V200R013 supports this feature while NodeB V100R013 does not support this

feature.– The UE supports UE-based A-GPS positioning or UE-assisted A-GPS positioning or

both.– The CN can send positioning requests.

RANFeature Activation Guide 193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS


193-1

Context

A-GPS positioning is an application of GPS positioning in the WCDMA network. In open areas,A-GPS positioning can provide high positioning sensitivity, shorten positioning time, and savepower.

The location information about the GPS receiver can be automatically searched by the GPSreceiver itself or be configured by a user.

l If the accurate location information (to be provided by the surveying and mappingauthorities) about the antenna of the GPS receiver can be obtained, it is recommended thatthe information be specified when the GPS receiver is being configured. In this way, theGPS receiver can quickly search for the satellite group in the area where it is located, andaccurately calculate the differential GPS information.

l If the accurate location information about the antenna of the GPS receiver cannot beobtained, the auto search mode can be selected.


NOTE

The BSC6900 and NodeB must be configured with the related data to activate this feature.

Activation Procedure on the BSC6900 Side

1. Optional: If inter-RNC locating is required, configure the Iur interface by referringto 195 Configuring LCS over Iur.

2. Optional: If the GPS positioning method in SAS-CENTRIC mode is required,configure the Iu-PC interface by referring to 196 Configuring Iupc Interface forLCS Service.

3. In RNC-CENTRIC mode, if a GPS receiver is configured on the BSC6900 side, runthe BSC6900 MML command SET CLKTYPE to set the type of clock board toGCGa.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to set the SMLC algorithmparameters. In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Modeto appropriate values.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL to set the parameters relatedto cell location information to appropriate values.

– Cell Location Setting Type

– Parameters associated with the geographical location information about theantenna system

– Cell Antenna Longitude

– Cell Antenna Latitude

– Cell Antenna Altitude

– Parameters associated with the cell coverage information

– Cell Antenna Max Coverage

– Cell Antenna Opening

– Cell Antenna Orientation

193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

6. In RNC-CENTRIC mode, run the command ADD GPS to set the parameters relatedto the GPS receiver. In this step, set GPS ID, GPS type, GPS antenna latitude, GPSantenna longitude, and GPS antenna altitude to appropriate values.

7. In RNC-CENTRIC mode, run the command ACT GPS to activate the specified GPSreceiver. In this step, set AGPS ID and Type to appropriate values.

8. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING toset the parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement. In thisstep, set Cell ID and GPS Frame Timing Active Flag to appropriate values.

9. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR POSAVE with Maximum timefor posave set to 12. Then, check the single point positioning results of the GPSreceiver in the \bam\common\fam\smlc directory.

Activation Procedure for NodeB V200R013

NOTE

In RNC-CENTRIC mode, a GPS receiver can be configured on the NodeB side as required. If a GPSreceiver is configured on the NodeB side, the NodeB must be configured with the USCU and WGRU,and all the equipment (including the GPS antenna system) must be properly installed and connected.

1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BRD to add a USCU board.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to appropriate values based on the

actual location of the USCU board.– Set Board Type to USCU.


3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.4. Run the NodeB MML command MOD GPSPOS to add a GPS receiver.

– If Way to Get Position is set to USER_CONFIG(User Config), set AntennaLongitude, Antenna Latitude, and Antenna Altitude to appropriate values.

– If Way to Get Position is set to SEARCH_WITH_DURATION(Search withduration), set Duration to an appropriate value.

– If Way to Get Position is set to SEARCH_WITH_PRECISION(Search withprecision), set Precision to an appropriate value.


Verification Procedure on the BSC6900 Side

1. Initiate Iu and Uu interface tracing, as shown in Figure 193-1 and Figure 193-2respectively.



193-3

Figure 193-1 Iub interface tracing


2. Make a UE access the network and enable the CN to send a positioning request.3. Over the Iu interface, you can view the Location Reporting Control and Location

Report messages, as shown in Figure 193-3 and Figure 193-4.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 193-3 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL



193-5

Figure 193-4 LOCATION REPORT

4. The Uu interface tracing messages contain the information about A-GPS positioningmeasurement, as shown in Figure 193-5 and Figure 193-6.

Figure 193-5 ue-positioning-GPS-AssistanceData




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 193-6 GPS-MeasurementParam

Verification Procedure for NodeB V200R013

1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP BRD to query the status of the USCU boardand status of the GPS receiver. In the command output displayed on the LMT, checkwhether the USCU board and the GPS receiver are normal.

2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP GPS to display the information of a GPSreceiver, including receiver position, receiver version, receiver status, and receiverhardware information. In the command output displayed on the LMT, check whetherthe location of the GPS receiver is locked up and whether the operating state of theGPS receiver is normal.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to deactivate the A-GPS location

service. In this step, deselect the AGPS check box under parameter UE PositioningMethod.

----End

Example/*Activating A-GPS Based LCS*/

/*Operations on the BSC6900 side*//Setting the type of clock board to GCGaSET CLKTYPE:CLKTYPE=GCGa;//Setting the parameters for the SMLC algorithmSET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-1, AGPSMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, UeAssAgpsAssDataSwitch=REFERENCE_TIME_FOR_GPS-1&REFERENCE_LOCATION_FOR_GPS-1&DGPS_CORRECT-0&GPS_NAVGMODEL-1&GPS_IONOSPHERIC_MODEL-1&GPS_UTC_MODEL-1&GPS_ALMANAC-1&GPS_ACQ_ASSIST-1&GPS_REALTIME_INTEGRITY-1,LcsWorkMode=RNC_CENTRIC;//Setting the location information parameters of the cell ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789;//Setting the parameters of the GPS receiverADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=RNC, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET,



193-7

LATITUDE=31243596, LONGITUDE=121590603, ALTITUDE=20;ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=1, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=NODEB, CellId=82, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, LATITUDE=31243596, LONGITUDE=121590603, ALTITUDE=20;//Activating the specified GPS receiver ACT GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, ACTTYPE=BOTH;//Setting parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING: CellId=80, StartFlag=ACTIVE;

/*Operations on the NodeB V200R013 side*

SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;

ADD GPS: SN=0;

MOD GPSPOS: WPOS=USER_CONFIG, LONG=160000000, LAT=80000000, ALT=900;//Deactivating A-GPS Based LCSSET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

194 Configuring LCS Classified Zone

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020804LCS Classified Zone.





l License



– The core network (CN) supports this feature.

Context

This feature defines a classified zone. Once the UE enters or exits the zone, the RNCautomatically reports the service area identity (SAI) of the UE.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCZ to add a classified zone.

NOTE

l In this step, you need to set the parameters Cn Operator Index, Location Area Code,Service Area Code, and Classified Zone ID. More than one classified zone can be set foreach operator.

l Before running the ADD UCZ command, ensure that Location Area Code and ServiceArea Code are configured at the local RNC. Otherwise, the classified zone cannot beconfigured.


1. Initiate Iub interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure194-1.

RANFeature Activation Guide 194 Configuring LCS Classified Zone


194-1


2. Enable the UE to establish a service of any type. Move the UE from cell A (whoseLAC and SAC are 9513 and 272 respectively) to cell B (whose LAC and SAC are9514 and 273 respectively), to add cell B to the active set.– If a LOCATION REPORT message is displayed, this feature has been activated.– If the value of the information element (IE) "Cause" in the LOCATION REPORT

message is "User Restriction Start Indication", the UE enters the classified zone.The SAI of the UE is also contained in the message, as shown in Figure 194-2.

194 Configuring LCS Classified ZoneRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 194-2 LOCATION REPORT message

3. Remove cell B from the active set by performing a handover or Serving Radio NetworkSubsystem (SRNS) relocation.– If a LOCATION REPORT message is displayed, this feature has been activated.– If the cause value of the LOCATION REPORT message is displayed as "User

Restriction End Indication", the UE exits the classified zone. The SAI of the UEis also contained in the LOCATION REPORT message.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCZ to remove the classified zone from

all operators at the RNC.

----End

Example//Activating LCS Classified Zone

ADD UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, LAC=9513, SAC=272, CZ=0;ADD UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, LAC=9514, SAC=273, CZ=1;//Deactivating LCS Classified ZoneRMV UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, CZ=0;RMV UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, CZ=1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 194 Configuring LCS Classified Zone


194-3

195 Configuring LCS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020805Configuring LCS over Iur.



– The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or WRFD-020803 A-GPS BasedLCS.


l Others Prerequisites– The UE and the neighboring RNC (NRNC) support this feature.– This feature is used only in RNC-CENTRIC mode.

ContextThis feature enables Huawei RAN to provide location services (LCS) over the Iur interface,extending the LCS area. It enables exchange of cell information and GPS assistance informationover the Iur interface.


NOTEIn this procedure, you need to set the positioning method and add the geographical information aboutthe cell at the RNC. For cell information exchange over the Iur interface, geographical informationabout a neighboring cell must be configured at the NRNC.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to set the SMLC algorithmparameters, In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location WorkingMode.

2. Configure cell information exchange over the Iur interface.

RANFeature Activation Guide 195 Configuring LCS over Iur


195-1

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIURCOMMSCCP. In this step, setthe subrack number and slot number of the SPU subsystem that processesinformation exchange on the BSC6900.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL to set the parametersrelated to cell location information. The parameters include:– Cell location configuration type– Geographical location information about the antenna:

– Cell Antenna Latitude– Cell Antenna Altitude– Cell Antenna Longitude

– Cell coverage information:– Cell Antenna Max Coverage– Cell Antenna Orientation– Cell Antenna Opening and so on

3. Configure GPS assistance information exchange.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIURCOMMSCCP. In this step, setthe subrack number and slot number of the SPU subsystem that processesinformation exchange on the BSC6900.

(2) For GPS information exchange over the Iur interface, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD GPS to add a GPS receiver to the NRNC. In this step, set GPStype to NRNC_RNC(Nearby RNC), indicating that the GPS receiver isinstalled at the NRNC.

NOTE

l If a GPS receiver on the NRNC side is installed on the NodeB, set GPS type toNRNC_NODEB(NodeB in RNC).

l Before adding a GPS receiver to the NRNC, ensure that the GPS receiver is installedat the NRNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPS to add the GPS receiver.In this step, set GPS type to RNC(Local RNC) (when the GPS receiver is installedat the RNC) or to NODEB(Local NodeB) (when the GPS receiver is installed at theNodeB).

(3) If a GPS receiver needs to be configured on the BSC6900 side, run theBSC6900 MML command SET CLKTYPE with the type of clock board in theBSC6900 set to GCGa.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GPS to activate the GPS referencereceiver.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING to setparameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement to appropriatevalues. In this step, set Cell ID and GPS Frame Timing Active Flag.

l Verification Procedure1. Start Iur interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 195-1.

195 Configuring LCS over IurRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 195-1 Iur Interface Trace dialog box

2. Check the information traced over the Iur interface. You can find an informationexchange initiation procedure. In this procedure, the local RNC sends the NRNC anINFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST message, in which thevalue of Information Type is GPS Information or DGPS. The NRNC sends thelocal RNC INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE andINFORMATION REPORT messages, which contain GPS assistance data, as shownin Figure 195-2.

Figure 195-2 GPS assistance data carried in the INFORMATION REPORTmessage

NOTEYou can see INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST andINFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE messages only after theBSC6900 MML command ACT GPS is executed.



195-3

3. Establish a service, and then perform a soft handover over the Iur interface.4. Enable the CN to send a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message with the

cause "DIRECT".5. Check messages traced over the Iur interface. You can find an Information Exchange

Initiation procedure. In this procedure, the local RNC sends the NRNC anINFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST message, in which thevalue of Information Type is UTRAN Access Point Position with Altitude, asshown in Figure 195-3. The NRNC sends the local RNC an INFORMATIONEXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE message, which contains geographicalinformation about the neighboring cell over the Iur interface, as shown in Figure195-4.

Figure 195-3 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 195-4 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE

6. Check messages traced over the Iur interface. You can find DEDICATEDMEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST and DEDICATEDMEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE messages, as shown in Figure195-5 and Figure 195-6 respectively. In the former message, the value of DedicatedMeasurement Type is Round Trip Time.

Figure 195-5 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST



195-5

Figure 195-6 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GPS to deactivate the GPS receiver.

Alternatively, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GPS to remove the GPSreceiver from the NRNC. GPS information exchange over the Iur interface is therebydisabled.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UIURCOMMSCCP to deactivate LCSover Iur.

----End

Example/*Activating LCS over Iur*///Setting the positioning methodSET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_RTT-1&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0;/*Configuring cell information exchange over the Iur interface*/ADD UIURCOMMSCCP: SRN=0, SN=1;ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=29, CellId=1, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=31245560, AntennaLongitudeDegree=121588234, AntennaAltitudeMeter=20, MaxAntennaRange=2000, AntennaOrientation=0, AntennaOpening=1200; CellAverageHeight=25;/*Configuring GPS assistance information exchange.*/ADD UIURCOMMSCCP: SRN=0, SN=1;ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=NRNC_RNC, RNCID=1, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, LATITUDE=31245560, LONGITUDE=121588230, ALTITUDE=21;SET CLKTYPE: CLKTYPE=GCGa;ACT GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, ACTTYPE=BOTH;ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING: CellId=1, StartFlag=ACTIVE;

//Deactivating LCS over IurRMV GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

196 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCSService

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020807Iupc Interface for LCS service.


– IP interface boards of the BSC6900 support this feature.

– A Stand-Alone SMLC (SAS) is configured.


– The following features have been configured before this feature is activated:

– WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS has been configured if theoperator employs the Cell ID+RTT algorithm.

– WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS has been configured if the operator employs theA-GPS algorithm.

l License



– The UE supports at least one of the following positioning methods:

– UE-assisted CELLID+RTT

– UE-based A-GPS

– UE-assisted A-GPS

– The global data is configured by performing the following procedure:

1. Configuring the Basic Data

2. Configuring the OPC and DPC

3. Configuring the Area Information

4. Configuring the M3UA Local and Destination Entities

– Physical layer data and data link layer data are configured by performing the followingprocedure:

RANFeature Activation Guide 196 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service


196-1

1. Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc Board

2. Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board3. Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUa/POUc Board4. Configuring the User Plane of the Iub Interface (over ATM)

ContextOnly IP transmission can be applied between the BSC6900 and the SAS. The transport networklayer data on the Iupc interface needs to be configured at the BSC6900. When the BSC6900 isconnected to multiple SASs through IP transmission, you need to configure this feature on eachIupc interface. One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of four SASs simultaneously.

NOTE

Before configuring the Iupc interface data, familiarize yourself with Protocol Structure and Links on theIupc Interface.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC to add the destination signalingpoint (DSP) data that corresponds to the SAS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML commands ADD M3LE and ADD M3DE to add the M3UAlocal entity (M3LE) and the M3UA destination entity (M3DE) that correspond to theSAS respectively.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link. To addmultiple SCTP links, run this command for each SCTP link to be added.– If Signalling link mode is set to Server at the SAS, set Signalling link mode to

CLIENT at the BSC6900. If Signalling link mode is set to CLIENT at the SAS,set Signalling link mode to Server at the BSC6900.

– Set Application type to M3UA.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS to add an M3UA link set.

– If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP, set Work mode of the M3UA link setto M3UA_IPSP.

– If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP and Destination entity type is set toM3UA_SP, set Work mode to M3UA_IPSP. If Local entity type is set toM3UA_ASP and Destination entity type is not set to M3UA_SP, set Workmode to M3UA_ASP.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT to add an M3UA route.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK to add an M3UA link. To add more

M3UA links, run this command repeatedly.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USAS to add the SAS.8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to enable SAS-CENTRIC

positioning based on CELLID + RTT or AGPS. For details, see 191 Configuring CellID + RTT Function Based LCS or 193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.

l Verification Procedure1. Perform the verification procedures by referring to 191 Configuring Cell ID + RTT

Function Based LCS or 193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.

196 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS ServiceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

l Deactivation Procedure1. Perform the deactivation procedures by referring to 191 Configuring Cell ID + RTT

Function Based LCS or 193 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.

----End

Example//Activating Iupc Interface for LCS Service//Adding the DSP data that corresponds to the SASADD N7DPC:DPX=4, SPDF=WNF, DPC=8345, STP=OFF, SLSMASK=B0000, NEIGHBOR=YES, NAME="SAS", DPCT=IUPC, PROT=ITUT, BEARTYPE=M3UA, SPX=4;//Adding the M3LE that corresponds to the SASADD M3LE:LENO=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=4294967295, NAME="IUPC", SPX=4;//Adding the M3DE that correspond to the SAS ADD M3DE:DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=4, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=4294967295, NAME="IUPC";//Adding an SCTP linkADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=SERVER, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="10.10.10.10", PEERIP1="10.10.11.11", PEERPN=3000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an M3UA link setADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, NAME="IUPC";//Adding an M3UA routeADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="IUPC";//Adding an M3UA linkADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, NAME="IUPC";//Adding the SASADD USAS: CnOpIndex=0, SasId=0, Dpx=4;//Setting SMLC-related parametersSET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_RTT-1, AGPSMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, LcsWorkMode=SAS_CENTRIC;

RANFeature Activation Guide 196 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service


196-3

197 Configuring RAN SharingIntroduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021304RAN Sharing Introduction Package.




– This feature cannot be used together with the feature WRFD-021311 MOCNIntroduction Package.

l License


Context

This feature enables multiple operators to share the same set of RAN equipment but have theirown independent cells. The same set of RAN equipment can provide different operators withrich and differentiated services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In thisstep, set RAN Sharing Support to YES to turn on the RAN sharing switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR twice to add the primaryand secondary operators respectively.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERGROUP twice to add anoperator group respectively for the primary and secondary operators.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPC for multiple times to add OSPs forprimary and secondary operators.

RANFeature Activation Guide 197 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package


197-1

NOTE

Primary and secondary operators can have their own OSPs for the same BSC6900.l Primary and secondary operators can share the same Network ID when required.l When primary and secondary operators share the same Network ID, they must use the

same OSP code bits but different OSP code[Whole Number].l When primary and secondary operators do not share Network ID, they can have different

values for OSP code bits.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC for multiple times to add DSPs forprimary and secondary operators.

6. Configure Iu data for the primary and secondary operators.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE for multiple times to add CN

nodes for the primary operator.8. Configure Iub data and add a dedicated cell.

NOTE

There are two types of RAN sharing:l NodeBs are independently deployed by operators.l NodeBs are shared by operators and cells are not shared by operators.


If the CNs of the primary and secondary operators are working properly, dedicated cellscan be set up for these operators, and the IDs of these operators can be displayed on theUE, this feature has been activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In this

step, set RAN Sharing Support to NO to turn off the RAN sharing switch.

----End

Example//Activating RAN Sharing Introduction Package

//Setting the sharing mode for the operatorsSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES;

//Adding a primary operatorADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, CnOperatorName="PRIM", MCC="502", MNC="10", CnOpIndex=0;

//Adding a secondary operatorADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, CnOperatorName="SEC", MCC="310", MNC="30", CnOpIndex=1;

//Adding an operator group for the primary operatorADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=0, CnOpGrpName="PRIM", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=0;

//Adding an operator group for the secondary operator ADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=1, CnOpGrpName="SEC", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=1;

//Adding the OSP for the primary operatorADD OPC: NAME="PRIM", SPX=0, NI=INT, SPCBITS=BIT14, SPDF=WNF, SPC=111;

197 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Adding the OSP for a secondary operatorADD OPC: NAME="SEC", SPX=1, NI=NAT, SPCBITS=BIT24, SPDF=WNF, SPC=222;

//Adding DSPs for the primary operatorADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMCS", DPX=0, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=333, DPCT=IUCS, BEARTYPE=M3UA;ADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMPS", DPX=1, SPX=0, SPDF=WNF, DPC=444, DPCT=IUPS, BEARTYPE=M3UA;//Adding DSPs for a secondary operatorADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMCS", DPX=2, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=555, DPCT=IUCS, BEARTYPE=M3UA;ADD N7DPC: NAME="PRIMPS", DPX=3, SPX=1, SPDF=WNF, DPC=666, DPCT=IUPS, BEARTYPE=M3UA;

//Adding CN nodes for the primary operatorADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=0, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=0, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=ON, RTCPBWRatio=1, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=1, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=1, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000;

//Adding CN nodes for a secondary operatorADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=2, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=2, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=ON, RTCPBWRatio=1, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;ADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=3, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R99, SupportCRType=CR527_NOT_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=60000;

//Adding a cellADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", BANDIND=BAND1,PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=100, CnOpGrpIndex=0,UARFCNUPLINK=9612, UARFCNDOWNLINK=10562, PSCRAMBCODE=0, TCELL=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CFGRACIND=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId = 6,URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NODEBNAME="NodeB1", LOCELL=0, SUPBMC=FALSE, MAXTXPOWER=430, PCPICHPOWER=330;

//Deactivating RAN Sharing Introduction Package

//Setting the sharing mode for the operatorsSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO;

RANFeature Activation Guide 197 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package


197-3

198 Configuring Dedicated Carrier forEach Operator

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.




– The feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package has been configuredbefore this feature is activated.

l License



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In thisstep, set RAN Sharing Support to YES to turn on the RAN sharing switch.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR to add the primary andsecondary operators.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERGROUP twice to add anoperator group respectively for the primary and secondary operators.

4. Configure Iu data for the primary and secondary operators.

5. Configure Iub data and add a dedicated cell.

NOTE

There are two types of RAN sharing:

l NodeBs are independently deployed by operators.

l NodeBs are shared by operators and cells are not shared by operators.


RANFeature Activation Guide 198 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator


198-1

Use a UE to access cells 1000 and 1001. If the network access is successful, carriers areexclusively used by the operators.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In this

step, set RAN Sharing Support to NO to turn off the RAN sharing switch.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL to remove all cells configured for

the operator.

----End

Example//Activating Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator

//Configuring basic information about the BSC6900SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES;

//Adding a primary operatorADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, CnOperatorName="PRIM", MCC="502", MNC="10", CnOpIndex=0;

//Adding a secondary operatorADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, CnOperatorName="SEC", MCC="310", MNC="30", CnOpIndex=1;

//Adding an operator group for the primary operatorADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=0, CnOpGrpName="PRIM", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=0;

//Adding an operator group for the secondary operatorADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=1, CnOpGrpName="SEC", CnOpNum=ONE, CnOpIndex1=1;

//Adding dedicated cell 1ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CELLID=1, CELLNAME="Cell1", BANDIND=BAND1,PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=100, CnOpGrpIndex=0,UARFCNUPLINK=9612, UARFCNDOWNLINK=10562, PSCRAMBCODE=0, TCELL=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CFGRACIND=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId = 6,URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NODEBNAME="NodeB1", LOCELL=0, SUPBMC=FALSE, MAXTXPOWER=430, PCPICHPOWER=330;//Adding dedicated cell 2ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CELLID=2, CELLNAME="Cell2", BANDIND=BAND1,PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=100, CnOpGrpIndex=1,UARFCNUPLINK=9622, UARFCNDOWNLINK=10572, PSCRAMBCODE=0, TCELL=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CFGRACIND=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId = 6,URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NODEBNAME="NodeB1", LOCELL=0, SUPBMC=FALSE, MAXTXPOWER=430, PCPICHPOWER=330;

//Deactivating Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator

//Turning off the RAN sharing switchSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO;

198 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each OperatorRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Removing a dedicated cellRMV UCELL: CellId=1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 198 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator


198-3

199 Configuring Flexible NetworkArchitecture

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture.





l License


Context

This feature can meet the networking requirements of different operators.


For information on activating the Iu Flex feature, see 211 Configuring Iu Flex.

For information on activating the Cell Broadcast Service feature, see 174 Configuring CellBroadcast Service.

For information on activating the RAN Sharing feature, see 197 Configuring RANSharing Introduction Package.


For information on verifying the Iu Flex feature, see 211 Configuring Iu Flex.

For information on verifying the Cell Broadcast Service feature, see 174 Configuring CellBroadcast Service.

RANFeature Activation Guide 199 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture


199-1

For information on verifying the RAN Sharing feature, see 197 Configuring RAN SharingIntroduction Package.


For information on deactivating the Iu Flex feature, see 211 Configuring Iu Flex.

For information on deactivating the Cell Broadcast Service feature, see 174 ConfiguringCell Broadcast Service.

For information on deactivating the RAN Sharing feature, see 197 Configuring RANSharing Introduction Package.

----End

199 Configuring Flexible Network ArchitectureRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

200 Configuring Mobility Control andService Differentiation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD02130403 Mobility Control and Service Differentiation.





ContextThis feature supports the configuration of different service support for multiple operators to meettheir individual requirements.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE to setthe parameter RAN Sharing Support to YES. Then, set the parameters Intra RATInter Plmn Ho Allowed and Inter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to YES.


The cells that belong to different operators can be configured as intra-frequency, inter-frequency, or inter-RAT neighboring cells.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE to set

the parameter RAN Sharing Support to YES. Then, set the parameters Intra RATInter Plmn Ho Allowed and Inter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to NO.

----End


200 Configuring Mobility Control and ServiceDifferentiation


200-1

Example//Activating Mobility Control and Service DifferentiationSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES;//Deactivating Mobility Control and Service DifferentiationSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=NO;

200 Configuring Mobility Control and ServiceDifferentiation



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

201 Configuring Independent LicenseControl

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130404 Independent License Control.




– The feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package has been configuredbefore this feature is activated.

l License


Context

This feature enables operators to have their own network capacity and optional features, therebymeeting different service and operation requirements.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to configure a license for theprimary operator.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to configure a license for thesecondary operator.

l Verification ProcedureThis feature does not need to be verified.


----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 201 Configuring Independent License Control


201-1

Example//Activating Independent License ControlSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=0, CsErlang=30000, FUNCTIONSWITCH1=PDCP-1;SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=NO, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, CsErlang=20000;

201 Configuring Independent License ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

202 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021305RAN Sharing Phase 2.



– The features WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package must be configuredbefore this feature is activated.


ContextThis feature provides independent Iub transmission resource management for multiple telecomoperators to ensure the QoS of their respective users.


For information on activating this feature, see 203 Configuring Dedicated IubTransmission Control.




----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 202 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2


202-1

203 Configuring Dedicated IubTransmission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02130501 Dedicated Iub Transmission Control.





ContextThis feature provides separate admission control policies for operators that share the same port,thereby ensuring the basic bandwidth available to each operator and improving bandwidthefficiency when the Iub resources are idle.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD OPSEPINFO to add the separateinformation for operators, including bandwidth ratio and load threshold for eachoperator.

NOTE

This feature can be enabled for one to four operators as required. The bandwidth ratios and loadthresholds for these operators need to be separately configured. Note that the sum of the bandwidthratios for all valid operators must be 100%.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD FRALNK, ADD UNILNK, or ADDIMAGRP to add a physical port and configure Index of Separate Information forOperators for the links carried on the physical port. In addition, set OperatorSeparated Flag to ON(ON).

RANFeature Activation Guide 203 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control


203-1

NOTE

If IP transmission is used on the port, configure separate information for operators based on IPtransmission by repeating the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK or ADD MPGRP.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a NodeB. In this step, setSharing Type Of NodeB to RANSHARING(RAN Sharing).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE to add an adjacent node.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP to configure the TRM mapping

table.

NOTE

The BSC6900 provides a default TRM mapping table. This step is executed only when differentTRM mapping policies are required.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP to add the TRM mapping to theadjacent node. In this step, set Resource Management Mode to SHARE(SHARE)or EXCLUSIVE(EXCLUSIVE). If you set Resource Management Mode toEXCLUSIVE(EXCLUSIVE), you are advised to add the TRM mapping to theadjacent node for each operator. Otherwise, the operator for whom the TRM mappingto the adjacent node is not added cannot admit services.


Assume that networks of operators A and B are enabled with the RAN sharing feature.

1. Choose Monitor > Transport Resource RealTime Monitoring on the LMT. Specifythe parameters related to the physical port that is shared by operators A and B andspecify operator indexes. Then, check whether the bandwidth occupied by eachoperator meets the conditions specified by the predefined bandwidth ratio parameters.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD FRALNK, MOD UNILNK, or MOD

IMAGRP as required. In this step, set Operator Separated Flag to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activation procedureADD OPSEPINFO: OPSEPINDEX=0, OPCOUNT=TWO, TYPE=ATM, OPINDEX1=0, BWRATIO1=40, OPINDEX2=3, BWRATIO2=60;

ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BT=AEUa, IMAGRPN=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=ON, OPSEPINDEX=0;

ADD UNODEB: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBId=1, SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, HostType=SINGLEHOST,SharingType=RANSHARING;

ADD ADJNODE: ANI=1, NAME="NodeB1", NODET=IUB, NODEBID=1, TRANST=ATM, IsROOTNODE=YES, SAALLNKN=20;

ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=1, PATHID=10, CARRYT=ATMLOGICPORT, CARRYF=0, CARRYSN=26, CARRYVPN=10, VPI=2, VCI=50, TXTRFX=111, RXTRFX=111, AAL2PATHT=SHARE;

ADD TRMMAP: TMI=14, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM;

203 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ADD ADJMAP: ANI=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM, CNMNGMODE=SHARE, TMIGLD=14, TMISLV=14, TMIBRZ=14, FTI=0;//Deactivation procedureMOD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=26, BT=AEUa, IMAGRPN=0, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;

RANFeature Activation Guide 203 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control


203-3

204 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021303IMSI-Based Handover.





ContextWith this feature, configuring SNA-related information on the RNC is supported. This enablesthe UTRAN to limit UE mobility when the CN does not support the shared network area (SNA)function.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE toenable RAN Sharing.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ULASNAMAP. In this step, set PLMN to46000, LAC to 1234, and SNAC to 1.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIMSISNAMAP to add an IMSI-to-SNAmapping relationship. In this step, set The start of IMSI to 460071234000000, Theend of IMSI to 460071234500000, PLMN to 46000, and SNAC to 1.

l Verification Procedure1. Use the UE with the IMSI of 460071234000006 to access the cell with the LAC of

H'1234. The UE is admitted to the cell.2. Use the UE with the IMSI of 460071234000006 to access the cell with the LAC of

H'1235. The UE is rejected by the cell. In this case, you can view the RRCCONNECTION REJECT message on the Uu interface.

RANFeature Activation Guide 204 Configuring IMSI-Based Handover


204-1

NOTE

The restrictions on cell update, UTRAN registration area (URA) update, handovers,relocations, and handling COMMON ID messages are the same as that on RRC connectionrequest.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ULASNAMAP to remove a mapping

relationship between LAC and SNA.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UIMSISNAMAP to remove a mapping

relationship between IMSI and SNA.

----End

Example//Activating IMSI-Based Handover

//Enabling RAN SharingSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=YES;

//Adding PLMN, LAN, and SNACADD ULASNAMAP: MCC="460", MNC="00", LAC=H'1234, SNAC=1;

//Adding the PLMN and SNAC of the SNAADD UIMSISNAMAP: ImsiMin = "460071234000000", ImsiMax = "460071234500000", MCC="460", MNC="07", SnaExistInd=TRUE,SNAC=1;

//Deactivating IMSI-Based Handover

//Removing a mapping relationship between IMSI and SNARMV ULASNAMAP: MCC="460", MNC="00", LAC=1234, SNAC=1;

//Removing a mapping relationship between IMSI and SNARMV UIMSISNAMAP: ImsiMin="460071234000000", ImsiMax="460071234500000", MCC="460", MNC="07", SnaExistInd=TRUE, SNAC=1;

204 Configuring IMSI-Based HandoverRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

205 Configuring MOCN IntroductionPackage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021311MOCN (Multi-Operator Core Network) Introduction Package.



– This feature cannot be used together with the feature WRFD-021304 RAN SharingIntroduction Package.

l License

– The license controlling this feature has been activated.l The UE and CN support the MOCN feature.

Context

Multi-Operator Core Network (MOCN) was introduced in 3GPP Release 6. It enables multipleoperators to share the network and therefore reduces the CAPEX and OPEX.

The MOCN feature has no requirement for the RNC, NodeB, and UE hardware. It is applicableto all categories of UEs.

For details about MOCN, see 3GPP TS 23.251.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR to add a primaryoperator. In this step, set Cn Operator Name, MCC, MNC, and Cn OperatorIndex to appropriate values.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR to add a secondaryoperator. In this step, set Cn Operator Name, MCC, MNC, and Cn OperatorIndex to appropriate values.

RANFeature Activation Guide 205 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package


205-1

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to activate the license for theprimary operator.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to activate the license for thesecondary operator.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERATOR to add a commonoperator.

NOTE

If the MOCN operator has applied for a new PLMN, a common operator needs to be configured.If the MOCN operator does not apply for a new PLMN, a common operator does not need tobe configured.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPERGROUP to add an operatorgroup.

NOTE

When no common operator is configured, set the common operator index (CnOpIndex1) of theoperator group to the default value 255.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE to setthe sharing mode for the operators. Set RAN Sharing Support to NO. Set MOCNSupport to YES. Set Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed, Inter RAT Inter PlmnHo Allowed, Default CnOperator, and Mocn Control Switch to appropriate valuesbased on the network plan.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA to setparameters for the primary operator.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA to setparameters for the secondary operator.

10. Configure Iu interface transmission data between the BSC6900 and the primary andsecondary operators' CNs by referring to Configuring Interface Data.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE to add a CN node for theprimary operator.

12. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE to add a CN node for thesecondary operator.

13. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP to add a mappingbetween Network Resource Identifiers (NRIs) and CN nodes.

NOTE

The mapping between NRIs and CN nodes needs to be configured based on the network plan.

If a CN node is configured with multiple NRIs, repeat this step until all the required mappingrelationships are configured.

14. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add an MOCN NodeB. In thisstep, set Sharing Type Of NodeB to MOCN and set other parameters based on thenetwork plan.

15. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a dedicatedNodeB.

16. Configure the area information by referring to Configuring the Area Information.

NOTE

Location areas must be the same for the primary and secondary operators.

17. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to add an MOCNcell.

205 Configuring MOCN Introduction PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

NOTE

A cell is a dedicated cell if its operator group is configured with only one operator.

18. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL to add a neighboring RNCcell.

l Verification Procedure1. Register supporting UEs and non-supporting UEs in MOCN cells of the primary and

secondary operators. The UEs are registered successfully and properly initiate CS andPS services.

NOTE

The MOCN network has two types of UEs:

l Supporting UE: supports the MOCN feature. In an MOCN network, the RNC broadcasts thePLMNs of the operators through system information messages (the Multiple-PLMN list IE).Supporting UEs interpret such PLMN information or notify the RNC of their selected PLMNsthrough initial direct transfer messages. Supporting UEs support 3GPP Release 6.

l Non-supporting UE: does not support the MOCN feature. Non-supporting UEs cannot interpretthe PLMN information in system information messages.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL to remove the MOCN cell.2. Add a cell not enabled with the MOCN feature by referring to Configuring the Cell

Data.

NOTE

Deactivating the MOCN feature interrupts services. Therefore, perform the deactivation operationsearly in the morning when the traffic is light.

----End

Example//Configuring MOCN Introduction Package

//Adding a primary operatorADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=PRIM, CnOperatorName="PrimOp", MCC="302", MNC="221", CnOpIndex=0;

//Adding a secondary operatorADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=SEC, CnOperatorName="SecOp", MCC="302", MNC="640", CnOpIndex=1;

//Adding a common operatorADD UCNOPERATOR: OperatorType=COMM, CnOperatorName="Common", MCC="302", MNC="580", CnOpIndex=5;

//Activating the license for the primary operatorSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=0, FUNCTIONSWITCH2=ENHANCEDIUFLEX-1, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=MOCN_PACKAGE-1;

//Activating the license for the secondary operatorSET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=NO, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH2=ENHANCEDIUFLEX-1, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=MOCN_PACKAGE-1;

//Adding an operator groupADD UCNOPERGROUP: CnOpGrpIndex=0, CnOpGrpName="ShareCnOpGrp", CnOpNum=TWO, CnOpIndex1=0, CnOpIndex2=1, CnOpIndexComm=5;



205-3

//Setting the sharing mode for the operatorsSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO, MOCNSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=NO, DefaultCnOp=255, MocnControlSwitch=COMM_MOCN_NRI_GLOBAL_CONFIG_MODE_SWITCH-1&COMM_MIB_MULTI_PLMN_LIST_ALLOWED_SWITCH-1;

//Setting parameters for the primary operator SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=0, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, CSNRILength=7, PSNRILength=10, NullNRI=0;

//Setting parameters for the secondary operatorSET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX_MOCN, CSNRILength=7, PSNRILength=10, NullNRI=1;

//Adding CN node 10 for the primary operatorADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=10, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Adding CN node 20 for the primary operatorADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=20, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Adding CN node 11 for the secondary operatorADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=11, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Adding CN node 21 for the secondary operatorADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=21, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R5, SupportCRType=CR529_SUPPORT, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=65535, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, RTCPSwitch=OFF, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Adding the mapping between CN node 10 and an NRI for the primary operatorADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=10, NRI=10;

//Adding the mapping between CN node 20 and an NRI for the primary operatorADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=0, CNId=20, NRI=20;

//Adding the mapping between CN node 11 and an NRI for the secondary operatorADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=11, NRI=100;

//Adding the mapping between CN node 21 and an NRI for the secondary operatorADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=21, NRI=600;

//Adding an MOCN NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBId=1, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=MOCN;

//Adding a dedicated NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="NodeB2", NodeBId=2, SRN=0, SN=0,

205 Configuring MOCN Introduction PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0;

//Adding a location area for the primary operatorADD ULAC:CNOPINDEX=0, LAC=H'7208, PLMNVALTAGMIN=1, PLMNVALTAGMAX=256;

//Adding a location area for the secondary operatorADD ULAC:CNOPINDEX=1, LAC=H'7208, PLMNVALTAGMIN=1, PLMNVALTAGMAX=256;

//Adding an MOCN cellADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Cell1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=0, SupBmc=FALSE;

//Adding a neighboring RNC cellADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=RNC1, CellId=1, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="Cell1", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=h'2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE;

//Deactivating MOCN Introduction Package

//Removing an MOCN cellRMV UCELL: CellId=1;

//Adding a cell not enabled with the MOCN featureADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Cell1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=1, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00, SpgId=6, URANUM=D8, URA1=1, URA2=2, URA3=3, URA4=4, URA5=5, URA6=6, URA7=7, URA8=8, NodeBName="NodeB1", LoCell=0, SupBmc=FALSE;



205-5

206 Configuring Carrier Sharing byOperators

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators.




– The feature WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package has been configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License


l The CN supports the MOCN feature.

Context

This feature enables multiple operators to share the same carrier.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to add an MOCNcell so that multiple operators can share the same carrier.


1. Check whether the MOCN introduction package is effective based on the messagetraced on the Uu interface.

– If a cell is configured for only one operator, the system information message ofthe cell does not contain the information element (IE) multiplePLMN-List.

– If a cell is configured with multiple operators but is not configured with a commonoperator, the system information message of the cell contains the PLMN of onlythe first operator, and the value of the IE multiplePLMN-List is TRUE.

RANFeature Activation Guide 206 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators


206-1

– If a cell is configured with multiple operators and a common operator, the systeminformation message of the cell contains the IE multiplePLMN-List, broadcastingall PLMNs of the MOCN cell.As shown in Figure 206-1, the system information message broadcasts PLMN302580 of the common operator.As shown in Figure 206-2, the field PLMN Identity in the system informationmessage contains the IE multiplePLMN-List. This IE contains the PLMNs(302221 and 302640) of two operators.

Figure 206-1 PLMN Identify field in the MIB message

The IE Multiple PLMN List contains the PLMNs (302221 and 302640) of the actualoperators.

206 Configuring Carrier Sharing by OperatorsRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 206-2 Multiple PLMN List IE in the MIB message

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL to remove the MOCN cell.

----End

Example//Configuring Carrier Sharing by OperatorsADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, LAC=H'7208, SupBmc=FALSE;//Deactivating Carrier Sharing by OperatorsRMV UCELL: CellId=1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 206 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators


206-3

207 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cellfor Operators

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131102 Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.





l License


Context

This feature enables operators to independently control a NodeB or cell when the MOCN featureis enabled.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a dedicated NodeB.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to add a dedicatedcell.


1. Check whether this feature has been activated based on the master information block(MIB) message traced on the Uu interface.

As shown in Figure 207-1, the MIB message of the dedicated cell contains the operatorinformation (302640).

RANFeature Activation Guide 207 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators


207-1

Figure 207-1 PLMN Identify IE in the MIB message

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELL to remove the dedicated cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB to change a dedicated NodeB

into a shared NodeB.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to add a shared

cell.

----End

Example//Activating Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators

//Adding a dedicated NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="1", NodeBId=1, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0;//Adding a dedicated cellADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="1", LoCell=1, SupBmc=FALSE;

207 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for OperatorsRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Deactivating Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators

//Removing a dedicated cellRMV UCELL: CellId=1;//Changing a dedicated NodeB into a shared NodeBMOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, SharingType=MOCN;//Adding a shared cellADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="1", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=1, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10562, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="1", LoCell=1, SupBmc=FALSE;

RANFeature Activation Guide 207 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators


207-3

208 Configuring MOCN MobilityManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131103 MOCN Mobility Management.





ContextThis feature is applicable to different MOCN mobility strategies. This feature enables theBSC6900 to determine whether to hand over a UE to a target cell based on the ID of the operatorto which the UE belongs and the PLMN ID of the target cell.

By default, the BSC6900 allows inter-RAT cross-PLMN handovers. You can prohibit this typeof handover by running the command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In thisstep, set MOCN Support, Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed, and Inter RAT InterPlmn Ho Allowed to YES.

l Verification Procedure1. When the cross-PLMN handover switch is turned on, check whether UEs can perform

cross-PLMN handovers, relocations, and cell updates. If UEs can perform cross-PLMN handovers, relocations, and cell updates, this feature has been activated.


RANFeature Activation Guide 208 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management


208-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In thisstep, set MOCN Support to YES, Intra RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to NO, andInter RAT Inter Plmn Ho Allowed to NO.

----End

Example//Activating MOCN Mobility ManagementSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO, MOCNSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=YES;//Deactivating MOCN Mobility ManagementSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: RANSharingSupport=NO, MOCNSupport=YES, InterPlmnHoAllowedIntraRat=NO, InterPlmnHoAllowedInterRat=NO;

208 Configuring MOCN Mobility ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

209 Configuring MOCN Load Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131104 MOCN Load Balance.





ContextThis feature enables multiple operators to achieve load balance and network fairness.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In thisstep, set MOCN Support to YES.

NOTE

In this step, set Default CnOperator to 255. The BSC6900 selects operators in Round Robinmode.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UOPERATORSHARINGMODE to query

the parameter settings of the feature MOCN Load Balance.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE. In thisstep, set MOCN Support to YES and Default CnOperator to 0. The BSC6900preferentially selects the default operator (operator 0).

----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 209 Configuring MOCN Load Balance


209-1

Example//Activating MOCN Load BalanceSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: MOCNSupport=YES, DefaultCnOp=255;//Deactivating MOCN Load BalanceSET UOPERATORSHARINGMODE: MOCNSupport=YES, DefaultCnOp=0;

209 Configuring MOCN Load BalanceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

210 Configuring Routing Roaming UEsin Proportion

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-02131106 Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.




l License


– The CN supports this feature. During initial registration of a roaming UE, the UE selectsthe same operator for CS and PS services, and the IMSI is carried to the RNC.

Context

When roaming UEs of one operator move to the area served by the RNC that is shared amongmultiple operators using the Multi-Operator Core Network (MOCN), the RNC routes the UEsto CN nodes that belong to different operators according to the preset ratio if the UEs are underthe roaming agreement with these operators.


NOTE

Assume that operator1 and operator2 share the same RNC by using the MOCN and operator A signsa roaming agreement with the two operators.

1. To add operator A to the roaming relation list of operator1, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD UROAMMAP. In this step, set MCC for operator A to 460, MNCto 09, Cn Operator Index for operator1 to 1, Cn Operator Group Index for

RANFeature Activation Guide 210 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion


210-1

operator1 to 1, and Capability of Roaming Operator to an appropriate valueaccording to the network plan, such as 30.

2. To add operator A to the roaming relation list of operator2, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD UROAMMAP. In this step, set Cn Operator Index for operator2to 2, Cn Operator Group Index to 1, and Capability of Roaming Operator to anappropriate value according to the network plan, such as 70.

NOTE

After the parameter settings are complete, the UEs that belong to operator A are distributed tooperator1 and operator2 according to the preset ratio (30:70).If operator B also signs a roaming agreement with operator1 and operator2, the roaming UEdistribution ratio for operator B must be set to the same as that for operator A when operatorB is added to the roaming relation lists of the two operators.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UROAMMAP to query the roaming

capacity of operator A. Expected result: Capability of Roaming Operator foroperator1 is set to 30, and Capability of Roaming Operator for operator2 is set to70.

2. When UEs belonging to operator A roam to the RNC shared by operator1 andoperator2 by using the MOCN for a long measurement period, view the performancecounter VS.ROAM.MOCN.NUM on the M2000. Expected result: The roaming UEsof operator A are routed to CN nodes of operator1 and operator2 in a preset proportionof 30:70.

NOTE

UEs of the non-supporting UE type do not support network sharing, as defined in the featureWRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators.This feature is not applicable to UEs of the supporting UE type (supporting network sharing).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UROAMMAP to remove operator A from

the roaming relation list of operator1.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UROAMMAP to remove operator A from

the roaming relation list of operator2.

----End

Example/*Activating Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion*/

//Adding operator A serving roaming UEs to the roaming relation list of operator1ADD UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=1, CnOpGrpIndex = 1,AvailRoamCap =30;

//Adding operator A serving roaming UEs to the roaming relation list of operator2ADD UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=2, CnOpGrpIndex = 1,AvailRoamCap =70;

/*Deactivating Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion*/

//Removing operator A serving roaming UEs from the roaming relation list of operator1

210 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in ProportionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

RMV UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=1, CnOpGrpIndex = 1;

//Removing operator A serving roaming UEs from the roaming relation list of operator2RMV UROAMMAP: MCC="460", MNC="09", CnOpIndex=2, CnOpGrpIndex = 1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 210 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion


210-3

211 Configuring Iu Flex

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021302Iu Flex.





l License


l Others

– The MSC and the serving GPRS support node (SGSN) support this feature.

Context

This feature allows one BSC6900 to connect to multiple MSCs and/or SGSNs, and these CS/PS domain nodes can form different pools that serve the same pool area.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA. In this step, setFeature Supporting Mode of CS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX, set FeatureSupporting Mode of PS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX, and set Length of CS NRI inbits and Length of PS NRI in bits to appropriate values.

2. Configure the Iu interface transmission between BSC6900 and multiple core networks(CNs) by referring to Configuring the Interfaces.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE to add multiple CN nodes foran operator according to the network plan.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP. In this step, set CnOperator Index, CN node ID, and Network resource identity to configure themapping relationships between NRI and CN nodes.

RANFeature Activation Guide 211 Configuring Iu Flex


211-1

5. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP toconfigure the mapping relationships between international mobile subscriber identity(IMSI) ranges and CN nodes.

After configuring the mapping relationships, the RNC routes the UE whose IMSI iswithin the IMSI range to the specified CN.


1. Enable the UE to access a cell and register in the cell.

2. According to the mapping relationships between IMSI ranges and CN nodes and theload balance algorithm, the RNC selects a CN node for the UE, and the UE registerssuccessfully.

3. Then, if the UE initiates a service, the RNC routes the UE to the corresponding CNnode according to the mapping relationships between NRI and CN nodes.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA to deactivatethis feature.

----End

Example//Activating Iu Flex

//Configuring the RNC supporting Iu Flex with Length of CS NRI in bits and Length of PS NRI in bits set to appropriate valuesSET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, PSNRILength=5;

//Configuring the first CN nodeADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=2, CNProtclVer=R6, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=1000, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Configuring the second CN nodeADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=3, CNProtclVer=R6, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=1000, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Configuring the mapping relationship between NRI and the first CN nodeADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, NRI=8;

//Configuring the mapping relationship between NRI and the second CN nodeADD UNRIGLBCNIDMAP: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18, NRI=9;

//Configuring the mapping relationship between the IMSI range and the first CN nodeADD UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP: ImsiRtMin=0, ImsiRtMax=666, CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17;

//Configuring the mapping relationship between the IMSI range and the second CN nodeADD UIMSIIDNNSCNIDMAP: ImsiRtMin=667, ImsiRtMax=999, CnOpIndex=1, CNId=18;

//Deactivating Iu Flex

211 Configuring Iu FlexRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_NONE, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_NONE;

RANFeature Activation Guide 211 Configuring Iu Flex


211-3

212 Configuring Iu Flex LoadDistribution Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021306Iu Flex Load Distribution Management.



– The feature WRFD-021302 Iu Flex has been configured before this feature is activated.l License


– The CN supports dynamic capacity management and load redistribution.

ContextThis feature enables load balancing and load redistribution among multiple CN nodes when IuFlex is deployed. The BSC6900 supports dynamic and static management of CN capacity andstatus information.


– Configuring load balancing in static capacity mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNNODE. In this step, set Capabilityof CN Node to an appropriate value. The BSC6900 performs load balancingbetween CN nodes based on the configured CN capacities.

– Configuring load balancing in dynamic capacity mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA. In this step:– Set Feature Supporting Mode of CS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX.– Set Feature Supporting Mode of PS Domain to SUPP_IUFLEX.

RANFeature Activation Guide 212 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management


212-1

– Set CS Information Update Switch to ON.– Set PS Information Update Switch to ON.

NOTE

Load balancing in dynamic capacity mode takes effect only when the BSC6900 isconnected to Huawei CN and the preceding switches related to Iu Flex are turned on.

– Configuring load redistribution based on NullNRI

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE. In this step, set Status ofCN Node to OFFLOAD.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA. In this step,set NullNRI VALUE to an appropriate value based on the network plan.

– Configuring load redistribution based on Block CN Node

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE. In this step, set Status ofCN Node to NORMAL and select the RSVDBIT1_BIT1 check box under theparameter Reserved parameter 1.

l Verification Procedure– Verifying load balancing in static capacity mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCNNODE to query the capacity ratioof CN nodes.

2. Check the following performance counters on the M2000 to verify that theBSC6900 performs load balancing based on the preconfigured CN capacity:– Performance counters for CS service setup:

– VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMSI– VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.InValidNRI– VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMEI

– Performance counters for PS service setup:– VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMSI– VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.NRI– VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMEI

– Verifying load balancing in dynamic capacity mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCNNODE to query the capacity ratioof CN nodes.

2. On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Trace > UMTS Services to initiate Uu and Iuinterface message tracing.

3. Check the traced messages. If the CN sends the BSC6900 an INFORMATIONTRANSFER INDICATION message, the dynamic CN capacity ratio is updatedand used. If the CN does not send any INFORMATION TRANSFERINDICATION message to the BSC6900, the static CN capacity ratio is used.

4. Check the following performance counters on the M2000 to verify that theBSC6900 performs load balancing based on the dynamic CN capacity ratio:– Performance counters for CS service setup:

– VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMSI– VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.InValidNRI– VS.IU.LdBalRtCS.IMEI

212 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

– Performance counters for PS service setup:

– VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMSI

– VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.NRI

– VS.IU.Load.RoutePS.IMEI

– Verifying load redistribution based on NullNRI


2. Power off the UE. The PTMSI of the UE is assigned by SGSN1.

3. Set SGSN1 to the OFFLOAD state and SGSN2 to the NORMAL state on the RNC.

4. Set SGSN1 to the OFFLOAD state on SGSN1.

5. Power on the UE and the UE makes an attach request. Check the traced Iu interfacemessages. The expected result is as follows:

– The BSC6900 routes the RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message toSGSN1 based on NULL NRI. The attach reception message from SGSN1contains NULL NRI and non-broadcasting location areas.

– After receiving the non-broadcasting location areas, the UE sends a new routingarea update (RAU) request and contains NULL NRI in theRRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message. The BSC6900 routes theRRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message to SGSN2, of which the stateis not OFFLOAD, based on NULL NRI.

– Verifying load redistribution based on Block CN Node


2. Power off the UE. The PTMSI of the UE is assigned by SGSN1.

3. Set SGSN1 to the BLOCK state and SGSN2 to the NORMAL state on the RNC.

4. Power on the UE and the UE makes an attach request. Check theRRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message traced on the Iu interface.

Expected result: The RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFER message containsNRI of SGSN1. The BSC6900 routes the RRC_INIT_DIRECT_TRANSFERmessage to SGSN2 because SGSN1 is in the BLOCK state.


– Deactivating load balancing in static capacity mode

Load balancing in static capacity mode does not need to be deactivated.

– Deactivating load balancing in dynamic capacity mode

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOPERATORCFGPARA. In this step,set CS Information Update Switch to OFF and PS Information UpdateSwitch to OFF.

– Deactivating load redistribution based on NullNRI

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE. In this step, set Status ofCN Node to NORMAL.

– Deactivating load redistribution based on Block CN Node

RANFeature Activation Guide 212 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management


212-3

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCNNODE. In this step, set Status ofCN Node to NORMAL and deselect the RSVDBIT1_BIT1 check box under theparameter Reserved parameter 1.

----End

Example//Activating Iu Flex Load Distribution Management//Configuring Load balancing in static capacity modeADD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, Dpx=2, CNProtclVer=R6, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, AvailCap=1000, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Configuring load balancing in dynamic capacity modeSET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, CsInfoUpdFlag=ON, PsInfoUpdFlag=ON;

//Configuring load redistribution based on NullNRIMOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, CNLoadStatus=OFFLOAD, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;SET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, NullNRI=31;

//Configuring load redistribution based on Block CN NodeMOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN,CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF, RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT1-1;

//Deactivating Iu Flex Load Distribution Management//Deactivating load balancing in dynamic capacity modeSET UOPERATORCFGPARA: CnOpIndex=1, CsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, PsNriCfgMode=SUPP_IUFLEX, CSNRILength=5, CsInfoUpdFlag=OFF, PsInfoUpdFlag=OFF;

//Deactivating load redistribution based on NullNRIMOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF;

//Deactivating load redistribution based on Block CN NodeMOD UCNNODE: CnOpIndex=1, CNId=17, CNDomainId=CS_DOMAIN, CNLoadStatus=NORMAL, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS, Switch3GPP25415CR0125=OFF, RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT1-0;

212 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

213 Configuring Enhanced MultibandManagement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020160Enhanced Multiband Management.



– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:– In the inter-frequency traffic steering, the features WRFD-020110 Multi Frequency

Band Networking Management and WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Packagemust be activated.

– In the inter-frequency load sharing, the features WRFD-020110 Multi FrequencyBand Networking Management and WRFD-020103 Inter-Frequency Load Balancemust be activated.

– If one of the required features is not activated, the corresponding function isunavailable in the multi-frequency band networking solution. Features can beconfigured according to operator requirements.


ContextBlind load-based inter-frequency handovers are previously performed. In a multiband network,cells in different frequency bands have different coverage areas, and therefore blind handoversperformed in this scenario may lead to call drops. After this feature is applied, when an inter-frequency handover is required, the RNC starts the inter-frequency measurement and makes ahandover decision instead of performing a blind handover. This increases the handover successrate.

In the inter-frequency traffic steering, each cell is configured with the priority for carrying eachtype of service (R99 RT, R99 NRT, HSPA, and others). After the radio access bearer (RAB) isset up, inter-frequency measurement is performed to ensure that the UE accesses the cell withthe highest priority.

RANFeature Activation Guide 213 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management


213-1

In the inter-frequency load sharing, after the RAB setup, load reshuffling (LDR) may trigger aload-based inter-frequency handover. The target cell is selected on the basis of the qualitymeasurement of cells. Only the cell that meets the quality requirement is selected.


– Configure this feature based on the traffic steering-based handover function.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD to set Measurement-Based DRDSwitch to ON.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL to setDrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE(Send).

– Configure this feature based on the load sharing-based handover function.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL to setDrdOrLdrFlag to TRUE(Send).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set InterFreq LoadHandover Method Selection to MEASUREHO.


– Verify this feature based on the traffic steering-based handover function.

1. Configure cell A to provide R99 services and configure cell B to provide HSPAservices.

2. Enable the UE to set up an R99 service in cell A and then raise the service rate of theUE.

3. Monitor the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message on the Uu interface to view the inter-frequency measurement control information element (IE), as shown in Figure213-1.

Figure 213-1 Message containing the IE

4. After reporting an inter-frequency measurement message, the UE switches to thetarget inter-frequency cell B if cell B meets the related threshold requirements.

– Verify this feature based on the load sharing-based handover function.

1. Configure cell A and cell B to provide R99 services.

2. Enable the UE to set up an R99 service in cell A.

3. When a large number of UEs access cell A, cell congestion occurs. In this scenario,you can view the inter-frequency measurement control information in theRRC_MEAS_CTRL message on the Uu interface.

4. After reporting an inter-frequency measurement message, the UE switches to thetarget inter-frequency cell B if cell B meets the related threshold requirements.


– Deactivate this feature based on the traffic steering-based handover function.

213 Configuring Enhanced Multiband ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD to set Measurement-Based DRDSwitch to OFF.

– Deactivate this feature based on the load sharing-based handover function.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set InterFreq LoadHandover Method Selection to BLINDHO.

----End

Example//Configuring this feature based on the traffic steering-based function

//Enabling the measurement-based directed retry decision (DRD)SET UDRD: BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=ON;

//Enabling the measurement switch for an inter-frequency neighboring cellMOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=2021, CellId=3000, NCellRncId=2021, NCellId=3002, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE;

//Configuring this feature based on the load sharing-based handover function

//Enabling the measurement switch for an inter-frequency neighboring cell MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=2021, CellId=3000, NCellRncId=2021, NCellId=3002, DrdOrLdrFlag=TRUE;

//Configuring the load-based inter-frequency handover with InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection set to MEASUREHOMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=3000, InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection=MEASUREHO;

//Deactivating this feature based on the traffic steering-based handover function

//Disabling the measurement-based DRDSET UDRD: BasedOnMeasHRetryDRDSwitch=OFF;

//Deactivating this feature based on the load sharing-based handover function.

//Configuring the load-based inter-frequency handover with InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection set to BLINDHOMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=3000, InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection=BLINDHO;

RANFeature Activation Guide 213 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management


213-3

214 Configuring Satellite Transmissionon Iub Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050104Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface.





Context

This feature supports satellite transmission on the Iub interface, which is useful to cover remoteareas, such as an island.

When satellite transmission is applied over the Iub interface, the delay increases. The defaultsetting of the SAAL/SCTP timer on the Iub interface can meet the satellite transmissionrequirements.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB. In this step, set Satellite TransInd to TRUE.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate a cell.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether cell settings aresuccessful.

2. Establish an AMR service in the cell. The AMR service is established successfullyand the speech quality is satisfactory.

RANFeature Activation Guide 214 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface


214-1

3. Establish a PS BE service in a cell. The service is established successfully and thedata download rate is steady.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate the cell.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB. In this step, set Satellite Trans

Ind to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activating Satellite Transmission on Iub InterfaceMOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, SATELLITEIND=TRUE;ACT UCELL: CellId=1;//Deactivating Satellite Transmission on Iub InterfaceDEA UCELL: CellId=1;MOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, SATELLITEIND=FALSE;

214 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub InterfaceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

215 Configuring Satellite Transmissionon Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050108Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface.





ContextThis feature solves the communication problems of base stations in remote areas, such as remoteregions, islands, and deserts, where there is no transmission system or the terrestrial transmissionsystem is difficult to deploy

Satellite transmission may bring extra delay and therefore timers of signaling plane and userplane need to be adjusted to prevent transmission delay from causing data loss.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SAALLNK or MOD SAALLNK to add ormodify the settings of SAAL links on the Iu interface. Modify the values of parametersassociated with satellite transmission, as described in Table 215-1.

RANFeature Activation Guide 215 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface


215-1

Table 215-1 Timers related to SAAL links of satellite transmission

Parameter ID ParameterName

Default Value RecommendedValue

MPS Managementproving status

MPS_NEUTRAL MPS_EMERGENCY

CCTMR Timer_CC{ms} 200 800

POLLTMR Timer_Poll{ms} 100 300

IDLETMR Timer_Idle{ms} 500 3000

RSPTMR Timer_No-Response{ms}

1500 3000

KEEPTMR Timer_Keep-Alive{ms}

100 1000

NOTEIn the signaling plane of the Iu interface, except that the timer of SAAL links is set to a smallervalue, timers of other links are set to 1s or longer. The delay of satellite transmission is about 600ms and therefore the settings of timers in other signaling planes do not need to be changed. Timersof links in the user plane of the Iu interface are also set to 1s or longer and do not need to be changed,either.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SAALLNK to check whether the setting of

the timer is modified correctly.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SAALLNK to query the status of SAAL

links. The result shows that SAAL link state is AVAILABLE.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD SAALLNK to change associatedparameters to the default values.

----End

Example//Activating Satellite Transmission on Iu InterfaceMOD SAALLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SAALLNKN=1, CARRYT=NCOPT, CARRYSRN=0, CARRYSN=14, CARRYNCOPTN=0, SAALLNKT=NNI, CCTMR=800, POLLTMR=300, IDLETMR=3000, RSPTMR=3000, KEEPTMR=1000;

215 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu InterfaceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

216 Configuring MBMS IntroductionPackage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010616MBMS Introduction Package.





l License


l Others

– The existing PS domain functional entities (GGSN, SGSN, UTRAN, and UE) supportthe Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) bearer service.

– A new functional entity, that is, the broadcast multicast service centre (BM-SC) is addedto provide a set of functions for the MBMS services.

– The UE supports MBMS functions.

Context

The MBMS feature is an important feature specified by 3GPP Release 6. When MBMS isenabled, point-to-multipoint multimedia services can be forwarded from one entity to multipleentities over a common channel. In this way, the resources can be shared.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH to set MBMS ControlSwitch to ON(ON).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UMBMSSA to add the MBMS service areaaccording to the network plan.

RANFeature Activation Guide 216 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package


216-1

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBMSSA to add the mappingbetween the cell and the MBMS service area (SA) according to the network plan.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHBASIC to add the SCCPCHaccording to the network plan.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH to add the FACH according to thenetwork plan.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACHDYNTFS to add the transportformat set (TFS) of an FACH according to the network plan.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH to add a logical channel mappedto an FACH according to the network plan.

8. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHTFC to add the CalculatedTransport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCH according to the network plan.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMCCH to add the MCCH and theMICH for the cell according to the network plan.

10. Configure the cell-level MBMS parameters according to the network plan.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT USCCPCH to activate theconfiguration information of an SCCPCH.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLMBMS to activate the MBMSconfiguration data for the cell.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMTCH to set the MBMS service type andrate according to the network plan.

12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA to set the RNC-levelparameters for the MBMS algorithm according to the network plan.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE to query the

MBMS status in the cell.2. Conduct a test to check whether the MBMS UE can receive the corresponding MBMS

data successfully.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH to set MBMS ControlSwitch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activation MBMS Introduction Package

//Enabling the MBMS control switchSET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON;//Adding the MBMS service areaADD UMBMSSA: CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=1;//Adding the mapping between the cell and the MBMS service area (SA)ADD UCELLMBMSSA: CellId=2, CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=1;//Adding the SCCPCHADD USCCPCHBASIC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, ScrambCode=0, SlotFormat=D8, TFCIpresence=NOT_EXISTS, MbmsChInd=MCCH;//Adding the FACHADD UFACH: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, TrChId=10, RateMatchingAttr=220, ToAWS=20, ToAWE=10, MaxFachPower=-10, MAXCMCHPI=D15, MINCMCHPI=D14, SIGRBIND=TRUE, ChCodingType=CONVOLUTIONAL;

216 Configuring MBMS Introduction PackageRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Adding the transport format set (TFS) of an FACHADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=2, TrChId=10, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D3, TbNumber1=0, TbNumber2=1, TbNumber3=2;//Adding a logical channel mapped to an FACHADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=2, TrChId=10;//Adding the Calculated Transport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCHADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, CTFC=0;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, CTFC=1;//Adding the MCCH and the MICH for the cellADD UCELLMCCH: CellId=2, MichId=19, PhyChIdforMcch=11, FachIdforMcch=10;//Activating the configuration information of an SCCPCHACT USCCPCH: CellId=2, PhyChId=11;//Activating the MBMS configuration data for the cellACT UCELLMBMS: CellId=100;//Setting the MBMS service type and rateSET UMTCH: ServiceType=STREAMING, ServiceBitRate=D128;//Setting the RNC-level parameters for the MBMS algorithmSET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode=DYNAMIC;

//Deactivation MBMS Introduction PackageSET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=OFF;

RANFeature Activation Guide 216 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package


216-3

217 Configuring MBMS AdmissionControl

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control.




– The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License


Context

The admission criteria of Iub resources and credit resources for the Multimedia Broadcast andMulticast Service point-to-point/point-to-multipoint resource block (MBMS PtP/PtM RB)requests is the same as that for other services. The cell power resources are preferentiallyallocated to high-priority MBMS broadcasting services. Only the activation procedure of theresource admission on the Uu interface is provided in this section.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select MBMS_UU_ADCTRL from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down listto enable the MBMS admission control on the Uu interface and select a properadmission algorithm according to the network plan.


1. Enable the MBMS admission algorithm, and then limit cell resources to ensure thatthe admission resources are insufficient. In this manner, the admission fails. Anexample is given as follows:

RANFeature Activation Guide 217 Configuring MBMS Admission Control


217-1

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URESERVEOVSF to reserve thedownlink Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) for the cell so that only64 kbit/s services are supported in the cell.

(2) Originate a 256 kbit/s service. Check the messages traced on the Iu interface onthe RNC side, which are the MBMS SESSION START message from the corenetwork (CN) to the RNC and the MBMS SESSION START RSPPONSEmessage from the RNC to the CN.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE. If theparameter Reason of service setup failure is Access Failure, the MBMSadmission algorithm takes effect.

2. Disable the MBMS admission algorithm, and the services are successfully admitted.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect MBMS_UU_ADCTRL from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-downlist to disable the MBMS admission algorithm.

----End

Example//Activating MBMS Admission ControlMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=MBMS_UU_ADCTRL-1, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST;

//Verifying MBMS Admission ControlADD URESERVEOVSF: CellId=1, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=20;DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE: CellId=1;

//Deactivating MBMS Admission ControlMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=MBMS_UU_ADCTRL-0;

217 Configuring MBMS Admission ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

218 Configuring MBMS Load Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control.





l License


Context

The feature helps to lighten the cell load when the cell enters the congestion state and ensuresthe system stability. When the cell is in the basic congestion state and downlink congestion isdetected, the power consumed by MBMS services is reduced.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-downlist to enable downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control onthe Uu interface.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to set the congestion-reliefaction triggered by Load Reshuffling (LDR).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLOLC to set the sequence andnumber of MBMS services to be released for Overload Control (OLC).


1. Originate an MBMS service on the BSC6900, and ensure that service data is sent.

RANFeature Activation Guide 218 Configuring MBMS Load Control


218-1

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM. Based on the current loadof the cell, set the triggering thresholds for LDR and OLC. Ensure that thecorresponding load control actions can be triggered.

3. When the cell load exceeds the LDR threshold, the power of MBMS services isreduced in the cell. Check the maxFACH Power information element in theCOMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUESTmessage on the Iub interface.

4. When the cell load exceeds the OLC threshold, MBMS services are released.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-downlist to disable downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control onthe Uu interface.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to remove theMBMS service power reduction from the LDR-triggered actions.

----End

Example//Activating MBMS Load Control//Enabling downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control on the Uu interfaceMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= DL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_OLC-1;//Setting the first LDR-triggered action to power reduction of MBMS servicesMOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFirstAction=MBMSDECPOWER;//Enabling the triggered OLC to release MBMS services on a one-by-one basisADD UCELLOLC: CellId=1, SeqOfUserRel=MBMS_REL, MbmsOlcRelNum=1;//Verifying MBMS Load ControlMOD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, DlLdrTrigThd=2, DlLdrRelThd=1, DlOlcTrigThd=2, DlOlcRelThd=1;//Deactivating MBMS Load ControlMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= DL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_OLC-0;MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFirstAction=NoAct;

218 Configuring MBMS Load ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

219 Configuring MBMS TransportResource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management.



– The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured beforethis feature is activated.

l License


Context

For the same MBMS session in the same Node B, a separate Iub transport bearer is establishedfor each cell. An example is shown in the following figure assuming 3 cells in one Node B.Three copies of exact same MBMS session data are sent through the Iub from the CRNC to theNode B.

For details, see the Optional Feature Description of Huawei UMTS.


RANFeature Activation Guide 219 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management


219-1

The feature does not need to be activated.l Verification Procedure

1. Use UEs to require an MBMS service in the two cells under the same NodeB.2. Check the signaling traced on the Iub interface.

You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUPREQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSEmessages.

– The BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORTCHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are different. This indicates that themessages are from different Iub interfaces.

– Both the COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSEmessages contain the TLA and Binding ID.



----End

219 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource ManagementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

220 Configuring Streaming Service onMBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package.


ContextThis feature enables the MBMS service to be carried on the PS streaming class, thereforeensuring QoS.


This feature depends on MBMS basic functions.

This feature can be activated only after MBMS basic functions are enabled. For details, seethe section "Configuring MBMS Introduction Package".

The parameters of streaming services have been configured by the RNC by default. Thisfeature is used as long as the CN sends MBMS services in the form of PS streaming. Noactivation operation is needed.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS mobile television service and

receive the corresponding data.2. The UE receives the data of the MBMS mobile television service successfully.

RANFeature Activation Guide 220 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS


220-1


This feature is used as long as MBMS is configured. There is no need to deactivate thisfeature.

----End

220 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

221 Configuring 16/32/64/128KbpsChannel Rate on MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.




l License


Context

This feature is related to four MBMS channel rates: 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, and 128 kbit/s.



1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE to query theMBMS status in the cell and the bandwidth of the MBMS service.

2. Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS service, the UE can receive thecorresponding data successfully.



----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 221 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS


221-1

222 Configuring MBMS Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010660MBMS Phase 2.




l License


– UE should support the corresponding enhanced MBMS functions.

Context

This feature supports the enhanced MBMS (PTP/PTM) to save cell resources. The MBMS phase2 includes following features:

l WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Model WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPAl WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancementl WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users


For details about activation procedures, see the following sections:

– 223 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode– 224 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA– 225 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement

RANFeature Activation Guide 222 Configuring MBMS Phase 2


222-1

– 226 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTPUsers

----End

222 Configuring MBMS Phase 2RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

223 Configuring MBMS EnhancedBroadcast Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode.





l License


Context

Compared with broadcast mode, it is a more efficient way to deploy the point-to-multipointservices, such as mobile TV.

This feature can be activated only after MBMS basic functions are enabled. For details, see thesection "Configuring MBMS Introduction Package".

The CN specifies whether broadcast mode or enhanced broadcast mode is used for MBMSservices. If the CN specifies the enhanced broadcast mode and the license for this mode isactivated, then, enhanced broadcast mode is used. The MBMS transmission mode should beconfigured on the RNC.

The MBMS transmission mode can be configured at the SA level, RNC level, or cell level. Thecell level has the highest priority, while the RNC level has the lowest priority. That is, if theMBMS transmission mode is configured at both the RNC level and the cell level, the cell levelconfiguration takes effect in the corresponding cell. The detailed process is as follows:


RANFeature Activation Guide 223 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode


223-1

1. Run theBSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA to set the transmissionmode at the RNC level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter.

2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USAMBMSPARA to set thetransmission mode at the SA level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter.

3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBMSPARA to set thetransmission mode at the cell level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA to set the transferthreshold between PtP and PtM mode through the Counting Threshold and the PtpTo Ptm Offset parameters.

l Verification Procedure1. Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS service and receive the

corresponding data.2. Check MBMS SESSION START message traced on the Iu interface at the RNC. If

the value of the MBMS Bearer Service Type IE is broadcast and the value of MBMSCounting Information IE is counting, the enhanced broadcast mode is configured.

3. Use one or two MBMS-supportive UEs to receive the MBMS service, you can findthat the DCH or HS-DSCH is used. Use three MBMS-supportive UEs to receive theMBMS service, you can find that the FACH is used.


To deactivate this feature, switch off the license item of the feature.

----End

Example//Activating MBMS Enhanced Broadcast ModeSET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC;ADD USAMBMSPARA: CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=0, MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC;ADD UCELLMBMSPARA: CellId=100, MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC;SET URNCMBMSPARA: NCountingThd=2, NPtpToPtmOffset=1;

223 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast ModeRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

224 Configuring MBMS P2P overHSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA.




– The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package and WRFD-010610 HSDPAIntroduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l License


Context

This feature enables Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service point-to-point (MBMS P2P)services to be carried on the HS-DSCH, saving cell resources.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA. In this step, set MbmsTransfer Mode to DYNAMIC.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,set Service Mapping Strategy Switch toMAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH.


1. Set up a 256 kbit/s MBMS streaming service.

2. Use an MBMS-capable UE to request the MBMS service and receive thecorresponding data.


RANFeature Activation Guide 224 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA


224-1

To deactivate this feature, switch off the license item of the feature.

----End

Example//Activating MBMS P2P over HSDPASET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;

224 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPARAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

225 Configuring MBMS AdmissionEnhancement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement.





ContextThis feature provides different admission policies for Multimedia Broadcast and MulticastService point-to-multipoint (MBMS PTM) services and MBMS point-to-point (MBMS PTP)services. MBMS PTP services use the same admission, preemption, and congestion criteria withnormal services except MBMS HSDPA services. MBMS PTM services should be treateddifferently so that they do not occupy excessive resources to block non-MBMS connectionadmission. In addition, some resources should be reserved for MBMS PTM services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT to set MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch and Preempt algorithm switch to ON.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA to set the preemptionparameters for PTM services. The actual preemption capabilities are determined byboth the settings of these parameters and the parameter settings sent by the CN. Theparameter settings of PTP services are sent by the CN and do not need to be setmanually.


RANFeature Activation Guide 225 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement


225-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST URNCMBMSPARA to check theconfiguration.

2. Enable a low-priority user to access the cell.3. Enable the admission algorithm, and then limit cell resources so that the admission

resources in the cell are insufficient. In this case, the MBMS services successfullypreempt common services. An example is given as follows:

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URESERVEOVSF to reserve thedownlink OVSF for the cell so that only 64 kbit/s services are supported in thecell.

(2) Originate a 256 kbit/s service. Check the messages traced on the Iu interface onthe RNC side, which are the MBMS SESSION START message from the CNto the RNC and the MBMS SESSION START RSPPONSE message from theRNC to the CN.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE. If the parameterCurrent State of Service Session is Setuping, the user connection is released due topreemption.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to set Mbms

PreemptAlgoSwitch to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating MBMS Admission EnhancementSET UQUEUEPREEMPT: PreemptAlgoSwitch=ON, MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch=ON;SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode=PTM, PtmPreemptSwitch=ON, PtmStrmPasiSwitch=ON, PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch=ON;

//Verifying MBMS Admission EnhancementADD URESERVEOVSF: CellId=1, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=20;DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE: CellId=1;

//Deactivating MBMS Admission EnhancementSET UQUEUEPREEMPT: MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch=OFF;

225 Configuring MBMS Admission EnhancementRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

226 Configuring Inter-FrequencyNeighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP

Users

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional featureWRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package,WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2.


ContextThis feature enables the filtering and handover of a target cell based on the MBMS channelresources in the inter-frequency neighboring cells, therefore ensuring the continuity of theMBMS service.





----End


226 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selectionfor MBMS PTP Users


226-1

227 Configuring FACH TransmissionSharing for MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010627FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS.



– The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package has been configured beforethis feature is activated.


ContextThis feature enables the FACHs that carry MBMS services to share transport resources over theIub interface, thereby saving the Iub bandwidth.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH. In this step, set MBMSIub Sharing Switch to ON(ON).

l Verification Procedure1. Before turning on the transmission sharing switch, activate the MBMS services in two

cells served by the same NodeB. View the tracing messages over the Iub interface.You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUPREQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages,where the BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORTCHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are different. This indicates that themessages are transmitted over different Iub interfaces.

2. Turn on the transmission sharing switch, activate the MBMS services in two cellsserved by the same NodeB, and view the tracing messages over the Iub interface.

RANFeature Activation Guide 227 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS


227-1

You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUPREQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages,where the BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORTCHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are the same. This indicates that themessages are transmitted over the same Iub interface. This feature has been activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH. In this step, set MBMS

Iub Sharing Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMSSET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MbmsIubSharingSwitch=ON;

//Deactivating FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMSSET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MbmsIubSharingSwitch=OFF;

227 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMSRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

228 Configuring MBMS FLC(FrequencyLayer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer

Dispersion)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010626MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion).





l License



– UEs support this feature.

Context

Frequency Layer Convergence (FLC) denotes the process where the UTRAN requests UEs topreferentially reselect to the frequency layer on which the MBMS service is intended to betransmitted.

Frequency Layer Dispersion (FLD) denotes the process where the UTRAN redistributes UEsacross frequencies.

FLC helps users obtain the information about an MBMS service in real time. FLD reduces cellload after the MBMS service is finished.

FLD is activated automatically after FLC takes effect, and is deactivated automatically afterFLC is disabled.


228 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency LayerConvergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)


228-1


NOTE

Two overlapping cells covered by multiple carriers must be enabled with MBMS.

The cell using frequency F1 is in the SA of MBMS, and other cells using other frequencies are notin the SA of MBMS.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLMCCH. In this step, set Flc AlgoSwitch to ON(ON).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select the HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH check box under the parameterHandOver Switch.

l Verification Procedure1. Configure an MCCH in an R99 cell and set an MBMS cell to the neighboring cell of

the R99 cell.2. Make UEs camp on the R99 cell, activate the MBMS service, and accept the MBMS

service.If UEs are reselected to the MBMS cell successfully and transmit and receive datanormally, FLC is activated.

3. Move UEs to the MBMS cell edge and terminate the MBMS service.If some UEs are reselected to the R99 cell, FLD is activated.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLMCCH. In this step, set Flc Algo

Switch to OFF(OFF).2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,

deselect the HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH check box under the parameterHandOver Switch.

----End

Example//Activating MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)MOD UCELLMCCH: CellId=1, FlcAlgoSwitch=ON;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)MOD UCELLMCCH: CellId=1, FlcAlgoSwitch=OFF;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH-0;

228 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency LayerConvergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

229 Configuring MBMS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010661MBMS over Iur.




– The feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 has been configured before this feature isactivated.

l License



– The neighboring RNC supports the MBMS feature.

– The Point to Point (PTP) services are supported.

Context

This feature extends the application scope of the MBMS service.


This feature does not need to be activated. It takes effect after the feature WRFD-010616MBMS Introduction Package is activated.

l Verification ProcedureInitiate a softt handover by moving a UE that is in CELL_DCH state and receiving theMBMS data in PTP mode from the Serving RNC (SRNC) to the Drift RNC (DRNC). Inthis way, a Radio Link (RL) is established on the Iur interface. The cell to which the RLbelongs performs the MBMS service in Point to Multipoint (PTM) mode. If at the timebeing the UE under the DRNC is receiving only MBMS data in PTM mode, this featurehas been activated.


RANFeature Activation Guide 229 Configuring MBMS over Iur


229-1


----End

229 Configuring MBMS over IurRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

230 Configuring Dynamic PowerEstimation for MTCH

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010662Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.




– The feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 has been configured before this feature isactivated.

l License


Context

This feature enables dynamic adjustment of the transmit power of the MTCH based on thenumber of neighboring cells that are in PTM mode.

It does not conflict with the maximum power and minimum power defined in the MBMS service.In addition, this feature depends on the MBMS service, because it introduces only powerdeviation.


This feature does not need to be activated. Telecom operators only need to set the poweradjustment threshold to an appropriate value.1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA. In this step, set

Combine Neighbour Cell Percent to an appropriate value based on the network plan.When the rate of PTM applications in a cell in PTM mode reach the value of thisparameter, this feature brings a combining gain. If Combine Neighbour CellPercent is set to a small value, the transmit power of the MBMS SCCPCH in the celldecreases.

RANFeature Activation Guide 230 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH


230-1

l Verification Procedure1. Select two MBMS cells (cell A and cell B) that work in the same frequency. In cell

A, configure only cell B as its intra-frequency neighboring cell. Apply the PTM modein cell A and PTP mode in cell B.

2. Use an MBMS-capable UE to initiate an MBMS service in cell A. View theNBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iub interface tocheck the power of the FACH that carries the service.

3. Set cell B to send MBMS data in the same channel in PTM mode. In this manner, therate of the intra-frequency neighboring cells that apply the PTM mode exceeds thevalue of the preset Combine Neighbour Cell Percent.

4. View the NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iubinterface to check the power of the FACH that carries the service.Expected result: The power of the FACH that carries data of the MBMS channeldecreases by 5 dB.


----End

Example//Setting the Power Adjusting ThresholdSET URNCMBMSPARA: CombNCellPercent=50;

230 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCHRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

231 Configuring MSCH Scheduling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010663MSCH Scheduling.





l License


Context

This feature enables a UE to receive packets on the MTCH in Discontinuous Reception (DRX)mode, thereby reducing UE power consumption.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH. In this step, set bothMsch Switch For NonMtchMulti Sccpch and Msch Switch For MtchMultiSccpch to ON(ON).


1. Use an MBMS-capable UE to initiate an MBMS service and ensure that the UE canreceive the MBMS data.

2. Check messages traced on the Uu interface. If MSCH configuration information isfound in the MBMS CURRENT CELL P-T-M RB INFORMATION, MBMSGENERAL INFORMATION, and MBMS NEIGHBOURING CELL P-T-M RBINFORMATION messages, this feature has been activated.


RANFeature Activation Guide 231 Configuring MSCH Scheduling


231-1

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH. In this step, set bothMsch Switch For NonMtchMulti Sccpch and Msch Switch For MtchMultiSccpch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating MSCH schedulingSET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MschSwitchForNonMtchMulti=ON, MschSwitchForMtchMulti=ON;

//Deactivating MSCH schedulingSET UMBMSSWITCH: MschSwitchForNonMtchMulti=OFF, MschSwitchForMtchMulti=OFF;

231 Configuring MSCH SchedulingRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

232 Configuring MBMS ChannelAudience Rating Statistics

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010665Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics.





l Other Prerequisites– The BMSC on the CN side identifies the channel with a fixed Temporary Mobile Group

Identity (TMGI) when delivering a program source.

ContextThis feature enables statistics on MBMS channels to help the operator obtain the audience ratingof the MBMS channels.



Set the MBMS channels (a maximum of five MBMS channels can be set) on which statisticsis to be performed. Then, send the TMGIs of these channels from the M2000 to the RNC.The RNC then measures the following channel-related counters:

– Average number of users in PTP mode– Average number of users in PTM mode

RANFeature Activation Guide 232 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics


232-1

– Time for channels remaining in PTM mode– TTime for channels remaining in PTP mode

Based on the preceding counters, the average duration for which each UE is connected toa channel can be calculated.


----End

232 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating StatisticsRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

233 Configuring Domain Specific AccessControl (DSAC)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020114Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).


– DSAC is based on the CN overload message and therefore the CN nodes should supportthis message on the Iu interface.



l License



– DSAC is a feature specified in 3GPP Release 6, and therefore only the UEs of Release6 or later support this feature.

Context

DSAC specifies the UE access restriction based on the domain type (CS, PS, or CS+PS). Thefeature can be triggered either manually or automatically.


1. To activate manual DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command ADDUCELLDSACMANUALPARA.

– To restrict the UE access to the CS domain, set Restriction for CS to TRUE; torestrict the UE access to the PS domain, set Restriction for PS to TRUE.

– To set a fixed access restriction, set Restriction Type to RestrictionFixed andselect the access classes (ACs) to be restricted from the drop-down list of ACRestriction Indicator. To set a flexible access restriction, set Restriction Type

RANFeature Activation Guide 233 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)


233-1

to RestrictionFlexible, and set Number of restrained AC every time, Range ofrestrained AC, and Interval of DSAC Restriction to appropriate values.

2. To activate automatic DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command SETUDSACAUTOALGO. In this step, set Switch for auto DSAC to ON.– To restrict the UE access to the CS domain, set Restriction for CS to TRUE; to

restrict the UE access to the PS domain, set Restriction for PS to TRUE.– Set Number of restrained Access Class every time, Range of restrained Access

Class, Access Class Restriction interval between Cells, and Interval length ofDomain Specific Access Class Restriction to appropriate values.

l Verification Procedure1. Start Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select

RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3.2. Check whether manual or automatic DSAC is activated by viewing the IE

domainSpecificAccessRestrictionParametersForPLMNOfMIB in the SIB3message traced on the Uu interface.– If the value of AccessClassBarred in the IE

domainSpecificAccessRestrictionParametersForPLMNOfMIB is barred (0),as shown in Figure 233-1, this feature has been activated.

– If the value of AccessClassBarred in the IEdomainSpecificAccessRestrictionParametersForPLMNOfMIB is notBarred(1), as shown in Figure 233-2, this feature is not activated.

Figure 233-1 DSAC activated

233 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 233-2 DSAC not activated

l Deactivation Procedure1. To deactivate manual DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV

UCELLDSACMANUALPARA.2. To deactivate automatic DSAC, run the BSC6900 MML command SET

UDSACAUTOALGO. In this step, set Switch for auto DSAC to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating DSACADD UCELLDSACMANUALPARA: CellId=223, CnOpIndex=0, CsRestriction=TRUE, PsRestriction=TRUE, RestrictionType=RestrictionFlexible, NumberOfACs=4, AcRange=AC0-1&AC1-1&AC2-1&AC3-1&AC4-1&AC5-1&AC6-1&AC7-1&AC8-1&AC9-1&AC10-0&AC11-0&AC12-0&AC13-0&AC14-0&AC15-0, AcRstrctIntervalLen=10;SET UDSACAUTOALGO: DsacAutoSwitch=ON, CsRestriction=TRUE, PsRestriction=TRUE, NumberOfACs=2, AcRange=AC0-1&AC1-1&AC2-1&AC3-1&AC4-1&AC5-1&AC6-1&AC7-1&AC8-1&AC9-1&AC10-0&AC11-0&AC12-0&AC13-0&AC14-0&AC15-0, AcIntervalOfCells=1, AcRstrctIntervalLen=10;//Deactivating DSACRMV UCELLDSACMANUALPARA: CellId=223, CnOpIndex=0;SET UDSACAUTOALGO: DsacAutoSwitch=OFF;

RANFeature Activation Guide 233 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)


233-3

234 Configuring One Tunnel

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020111One Tunnel.





l License



– The gateway GPRS support node (GGSN) and Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN)support this feature.

Context

With this feature, there is only one tunnel between the RNC and the GGSN and no tunnel betweenthe SGSN and the RNC. This feature improves efficiency of PS traffic and prevents the SGSNfrom being the bottleneck of a network when PS traffic is heavy.


1. Configure transmission resources. For details about transmission resourceconfiguration, see the section Configuring the Iu-PS Interface in the BSC6900UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

NOTE

l Whether the SGSN and GGSN support the one tunnel function can be queried by using commandson these two sides.

l Verification Procedure1. Start message tracing on the Iu interface on the BSC6900 LMT by referring to Tracing

Messages on the Iu Interface.

RANFeature Activation Guide 234 Configuring One Tunnel


234-1


2. Use a UE to initiate a PS service.

3. View the transportLayerAddress information element (IE) in theRANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message traced during Iu interface messagetracing.


4. If the value of the transportLayerAddress IE is the GGSN IP address preset duringthe transmission resource configuration, it indicates that this feature is activated.

Figure 234-3 Configured GGSN IP address


234 Configuring One TunnelRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. The feature does not need to be deactivated on the RAN side.

----End

RANFeature Activation Guide 234 Configuring One Tunnel


234-3

235 Configuring IP TransmissionIntroduction on Iub Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050402IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.


– To use the IP header compression function on the Iub interface, the PEUa or POUaboard is required.

– Only the Dopra Linux OS supports the built-in firewall function for O&M.– Only the FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support the built-in firewall function

for interfaces.– Only the FG2a, GOUa, FG2c and GOUc boards of the BSC6900 support Bidirectional

Forwarding Detection (BFD).– Dependencies on 3900 series base stations:

– In RAN11.0, only 3900 series base stations support this feature.– In RAN12.0, BTS3812E/AE, DBS3800, and 3900 series base stations support this

feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextThis feature provides a new lub transmission solution for operators. Compared with ATMtransmission, IP transmission reduces the transmission costs of HSDPA and HSUPA services.

This feature enhances Iub transmission by introducing the following functions: BFD-based IPfault detection, built-in firewall on the RNC side, and built-in firewall on the NodeB side.l If BFD-based IP fault detection is enabled, the BSC6900 triggers a port switchover, board

switchover, or IP rerouting when detecting that the gateway or the peer entity becomesfaulty. BFD can be classified into multi-hop BFD and single-hop BFD:


235 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on IubInterface


235-1

– In multi-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on differentnetwork segments.

– In single-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on the samenetwork segment.

l The built-in firewall on the RNC side safeguards IP Ethernet ports on interface boards andO&M ports against network attacks.

l The built-in firewall on the NodeB side safeguards the Iub interface against network attacksduring IP transmission.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the attributes of anEthernet port. In this step, takes the FG2c board as an example.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP to add an IP address to the Ethernetport.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK to configure the BFD check. In thisstep, set Check type to SBFD.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET IPGUARD to configure the built-in firewallfunction for an interface board. In this step, set Board type. to FG2c and ARPLearning Strict Switch to ON.

NOTE

The FG2c and GOUc boards support both the invalid packet detection function and the ARP learningstrict function. The FG2a and GOUa boards support only the ARP learning strict function.

5. (Optional) Activate the built-in firewall function for O&M (only the Dopra Linux OSsupports the built-in firewall function) by performing the following operations: Login to the OMU through LMT locally or through Putty remotely. Run the Dopra Linuxcommand iptables -A INPUT –s restricted IP -i Ethernet adapter –p transportprotocol --dport restricted port –j DROP. Here, restricted IP refers to the IP addressthat needs to be prohibited or allowed, and it can be a single IP address or a networksegment; Ethernet adapter is the name of the OMU external Ethernet adapter; transportprotocol can be TCP or UDP; restricted port is the port to be prohibited. If –p transportprotocol and --dport restricted port are not specified, all ports are disabled.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK to configure head compress fora PPP link. In this step, set Head compress to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC). Run theBSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP to configure head compress for a PPP linkgroup. In this step, set Head compress to UDP/IP_HC(UDP/IP_HC).

NOTEHead compress must be configured on peer equipment.

7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PPPLNK to enable head compress for a PPPlink. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to enable head compress for aPPP link group.

8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACL to add an access control list (ACL).9. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ACLRULE to add a rule to the ACL.

NOTEBefore adding a rule to an ACL, ensure that the ACL has already existed.





Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT to query the attributes of anEthernet port.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ETHIP to query the IP address of theEthernet port.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query whether the Check stateis UP.

4. Start BFD-based IP fault detection. If a BFD fails, an alarm ALM-21346 IPConnectivity Check Failure is reported.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPGUARD to check whether the value ofARP Learning Strict Switch is ON.

6. Built response messages to ARP requests and sent to interface boards. Run theBSC6900 MML command DSP ARP to query the ARP table of interface boards. Ifthe information of interface boards in ARP table do not update, the ARP LearningStrict Switch is valid.

7. If any invalid packet exists, run the BSC6900 MML command DSPINVALIDPKTINFO to query the detailed information.

8. (Optional) Log in to the computer whose IP address is prohibited and check whetherthe prohibited services can be performed. Run the Dopra Linux command iptables –L. All the filtering rules on the OMU will be listed, and check whether new rules areadded successfully.

– If port 80 is disabled, logging in to the BSC6900 LMT is prohibited. Check whetheryou can log in to the BSC6900 LMT on the PC whose port 80 is disabled.

– If port 22 is disabled, the OMU cannot be logged in to remotely. Check whetheryou can log in to the BSC6900 OMU through Putty on the PC whose port 22 isdisabled.

– If port 21 is disabled, FTP services of the OMU cannot be used. Check whetheryou can connect to the FTP server of the BSC6900 OMU through an FTP clienton the PC whose port 21 is disabled.

9. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP PPPLNK or DSP MPGRP to query whetherthe Code compress type is UDP/IP_HC.

10. Run the NodeB MML command DSP PPPLNK or DSP MPGRP to check whetherthe compress state is enable.

11. Run the NodeB MML command LST ACL to check whether an ACL has beenconfigured.

12. Run the NodeB MML command LST ACLRULE to check whether a rule has beenadded to the ACL.

13. Run the NodeB MML command DSP PACKETFILTER to check whether a port isbound to the ACL.

14. Run the NodeB MML command PING to use IP addresses that are not listed in theACL to ping the port supporting the packet filtering function. If no response isreceived, the built-in firewall on the NodeB side has been activated.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STP IPCHK to stop the BFD.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET IPGUARD. In this step, set Board type toFG2c and ARP Learning Strict Switch to OFF.




235-3

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ETHIP to remove an IP address from theEthernet port.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT. In this step, set Port type toFE.

5. (Optional) Log in to the OMU through the LMT locally or through Putty remotely.Run the Dopra Linux command iptables -D INPUT –s restricted IP -i Ethernetadapter –p transport protocol --dport restricted port –j DROP. Here, restrictedIP is the IP address that needs to be prohibited or allowed, and it can be a single IPaddress or a network segment; Ethernet adapter is the name of the OMU externalEthernet adapter; transport protocol can be TCP or UDP; restricted port is the port tobe prohibited, and it is used together with the transport protocol. If –p transportprotocol and --dport restricted port are not specified, all ports are disabled.

6. (Optional) Run the Dopra Linux command iptables –L. All the filtering rules on theOMU will be listed, and check whether new rules are removed successfully.

7. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK or MOD MPGRP. In this step,set Head compress to No_HC.

8. Run the NodeB MML command RMV PPPLNK to remove a PPP link. Run theNodeB MML command RMV MPGRP to remove a PPP link group.

9. Run the NodeB MML command RMV PACKETFILTER to remove the bindingrelationship between the port and the ACL.

10. Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACLRULE to remove all the rules from theACL.

11. Run the NodeB MML command RMV ACL to remove the ACL.

----End

Example//Configuring the attributes of an Ethernet port and adding an IP address to the portSET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=GE, PN=0;ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Activating BFD-based IP fault detection on an interface boardSTR IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKTYPE=SBFD, CARRYT=ETHPORT, PN=0, MODE=CHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT, PEERIP="99.9.9.100";//Activating the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface boardSET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=ON;//Activating the built-in firewall function for O&M on the RNC//For example, only the IP addresses on the 10.141.148.0 network segment is allowed to access the LMTiptables -A INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP//Activating IP head compress for a PPP linkADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=0, DS1=0, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="5.5.5.5", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="5.5.5.6", IPHC=UDP/IP_HC, PPPMUX=Disable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;//Activating IP head compress for a PPP link groupADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=0, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="5.5.5.5", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="5.5.5.6", MHF=LONG, PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF, ANTIERRFLAG=OFF, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;//Activating IP head compress for a PPP link on NodeBADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD, AUTH=NONAUTH, TSN=TS1-1,




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

IPHC=ENABLE;//Activating IP head compress for a PPP link group on NodeBADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD, AUTH=NONAUTH, IPHC=ENABLE;//Activating the built-in firewall function on the NodeBADD ACL: ACLID=3000, ACLDESC="ACL_TEST";ADD ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1, PT=IP, SIP="192.168.1.1", SWC="0.0.0.0", DIP="10.10.1.101", DWC="0.0.0.0", MDSCP=NO;ADD PACKETFILTER: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, ACLID=3000;//Querying the attributes and IP address of an Ethernet portDSP ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14;LST ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;//Verifying BFD-based IP fault detectionDSP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14;//Verifying the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface boardLST IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14;DSP ARP: SRN=0, SN=14;DSP INVALIDPKTINFO: SRN=0, SN=14;//Verifying IP head compress for a PPP linkDSP PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, PPPLNKN=0;//Verifying IP head compress for a PPP link groupDSP MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=14, MPGRPN=0;//Verifying IP head compress for a PPP link on NodeBDSP PPPLNK:;//Verifying IP head compress for a PPP link groupDSP MPGRP:;//Verifying the built-in firewall function on the NodeBLST ACL: ACLID=3000;LST ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1;DSP PACKETFILTER:;PING: SN=7, SRCIP="192.168.1.1", DSTIP="192.168.2.2", CONTPING=DISABLE, APPTIF=YES, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0;//Deactivating BFD-based IP fault detectionSTP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKN=0;//Deactivating the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface boardSET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=OFF;//Removing an IP address from an Ethernet port and modifying the attributes of the Ethernet portRMV ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0;SET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=FE, PN=0;//Deactivating the built-in firewall function for O&Miptables -D INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP//Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP linkMOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=0, IPHC=No_HC;//Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP link groupMOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=0, IPHC=No_HC;//Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP link on NodeBRMV PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD;//Deactivating IP head compress for a PPP link group on NodeBRMV MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=E1_COVERBOARD;//Deactivating the built-in firewall function on the NodeBRMV PACKETFILTER: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0;RMV ACLRULE: ACLID=3000, RULEID=1;RMV ACL: ACLID=3000;




235-5

236 Configuring Hybrid Iub IPTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050403Hybrid Iub IP Transmission.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on IubInterface.


l Other Prerequisites– The RNC and NodeB support IP transmission.– The control-plane data and physical device data of the IP-based Iub interface is

configured.

ContextIn hybrid IP transmission, real-time services and non-real-time services are transmitted ondiscrete paths to meet different requirements of services in the UMTS system. Two types ofhybrid transmission are available: FE+E1/T1 and FE+FE.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a NodeB. In this step, setIUB Trans Bearer Type to HYBRID_IP_TRANS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE to add an adjacent node. In thisstep, set the parameter Adjacent Node Type to IUB and the parameter TransportType to HYBIRD_IP.

RANFeature Activation Guide 236 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission


236-1

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path. In this step, setthe parameter Interface Type to IUB and the parameter Transport Type toHYBIRD_IP.

NOTE

If IP Path Type is set to QOS or BE-EF, the path is a high-priority path and usually E1/T1transmission is applied.If IP Path Type is set to LQ_QOS or LQ_BE-LQ_EF, the path is a low-priority path and usuallyFE transmission is applied.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP. In this step, set InterfaceType to IUB and Transport Type to HYBIRD_IP.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP. In this step, set InterfaceType to IUB, and Transport Type of the adjacent node and interface type andInterface type to HYBIRD_IP.

l Verification Procedure1. Use the UE to make a call. If the call is connected, you can infer that high-priority

services can access the high-priority IP paths normally and low-priority services canaccess the low-priority IP paths normally.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHN to query the type of services carriedin the IP path, and the forward bit rate and backward bit rate of the services.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ADJMAP to remove the TRM mapping to

the adjacent node on the Iub interface.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV TRMMAP to remove the transmission

resource mapping on the Iub interface.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH to remove the IP path on the Iub

interface.

----End

Example//Activating Hybrid Iub IP Transmission//Adding a NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="test", NodeBId=115, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=HYBRID_IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0;//Adding an adjacent nodeADD ADJNODE: ANI=115, NAME="test", NODET=IUB, NODEBID=115, TRANST=HYBRID_IP;//Adding an IP pathADD IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="183.22.81.1", PEERIPADDR="22.22.22.23", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Adding another IP pathADD IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=116, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, PATHT=LQ_QOS, IPADDR="165.11.81.1", PEERIPADDR="22.22.22.23", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Adding the transmission resource mappingADD TRMMAP: TMI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, CCHPRIPATH=EF, CCHSECPATH=LQEF, SIPPRIPATH=EF, SIPSECPATH=LQEF, SRBPRIPATH=EF, SRBSECPATH=LQEF, VOICEPRIPATH=EF, VOICESECPATH=LQEF, CSCONVPRIPATH=AF42, CSCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, CSSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, CSSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, PSCONVPRIPATH=AF42, PSCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, PSSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, PSSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, PSINTHGHPRIPATH=AF21, PSINTHGHSECPATH=LQAF21,

236 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

PSINTMIDPRIPATH=AF21, PSINTMIDSECPATH=LQAF21, PSINTLOWPRIPATH=AF21, PSINTLOWSECPATH=LQAF21, PSBKGPRIPATH=AF21, PSBKGSECPATH=LQAF21, HDSRBPRIPATH=EF, HDSRBSECPATH=LQEF, HDSIPPRIPATH=EF, HDSIPSECPATH=LQEF, HDVOICEPRIPATH=AF42, HDVOICESECPATH=LQAF42, HDCONVPRIPATH=AF42, HDCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, HDSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, HDSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, HDINTHGHPRIPATH=LQBE, HDINTHGHSECPATH=BE, HDINTMIDPRIPATH=LQBE, HDINTMIDSECPATH=BE, HDINTLOWPRIPATH=LQBE, HDINTLOWSECPATH=BE, HDBKGPRIPATH=LQBE, HDBKGSECPATH=BE, HUSRBPRIPATH=EF, HUSRBSECPATH=LQEF, HUSIPPRIPATH=EF, HUSIPSECPATH=LQEF, HUVOICEPRIPATH=AF42, HUVOICESECPATH=LQAF42, HUCONVPRIPATH=AF42, HUCONVSECPATH=LQAF42, HUSTRMPRIPATH=AF42, HUSTRMSECPATH=LQAF42, HUINTHGHPRIPATH=LQBE, HUINTHGHSECPATH=BE, HUINTMIDPRIPATH=LQBE, HUINTMIDSECPATH=BE, HUINTLOWPRIPATH=LQBE, HUINTLOWSECPATH=BE, HUBKGPRIPATH=LQBE, HUBKGSECPATH=BE;//Adding the TRM mapping to the adjacent nodeADD ADJMAP: ANI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=HYBRID_IP, CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE, CNOPINDEX=0, TMIGLD=115, TMISLV=115, TMIBRZ=115, FTI=0, LEIGLD=0, LEISLV=0, LEIBRZ=0;

//Verifying Hybrid Iub IP TransmissionDSP IPCHN: ANI=115, PATHID=115;

//Deactivating Hybrid Iub IP Transmission//Removing the TRM mapping to the adjacent nodeRMV ADJMAP: ANI=115,ITFT=IUB,CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE;//Removing the transmission resource mappingRMV TRMMAP: TMI=115;//Removing IP pathsRMV IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115;RMV IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=116;

RANFeature Activation Guide 236 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission


236-3

237 Configuring ATM/IP Dual StackNodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050404ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB.


– BSC6900 is configured with both ATM interface boards and IP interface boards.– BTS3902E does not support this feature.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface must be

configured before this feature is activated.l License


– The ATM/IP transmission link from the RNC to the NodeB is configured.

ContextThis feature allows Huawei NodeB to support the ATM/IP dual-stack transmission. Serviceswith different QoS requirements can be carried on the links of different protocols. In addition,the transmission backup is also provided.


RANFeature Activation Guide 237 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB


237-1

NOTE

When you allocate resources for ATM/IP dual stack-based transport on the Iub interface, take thefollowing suggestions into consideration:

l ATM transport, IP transport, or ATM/IP hybrid transport is applicable to control plane data. Itis recommended that ATM/IP hybrid transport be applied to control plane data for securitypurposes. That is, the SAAL and SCTP links together carry an NCP or a CCP, and the SAALlink is the active link.

l ATM transport, IP transport, or ATM/IP hybrid transport is applicable to user plane data. It isrecommended that:

l ATM transport be applied to signaling, voice services, CS conversational services, CSstreaming services, PS conversational services, and PS streaming services.

l IP transport be applied to PS interactive services, PS background services, HSDPAconversational services, HSDPA streaming services, HSDPA interactive services, HSDPAbackground services, HSUPA conversational services, HSUPA streaming services, HSUPAinteractive services, and HSUPA background services.

l Either ATM or IP transport is applicable to management plane data. It is recommended that IPtransport be applied.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a NodeB. In this step, setIUB Trans Bearer Type to ATMANDIP_TRANS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE to add an adjacent node. In thisstep, set Adjacent Node Type to IUB and Transport Type to ATM_IP. If the nodeis a leaf node, set Is Root Node to YES; otherwise, set Is Root Node to NO.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP. In this step, set InterfaceType to IUB and Transport Type to ATM_IP.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path. In this step, setInterface Type to IUB and Transport Type to IP.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJMAP. In this step, set InterfaceType to IUB and Transport Type of the adjacent node and interface type toATM_IP.


1. Use a UE to make a call. High-priority services can be carried on ATM paths and low-priority services can be carried on IP paths.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH to check the state of the IP pathand whether any resources of the path are occupied.

Expected result: Operation state is Available, and some resources of the path areoccupied.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to check the state of the AAL2path and whether any resources of the path are occupied.

Expected result: Operation state is Available, and some resources of the path areoccupied.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ADJMAP to remove the TRM mapping tothe adjacent node.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV TRMMAP to remove the transmissionresource mapping on the Iub interface.

237 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeBRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPPATH to remove the IP path on the Iubinterface.

----End

Example//Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB//Adding a NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="test", NodeBId=115, SRN=0, SN=0, TnlBearerType=ATMANDIP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=SUPPORT, HostType=SINGLEHOST, SharingType=DEDICATED, CnOpIndex=0;//Adding an adjacent nodeADD ADJNODE: ANI=115, NAME="test", NODET=IUB, NODEBID=115, TRANST=ATM_IP, IsROOTNODE=YES, SAALLNKN=1;//Adding the transmission resource mappingADD TRMMAP: TMI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM_IP;//Adding an AAL2 pathADD AAL2PATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=115, RXTRFX=115, AAL2PATHT=R99;//Adding an IP pathADD IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=QoS, IPADDR="183.22.81.1", PEERIPADDR="22.22.22.23", TXBW=10000, RXBW=10000, CARRYFLAG=NULL, VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;//Adding the TRM mapping to the adjacent nodeADD ADJMAP: ANI=115, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=ATM_IP, CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE, CNOPINDEX=0, TMIGLD=115, TMISLV=115, TMIBRZ=115, FTI=0, LEIGLD=0, LEISLV=0, LEIBRZ=0;

//Verifying ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeBDSP IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115;DSP AAL2PATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115;

//Deactivating ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB//Removing the TRM mapping to the adjacent nodeRMV ADJMAP: ANI=115,ITFT=IUB,CNMNGMODE=EXCLUSIVE;//Removing the transmission resource mappingRMV TRMMAP: TMI=115;//Removing the IP pathRMV IPPATH: ANI=115, PATHID=115;

RANFeature Activation Guide 237 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB


237-3

238 Configuring IP TransmissionIntroduction on Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050409IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface.




Forwarding Detection (BFD).l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextThis feature provides a new lu transmission solution for operators. Compared with ATMtransmission, IP transmission can significantly reduce the transmission cost.

This feature enhances Iu transmission by introducing the following functions: BFD-based IPfault detection and built-in firewall on the RNC side.l If BFD-based IP fault detection is enabled, the BSC6900 triggers a port switchover, board

switchover, or IP rerouting when detecting that the gateway or the peer entity becomesfaulty. BFD can be classified into multi-hop BFD and single-hop BFD:– In multi-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on different

network segments.– In single-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on the same

network segment.l The built-in firewall on the RNC side safeguards IP Ethernet ports on interface boards and

O&M ports against network attacks.

RANFeature Activation Guide 238 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface


238-1


The following takes the FG2c board as an example to describe the configuration operations.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the attributes of anEthernet port.


3. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set Check type toSBFD.


NOTE




1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT to query the attributes of anEthernet port.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ETHIP to query the IP address of theEthernet port.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query whether the Check stateis UP.

4. Start BFD-based IP fault detection. If a BFD fails, an alarm ALM-21346 IPConnectivity Check Failure is reported.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPGUARD to check whether the value ofARP Learning Strict Switch is ON.

6. Built response messages to ARP requests and sent to interface boards. Run theBSC6900 MML command DSP ARP to query the ARP table of interface boards. Ifthe information of interface boards in ARP table do not update, the ARP LearningStrict Switch is valid.


8. (Optional) Log in to the computer whose IP address is prohibited and check whetherthe prohibited services can be performed. Run the Dopra Linux command iptables –L. All the filtering rules on the OMU will be listed, and check whether new rules areadded successfully.

238 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu InterfaceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

– If port 80 is disabled, logging in to the BSC6900 LMT is prohibited. Check whetheryou can log in to the BSC6900 LMT on the PC whose port 80 is disabled.

– If port 22 is disabled, the OMU cannot be logged in to remotely. Check whetheryou can log in to the BSC6900 OMU through Putty on the PC whose port 22 isdisabled.


l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STP IPCHK to stop the BFD.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET IPGUARD. In this step, set Board type to

FG2c and ARP Learning Strict Switch to OFF.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ETHIP to remove an IP address from the

Ethernet port.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT. In this step, set Port type to

FE.5. (Optional) Log in to the OMU through the LMT locally or through Putty remotely.

Run the Dopra Linux command iptables -D INPUT –s restricted IP -i Ethernetadapter –p transport protocol --dport restricted port –j DROP. Here, restrictedIP is the IP address that needs to be prohibited or allowed, and it can be a single IPaddress or a network segment; Ethernet adapter is the name of the OMU externalEthernet adapter; transport protocol can be TCP or UDP; restricted port is the port tobe prohibited, and it is used together with the transport protocol. If –p transportprotocol and --dport restricted port are not specified, all ports are disabled.


----End

Example//Configuring the attributes of an Ethernet port and adding an IP address to the portSET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=GE, PN=0;ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Activating BFD-based IP fault detectionSTR IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKTYPE=SBFD, CARRYT=ETHPORT, PN=0, MODE=CHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT, PEERIP="99.9.9.100";//Activating the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface boardSET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=ON;//Activating the built-in firewall function for O&M//For example, only the IP addresses on the 10.141.148.0 network segment is allowed to access the LMTiptables -A INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP//Querying the attributes and IP address of an Ethernet portDSP ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14;LST ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;//Verifying BFD-based IP fault detectionDSP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14;//Verifying the built-in firewall function on the RNCLST IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14;DSP ARP: SRN=0, SN=14;DSP INVALIDPKTINFO: SRN=0, SN=14;

RANFeature Activation Guide 238 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface


238-3

//Deactivating BFD-based IP fault detectionSTP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKN=0;//Deactivating the built-in firewall function on the RNCSET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=OFF;//Removing an IP address from an Ethernet port and modifying the attributes of the Ethernet portRMV ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0;SET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=FE, PN=0;//Deactivating the built-in firewall function for O&Miptables -D INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP

238 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu InterfaceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

239 Configuring IP TransmissionIntroduction on Iur Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050410IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface.




Forwarding Detection (BFD).l Dependencies on Other Features


– The license controlling this feature has been activated.l Others Prerequisites

– The neighboring RNC supports IP transmission on the Iur interface.

ContextThis feature provides a new lur transmission solution for operators. Compared with ATMtransmission, IP transmission can significantly reduce the transmission cost.

This feature enhances Iur transmission by introducing the following functions: BFD-based IPfault detection and built-in firewall on the RNC side.l If BFD-based IP fault detection is enabled, the BSC6900 triggers a port switchover, board

switchover, or IP rerouting when detecting that the gateway or the peer entity becomesfaulty. BFD can be classified into multi-hop BFD and single-hop BFD:– In multi-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on different

network segments.– In single-hop BFD, the IP addresses of the local and peer ports must be on the same

network segment.


239 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on IurInterface


239-1

l The built-in firewall on the RNC side safeguards IP Ethernet ports on interface boards andO&M ports against network attacks.


The following takes the FG2c board as an example to describe the configuration operations.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the attributes of anEthernet port.


3. Run the BSC6900 MML command STR IPCHK. In this step, set Check type toSBFD.


NOTE



l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHPORT to query the attributes of an

Ethernet port.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ETHIP to query the IP address of the

Ethernet port.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPCHK to query whether the Check state

is UP.4. Start BFD-based IP fault detection. If a BFD fails, an alarm ALM-21346 IP

Connectivity Check Failure is reported.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST IPGUARD to check whether the value of

ARP Learning Strict Switch is ON.6. Built response messages to ARP requests and sent to interface boards. Run the

BSC6900 MML command DSP ARP to query the ARP table of interface boards. Ifthe information of interface boards in ARP table do not update, the ARP LearningStrict Switch is valid.


8. (Optional) Log in to the computer whose IP address is prohibited and check whetherthe prohibited services can be performed. Run the Dopra Linux command iptables –




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

L. All the filtering rules on the OMU will be listed, and check whether new rules areadded successfully.– If port 80 is disabled, logging in to the BSC6900 LMT is prohibited. Check whether

you can log in to the BSC6900 LMT on the PC whose port 80 is disabled.– If port 22 is disabled, the OMU cannot be logged in to remotely. Check whether

you can log in to the BSC6900 OMU through Putty on the PC whose port 22 isdisabled.


l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command STP IPCHK to stop the BFD.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET IPGUARD. In this step, set Board type to

FG2c and ARP Learning Strict Switch to OFF.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ETHIP to remove an IP address from the

Ethernet port.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT. In this step, set Port type to

FE.5. (Optional) Log in to the OMU through the LMT locally or through Putty remotely.

Run the Dopra Linux command iptables -D INPUT –s restricted IP -i Ethernetadapter –p transport protocol --dport restricted port –j DROP. Here, restrictedIP is the IP address that needs to be prohibited or allowed, and it can be a single IPaddress or a network segment; Ethernet adapter is the name of the OMU externalEthernet adapter; transport protocol can be TCP or UDP; restricted port is the port tobe prohibited, and it is used together with the transport protocol. If –p transportprotocol and --dport restricted port are not specified, all ports are disabled.


----End

Example//Configuring the attributes of an Ethernet port and adding an IP address to the portSET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=GE, PN=0;ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.171.35.123", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Activating BFD-based IP fault detectionSTR IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKTYPE=SBFD, CARRYT=ETHPORT, PN=0, MODE=CHECK_ON_PRIMARY_PORT, PEERIP="99.9.9.100";//Activating the built-in firewall function on an RNC interface boardSET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=ON;//Activating the built-in firewall function for O&M//For example, only the IP addresses on the 10.141.148.0 network segment is allowed to access the LMTiptables -A INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP//Querying the attributes and IP address of an Ethernet portDSP ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14;LST ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;//Verifying BFD-based IP fault detectionDSP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14;//Verifying the built-in firewall function on the RNC




239-3

LST IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14;DSP ARP: SRN=0, SN=14;DSP INVALIDPKTINFO: SRN=0, SN=14;//Deactivating BFD-based IP fault detectionSTP IPCHK: SRN=0, SN=14, CHKN=0;//Deactivating the built-in firewall function on the RNCSET IPGUARD: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, ARPLRNSTRICTSW=OFF;//Removing an IP address from an Ethernet port and modifying the attributes of the Ethernet portRMV ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0;SET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=FE, PN=0;//Deactivating the built-in firewall function for O&Miptables -D INPUT -s ! 10.141.148.0/255.255.255.0 -i bond1 -p tcp --dport 80 -j DROP




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

240 Configuring FP MUX for IPTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050420Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission.


– The FG2a/FG2c, GOUa/GOUc, and POUc support FP multiplexing.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface has beenconfigured before this feature is activated.


l The receive end of IP packets support FP mulptiplexing.

Context

The FP MUX feature encapsulates multiple packets with the same source IP address, destinationIP address, and DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) into one UDP/IP packet. This reduces the overheadof packet headers and therefore improves the transmission efficiency.

FP MUX is a Huawei proprietary protocol. Both RNC and NodeB must support this feature.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX to enable frame multiplexing onthe Iub interface. In this step, set IP MUX Type to FPMUX.

RANFeature Activation Guide 240 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission


240-1

NOTEYou do not need to configure the number of packets for multiplexing, the BSC6900 selectsproper subframes for multiplexing based on the length of subframes. Subframes that meet thefollowing conditions are multiplexed into packets:

1. The total sending duration of subframes is smaller than Maximum Delay Time.

2. The length of the subframe is smaller than Max subframe length.

3. The total length of subframes plus eight is smaller than or equal to Maximum FrameLength.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET FPMUX to configure FP multiplexing on theIub interface on the NodeB side.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to check IP packet multiplexing

conditions.2. Run the NodeB MML command LST FPMUX to query the FP multiplexing condition

of an IP path.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to disable the FP multiplexingfunction for the IP path.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET FPMUX to disable FP multiplexing on theNodeB side.

----End

Example//Acitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the RNC sideADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=FPMUX, ANI=1, PATHID=1, ISQOSPATH=NO, SUBFRAMELEN=352, MAXFRAMELEN=1031;//Acitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the NodeB sideSET FPMUX: FPMUXSWITCH =ENABLE;//Verifying FP MUX for IP Transmission on the RNC sideDSP IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=1;//Verifying FP MUX for IP Transmission on the NodeB sideLST FPMUX:;//Deacitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the RNC sideRMV IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=1;//Deacitvating FP MUX for IP Transmission on the NodeB sideSET FPMUX: FPMUXSWITCH =DISABLE;

240 Configuring FP MUX for IP TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

241 Configuring Dynamic BandwidthControl of Iub IP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050422Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP.


– − The FG2a, FG2c, GOUa and GOUc support this feature for BSC6900.l Dependencies on Other Features

– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on IubInterface.


Context

This feature enables the RNC to adjust the transmission bandwidth according to the packet lossratio and jitter over links detected by the IP performance monitor (PM). It is recommended thatflow control algorithm for bandwidth dynamic adjustment do not to use.

Procedurel Activating Procedure

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set Autoadjust bandwidth switch to ON.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT IPPM to activate the IP PM.l Verification Procedure

1. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Monitor tab. The Monitor Navigation Tree tabpage is displayed.

2. On the displayed monitoring navigation tree, choose Monitor > CommonMonitoring > Link Performance Monitoring. The Link PerformanceMonitoring dialog box is displayed.

RANFeature Activation Guide 241 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP


241-1

3. Configure monitoring parameters, select Logical Port Bandwidth for Monitor Item,and set the Subrack No. and Slot No. of the logical port. Observe the bandwidthchange of the logical port. Click Submit, as shown in Figure 241-1.

Figure 241-1 Link performance monitoring

l Deactivating Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set Auto

adjust bandwidth switch to OFF.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA IPPM to deactivate the IP PM.

----End

Example//Activating dynamic bandwidth control of Iub IPADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=ON, MAXBW=100, MINBW=50, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, OPSEPFLAG=OFF;ACT IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ISQOSPATH=NO, LOSTPKTDETECTSW=OFF;//Deactivating dynamic bandwidth control of Iub IPMOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=100;DEA IPPM: ANI=0, PATHID=1;

241 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IPRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

242 Configuring Overbooking on IPTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050408Overbooking on IP Transmission.


– All IP interface boards of BSC6900 (PEUa, FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, GOUc, UOIa_IP, andUOIc_IP) support backpressure mechanism. In addition, FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, GOUc,UOIa_IP, and UOIc_IP support IP shaping.

l Dependencies on Other Features– The feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface must be

configured before this feature is activated.l License


ContextThe transmission rate of UMTS services varies during the transmission. For example, the rateof a speech service is 12.2 kbit/s when someone is speaking and is low when no one is speaking.Overbooking on IP Transmission helps save transmission resources on the Iub interface,reducing the CAPEX and OPEX of the operator on transmission resources.

This feature consists of the following algorithms:

l RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion controll Fast backpressure on interface boardsl IP shaping


– Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion controlRun the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to switch on flowcontrol.

RANFeature Activation Guide 242 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission


242-1

– For R99 BE services, select DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH inDynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

– For HSDPA BE services, selectDRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic ResourceAllocation Switch.

– Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA. In thisstep, set Port protocol type to IP and set other flow control parameters.

2. Switch on flow control.

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD PPPLNK. In this step, set Flowcontrol switch to ON.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD MPGRP. In this step, set Flowcontrol switch to ON.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, setFlow control switch to ON.

– Activating IP shaping

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set Flowcontrol switch to ON(ON).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add a logical port. In thisstep, set Bearing type to IPLGCPORT.


Take the FE/GE-based IP transmission on the Iub interface as an example to describe howto verify backpressure-based downlink flow control.

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, start downlink traffic and bandwidth tracing tasks on the Uu,Iub, and Iu interfaces.

2. Register an R99 user UE1 in the HLR. Enable UE1 with streaming services and withboth highest uplink rate and highest downlink rate of 384 Kbit/s.

3. Register an HSDPA user UE2 in the HLR. Enable UE2 with background services andwith highest uplink rate of 384 Kbit/s and highest downlink rate of 1450 Kbit/s.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMMAP to map R99 services to high-priority queue and HSDPA services to low-priority queue.

5. All IP paths of the RNC are carried on a logical port. Enable the port flow controlwhen adding the logical port.

6. Enable UE1 and UE2 to stay in idle mode and camp on the test cell. The test cell mustsupport HSDPA services.

7. Use UE1 to perform PS streaming services, that is, use UE1 to download files fromthe FTP server.Expected result: The logical port is not congested and UE1 downloads data at thehighest rate.

8. Use UE2 to perform PS BE services, that is, use UE2 to download files from the FTPserver.Expected result: The logical port is congested and the backpressure function istriggered. The downloading rate of UE2 decreases and that of UE1 remainsunchanged. This is because R99 services have a higher priority.

242 Configuring Overbooking on IP TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

l Deactivation Procedure– Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion control

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to switch offflow control.– For R99 BE services, deselect DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in

Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.– For HSDPA BE services, deselect

DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH in Dynamic ResourceAllocation Switch.

– Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion control

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD PPPLNK. In this step, set Flow controlswitch to OFF.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD MPGRP. In this step, set Flow controlswitch to OFF.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set Flowcontrol switch to OFF.

– Deactivating IP shaping

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH to modify a logical port. Inthis step, set Bearing type to NULL(NULL).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPLOGICPORT. In this step, set Flowcontrol switch to OFF(OFF).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to add a logical port. In thisstep, set Bearing type to IPLGCPORT.

----End

Example//Activating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion controlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-1&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-1;

//Activating backpressure-based downlink congestion controlADD PORTFLOWCTRLPARA: FCINDEX=10, PORTPROTYPE=IP;ADD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=1, DS1=2, TSBITMAP=TS1-1, BORROWDEVIP=NO, LOCALIP="5.5.5.5",MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="5.5.5.6", PPPMUX=Enable, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;ADD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=1, MPTYPE=MCPPP, BORROWDEVIP=No, LOCALIP="9.9.9.99", MASK="255.255.255.0", PEERIP="9.9.9.98", MHF=LONG, PPPMUX=Disable, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON, AUTHTYPE=NO_V, ERRDETECTSW=OFF;ADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPNTYPE=Leaf, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=1000, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;

//Activating IP shapingADD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPNTYPE=Leaf, LPN=0, CARRYT=ETHER, PN=0, RSCMNGMODE=SHARE, BWADJ=OFF, CIR=1000, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON;ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP, PATHT=BE, IPADDR="80.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="10.161.0.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000, CARRYFLAG=IPLGCPORT, LPNSN=0, LPN=0,

RANFeature Activation Guide 242 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission


242-3

VLANFlAG=DISABLE, PATHCHK=DISABLED;

//Deactivating RLC retransmission rate-based downlink congestion controlSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-0&DRA_R99_DL_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH-0

//Deactivating backpressure-based downlink congestion controlMOD PPPLNK: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, PPPLNKN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF;MOD MPGRP: SRN=0, SN=27, BRDTYPE=PEUa, LGCAPPTYPE=IP, MPGRPN=1, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF;MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF;

//Deactivating IP shapingMOD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, CARRYFLAG=NULL;MOD IPLOGICPORT: SRN=0, SN=27, BT=FG2a, LPN=0, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=OFF;

242 Configuring Overbooking on IP TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

243 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CSTransmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature WRFD-050412 UDPMUX for Iu-CS Transmission.


– This feature is supported only by the BSC6900 that is configured with the FG2a/GOUa/FG2c/GOUc/POUc boards.


– The feature WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface has beenconfigured before this feature is activated.

l License



– The CS CN element (MGW) supports UDP MUX.

Context

After IP transmission is introduced to the Iu-CS interface, UP packets, especially short packetslike CS packets, cannot be transmitted efficiently after being encapsulated at the RTP, UDP, andIP layers.

This feature helps solve this problem by using a UDP subheader shorter than UDP to encapsulatemultiple RTP packets into a UDP. This reduces resources used by packet headers and thereforeimproves the efficiency of Iu-CS transmission.

This feature supports UDP MUX, regardless of whether compression of RTP headers is enabled.After this feature is enabled, transmission efficiency can be increased by 30% to 40%, dependingon the number of RTP packets that are encapsulated into a UDP.


RANFeature Activation Guide 243 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission


243-1

NOTEConfigure IP paths based on the network plan.

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPMUX or MOD IPMUX to enable the Iu-CS UDP MUX function. In this step, set IP MUX Type to UDPMUX, and set Maxsubframe length[byte], Maximum Frame Length[byte], and Maximum DelayTime[ms] to appropriate values based on the network plan. To enable the UDP MUXfunction for multiple links, run this command for each of the links.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPMUX to query the application of UDP

MUX for Iu Transmission. Check whether the feature has been activated based on thevalues of IPMUX Status, Number of MUX packets, and Number of MUX Sub-frames.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV IPMUX to remove the IP MUX paths or

run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPMUX to set IP MUX Type toFPMUX.

----End

Example//Activating UDP MUX for Iu-CS TransmissionADD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=UDPMUX, SUBFRAMELEN=352, MAXFRAMELEN=1031, FPTIMER=2;

//Checking whether UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission has been activated for an IP MUX path of which the index is 1DSP IPMUX: IPMUXINDEX=1;

//Deactivating UDP MUX for Iu-CS TransmissionMOD IPMUX: MUXTYPE=FPMUX;

243 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS TransmissionRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

244 Configuring ATM Switching-BasedHub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050105ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB.





ContextThis feature enables Huawei NodeB to provide the transmission convergence function in ATMmode. Thus, the convergence gain is achieved and the transmission line cost is reduced.


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD TREELNKPVC to add a tree link PVC.l Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command LST TREELNKPVC to query the tree link PVC.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV TREELNKPVC to remove the tree link PVC.

----End


//Activation procedure ADD TREELNKPVC: NO=1, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VST=VC_SWITCH, SRCSRN=0, SRCSN=7, SRCSBT=BASE_BOARD,

RANFeature Activation Guide 244 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB


244-1

SRCPT=IMA, SRCPN=0, SRCVPI=7, SRCVCI=33, DSTSRN=0, DSTSN=5, DSTSBT=E1_COVERBOARD, DSTPT=IMA, DSTPN=1, DSTVPI=8, DSTVCI=33, RU=kbps, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1000, SCR=800;//Verification procedure LST TREELNKPVC:;//Deactivation procedure RMV TREELNKPVC: NO=1;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure ADD TREELNKPVC: NO=1, VST=VC_SWITCH, SRCSRN=0, SRCSN=15, SRCSBT=BASE_BOARD, SRCPT=IMA, SRCPN=0, SRCVPI=7, SRCVCI=33, DSTSRN=0, DSTSN=12, DSTSBT=E1_COVERBOARD, DSTPT=IMA, DSTPN=1, DSTVPI=8, DSTVCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1000, SCR=800;//Verification procedure LST TREELNKPVC:;//Deactivation procedure RMV TREELNKPVC: NO=1;

244 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeBRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

245 Configuring AAL2 Switching-BasedHub NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050106AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB.


– DBS 3800 does not support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-050105 ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeBl License


ContextThis feature enables Huawei NodeB to provide the AAL2 transmission convergence functionin ATM mode. Thus, the convergence gain is achieved and the transmission line cost is reduced.


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node. In thisstep, set Node Type to HUB(Switching Node).

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2ADJNODE to add an AAL2 adjacentnode to the lower-level NodeB.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP AAL2NODE to query the configuration of the

AAL2 node.2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP AAL2ADJNODE to query the configuration

of the AAL2 adjacent node.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV AAL2ADJNODE to remove the AAL2adjacent node.

RANFeature Activation Guide 245 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB


245-1

2. Run the NodeB MML command RMV AAL2NODE to remove an AAL2 node. Inthis step, set Node Type to HUB(Switching Node).

NOTE

There is a relation between the AAL2 adjacent node and the AAL2 node. Therefore, you needto remove the AAL2 adjacent nodes first and then remove the AAL2 node. Note that the AAL2node can be removed only after all the AAL2 adjacent nodes are removed. Otherwise, thecommand execution fails.

----End

Example//Activation procedure ADD AAL2NODE: NT=HUB, LN=1;ADD AAL2ADJNODE: ANI=1, ADDR="H'3912323232323232333333333333333333333333", LN=2;//Verification procedure DSP AAL2NODE:;DSP AAL2ADJNODE:;//Deactivation procedure RMV AAL2ADJNODE: ANI=1;RMV AAL2NODE: NT=HUB;

245 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeBRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

246 Configuring IP Routing-Based HubNodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050107IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB.


– Only 3900 series base stations support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interfacel License


ContextThis feature enables Huawei NodeBs to provide the transmission convergence function in IPmode, therefore increasing transmission efficiency and reducing transmission costs.


1. On NodeBs locating on all leaf nodes and root nodes, run the NodeB MML commandADD IPRT to add an IP route from the NodeB to the BSC6900 or M2000.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPRT to query the configuration of the newly

added IP route.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPRT to remove the IP route.

----End


RANFeature Activation Guide 246 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB


246-1

//Activation procedure ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10";//Verification procedure DSP IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7;//Deactivation procedure RMV IPRT: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10";

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedure ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=12, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10";//Verification procedure DSP IPRT:;//Deactivation procedure RMV IPRT: SRN=0, SN=12, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="11.11.11.11", DSTMASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="10.10.10.10";

246 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeBRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

247 Configuring Ethernet OAM

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050425Ethernet OAM.

Prerequisitel Dependency on RNC Hardware

– Only BSC6900 supports this feature.l Dependency on NodeB Hardware

– BTS3812E/AE, DBS3800,3900 series NodeB can support both IEEE 802.3ah and IEEE802.1ag draft 8;


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on the IubInterface, or WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on the Iu Interface, orWRFD-050410 IP Transmission Introduction on the Iur Interface.

l License


Context

With the evolution from WCDMA to IPRAN, the Ethernet transmission network is widely used.As a layer-2 protocols, the Ethernet OAM can report the status of the network on the data linklayer. In this way, the Ethernet can be more efficiently monitored and managed. The EthernetOAM functions include detection, notification, verification, and fault location functions. Thesefaults include the hard faults (such as the link interruption) that can be detected on the physicallayer or the soft faults (such as the fault of the memory or the bridge) that cannot be detected onthe physical layer. The Ethernet OAM plays a significant role in cutting the CAPEX/OPEX costand complies with the service level (SLA).

The RAN supports two kinds of Ethernet OAM features, that is, the PPP Ethernet OAM featuredefined by the 802.3ah and the E2E Ethernet OAM defined by 802.1ag.

1. PPP Ethernet OAMThe PPP Ethernet OAM complies with the IEEE 802.3ah protocol. It is the last-mile OAMsolution. It implements the PPP maintenance of the Ethernet through detection, loopback,

RANFeature Activation Guide 247 Configuring Ethernet OAM


247-1

link monitoring, and fault detection and is not service, and it is not service-specific, asshown in Figure 247-1.

Figure 247-1 PPP Ethernet OAM network

2. E2E Ethernet OAM

The E2E Ethernet OAM complies with IEEE 802.1ag draft 7 or IEEE 802.1ag draft 8. Itis implemented based on services, maintenance domains, and E2E detection.

Procedurel Activating the Ethernet OAM 3AH Function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT EFMAH to activate the Ethernet OAM 3AHfunction.

NOTEThe OAM 3AH function on peer equipment must be activated.

l Activating the Ethernet OAM 1AG Function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMD to add the Ethernet OAMmaintenance domain (MD). The Ethernet OAM MD consists of bridges andmaintenance equipment. Each MD is associated with a maintenance level. There areeight maintenance levels, that is level 0 to level 7.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMA to add the Ethernet OAMmaintenance association (MA). Each MD can be divided into several MAs. Each MAcorresponds to a service instance identified by the VLAN in the MD.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD CFMMEP to add an Ethernet OAMmaintenance end point (MEP). You can add different local or remote maintenancepoints of different MEP types to the MA.

NOTE

l The MEPID of the RemoteMep configured on the peer equipment must be consistent withthe MEPID of the LocalMep configured on the local equipment.

l MD, MA or MEP must be configured on the peer equipment when the MD, MA or MEPhas be added on BSC6900.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT CFMCCMTST to activate the EthernetOAM unidirectional connectivity detection between the local MEP and the remoteMEP.

l Verifying the Ethernet OAM 3AH Function

1. Activate the Ethernet OAM 3AH function. The Alarm-21371 ETHOAM 3AHDetection Failure alarm is reported when Ethernet OAM detection fails. The

247 Configuring Ethernet OAMRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ALM-21345 Ethernet Link Fault alarm is report when Ethernet OAM detection isenable, because link on local end and peer end fails.

2. Activate the Ethernet OAM 3AH loopback function. If the loopback succeeds, theAlarm-21374 ETHOAM 3AH Remote Loopback is reported due to servicecongestion.

l Verifying the Ethernet OAM 1AG Function1. Activate the Ethernet OAM 1AG function. The running of the PING MAC and TRC

MAC fails if the transmission between the local MEP and the remote MEP is faultybecause the local MEP fails to receive the connectivity detection packet from theremote MEP.

2. OAM 1AG function on the peer equipment must be activated, and the transmission isfunctional that the local MEP succeeds to receive the CCM packets from the peerMEP, the running of the PING MAC and TRC MAC succeeds.

l Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 3AH Function1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA EFMAH to deactivate the Ethernet OAM

3AH function.l Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 1AG Function

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA CFMCCMTST to deactivate the EthernetOAM unidirectional connectivity detection.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMD to delete the Ethernet OAMmaintenance domain (MD).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMA to delete the Ethernet OAMmaintenance association (MA).

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV CFMMEP to delete the Ethernet OAMmaintenance end point (MEP).

----End

Example//Activating the Ethernet OAM 3AG functionACT EFMAH: SRN=0, SN=18, PN=0;//Activating the Ethernet OAM 1AG functionADD CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, MDName="md0";ADD CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0, VLANID=2, MAIDX=0, MANAME="ma0";ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=LocalMep, MEPID=1, PORTTYPE=ETHER, SN=18, PN=0;ADD CFMMEP: SRN=0, MAIDX=0, MEPTYPE=RemoteMep, MEPID=11, SN=18;ACT CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;//Verifying the Ethernet OAM 1AG functionPING MAC: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, SRCMEPID=1, DESTMEPID=11;TRC MAC: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, SRCMEPID=1, DESTMEPID=11;//Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 3AG functionDEA EFMAH: SRN=0, SN=18, PN=0;//Deactivating the Ethernet OAM 1AG functionDEA CFMCCMTST: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;RMV CFMMD: SRN=0, SN=18, MDIDX=0;RMV CFMMA: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0;RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=11;RMV CFMMEP: SRN=0, SN=18, MAIDX=0, MEPID=1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 247 Configuring Ethernet OAM


247-3

248 Configuring Clock Synchronizationon Ethernet in NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050501Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB.


– Huawei clock server should support this feature.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interfacel License


ContextThis feature provides a solution for clock synchronization in the all-IP network. The clocksynchronization of the base station can be achieved for the operator without changing the existingdata network and introducing additional QoS requirements for the transport network.



1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK to add an IP clock link.2. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of the

reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock).


1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPCLKLINK to query the running status ofall IP clock links.


248 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet inNodeB


248-1

Expected result: The value of Link Available State is Available.2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the system

clock.Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.


1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPCLKLINK to remove a specified IP clocklink.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of thereference clock source. Set Clock Working Mode to FREE(Free).

l NodeB V100R013


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLNK to add an IP clock link.2. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of the

reference clock source.– Set System Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Clock Source Type to IPCLK(IP clock source).


1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP IPCLKLNK to query the running status of allIP clock links.Expected result: The value of IP Clock Link Status is Normal.

2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the systemclock.Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.


1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV IPCLKLNK to remove a specified IP clocklink.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of thereference clock source. Set System Clock Working Mode to FREE(Free).

----End


//Activation procedure ADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=HW_DEFINED, SN=7, CIP="82.0.1.107", SIP="82.0.1.128";SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK, SYNMODE=OFF;//Verification procedure DSP IPCLKLINK:;DSP CLKSTAT: SN=7;//Deactivation procedure RMV IPCLKLINK:;SET CLKMODE: MODE=FREE;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedureADD IPCLKLNK: SRN=0, SN=12, CIP="11.11.11.11", SIP="10.10.12.12",




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ICPT=HW_DEFINED;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK, IPMODE=AUTO;//Verification procedureDSP IPCLKLNK: SN=12;DSP CLKSTAT:;//Deactivation procedureRMV IPCLKLNK: SRN=0, SN=12;SET CLKMODE: MODE=FREE;




248-3

249 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050502Synchronous Ethernet.


– Only the BSC6900 supports this feature.– Only the 3900 series base stations support this feature.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface


l Other Prerequisites– The synchronous Ethernet technology requires that all the equipments on the clock relay

path must support the synchronous Ethernet.

ContextThis feature provides the solution for clock synchronization in all-IP networking scenarios. Itenables the clock extraction and recovery in the physical layer of the Ethernet.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of thereference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock).

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronous-Ethernetclock link.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the current

clock source.

RANFeature Activation Guide 249 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet


249-1

Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal.l Deactivation Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV SYNCETH to remove a synchronous-Ethernet clock link.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of thereference clock source. In this step, set Clock Working Mode to FREE(Free).

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;ADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0;//Verification procedureDSP CLKSTAT: SN=7:;//Deactivation procedureRMV SYNCETH:;SET CLKMODE: MODE=FREE;

249 Configuring Synchronous EthernetRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

250 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040202RNC Node Redundancy.




– The license controlling this feature has been activated.l The Iur, Iu-CS, Iub and Iu-PS interfaces have been configured. For details, see Configuring

the Interfaces.l This feature has been available since RAN11.0 and is applicable only to the BSC6900.

ContextThis feature improves the reliability and robustness of RAN and shortens the service interruptiondue to single-point failure in the RNC. In this way, the service quality is improved. With thisfeature, a NodeB can be connected to two RNCs and heartbeat detection is performed on the Iurinterface between the two RNCs. When the primary RNC is faulty, the NodeB can be fastswitched to the secondary RNC for service provisioning.

The primary RNC and the secondary RNC form an RNC pool, as shown in Figure 250-1 andFigure 250-2.

RANFeature Activation Guide 250 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy


250-1

Figure 250-1 Network topology not configured with RNC pool

Figure 250-2 Network topology configured with RNC pool

NOTE

l When the serving RNC is faulty, the maximum service capability (such as CS Erlang and PSthroughput) decreases from the combined capability of two RNCs to the capability of one RNC. As aresult, the processing specifications of the network decrease.

l To activate this feature, data configurations related to this feature are required on the RNC and theNodeB. The CN and M2000 do not require data configurations specific to this feature. You can checkthe homing state of the NodeB on the M2000.


250 Configuring RNC Node RedundancyRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

NOTE

This document uses RNC202, RNC203, and NodeB1 as examples to describe the procedures. Assumethat RNC202 and RNC203 are initially configured as the primary homing and secondary homingRNC of NodeB1 respectively.

1. Data configurations on the primary homing RNC (RNC202)

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOL to add an RNC pool. Inthis step, set the parameters such as RncPool Index, RncPool Name,Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch and so on.

CAUTIONIf the license is activated , the primary homing RNC is physically broken downand Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch is set to OFF, the featureWRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency will be activated.WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency can be enabled only fifteen timesfor each R version for this kind of reason.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER to add theprimary homing RNC (RNC203) to the RNC pool.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT URNCPOOL to activate the RNC noderedundancy feature.

(4) Add a NodeB (NodeB1) of which the primary homing RNC is RNC202: Run theBSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a NodeB of which the primaryhoming RNC is RNC202.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to add thecell to the primary homing RNC and specify the peer cell ID under the secondaryhoming RNC.

(6) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPOOLPRIMHOSTPOLICY to setthe rehoming strategy of the NodeB.

2. Data configurations on the secondary homing RNC (RNC203)

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOL to add an RNC pool. Inthis step, set the parameters such as RncPool Index, RncPool Name,Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch and so on.

CAUTIONIf the license is activated , the secondary homing RNC is physically broken downand Supporting Auto-Rehoming Switch is set to OFF, and the featureWRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency will be activated.WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency can be enabled only fifteen timesfor each R version for this kind of reason.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER to add theprimary homing RNC (RNC202) to the RNC pool.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT URNCPOOL to activate the RNC noderedundancy feature.



250-3

(4) Add a NodeB (NodeB1) of which the secondary homing RNC is RNC203: Runthe BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEB to add a NodeB of which thesecondary homing RNC is RNC203.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to add thecell to the secondary homing RNC and specify the peer cell ID under the primaryhoming RNC.

3. Data configurations on the NodeB (NodeB1) side

(1) Configure information about the primary homing RNC.

a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link.b. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link.

(2) Configure information about the secondary homing RNC.

a. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link.b. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link.

l Verification Procedure1. Method 1: Verifying data configurations

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL on the RNC202 LMT. Thequery result shows that cell 1 is functional. Run the BSC6900 MML commandDSP UCELL on the RNC203 LMT. The query result shows that cell 2 isunavailable due to no control rights.

(2) Perform an emulation test of the primary RNC fault.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command RST UIU on RNC202 to make RNC202become faulty.

– If the BSC6900 recovers too fast after the BSC6900 MML command RSTUIU is executed, you can remove the cable on the Iu-CS/Iu-PS interfaceinstead.

(3) After RNC203 detects that RNC202 is faulty through the Iur interface, RNC203takes over the NodeB and initiates cell2 reestablishment.

(4) (Optional) When the connection between the NodeB and the primary homingRNC is disconnected, the secondary homing RNC cannot obtain the NodeBcontrol rights automatically. To solve this problem, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand FOC UHOSTNODEB on the RNC203 LMT to manually switch overthe NodeB control rights to the secondary homing RNC.

CAUTIONSwitching over NodeB control rights manually disrupts the ongoing serviceswhen the connection between the NodeB and the primary homing RNC is normal.

(5) On both the RNC203 LMT and the RNC202 LMT, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand DSP UCELL. If the query result on the RNC203 LMT shows that cell2 is operational and the query result on the RNC202 LMT shows that cell 1 isunavailable due to no control rights, this feature has been activated. Otherwise,this feature is not activated.

2. Method 2: Verifying services




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(1) Check whether the heartbeat between RNC202 and RNC203 is normal, as shownin Figure 250-3.

Figure 250-3 Normal heartbeat between RNC202 and RNC203

(2) Check that the cell under RNC202 is available, and then use the UE to establisha CS AMR service, as shown in Figure 250-4 and Figure 250-5.

Figure 250-4 NodeB control rights obtained by RNC202

Figure 250-5 CS AMR service set up successfully

(3) Power off RNC202 when RNC203 works properly. RNC203 then takes over theNodeB control rights.

(4) When RNC202 restores normal services, it takes over the NodeB control rightsagain according to the rehoming strategy, and RNC203 releases the NodeBcontrol rights.

3. Method 3: Verifying this feature on the M2000

(1) Create the RNCs and NodeB on the RNC POOL monitor of the M2000. Whencreating a NodeB, the M2000 checks the homing state of the NodeB. If the RNC



250-5

is the secondary homing RNC of the NodeB, the NodeB cannot be created underthat RNC.

(2) When the M2000 starts, it starts NE status subscribing. When the homing stateof the NodeB changes, the RNC reports the NodeB homing state to the M2000.The M2000 then updates the network topology displayed in the RNC POOLmonitor.

l Deactivation Procedure1. On RNC202 and RNC203, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA URNCPOOL to

deactivate the feature.

----End

Example/*Activation procedure*//*Data configuration script on the primary homing RNC side*//*Configuring an RNC pool*/ADD URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0, RncPoolName="redundancy_RNCPOOL";ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER: RncPoolIndex=0, NrncId=203;ACT URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0;

//Adding a dual-homing NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", NodeBId=500, SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS,IPTRANSAPARTIND=NOT_SUPPORT, HostType=PRIMHOST, PeerRncId=203, PeerNodebId=500, SharingType=RANSHARING;

//Setting cell parametersADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=1, CellName="Redundancy_NODEB500_00", PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=2, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10668, PScrambCode=500, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=H’0046, SAC=H’0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H’00, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", LoCell=500, SupBmc=FALSE;

/*Data configuration script on the secondary homing RNC side*//*Configuring an RNC pool*/ADD URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0, RncPoolName="redundancy_RNCPOOL";ADD URNCPOOLMEMBER: RncPoolIndex=0, NrncId=202;ACT URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0;

//Adding a dual-homing NodeBADD UNODEB: NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", NodeBId=500, SRN=0, SN=0, SSN=1, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, IPTRANSAPARTIND=NOT_SUPPORT, HostType=SECHOST, PeerRncId=202, PeerNodebId=500, SharingType=RANSHARING;

//Setting cell parametersADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=2, CellName="Redundancy_NODEB500_00", PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=1, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNDownlink=10668, PScrambCode=500, TCell=CHIP0, LAC=H’0046, SAC=H’0000, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=H’00, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="Redundancy_NODEB500", LoCell=500, SupBmc=FALSE;

/*Data configuration script on the NodeB side*//*Configuring information about the primary homing RNC on the NodeB*//*Configuring NCP and CCP*/ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;

/*Configuring information about the secondary homing RNC on the NodeB*//*Configuring NCP and CCP*/




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=2, BELONG=SLAVE;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=3, BELONG=SLAVE;/*Verifying RNC Node Redundancy*///RNC202DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=1;

//RNC203DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=2;

//RNC202RST UIU: CnOpIndex=0, CNDOMAINID= ALL_DOMAIN, RSTCNTYPE=ALL_NODES;

//RNC202DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=1;

//RNC203DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=2;//Deactivating RNC Node Redundancy//RNC202&RNC203DEA URNCPOOL: RncPoolIndex=0;



250-7

251 Configuring RRU Redundancy

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040203RRU Redundancy.





Context

RRU redundancy can improve the reliability and robustness of the RAN and shorten the durationof service disruption caused by an RRU failure, improving service quality.


1. If a cell is configured as a MIMO cell or a transmit diversity cell, run the BSC6900MML command ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH or MODUCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Cell Capability Auto Handle Switch toTX_DIVERSITY_ON_TO_OFF(TX diversity capability is on to off) orTX_DIVERSITY_OFF_TO_ON(TX diversity capability is off to on). Both theoptions can be selected.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to ensure the local cell uses twopower amplifiers.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLALGOSWITCH to check that Cell

Capability Auto Handle Switch is set to TX diversity capability is on to off::ONor TX diversity capability is off to on::ON.

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query whether the local cell isconfigured with two power amplifiers.

RANFeature Activation Guide 251 Configuring RRU Redundancy


251-1

l Deactivation ProcedureThis feature need not be deactivated.

----End

Example//Activation procedure//When a cell is configured as a MIMO and transmit diversity cell, do as follows: ADD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND, CellCapacityAutoHandleSwitch=TX_DIVERSITY_ON_TO_OFF-1&TX_DIVERSITY_OFF_TO_ON-1;//OrMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, CellCapacityAutoHandleSwitch=TX_DIVERSITY_ON_TO_OFF-1&TX_DIVERSITY_OFF_TO_ON-1;//Ensure that the local cell uses two power amplifiers. ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, RADIUS=10000, HORAD=150, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, SN2=0, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, MXPWR=430, HISPM=TRUE, SPR=250, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE;,//Verification procedure//Querying the cell algorithm switch LST UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1;//Checking whether the local cell is configured with two power amplifiers LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=10;

251 Configuring RRU RedundancyRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

252 Configuring Transmit Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010203Transmit Diversity. Transmit diversity enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RFDL channels compared with no transmit diversity.





Contextl The feature supports STTD, TSTD, and CLD1 to effectively improve the reception

performance of the UE.l The transmit diversity feature improves terminal performance in special circumstances.

Especially when multipath fading is not obvious and the UE is not moving fast, capacityand coverage can be significantly improved. The investment can be reduced while the sameQoS is guaranteed. In this way, operators can reduce the CAPEX and the OPEX.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP to set the transmitdiversity mode. Transmit diversity mode consists of Space Time Transmit Diversity(STTD) mode and closed loop TX diversity mode 1 (CP1).

(1) In this step, set TX Diversity Indication to TRUE.(2) (Optional) Set STTD Support Indicator to STTD_Supported.(3) (Optional) Set CP1 Support Indicator to CP1_Supported.(4) (Optional) Set DPCH Tx Diversity Mode for Other User to STTD or CP1.(5) (Optional) Set FDPCH Tx Diversity Mode for Other User to STTD. As

specified in 3GPP TS 25.211, the FDPCH can only use the STTD mode.

RANFeature Activation Guide 252 Configuring Transmit Diversity


252-1

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC to add a sector. In this step, set DiversityMode to COMMON_MODE(COMMON MODE) and configure the antenna datain line with the hardware deployment scheme.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add a sector. In this step, set TwoTx Way to TRUE and configure the antenna data in line with the hardwaredeployment scheme.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the status of a specified

local cell.Expected result: The value of Cell Transmit Diversity Status is Enabled.


----End

Example//Activation procedureMOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=1, TxDiversityInd=TRUE, STTDSupInd=STTD_Supported, CP1SupInd=CP1_not_Supported, DpchPrioTxDiversityMode=STTD, HspdschPrioTxDiversityMode=STTD, DpchDivModforMIMO=STTD;ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=61, ANT2N=R0A;ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, TTW=TRUE, SRN1=60, SRN2=61, ULFREQ=9700, DLFREQ=10650, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=FALSE, VAM=FALSE;//Verification procedureDSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1;

252 Configuring Transmit DiversityRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

253 Configuring 4-Antenna ReceiveDiversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-0102094-Antenna Receive Diversity.





l License


Contextl Compared with 2-Antenna Receive Diversity, 4-Antenna Receive Diversity provides the

NodeB with twice the number of RF UL channels. In this way, a bigger UL coverage gaincan be obtained.

l 4-antenna Receive Diversity improves the receiver sensitivity and the uplink coverage, sothat the CAPEX can be reduced.


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC. In this step, set Antenna Magnitude to4. Set Antenna Channel1 No., Antenna Channel2 No., Antenna Channel3 No.,Antenna Channel4 No., their respective cabinet numbers, and subrack numbers.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ULGROUP. In this step, set DemodulationWork Mode to DEM_4_CHAN(4-Channels Demodulation Mode) orDEM_ECON_4_CHAN(Economical 4-Channels Demodulation Mode).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to check that the preceding parameters

are correctly configured.

RANFeature Activation Guide 253 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity


253-1


----End


//Activation procedureADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ANTM=4, ANT1CN=0, ANT1SRN=4, ANT1N=N0A, ANT2CN=0, ANT2SRN=4, ANT2N=N0B, ANT3CN=0, ANT3SRN=4, ANT3N=N1A, ANT4CN=0, ANT4SRN=4, ANT4N=N1B;

ADD ULGROUP: ULGROUPN=0, DEMMODE=DEM_4_CHAN, SNE1=0;//Verification procedureLST SEC: STN=0, SECN=0;

l NodeB V100R013//Activation procedureADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ANTM=4, ANT1SRN=2, ANT1N=N0A, ANT2SRN=2, ANT2N=N0B, ANT3SRN=2, ANT3N=N1A, ANT4SRN=2, ANT4N=N1B;ADD ULGROUP: ULGROUPN=0, DEMMODE=DEM_4_CHAN, SNE1=0;//Verification procedureLST SEC: STN=0, SECN=0;

253 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive DiversityRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

254 Configuring Extended Cell Coverageup to 200km

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021308Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km.


– In the case of the NodeB 3900 series base stations, the WBBPb board or later versionneeds to be configured.

– In the case of the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE, the EBBI board needs to be configured.– In the case of the DBS3800, the EBBC or EBBM board needs to be configured.



Contextl This feature enables the operator to use a few NodeBs to extend the cell coverage.l This feature extends the cell coverage to very remote areas with the fewest sites.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UAICH. In this step, set AICHTransmission Timing to 1.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UPRACHBASIC. In this step, selectavailable RACH sub channels in the cell from the RACH Sub Channel No. list.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLSETUP. In this step, set MaxTransmit Power of Cell to the maximum cell transmit power that is configured onthe NodeB side.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD REMOTECELLGRP. In this step, setRemote Cell Group No and Remote Cell Group Name.

RANFeature Activation Guide 254 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km


254-1

In case of setting the remote cell to save boards, carry out Step 6. Otherwise, do notcarry out Step 6.

5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL. In this step, set Remote CellMode to TRUE and set Index of Remote Cell Group to the same value as that ofRemote Cell Group No.

6. Optional: Run BSC6900 MML command MOD UPRACH, set sub channel of everycell, select sub channel from RACH Sub Channel No..

NOTE

l Only 3 sub channels can be set for every cell, and no repeated sub channel exists. The 3 subchannels need to be fixed as follows:

l sub-channel 0, sub-channel 1 and sub-channel 2



l When adding logical cell on BSC6900, the parameter Time Offset needs to be set to CHIP0,CHIP256 or CHIP512.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST REMOTECELLGRP to check that the remotecell group is configured.

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to check that the local cell is set toa remote cell and that Remote Cell Mode is set to TRUE.


----End

Example//Activation procedure//Configuration on the BSC6900 sideADD UAICH: CELLID=1;ADD UPRACHBASIC: CellId=1, PhyChId=4, PreambleSignatures=SIGNATURE0-1, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1, Constantvalue=-23, PreambleRetransMax=20, PowerRampStep=2, CTFCSize=BIT2;ADD UCELLSETUP:CELLID=1,CELLNAME="Cell1",MaxTxPower=430,BANDIND=BAND1,PeerIsValid=VALID, PeerCellId=100, CnOpGrpIndex=0,UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE,UARFCNUPLINK=9612, UARFCNDOWNLINK=10562, TCELL=CHIP256, NINSYNCIND=5, NOUTSYNCIND=50, TRLFAILURE=50, PSCRAMBCODE=2, TXDIVERSITYIND=TRUE, SpgId = 8,NODEBNAME="NodeB6", LOCELL=0, LAC=H'2501, SAC=H'0000, CFGRACIND=REQUIRE, RAC=H'00,CLTAModeInd=TRUE, STTDSUPIND = STTD_NOT_SUPPORTED, CP1SUPIND = CP1_NOT_SUPPORTED, DPCHDIVMODFOROTHER = NONE, DIVMODFORDCHSDPA = NONE;ADD UPCPICH: CELLID=1, PHYCHID=2, PCPICHPOWER=330, MAXPCPICHPOWER=346, MINPCPICHPOWER=313;//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD REMOTECELLGRP: REMOTECELLGRPINDEX=1, REMOTECELLGRPNAME="test";ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, STN=1, SECN=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, CN1=0, SRN1=4, SN1=0, ULFREQ=9700, DLFREQ=10600, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE, RMTCM=TRUE, RMTCGRPID=1, VAM=FALSE;Configuration on the BSC6900 sideMOD UPRACH: CellId=1, PhyChId=0, RACHSubChNo=SUBCHANEL0-1&SUBCHANEL1-1&SUBCHANEL2-1;

254 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200kmRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Verification procedureLST REMOTECELLGRP: REMOTECELLGRPINDEX=1;LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1;

RANFeature Activation Guide 254 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km


254-3

255 Configuring High Speed Access

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010206High Speed Access.


– All boards of the 3900 series base stations support High Speed Access.– All boards of the DBS3800 support High Speed Access.– All boards, except the NBBI and NULP, of the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE support

the high speed access feature.l Dependencies on Other Features



ContextThe time-selective fading caused by the Doppler effect of a fast-moving UE increases the BERand affects the signals received by the NodeB. The high speed access feature provides theautomatic frequency control (AFC) function for the uplink, reducing the Doppler effect andoffering reliable services for the UE in high-speed movement.

NOTE

l The local sectors, remote sectors and distributed sectors support the high speed access feature.

l When the HULP, HBBI, HBBU, or WBBPa is configured to support the high speed access feature, thecapability for the board to carry access channels decreases. Each board can support the access channelsof only one cell. In addition, the board in a common four-channel demodulation mode does not supporthigh speed access.

l When the WBBPb, WBBPd, EBBI, EBOI, EULP, EULPd, EBBC, or EBBCd is configured to supportthe high speed access feature, the capability of the board does not decrease. The board supports highspeed access in any demodulation mode.

RANFeature Activation Guide 255 Configuring High Speed Access


255-1

CAUTIONTo enable the high speed access feature in the cells carrying services, deactivate these cells,modify these cells, and then activate these cells. This process disrupts the ongoing services.


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify the attributes of thespecified local cell. In this step, set, High Speed Movement Mode to TRUE. SetSpeed Rate as required.

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to query the configuration

information about the local cell. The query result is returned on the LMT. Check thatthe values of High Speed Movement Mode and Speed Rate match the configuration.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify the attributes of the local

cell. In this step, set, High Speed Movement Mode to FALSE.

----End

Example//Activation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, HISPM=TRUE, SPR=400;//Verification procedure LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=1;//Deactivation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, HISPM=FALSE;

255 Configuring High Speed AccessRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

256 Configuring IndependentDemodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in

One Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021350Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell.


– DBS3900 series base stations only

– The WBBPb or WBBPd board needs to be configured.


– This feature conflicts with the features WRFD-010203 Transmit Diversity,WRFD-010209 4-Antenna Receive Diversity, WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO, andWRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km.

l License


Context

In multi-RRU cell scenarios, this feature can reduce handovers between cells and increase cellcapacity and cell throughput.

NOTE

l This feature cannot be used if a base station is configured with the feature transmit diversity, 4-AntennaReceive Diversity or MIMO.

l This feature applies to high-speed moving scenarios such as highways, railways, and F1 raceways.


1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC to add a sector.

– Set Sector Type to MULTIRRU_SECTOR(MULTIRRU_SECTOR).


256 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals fromMultiple RRUs in One Cell


256-1

– Set Diversity Mode to COMMON_MODE(Common Mode).2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL to add a local cell.

– Set Sector Type to MULTIRRU_SECTOR(MULTIRRU_SECTOR).l Verification Procedure

1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to query configured sectors.Expected result: The value of Sector Type is MULTIRRU_SECTOR(MULTIRRU_SECTOR).

2. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the configuration of a localcell.Expected result: The value of Local Cell Status is Local Cell Available.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command RMV LOCELL to remove a local cell.2. Run the NodeB MML command RMV SEC to remove a specified sector.

----End

Example//Activation procedure ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, RRUCOUNT=2, RRU1SRN=60, RRU2SRN=61; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, STN=0, SECN=0, SECT=MULTIRRU_SECTOR, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9650, DLFREQ=10600, MXPWR=430, HISPM=FALSE;//Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=0; DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=0;//Deactivation procedure RMV LOCELL: LOCELL=0; RMV SEC: STN=0, SECN=0;

256 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals fromMultiple RRUs in One Cell



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

257 Configuring PDCP HeaderCompression (RFC2507)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011500PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).


– The UE supports this feature.



l License


Context

This feature complies with the header compression function of data packet as defined in RFC2507. It enables the deletion of redundant information such as TCP/IP header. The systemcompresses the redundant protocol header before the data is transmitted on a link. In addition,the system can decompress the received data. This feature can decrease the throughput on theUu interface and improve the efficiency of radio links.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to select theCFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH check box under the Channelconfiguration strategy switch parameter.


1. Initiate UE tracing on the BSC6900 LMT.

2. Establish a PS service on the UE. Observe the CRLC _SETUP_REQ message in thetraced UE data. Check the bit1RfcInfo2507 IE in the following path in the message:pdcpSetupInfo> pdcpInfo> pdcpInfoBmp> bit1RfcInfo2507.

RANFeature Activation Guide 257 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)


257-1

– If the value of the bit1RfcInfo2507 IE is 1, you can infer that this feature has beenactivated.

– If the value of the bit1RfcInfo2507 IE is 0, you can infer that this feature has notbeen activated.


CFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH check box under the Channelconfiguration strategy switch parameter.

----End

Example//Activating PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH-1;//Deactivating PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH-0;

257 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

258 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical CellStructure)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021200HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).





Context

Based on speed estimation, the BSC6900 hands over fast-moving UEs to low-priority cells toreduce the number of handovers, and hands over slow-moving UEs to high-priority cells toincrease network capacity.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH.

In this step, set HoSwitch to the following parameter value.

– HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH– HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH– HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH– HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH– HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHCS. In this step, set Use ofHCS to USED.

RANFeature Activation Guide 258 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)


258-1

3. Set the HCS parameters for different types of neighboring cells as follows:– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL to add an intra-

frequency neighboring cell and set the HCS parameters.– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL to add an inter-

frequency neighboring cell and set the HCS parameters.– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add an inter-RAT GSM

neighboring cell and set the HCS parameters.4. For the cells whose HCS parameters have been set, run the BSC6900 MML command

ADD UCELLHCSHO. In this step, set SpdEstSwitch to ON.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHCSHO to set the RNC-level HCS

parameters according to network plan.l Verification Procedure

1. If the moving speed of a UE is higher than the fast-moving handover threshold (thenumber of 1D events reported by the UE in the specified period reaches the presetnumber), an inter-frequency or inter-RAT HCS handover is triggered.

2. If the moving speed of a UE is lower than the slow-moving handover threshold (thenumber of 1D events reported by the UE in the specified period is smaller than theslow-moving handover threshold), slow-moving HCS handover measurement istriggered, and a slow-moving inter-frequency or inter-RAT HCS handover isperformed.

3. If a measurement-based inter-frequency or inter-RAT handover is triggered, checkwhether compressed mode is started by using a RRC_PH_CH_RECFG message onthe Uu interface on the BSC6900 LMT. If compressed mode is started, this feature isactivated.

4. If an inter-frequency blind handover is triggered, check whether the handover istriggered by using a RRC_PH_CH_RECFG message on the Uu interface on theBSC6900 LMT. If the handover is triggered by using the message, this feature isactivated.

5. If an inter-RAT blind handover is triggered, check whether 3G-to-2G handovers areperformed on the Uu and Iu interfaces on the BSC6900 LMT. If 3G-to-2G handoversare performed, this feature is activated.


deselect HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH from the HoSwitchparameter.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHCS. In this step, set Use ofHCS to NOT_USED.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHCSHO. In this step, setSpdEstSwitch to OFF.

----End

Example/*Activating HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).*///Set HandOver SwitchSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH-1&HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1;

258 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Set HCS cell to Use of HCSADD UCELLHCS: CellId=11, UseOfHcs=USED;//Add an intra-frequency neighboring cellADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=11, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, SIB11Ind=TRUE, IdleQoffset1sn=0, IdleQoffset2sn=0, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;//Add an inter-frequency neighboring cellADD UINTERFREQNCELL:RncId=1, CellId=11, NCellRncId=9, NCellId=100, CIOOffset=0, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, HOCovPrio=1, BlindHOFlag=FALSE, NPrioFlag=FALSE;//Add a GSM inter-RAT neighboring cellADD U2GNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=11, GSMCellIndex=0, CIOOffset=0, Qoffset1sn=0, Qrxlevmin=-50, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, TempOffset1=D3, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, BlindHOPrio=30, NPrioFlag=FALSE;//Set Algorithm Switch for UE Speed EstimationADD UCELLHCSHO: CellId=11, SpdEstSwitch=ON;//Deactivating HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure).SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_HCS_SPEED_EST_SWITCH-0;MOD UCELLHCS: CellId=11, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED;MOD UCELLHCSHO: CellId=11, SpdEstSwitch=OFF;

RANFeature Activation Guide 258 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)


258-3

259 Configuring Intra Frequency LoadBalance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020104Intra Frequency Load Balance.





Context

This feature enables the change in cell load by adjusting the cell PCPICH power. For those UEsin soft handover state, this feature enables the intra-frequency neighboring cells to share the cellload by removing high load cell from the active set.



2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,select INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD. In this step, set Intra-frequency LDB period timer length to an appropriate value.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDB to set the followingparameters associated with the cell-level intra-frequency load balancing (LDB)algorithm to appropriate values:– Cell overload threshold

RANFeature Activation Guide 259 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance


259-1

– Pilot power adjustment step

– Cell under load threshold

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UPCPICHPWR. In this step, set P-CPICHparameters associated with intra-frequency LDB, including Max transmit power ofPCPICH and Min transmit power of PCPICH to appropriate values.

l Verification ProcedureTo verify that the RNC can balance the cell load by adjusting the P-CPICH power of a cell,perform the following steps:

1. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. Create the task of monitoringPCPICH TxPower of CELL_A11.

2. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate high load in CELL_A11.

3. In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, check the pilot power ofCELL_A11.Expected result: As the cell load increases, the pilot power periodically decreases. Theactual pilot power must not be decreased to a level lower than the configured minimumpilot power.

4. The NBAP_CELL_RECFG_REQ and NBAP_CELL_RECFG_RSP messagesshould be displayed in the Iub tracing result. In the NBAP_CELL_RECFG_REQmessage, check whether the RNC has reduced the pilot power.

5. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to stop simulating high load inCELL_A11.

6. In the Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, check the pilot power ofCELL_A11.Expected result: As the cell load becomes normal, the pilot power periodicallyincreases. The actual pilot power must not be increased to a level higher than theconfigured maximum pilot power.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,deselect INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list.

2. Restore the parameter settings modified in the activation procedure.

----End

Example//Activating Intra Frequency Load Balance//Configuring intra-frequency neighboring cellsADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=211, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;//Enabling the cell-oriented intra-frequency LDB algorithmMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB-1;//Setting the intra-frequency LDB periodSET ULDCPERIOD: IntraFreqLdbPeriodTimerLen=1800;//Setting parameters associated with the cell-oriented intra-frequency LDB algorithm to appropriate valuesMOD UCELLLDB: CellId=111, PCPICHPowerPace=2, CellOverrunThd=90, CellUnderrunThd=30;//Setting the P-CPICH associated parameters for intra-frequency LDBMOD UPCPICHPWR: CellId=111, MaxPCPICHPower=346, MinPCPICHPower=313;

259 Configuring Intra Frequency Load BalanceRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

//Verifying Intra Frequency Load BalanceSTR DLSIM: LOCELL=111, LR=90;STP DLSIM: LOCELL=111;//Deactivating Intra Frequency Load BalanceMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB-0;

RANFeature Activation Guide 259 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance


259-3

260 Configuring Potential User Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105Potential User Control.





ContextThis feature reduces system load by modifying cell selection and reselection parameters. In thisway, the cell where the UE camps can be controlled based on cell load.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enable thecell-oriented PUC algorithm.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD to specify the period ofpotential user control. In this step, set PUC period timer length to an appropriatevalue.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLPUC to set the cell-oriented PUCalgorithm parameters.

l Verification Procedure1. Configure two cells CELL_A11 and CELL_A12 as inter-frequency neighboring cells

on the NodeB.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential user

control threshold for CELL_A11.3. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation where the cell

has a high load.

RANFeature Activation Guide 260 Configuring Potential User Control


260-1

The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: theNBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ from the RNC to the NodeB, and theNBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP message responded by the NodeB.The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of theSintersearch signaling element (IE) of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and thevalues of the Qoffset1s,n and Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential usercontrol threshold for CELL_A12.

5. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation whereCELL_A12 has a high downlink load.The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: theNBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ message from the RNC to the NodeB, and theNBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP response message from the NodeB.

The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of theSintersearch IE of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and the values of the Qoffset1s,nand Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step,

deselect the PUC(Potential User Control Algorithm) check box under the parameterCell LDC algorithm switch.

----End

Example//Activating Potential User ControlMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-1;SET ULDCPERIOD: PucPeriodTimerLen=1800;ADD UCELLPUC: CELLID=1, SPUCLIGHT=45, SPUCHEAVY=70, SPUCHYST=5, OFFSINTERLIGHT=-2, OFFSINTERHEAVY=2, OFFQOFFSET1LIGHT=-4, OFFQOFFSET2LIGHT=-4, OFFQOFFSET1HEAVY=4, OFFQOFFSET2HEAVY=4;//Deactivating Potential User ControlMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-0;

260 Configuring Potential User ControlRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

261 Configuring Load Based GSM andUMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070004Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g.


– The BSC model is the BSC6900.– A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.– Interface board FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc should be configured to support Iur-g.

l Dependencies on Other Features– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.– This feature depends on features GBFD-511101 Load Based Handover Enhancement

on Iur-g, WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load or WRFD-021200 HCS(Hierarchical Cell Structure).


l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as the

neighboring cell of the UMTS cell.l Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you can

refer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.

ContextThis feature is based on Huawei private information exchange mechanism over the Iur-ginterface. With this feature, the traffic is distributed through the RRC redirection and load-basedhandover from the 3G network to the 2G network on the basis of the service attributes and theload of the 2G networks when 3G cell enters LDR status. In this manner, the load is shared bythe GSM network when the load of UMTS network is heavy.


261 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS HandoverEnhancement Based on Iur-g


261-1


1. Configuration on the RNC side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable the non-coverage-based handover. In this step, set Non-coverage handover based on2G load Indication to ON, Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1andLoad-base handover based on 3G2G load difference Indication to ON.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enablethe inter-RAT handover. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-downlist box.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enableUL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface. In this step, selectUL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_LDR(DownlinkUU LDR Algorithm) in the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR to configure LDRactions. In this step, set DL LDR first action and UL LDR first action toCSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should be loadhandover); set DL LDR second action and UL LDR second action toPSInterRatShouldBeLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should be loadhandover); set DL LDR third action and UL LDR third action toCSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(CS domain inter-rat should not be loadhandover); set DL LDR fourth action and UL LDR fourth action toPSInterRatShouldNotLDHO(PS domain inter-rat should not be loadhandover).

NOTE

You need to configure UL and DL LDR actions according to the actual situation.

2. Configuration on the BSC side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable inter-RAT handovers. In this step, set Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable andInter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes) .

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to set2G Load Adjustment Coefficient. Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to10 is recommended.


NOTE

l If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise,the configuration fails.

1. 3G-to-2G Load Based Handover Enhancement

CAUTIONThe verification can be done when only the UMTS cell is in the basic congestion state.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Trace signalingon the Iu interface on the LMT. RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIREDmessage is reported. The RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED messagecontains reduce-load-in-serving-cell. Trace signaling on the A interface on theLMT. Handover Request message is reported. The Handover Requestmessage contains reduce-load-in-serving-cell.

NOTE

After the verification, set the value of system to the value before the verification.

2. 2G-to-3G Load Based Handover Enhancement

(1) Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell, and the call is successfullyestablished.

(2) When the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state, the MS hand over to 3Gneighbor cell. Trace signaling on the A interface. Check that AssignmentRequest, Handover Required, and Handover Command messages arereported and cause in the Handover Required message is directed-retry(13).

l Deactivation Procedure1. Configuration on the RNC side

– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSCHandover based on Load Enhancement on the UMTS side. In this step, set Non-coverage handover based on 2G load Indication to OFF(OFF) and Load-basehandover based on 3G2G load difference Indication to OFF(OFF).

2. Configuration on the BSC side– Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB to

deactivate MBSC Handover based on Load Enhancement on the GSM side. In thisstep, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Connect State to NO(No).

----End

Example//Activating Handover based on Load Enhancement //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling the non-coverage-based handover*/ SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=ON, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=ON; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling UL and DL load reshuffling (LDR) on the Uu interface*/ MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=0, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1; /*Configuring LDR actions*/ MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=0, DlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, DlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, DlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, UlLdrFirstAction=CSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrSecondAction=PSInterRatShouldBeLDHO, UlLdrThirdAction=CSInterRatShouldNotLDHO, UlLdrFourthAction=PSInterRatShouldNotLDHO; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES; /*Setting 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient*/ SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;




261-3

//Deactivating UMTS Handover based on Load Enhancement//Configuration on the RNC side SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscNcovHoOn2GldInd=OFF, LoadHoOn3G2GldInd=OFF;//Configuration on the BSC sideSET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=NO;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

262 Configuring NACC(NetworkAssisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization

Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070005NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g.


– The BSC model is the BSC6900.

– A GSM+UMTS dual-mode MS is required.

– Interface board FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc should be configured to support Iur-g.


– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.

– This feature depends on features WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based onCoverage, WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service, WRFD-020306Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load, GBFD-511102 NACC Procedure OptimizationBased on Iur-g between GSM and WCDMA, or WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical CellStructure).

l License


l IP transmission mode is used on the Iur-g interface.

l The MS supports NACC.

l Both the 2G network and the 3G network are deployed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured and the GSM cell is configured as theneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.

l Data is negotiated and planned for the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface. For details you canrefer to Configuring the inter-BSC6900 Iur-g interface.

NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and the RNC sides are activated separately.


262 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g


262-1

Context

With this feature, the network assisted cell change (NACC) procedure is performed through theinternal information exchange mechanism of the MBSC. As a result, the interoperability of PSservices between GSM cells and UMTS cells under the same MBSC does not involve the CN.In this manner, the time taken to perform the NACC procedure is shortened by about 680ms andtherefore the handover delay is reduced. In addition, the NACC procedure does not require thesupport of the CN.



(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enablethe NACC function. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in theHandOver switch drop-down list box.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable directGERAN system information exchange. In this step, set GERAN SystemInformation Exchange Switch to ON.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enablethe inter-RAT handover. In this step, selectHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH in the HandOver switch drop-downlist box.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT2GCELL to enable the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM procedure. In this step, set Inter-RATcell support RIM indicator to TRUE. If multiple neighboring cells are planned,repeat this step to enable the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM forall the neighboring cells.


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GNRNC to allow NACC-relatedinformation exchange on the Iur-g interface. In this step, set Allow InfoExchange at Iur-g to YES(Support) and Info Exchange Content toNACCRELATED(NACC Info).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLGPRS to set basic GPRSattributes of the GSM cell. In this step, set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(Supportas built-in PCU) and Support NACC to YES(Yes).

l Verification Procedure1. Trace Iur-g and Um interfaces on the LMT.2. Use a dual-mode MS to download data in the UMTS cell and then switch the MS to

the GSM cell.3. Check that INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ and INFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP

messages are reported on the Iur-g interface. The value of informationTypeItem inthe INFO_EXCHG_INIT_REQ message is nACC-Related-Data(8) and theINFO_EXCHG_INIT_RSP message contains nACC-Related-Data.





Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH on theRNC to deactivate NACC Procedure Optimization. In this step, deselectHO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH in theHandOver switch drop-down list box.

----End

Example//Activating NACC Procedure Optimization //Configuration on the RNC side /*Enabling the NACC function*/SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling direct GERAN system information exchange*/SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscReqGeranInfoSwitch=ON; /*Enabling the inter-RAT handover*/ SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; /*Enabling the inter-RAT cell to support indication of the RIM procedure*/MOD UEXT2GCELL: GSMCellIndex=0, SuppRIMFlag=TRUE; //Configuration on the BSC side /*Allowing NACC-related information exchange on the Iur-g interface*/MOD GNRNC: RNCINDEX=0, SPTINFOEXCHG=YES, INFOEXCHGLIST=NACCRELATED-1; /*Setting basic GPRS attributes of the GSM cell*/SET GCELLGPRS: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, NACCSPT=YES;//Deactivating NACC Procedure Optimization//Configuration on the RNC side SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH-0;




262-3

263 Configuring GSM and UMTS LoadBalancing Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070006GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g.


– The BSC model is BSC6900.

– The MS is in GSM+UMTS dual mode.

– Interface board FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc should be configured to support Iur-g.


– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.

– This feature depends on features GBFD-511103 GSM and UMTS Load BalancingBased on Iur-g, WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package and WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.

l License


l 2G and 3G networks cover the same area.

l IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.

l The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENTREQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should beperformed.

l The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sentfrom the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as aneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.


NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.


263 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based onIur-g


263-1

ContextThis feature implements RRC redirection and the load-based GSM/UMTS handover throughthe exchange of Huawei proprietary IE over the Iur-g interface. The Iur-g protocol stack complieswith the 3GPP specifications. With this feature, the traffic is distributed on the basis of the servicehandover indicator and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network during RRC connectionsetup or after RAB setup. In this way, a load balance is achieved between the GSM network andUMTS network.



(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable loadbalancing and set load difference thresholds. In this step, set ServiceDistribution and Load Balancing Switch to LOAD-BASED(LOAD-BASED), Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of CS Service to10, PS Load Difference Threshold Between 3G And 2G of Ps Service to 30,and Adjustment Coefficient of 2G Load Value to 1.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enableinter-RAT handover. In this step, select theHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterHandOver switch.


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB. In thisstep, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in Access State to Load-based(Load-based), 2G Load Adjustment Coefficient to 10.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOBASIC to enable inter-RAT incoming BSC handover. In this step, set Inter-RAT In BSC HandoverEnable and Intra-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(Yes). If multipleneighboring cells are planned, repeat this step to enable inter-RAT incoming BSChandover for all neighboring cells.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET OTHSOFTPARA. In this step, set CS2G 3G Load Balance Delta Threshold to 110.

l Verification ProcedureNOTE

If the verification achieves the following results as expected, the configuration succeeds. Otherwise, theconfiguration fails.

1. 3G-to-2G Load Balancing


(1) The verification procedure consists of the RRC setup phase and the RABconnection phase. The verification in the latter phase involves CS speech servicesand PS data services.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

a. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSMcell2 at the RRC setup phase

1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call issuccessfully established. Initiate Uu-interface signaling tracing on theLMT. The RRC_RRC_CONNECT_REQ andRRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT messages are reported, and theRRC_RRC_CONN_REJECT message contains GSM-TargetCellInfo. That is, information about cell2 is contained,indicating that the MS accesses cell2.

b. Verifying that PS data services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GPRScell3 at the RAB connection phase

1) Use the MS to browse the Internet.2) Initiate Uu-interface message tracing on the LMT. You can find that

the messages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP,RRC_MEAS_CTRL, andRRC_CELL_CHANGE_ORDER_FROM_UTRAN are reported, andthat the value of InterRATEvent in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL messageis event3c.

3) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_REQ message is sent from the CNto the RNC and then the RANAP_SRNS_CONTEXT_RESP messageis sent from the RNC to the CN.

4) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_SRNS_DATA_FORWARD_COMMAND andRANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent from theCN to the RNC and then the RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETEmessage is sent from the RNC to the CN.

5) When the MS attempts to reselect cell3, Internet browsing is slightlyaffected. After the MS reselects cell3, Internet browsing returns tonormal.

c. Verifying that CS speech services in UMTS cell1 are handed over to GSMcell2 at the RAB connection phase

1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in cell1. The call issuccessfully established.

2) Initiate Uu-interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that themessages RRC_RB_SETUP, RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP,RRC_MEAS_CTRL, and RRC_HO_FROM_UTRAN_CMD_GSMare reported, and that the value of InterRATEvent in theRRC_MEAS_CTRL message is event3c.

3) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is sent from theRNC to the CN and then the RANAP_RELOCATION_COMMANDand RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMMAND messages are sent fromthe CN to the RNC.

4) Initiate Iu-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe RANAP_IU_RELEASE_COMPLETE message is sent from theRNC to the CN.

2. 2G-to-3G Load Balancing




263-3

CAUTIONThe verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state.

(1) Use the MS to initiate a call in the GSM cell. The directed retry procedure istriggered so that the MS accesses the neighboring UMTS cell. The call issuccessfully established. Initiate A-interface signaling tracing on the LMT. Youcan find that the Assignment Request, Handover Required, and HandoverCommand messages are reported and that the value of cause in the HandoverRequired message is directed-retry(13).


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate MBSCload balancing. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load BalancingSwitch to OFF(OFF).


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB todeactivate 2G-to-3G load balancing. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT LoadHO in Access State to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g//Configuration on the RNC side/*Enabling load balancing and setting load difference thresholds*/SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=LOAD-BASED, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcCsDeltaThrd=10, Mbsc3G2GLdBlcPsDeltaThrd=30;/*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;//Configuration on the BSC side/*Enabling load balancing*/SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, OutSysLoadHoEn=YES, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Load-based, G2GLoadAdjustCoeff=10;/*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/SET GCELLHOBASIC: IDTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="0", INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES;/*Setting load difference thresholds*/SET OTHSOFTPARA: G2G3GLdBlcDeltaThrd=110;//Deactivating Load Balancing Based on Iur-g//Configuration on the RNC sideSET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;//Configuration on the BSC sideSET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=OFF;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

264 Configuring GSM and UMTS TrafficSteering Based on Iur-g

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070007GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g.


– The BSC model is BSC6900.– The MS is in GSM+UMTS dual mode.– Interface board FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/GOUc should be configured to support Iur-g.

l Dependencies on Other Features– Configurations of other features on which this feature depends are complete.– This feature depends on features GBFD-511104 GSM and WCDMA Traffic Steering

Based on Iur-g, WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package and WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.


l 2G and 3G networks cover the same area.l IP transmission mode is used over the Iur-g interface.l The value of the information element (IE) Service Handover in the RAB ASSIGNMENT

REQUEST message sent from the CN to the RNC is Handover to GSM should beperformed.

l The value of the IE Service Handover in the ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message sentfrom the CN to the BSC is Handover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should be performed orHandover to UTRAN or cdma2000 should not be performed.

l A GSM cell and a UMTS cell are configured, and the GSM cell is configured as aneighboring cell of the UMTS cell.


NOTE

l The licenses on the BSC and RNC sides are activated separately.


264 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based onIur-g


264-1

ContextThis feature supports RRC redirection and GSM/UMTS inter-RAT handover based on service.With this feature, services are steered on the basis of the service handover indicator, hierarchicalnetwork planning, and the load of the GSM network and UMTS network when an MS accessesthe network. Service steering enables UEs requesting speech or low-speed PS services to accessthe GSM network and those requesting high-speed PS services to access the UMTS network.



(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to enable trafficsteering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch toSERVICE-BASED(SERVICE-BASED) and Adjustment Coefficient of 2GLoad Value to 1.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enableinter-RAT handover. In this step, select theHO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH andHO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH check boxes under the parameterHandOver switch.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHOCOMM to enable inter-RAT CS and PS handover. In this step, set both Inter-RAT CS HandoverSwitch and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON. Run the ADDUCELLHOCOMM command to enable inter-RAT CS and PS handover foreach cell.


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB toenable traffic steering. In this step, set Allow Inter-RAT Load HO in AccessState to Service-based(Service-based).

l Verification Procedure1. The verification procedure of 3G-to-2G Traffic Steering


(1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the UMTS cell. Initiate Iu-interface tracing on the LMT. You can find that theRANAP_RELOCATION_REQUIRED message is reported and the handovercause value in the message is resource-optimisation-relocation. Initiate Ainterface tracing. You can find that the Handover Request message is reportedand the handover cause value in the message is traffic.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

CAUTIONEnsure that the GSM cell is not in the congestion state.

2. The verification procedure of 2G-to-3G Traffic Steering

CAUTIONThe verification can be done when only the GSM cell is in the basic congestion state.

(1) Use the dual-mode MS to call a fixed telephone in the GSM cell. Initiate CSDomain Messages of a Single Subscriber tracing on the LMT. You can find thatthe call is in GSM cell, and don't hand over to UMTS cell.


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBSCCRRM to deactivate trafficsteering. In this step, set Service Distribution and Load Balancing Switch toOFF(OFF).

----End

Example//Activating 3G-to-2G traffic steering//Configuration on the RNC side/*Enabling traffic steering*/SET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=SERVICE-BASED;/*Enabling inter-RAT handover*/SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1;/*Enabling inter-RAT CS and PS handover*/ADD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, CSServiceHOSwitch=ON, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON;//Configuration on the BSC side/*Enabling inter-RAT incoming BSC handover*/SET GCELLHOINTERRATLDB: IDTYPE=BYID, CELLID=0, InterRatServiceLoadHoSwitch=Service-based;//Deactivating 3G-to-2G traffic steering//Configuration on the RNC sideSET UMBSCCRRM: MbscServiceDiffLdbSwitch=OFF;




264-3

265 Configuring Warning of Disaster

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020127Warning of Disaster.



– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast.

l License


Context

With this feature, the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) incorporated into the RNC informs all usersin specified cells of the disaster information through message broadcasting in the shortest time,therefore minimizing the impact of the disaster.

NOTE

Activating this feature requires operations on only the RNC.


1. For detailed operations for activating license, see 3.1 Activating the BSC6900License.

2. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR to remove theCBS configuration, if the operator configured the CBS function using external CBC.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA to set CB switch andCTCH switch of cell broadcast to ON. By doing this, the system can configure thedisaster warning message and send the message to UEs.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCCBCPUID to configure the SPUsubsystem for the built-in CBC.

RANFeature Activation Guide 265 Configuring Warning of Disaster


265-1

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSAREA to configure the broadcastarea. The broadcast area can be a LAC, a cell, or all cells under the RNC.

6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSMSG or MOD UCBSMSG toconfigure the broadcast message.

NOTE

l When disasters (such as earthquakes, tsunamis, and hurricanes) occur, Set GeographyScope to CellImmediate, and set CBS Message Priority to High so that users can receivethe message in time.

l It is recommended to set Number of CBS Messages to a value greater than 3 to ensurethat all UEs can receive the message.

l Verification Procedure1. Use a test UE to camp on the cell, and then activate the feature. Check whether the

test UE can receive the disaster warning message.

NOTE

A UE can receive this message only after it is enabled with the 3G broadcast message receivingfunction.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA to set CTCH switch of

cell broadcast to OFF.

----End

Example//Activating warning of disaster (The following procedure uses a cell as an example.)RMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=0;SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=ON, CTCHSwitch =ON;ADD URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1, SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1;ADD UCBSAREA: AreaId=1, CnOpIndex=1, AreaType=CELL, CellId=22;ADD UCBSMSG: MsgIndex=0, MsgTypeId=1, GeographicalScope=CellImmediate, Priority=High, RepetPeriod=10, NumOfBrdcstReq=5, CodeType=English, AreaID=1, EmergencyType=Other, CBSMsg="Hurricane";//Deactivating warning of disasterSET URNCCBPARA: CTCHSwitch=OFF;

265 Configuring Warning of DisasterRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

266 Configuring Flexible frequencybandwidth of UMTS carrier

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021001Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.


– For 4.6M~5M(including 4.6M), all the RF module can support this feature.

– For 4.2M~4.6M(excluding 4.6M), only 850M/1900M RRU3804, 850M WRFU, MRFUV1/V2 and MRRU V1/V2, WRFUd, RRU3828, RRU3829, RRU3928, RRU3929,MRFUd, MRFUe can support this feature.



l License


Context

To help an operator adapt to insufficient frequency resources, Huawei supports flexiblefrequency spacing. In network planning, to address insufficient bandwidth resources, an operatorcan plan a frequency spacing that is lower than the frequency spacing in the case of 5.0 MHzUMTS carrier bandwidth. Accordingly, the effective bandwidth of the RRU or RFU carrier isadjusted so that the carrier works in a suitable status with suitable algorithms and parameters.In this way, network performance on a low- spacing frequency is optimized as much as possible.When deploying a UMTS site, one needs to adjust the minimal effective bandwidth of a UMTScarrier based on the GSM frequency configuration. Otherwise, TRX alarms may occur ornetwork performance may deteriorate.


1. Before configuring the effective bandwidth of the carrier, run the NodeB MMLcommand LST RRU to check that an RRU is configured for the cell that requires


266 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTScarrier


266-1

setting of carrier effective bandwidth. If an RRU is not configured, run the NodeBMML command ADD RRU to add an RRU.

2. Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH to set the minimal effectivebandwidth of the RRU carrier (parameter: Frequency Min Bandwidth).


Run the NodeB MML command LST FREQBWH to query the effective bandwidth of theRRU carrier and check the returned message.

If... Then...

The effective bandwidth of the carriermatches the configuration.

The configuration succeeds.

The effective bandwidth of the carrier doesnot match the configuration.

The configuration fails.


Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH to set the RRU effective bandwidth to5000 Hz so that the standard configuration of the system is restored.

----End

Example//Activation procedureSET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, FMBWH=4200;//Verification procedureLST FREQBWH;//Deactivation procedureSET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, FMBWH=5000;

266 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTScarrier



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

267 Configuring Push to Talk

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020134Push to Talk.



– The following features must be configured before this feature is activated:WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPAIntroduction Package.


l Other Prerequisites– The UE and CN support the Push to Talk (PTT) solution.

ContextThis feature is a part of the end-to-end PTT solution. PTT needs joint support from the UE,RAN, CN, and PTT server. With this feature, Huawei RAN can identify PTT services andimplement technologies to reduce the delay of PTT services.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step,select CFG_PTT_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switchdrop-down list.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, based on the networkplan, set parameters PTT ARP Priority, PTT ARP Preemption Capability, PTTARP Preemption Vulnerability, and PTT ARP Queuing Allowed to the samevalues as those of Priority Level, Preemption Capability, Preemption Vulnerability,and Queuing Allowed respectively. The latter four ones are in allocation/retentionpriority (ARP) properties of the RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message sentfrom the CN.

RANFeature Activation Guide 267 Configuring Push to Talk


267-1

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to turn on switchesPTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH and PTT_SPEC_LI_SWITCH. In this step,deselect PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH_OFF andPTT_SPEC_LI_SWITCH_OFF from the Process switch drop-down list.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable PTTUEs to switch to the DCH for access reattempts when HSPA resources are insufficient.In this step, select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT19 check box under theparameter CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0.

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, start Iu Interface Trace to check whether the CN has sent an

RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.

NOTEThe RNC identifies PTT services based on information elements TrafficClass, Signaling Indication,ArpPriorityLevel, ArpPreEmptCap, ArpPreEmptVuln, and ArpQueuingAllowed in theRNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. If some services are identified as PTT services, theRNC allocates a rate of 8 kbit/s to the services.


deselect CFG_PTT_SWITCH from the Channel Configuration Strategy Switchdrop-down list.

----End

Example//Activating Push to Talk

SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PTT_SWITCH-1;SET UFRC: PTTARPPRIORITYLEVEL=1, PTTARPPREEMPTCAP=TRIGGER, PTTARPPREEMPTVULN=NOT_PRE_EMPTABLE, PTTARPQUEUINGALLOWED=ALLOWED;SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH_OFF-0&PTT_SPEC_LI_SWITCH_OFF-0;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT19-1;

//Deactivating Push to TalkSET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PTT_SWITCH-0;

267 Configuring Push to TalkRAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-012001RNC Offload (Trial). With this feature, the RNC can send some PS service data directly toInternet over the offload Gi interface.


– The Gi interface between the RNC and the Internet is supported only by the FG2c boardand the GOUc board.



l Others– The RNC supports the Network Address Translation (NAT) technology.

ContextThe RNC Offload function is applied by means of NAT. The RNC analyzes the uplink data flow,performs NAT on some service data, and then sends the service data to the Internet over theoffload Gi interface. Figure 268-1 shows the offload Gi interface between the RNC and theInternet.

Figure 268-1 Offload Gi interface

RANFeature Activation Guide 268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)


268-1

To enable data packets from the Internet to directly arrive at the RNC (instead of the GGSN),the source IP address of an uplink data packet must be changed to the public IP address of theoffload Gi interface by means of NAT. In this way, the downlink data packets can flow into theUTRAN over the offload Gi interface.

The RNC Offload function can be configured on the basis of IMEI, IMSI, cell, service type,Access Point Name (APN), and destination IP address.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BRD to add an FG2c board.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ETHPORT to set the Ethernet port attributes

of the FG2c board.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHREDPORT to add two Ethernet ports

as active and standby ports.4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UGIPORT to add a Gi interface.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHIP to add an IP address of the Gi

interface.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add a route from the Gi interface

to the firewall.7. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNATRESPOOL to add a NAT resource

pool.8. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UNATSWITCH to enable the NAT

function.9. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UNATALG to set the Application Level

Gateway (ALG) function for the protocols over the Gi interface.10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOAD to configure RNC Offload

for the operator.11. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOADRAB to configure RNC

Offload based on user priority and service type.12. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on IMEI, run the BSC6900 MML

command MOD UOFFLOAD to enable the TAC-level offload function. Then, runthe BSC6900 MML command ADD UOFFLOADIMEITAC to configure the TAC-level offload function. For details about Type Allocation Code (TAC), see the MMLcommand ADD UIMEITAC.

13. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on APN, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD UOFFLOADAPN to add a registered APN for the operator. Then,run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UOFFLOAD to enable RNC Offload basedon APN.

14. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on IMSI, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand ADD UOFFLOADIMSI to set the range of IMSIs supporting RNCOffload.

15. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on the cell, run the BSC6900 MMLcommand MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH to enable RNC Offload for the cell.

16. (Optional) To configure RNC Offload based on the destination IP address, run theBSC6900 MML command ADD UUNOFFLOADIP to set the IP addresses ornetwork segment that are not allowed to access the Internet using RNC Offload.

268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

l Verification Procedure1. On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Monitor > UMTS monitoring, and then double-click

Cell Performance Monitoring. The Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box isdisplayed.

2. Set Monitor Item to Cell User Number, and then set Monitor Period and Cell ID.Click OK.

3. Choose Monitor > Common Monitoring. Double-click Link PerformanceMonitoring. The Link Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed.

4. Set Monitor Item to FE/GE, Subrack No. to 0, Slot No. to 14, Monitor Type toPort, and FE/GE Port No. to 0. Click OK.

5. Power on a UE and enable the UE to camp on CELL1. Use the UE to initiate a PSservice.

6. Check the Cell User Number parameter. The number of UEs supporting RNC Offloadin the cell changes from 0 to 1.

7. The UE starts data transmission.8. Check the FE/GE parameter. The data throughput over the FE/GE port increases.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UOFFLOAD to disable RNC Offload for

the operator.

----End

Example//Configuring the Gi interfaceADD BRD: SRN=0, BRDCLASS=INT, BRDTYPE=FG2c, SN=14, RED=YES, MPUSUBRACK=0, MPUSLOT=0;SET ETHPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, BRDTYPE=FG2c, PTYPE=GE, PN=0, SPEED=AUTO;ADD ETHREDPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0;ADD UGIPORT: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, ISPSSHAREPORT=NO;ADD ETHIP: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="10.53.50.69", MASK="255.255.255.240";ADD IPRT: SRN=0, SN=14, DSTIP="0.0.0.0", DSTMASK="0.0.0.0", NEXTHOP="10.53.50.68", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="Gi";//Configuring the NAT functionADD UNATRESPOOL: SRN=0, SN=14, PN=0, NATINDEX=0, STARTADDR="172.168.0.100", ENDADDR="172.168.0.101", MAXPN=65535, MINPN=10000;SET UNATSWITCH: NATSW=ON;SET UNATALG: PROTOCOLTYPE=FTP, ALGSW=ON, AGINGTIMER=600;//Activating RNC OffloadADD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, OffloadSwitch=ON, NonDTRAB=PERMIT_OFFLOAD;ADD UOFFLOADRAB: CnOpIndex=0, UserPriority=GOLDEN_USER, OffloadService=STREAMING-1&INTERACTIVE-1&BACKGROUND-0;//Configuring RNC Offload based on IMEIMOD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, RsvdPara1=LBO_IMEITAC_SWITCH-1;ADD UOFFLOADIMEITAC: TAC=12345678, Description="iphone";//Configuring RNC Offload based on APNMOD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, OffloadSwitch=ON, NonDTRAB=NOT_PERMIT_OFFLOAD, RegAPN=PERMIT_OFFLOAD;//Configuring RNC Offload based on IMSIADD UOFFLOADIMSI: CnOpIndex=0, IMSIStart="000000000000000", IMSIEnd="999999999999999";//Configuring RNC Offload based on the cellMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, OffloadSwitch=ON;

RANFeature Activation Guide 268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)


268-3

//Configuring RNC Offload based on destination IP addressADD UUNOFFLOADIP: CnOpIndex=0, IpAddr="10.10.10.10", Mask="255.255.255.255";//Deactivating RNC OffloadMOD UOFFLOAD: CnOpIndex=0, OffloadSwitch=OFF;

268 Configuring RNC Offload (Trial)RAN



Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

269 Configuring Multi-mode DynamicPower Sharing (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221801Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS).

Prerequisite

l Dependencies on Hardware

– Only the MRFU and the RRU3908 supports GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharingat present.


– GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can not be configured with dynamic spectrumsharing.

– GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing is not supported in GSM dynamic transmitdiversity.

– It is not recommended that GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing coexists with thebaseband frequency hopping algorithm involving two power amplifiers. Theircoexistence results in a certain level of performance loss.

– This feature can't be activated with WRFD-010684 2×2 MIMO or WRFD-010693 DL64QAM+MIMO simultaneously.

– This feature has to be activated with MRFD-211801 Multi-mode Dynamic PowerSharing (GSM) simultaneously.

l License


– The UMTS cell must exist HSDPA Carry.

Context

In the case of a 3900 series multi-mode base station, the GSM and UMTS TRXs can share onepower amplifier. When there is unbalanced traffic in the GSM and the UMTS, the power can beused more efficiently in an effective way, namely, sharing the power amplifier. The overallnetwork quality of the GSM and the UMTS is therefore improved.


269 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing(UMTS)


269-1

NOTE

l The feature may fail to recall the shared power in one second when the GSM services increase suddenly.As a result, internal GSM peak clipping occurs, which affects service quality.

l Enabling the feature may cause the UMTS coverage to shrink and therefore increase the drop rate. Theproblem can be addressed by handing over services in marginal coverage to a GSM/UMTS cell underthe same coverage as the original UMTS.

l The switch and other parameter configurations are performed only on the GSM side. The UMTS siderequires no configuration.


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, setBoard Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES) and set the period forenabling GU power sharing.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set RXU BoardType to MRRU(MRRU) or MRFU(MRFU), set GU Dynamic Power SharingSwitch to YES(YES), and set parameters Minimum Number of Non-BCCH TRXsin GSM for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Load Threshold for GU PowerSharing, Number of Checked Timeslots for Retrieving Shared Power, Num ofTimeslots Meet Requirements for Retrieving Shared Pwr, GSM Power ReserveCoefficient for Retrieving Shared Power, GSM Idle Channel Threshold for GUPower Sharing, GSM Idle Channel Hysteresis for GU Power Sharing, GSMPower Reserve in Low Load for GU Power Sharing, GSM Power Reserve in HighLoad for GU Power Sharing, Maximum Accumulated Shared Power That UMTSCan Accept, Maximum Shared Power That UMTS Can Accept In Each Periodto actual conditions.

3. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL, set GU Power Share Flag toTRUE(TRUE).


1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP and LSTBTSRXUBP and check the returned message.Exception result: Board Parameter Configuration Enabled and GU DynamicPower Sharing Switch are YES.

2. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL, and check the returned message.Exception result: GU Power Share Flag is YES.


1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL, set GU Power Share Flag toFALSE(FALSE).

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP. In this step, setBoard Parameter Configuration Enabled to NO(NO).

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSRXUBP. In this step, set GU DynamicPower Sharing Switch to NO(NO).

NOTE

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing can be deactivated by performing either of the twosteps discussed above.

----End




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Example//Activation procedure SET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GUPWRSHARESTM1=07&00, GUPWRSHAREETM1=09&00, GUPWRSHARESTM2=10&00, GUPWRSHAREETM2=12&00, GUPWRSHARESTM3=14&00, GUPWRSHAREETM3=16&00, GUPWRSHARESTM4=20&00, GUPWRSHAREETM4=22&00; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=YES, GUPWRSHARETRXNUM=1, GUPWRSHAREPWRLOAD=80, GUPWRSHAREN=8, GUPWRSHAREP=6, GUPWRSHARERSVFACTOR=50, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLETH=12, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLEHS=2, GUPWRSHAREGSMIDLERSVPWR=5, GUPWRSHAREGSMBUSYRSVPWR=10, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWR=15, GUPWRSHAREURCVPWRPD=5; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=TRUE;//Verification procedure LST BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=0;//Deactivation procedureSET BTSGUPWRSHRFP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, CFGFLAG=NO; SET BTSRXUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1, RXUIDTYPE=SRNSN, CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, RXUTYPE=MRFU, GUPWRSHARESWITCH=NO;MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=0, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;




269-3

270 Configuring GSM and UMTSDynamic Spectrum Sharing

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221802GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing. This feature enables the spectrum resources tobe dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic load,improving frequency utilization.


– The 900 MHz MRFU and RRU3908 must support this feature.


– The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. Thisfeature depends on the feature MRFD-211802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic SpectrumSharing(GSM).

– − This feature cannot be used together with GBFD-117002 IBCA, GBFD-117001 FlexMAIO, GBFD-115830 VAMOS, or GBFD-510104 Multi-site Cell.

l License

– The license that supports this feature is activated.

l Start Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to the M2000 Online Help.

ContextThe dynamic spectrum sharing (DSS) between GSM and UMTS increases network throughputand reduces the total cost of data services because UMTS has higher spectral efficiency thanGSM. In theory, the maximum throughput gain is about 50%. After this feature is used, the totalcost of ownership (TCO) of mobile broadband (MBB) can be reduced, and dynamic GSM/UMTS refarming can be implemented. Thus, the maintenance cost of manual refarming isreduced.




270 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic SpectrumSharing


270-1

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB with DSS NodeB Flag setto TRUE.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP to set up aDSS cell, set DSS Cell Flag to TRUE, and set Maximum TX Power in SmallDSS Coverage and PCPICH TX Power in Small DSS Coverage based onnetwork conditions.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT with bothCell barred indicator for SIB3 and Cell barred indicator for SIB4 of DSScells set to BARRED.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTERFREQNCELL to add theneighbor 3G cells of DSS cells as inter-frequency neighboring cells, and setBlind Handover Flag to TRUE.

(5) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add the neighboringGSM cells for DSS cells, and set Blind Handover Flag to TRUE.

(6) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD U2GNCELL to add the neighboringDSS cells as intra-frequency neighboring cells.

(7) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH with bothDRD switch for single RAB andHO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH set to ON.

(8) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDRD with Load balance DRD switchfor HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set toUserNumber.

(9) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLDRD with Load balanceDRD switch for HSDPA set to ON and Load Balancing DRD Choice set toUserNumber.

(10) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate the cell.2. Configuration on the NodeB side

– Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD LOCELL to add local DSS cells, andset GUPOWERSHARE to FALSE.


(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GEXT3GCELL to add 3G externalcells.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD G3GNCELL to add 3G neighboringcells.

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA with Spectrum SharingAllowed set to YES(Yes).

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with Spectrum SharingShutdown Allowed set to YES(Yes).

CAUTIONThe parameter Spectrum Sharing Shutdown Allowed for all TRXs to be sharedunder a base station should be set to YES(Yes) except for the BCCH TRX.

l Verification Procedure1. Start spectrum sharing on the M2000 manually.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UNODEB to query the DSS status of aNodeB.

Expected result: The value of NodeB DSS state is Actived in Normal DSScoverage.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to query the DSS status of a cell.

Expected result: The value of DSS state is Actived in Normal DSS coverage.4. Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL to check the value of GU Power

Share Flag.

Expected result: The value of GU Power Share Flag is TRUE.5. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP BTSSTAT to query the value of Dynamic

Spectrum Sharing. Expected result: The value of Dynamic Spectrum Sharing isYes.

l Deactivation Procedure1. Stop Dynamic Spectrum Sharing on the M2000 by referring to the M2000 Online

Help.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEB with DSS NodeB Flag set to

FALSE.3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GDSSPARA with Spectrum Sharing

Allowed set to NO(No).4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET GTRXDEV with Spectrum Sharing

Shutdown Allowed set to FALSE.5. Remove the neighboring cell by referring to Reconfiguration Guide.6. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate a cell.

----End

Example//Activation procedureMOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=TRUE;ADD UCELLQUICKSETUP: CellId=102, CellName="dss102", PeerIsValid=INVALID, CnOpGrpIndex=0, BandInd=Band2, UARFCNDownlink=412, PScrambCode=0, TCell=CHIP256, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, SpgId=1, URANUM=D1, URA1=0, NodeBName="102", LoCell=102, SupBmc=FALSE, DSSFlag=TRUE, DSSSmallCovMaxTxPower=431, DSSSmallCovPCPICHPower=331;MOD UCELLACCESSSTRICT: CellId=102, IdleCellBarred=BARRED, IdleIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, IdleTbarred=D320, ConnCellBarred=BARRED, ConnIntraFreqReselection=ALLOWED, ConnTbarred=D320;ADD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=105, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE, InterNCellQualReqFlag=FALSE;ADD U2GNCELL: RNCId=2, CellId=102, GSMCellIndex=120, BlindHoFlag=TRUE, NPrioFlag=FALSE;ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellRncId=3, NCellId=121, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch=DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1;SET UDRD: LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, LdbDRDchoice=UserNumber;ADD UCELLDRD: CellId=120, LdbDRDSwitchHSDPA=ON, ReDirBandInd=DependOnNCell;ACT UCELL: CellId=102;




270-3

ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=102, STN=1, SECN=0, GUPOWERSHARE=FALSE;

ADD GEXT3GCELL: EXT3GCELLID=120, EXT3GCELLNAME="120", MCC="460", MNC="10", LAC=10, CI=60, RNCID=0, DF=412, SCRAMBLE=0, DIVERSITY=NO, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD, SYNCCASE=SyncCase1;ADD G3GNCELL: IDTYPE=BYID, SRC3GNCELLID=102, NBR3GNCELLID=120;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=YES;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1002, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES;SET GTRXDEV: TRXID=1003, DSSTRXOFFLINE=YES;//Deactivation procedureMOD UNODEB: NodeBId=1, DSSFlag=FALSE;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=102, DSSENABLE=NO;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1002, DSSENABLE=NO;SET GDSSPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=1003, DSSENABLE=NO;HO UCELL: CellId=102, CellChoice=ALLCELL;DEA UCELL: CellId=102;RMV UNRELATION: RNCId=0, CellId=102, NCellType=IntraFreqNCell&InterFreqNCell&InterRatNCell;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

271 Configuring IP-Based Multi-ModeCo-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221501IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.

271.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station SideThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.

271.2 Configuring IP-Based UMTS and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station SideThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-BasedUMTS and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


271 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission onBase Station Side (NodeB)


271-1

271.1 Configuring IP-Based GSM and UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-Based GSMand UMTS Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


– A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.– A UTRP board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GE port.

– A UTRP9 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GEelectrical port.

– A UTRP2 board needs to be added when co-transmission is implemented on a GEoptical port.

l Dependencies on Other Features– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP– GBFD-118611 Abis IP over E1/T1– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface


ContextThe feature requires a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on theGTMU and one FE port on the WMPT together and to share transmission ports on the UMTSside and the transmission network, therefore sharing transmission resources.

NOTEIn the scenario of GSM and UMTS co-transmission, it is recommended transmission resource sharing isachieved by connecting FE ports.

Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 271-1,Figure 271-2, and Figure 271-3.

Figure 271-1 IP-over-FE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 271-2 IP-over-E1/T1 GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

Figure 271-3 IP-over-GE GSM and UMTS co-transmission on base station side

IP PLAN

Table 271-1 IP Planning of connecting between BTS and BSC

Parameter Example

BSC IP 17.0.0.17

IP of FE interface on BTS 199.2.2.1

IP of BTS route 199.2.2.3

IP of BSC route 17.0.0.13

Table 271-2 IP Planning of connecting between NodeB and RNC (IP over FE/GE)

Parameter Example

IP of FE interface on NodeB 199.2.2.2

IP of BSC 17.0.0.17

IP of NodeB route 70.20.3.51




271-3

Parameter Example

communication IP of IUB interface 70.20.3.50

IP of BTS route 199.2.2.3

IP of RNC route 17.0.0.13

DHCP Server IP 17.0.0.17

Table 271-3 IP planning of connection between NodeB and RNC (IP over E1/T1)

Parameter Example

IP of FE interface on NodeB 199.2.2.2

IP of NodeB MP GROUP 70.83.26.1

IP of RNC route 17.0.0.13

IP of NodeB route 70.83.26.10

DHCP Server IP 17.0.0.17

Procedurel Procedure for Activating the BTS Data

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSESN to add the ESN of the GBTS.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSIP to set the IP address of the GBTS.

3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSDEVIP to add an IP address to the FEinterconnection port on the BTS side. In this step, set Physical IP to the IP address ofthe FE interconnection port on the BTS side.

4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSIPRT to add an IP route from the BTSto the BSC6900.

– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.

– Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).

– Set Forward Route Address to the IP address of the port connected to the networkon the GBTS side.

5. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from theBSC6900 to the GBTS.

– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of FE interconnection porton the GBTS side.

– Set Next Hop IP Address to the IP of BSC6900 gateway.

l Activating the NodeB data (IP over FE/GE)

1. If the planned data is inconsistent with the default data in the database, run the NodeBMML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for an Ethernet port.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,set IP Address to the IP address of FE interconnection port on the NodeB side.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add a device IP address. In this step,set IP Address to an IP address in the network segment of BTS.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the NodeB toBSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.


– Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.

5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.

– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.

– Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 3.

– Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.

– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value ofPeer SCTP Port.

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, setNCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.

7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, setNCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

NOTECCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. You can query theinformation about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side by running the BSC6900 MML commandLST UIUBCP.

8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacentnode.

– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,and slot that house the Iub interface board.

– Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth andTx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.

9. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCPrelay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.

10. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCPserver. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.

l Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1)



3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group (This operationis performed when E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side).

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link to the MP groupwhen E1/T1 transmission is used on the base station side.




271-5

NOTE

l When the base station uses the E1/T1 transmission mode, the upper-layer link can be configuredas a PPPLNK or in an MP group. The MP group is recommended because it provides greaterbandwidth than the PPPLNK group.

l A maximum of eight MP links can be configured for the UTRP board, and a maximum of fourMP links are configured for the WMPT board. If the transmission requirement is not met, anotherWMPT or UTRP board can be added.

5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the NodeB toBSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.– Set Destination IP Address to the gateway IP address of the BSC6900.– Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,

subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 3.– Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of

Peer SCTP Port.7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

NOTECCP Port No. must be set to the same value as that on the BSC6900 side. You can query theinformation about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side by running the BSC6900 MML commandLST UIUBCP.

9. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacentnode.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the number of the cabinet, subrack,

and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Rx Bandwidth and Tx Bandwidth to the same values as Rx Bandwidth and

Tx Bandwidth of the corresponding IP path on the BSC6900 side.10. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCP

relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.11. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for a DHCP

server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of the BSC6900DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and the BSC6900.

----End

Example//Activating the GBTS data//Add the ESN of the BTS ADD BTSESN: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2000, MAINDEVTAB="020GKV1083000212";//Setting the BTS IP address SET BTSIP:BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, BSCIP="17.0.0.17", BTSIP="199.2.2.1", BTSCOMTYPE=PORTIP, HOSTTYPE=SINGLEHOST, CFGFLAG=NULL;//Setting the IP address of the FE interconnection port on the BTS side ADD BTSDEVIP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=2000, PN=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6,




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

IP="199.2.2.1", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an IP route from the BTS to the BSC6900 ADD BTSIPRT:RTIDX=0, BTSID=2000, IDTYPE=BYID, PRI=60, DSTIP="17.0.0.10", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="199.2.2.3";//Adding an IP route from the BSC6900 to the BTS(If the IP route has been added, skip this step): ADD IPRT:DSTIP="199.2.2.3", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="17.0.0.10", SRN=0, SN=17, REMARK="0", PRIORITY=HIGH;//NodeB IP over FE/GE//Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="70.20.3.50", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="17.0.0.17", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=NEXTHOP, NEXTHOP="70.20.3.51", PREF=80;//Adding an SCTP signaling link ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.20.3.50", LOCPORT=1025, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;//Adding an NCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;//Adding a UCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=46, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=38, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=2, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=18, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=3, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.20.3.50", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=14, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";//Activating the NodeB data (IP over E1/T1)//Adding an IP address for the FE interconnection port on the NodeB side ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=MPGRP, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an MP group ADD MPGRP: SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, MPGRPN=0, AUTH=NONAUTH, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", IPMASK="255.0.0.0", PEERIP="70.83.26.10", MCPPP=DISABLE;//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0, E1T1SBT=E1_COVERBOARD, E1T1PN=0, TSN=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, DSTIP="17.0.0.13",




271-7

DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", RTTYPE=IF, IFT=MPGRP;//Adding an SCTP signaling link ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.10", LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.13", PEERPORT=58080;ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.10", LOCPORT=1025, PEERIP="17.0.0.13", PEERPORT=58080;//Adding an NCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;//Adding a UCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=46, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=38, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=2, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=18, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=3, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="70.83.26.10", PEERIP="17.0.0.13", DSCP=14, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";

271.2 Configuring IP-Based UMTS and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature IP-BasedUMTS and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side.


– A UMTS and LTE dual-mode base station whose UMTS and LTE modes share theBBU supports this feature.

– A UTRP needs to be added at the eNodeB to support IP over E1/T1.l Dependencies on Other Features

– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface

– MRFD-221601 Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)l License


Context

The feature IP-Based UMTS and LTE Co-Transmission on Base Station Side requires a UMTSand LTE dual-mode base station to connect the FE port on the WMPT and one FE port on the




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

LMPT together and to share transmission ports on the LTE side and the transmission network,therefore sharing transmission resources.

NOTEIn the scenario of UMTS and LTE co-transmission, it is recommended transmission resource sharing isachieved by connecting FE ports.

Co-transmission modes can be IP over FE/GE and IP over E1/T1, as shown in Figure 271-4 andFigure 271-5 respectively.

Figure 271-4 IP over FE/GE UMTS and LTE co-transmission on base station side

Figure 271-5 IP over E1/T1 UMTS and LTE co-transmission on base station side

Procedurel Activating the NodeB data



3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the NodeB toBSC6900 in case of layer 3 networking.


– Set Next Hop IP Address to the gateway IP address of the NodeB.




271-9

NOTENext Hop IP Address is the IP address of the eNodeB port connected to the NodeB.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add an SCTP link.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,

subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.– Set Local IP Address to the device IP address in step 2.– Set Peer IP Address to the IP address of the port on the BSC6900 side.– Run the BSC6900 MML command LST SCTPSRVPORT to query the value of

Peer SCTP Port.5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to CCP(CCP Port).6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, set

NCP/CCP Port Type to NCP(NCP Port).

NOTEBefore a CCP link is added, the value of CCP Port Number must be the same as that on theBSC6900 side. You can query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side by running theBSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path to the adjacentnode.– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,

subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.– The value of Rx Bandwidth must be the same as that of Tx Bandwidth of the IP

path on the BSC6900 side.– The value of Tx Bandwidth must be the same as that of Rx Bandwidth of the IP

path on the BSC6900 side.l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over FE/GE)

1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPTport connected to the WMPT.

NOTEWhen the WMPT is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/FULL mode.

2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add an IP address for the maincontrol board on the eNodeB side and an IP address for the S1 interface on the CNside.– Set IP Address to the IP address of the S1 interface on the eNodeB side.– In this step, set Port Type to ETH(Ethernet Port).– Set Port No. based on the actual situation.

3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe MME.– Set Destination IP Address to the destination IP address of the route.– Set Route Type to NEXTHOP(IP Address of The Next Hop).– Next Hop IP Address must be on the same network segment as the IP address of

the eNodeB.4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB to

the SGW.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

5. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe BSC6900.

6. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD RSCGRP to add a transmission resourcegroup.

7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between theeNodeB and the SGW.

– Set Join Logical Port to YES.

– Set PATH Type to ANY.

8. Run the eNodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable the DHCPrelay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch to ENABLE.

9. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for aDHCP server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of theBSC6900 DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and theBSC6900.

10. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link betweenthe eNodeB and the MME.

11. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.

l Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)

1. Run the eNodeB MML command SET ETHPORT to set parameters for the LMPTport connected to the WMPT.

NOTEWhen the WMPT is connected to the LMPT, the LMPT must be configured to work in 100M/FULL mode.

2. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPGRP to add an MP group.

3. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD MPLNK to add an MP link and then add itto the MP group.

4. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DEVIP to add the IP address of FE interfaceon eNodeB.

5. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe MME.

– Set Destination IP Address to the destination IP address of the route.

– Set Subboard Type to E1_COVERBOARD(E1 Cover Board)

– Set Route Type to IF(Exit Interface).

6. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe SGW.

7. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPRT to add an IP route from the eNodeB tothe BSC6900.

8. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD RSCGRP to add a transmission resourcegroup.

9. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPPATH to add an IP path between theeNodeB and the SGW.

– Set Join Logical Port to YES.

– Set PATH Type to ANY.




271-11

– Run the eNodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH to enable theDHCP relay function of the base station. In this step, set Enable Switch toENABLE.

– Run the eNodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP to add an IP address for aDHCP server. In this step, set DHCP Server IP Address to the IP address of theBSC6900 DHCP Server. This DHCP server is shared between the NodeB and theBSC6900.

10. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SCTPLNK to add a signaling link betweenthe eNodeB and the MME.

11. Run the eNodeB MML command ADD S1INTERFACE to add an S1 interface.

----End

Example//Activating the NodeB data//Setting parameters for an Ethernet port SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PN=0, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, ARPPROXY=DISABLE, OAM3AHSW=DISABLE; //Set the IP of FE interface on NodeBADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=6, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, PN=0, IP="199.2.2.2", MASK="255.255.255.0";//Adding an IP route from the NodeB to the RNC ADD IPRT:CN=0,SRN=0,SN=6,DSTIP="17.0.0.17",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="199.2.2.3",PREF=80;//Adding an SCTP signaling link ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, LOCIP="199.2.2.2", LOCPORT=1024, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, LOCIP="199.2.2.2", LOCPORT=1025, PEERIP="17.0.0.17", PEERPORT=58080;//Adding an NCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=0;//Adding a CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=IPV4, LN=1;//Adding an IP path to the adjacent node ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="199.2.2.2", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=0, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETH, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, LOCALIP="199.2.2.2", PEERIP="17.0.0.17", DSCP=0, RXBW=10000, TXBW=10000, TXCBS=15000, TXEBS=155000000, FPMUXSWITCH=DISABLE;//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over FE/GE)//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the WMPT SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;//Set the IP of FE interface on eNodeBADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.20", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP address for the eNodeB ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, PT=ETH, PN=1, IP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME ADD IPRT:CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="138.20.5.0",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="199.2.2.20",PREF=80;//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

ADD IPRT:CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="138.30.20.0",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="199.2.2.20",PREF=80;//Adding an IP route from eNodeB to BSC6900ADD IPRT:CN=0,SRN=0,SN=7,DSTIP="17.0.0.17",MASK="255.255.255.0",RTTYPE=NEXTHOP,NEXTHOPIP="199.2.2.20",PREF=80;//Adding a transmission resource groupADD RSCGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, BEAR=IP, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=MPGRP, PN=0, RSCGRPID=0, RU=KBPS, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000, TXEBS=200000;//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=7, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", PEERIP="138.20.5.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: EnableSwitch=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";//Adding a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=7, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907, PEERIP="138.20.5.0", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an S1 interface ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;//Activating the eNodeB data (IP over E1/T1)//Setting parameters for the LMPT port connected to the WMPT SET ETHPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PN=0, PA=COPPER, MTU=1500, SPEED=100M, DUPLEX=FULL, FC=OPEN;//Adding an MP group ADD MPGRP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, MPGRPN=0, MCPPP=DISABLE, AUTHTYPE=NOAUTH, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", MASK="255.0.0.0", PPPMUX=DISABLE;//Adding an MP link and then adding it to the MP group ADD MPLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PPPLNKN=0, E1T1SN=0, E1T1PN=0, TSBITMAP=TSBITMAP=TS1-1&TS2-1;&TS3-1;&TS4-1;&TS5-1;&TS6-1;&TS7-1;&TS8-1;&TS9-1;&TS10-1;&TS11-1;&TS12-1;&TS13-1;&TS14-1;&TS15-1;&TS16-1;&TS17-1;&TS18-1;&TS19-1;&TS20-1;&TS21-1;&TS22-1;&TS23-1;&TS24-1;&TS25-1;&TS26-1;&TS27-1;&TS28-1;&TS29-1;&TS30-1;&TS31-1;//Set the IP of FE interface on eNodeBADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, PT=MP, PN=1, IP="199.2.2.20", MASK="255.0.0.0";//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the MME ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, DSTIP="138.20.5.0", MASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=IF, PT=MP, PN=0;//Adding an IP route from the eNodeB to the SGW ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, DSTIP="138.30.20.0", MASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=IF, PT=MP, PN=1;//Add an IP route from eNodeB to BSC6900ADD IPRT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, DSTIP="17.0.0.17", MASK="255.255.255.0", RTTYPE=IF, PT=MP, PN=2;//Adding an IP logical port ADD IPLGCPORT: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=4, LPT=USERDEF, LPN=0, PT=ETH, PN=0, TXBW=150000, RXBW=200000, TXCBS=200000, TXEBS=200000;//Adding an IP path between the eNodeB and the SGW ADD IPPATH: PATHID=0, SN=4, JNLGCPORT=YES, LPN=0, LOCALIP="70.83.26.1", PEERIP="138.20.5.20", QT=HQ, PATHTYPE=ANY;//Enabling the DHCP relay function of the base station SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE;ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="17.0.0.17";//Adding a signaling link between the eNodeB and the MME ADD SCTPLNK: SCTPNO=0, SN=4, LOCIP="70.83.26.1", LOCPORT=2907, PEERIP="138.20.5.0", PEERPORT=2910, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES;//Adding an S1 interface ADD S1INTERFACE: S1INTERFACEID=0, S1SCTPLINKID=0, CnOperatorId=0;




271-13

272 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side

(NodeB)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221504TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB).


– A GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station supports this feature.– When the TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission feature is supported by a

GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, a UTRP should be configured for the BTS.The UTRP type must be UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4.

l Dependencies on Other Features– WRFD-050302 Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface– WRFD-050411 Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface


ContextThis feature enables the BTS and NodeB to share E1/T1 transmission resources through abackplane clock channel with the effective TDM timeslot cross connection function.

Backplane-based co-transmission is classified into the following scenarios:l In the scenario of GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, E1/T1

timeslots on the UMTS side are transmitted to the GTMU through the backplane TOPchannel on the WMPT. E1/T1 ports on the GTMU are connected to the transmissionnetwork. The TDM timeslot cross connection function enables GSM data and UMTS datato be multiplexed on the transmission network. Therefore, E1/T1 transmission resourcesare shared by the GSM and UMTS modes by timeslot, as shown in Figure 272-1.


272 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmissionvia Backplane on BS side (NodeB)


272-1

Figure 272-1 GTMU-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

l In the scenario of GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission, a

UTRP is configured on the GSM side. Therefore, extra E1/T1 resources can be shared bythe UMTS mode through the backplane TOP channel to extend E1/T1 transmissionresources for the UMTS mode, as shown in Figure 272-2.

NOTE

l The number of E1/T1 on the BTS backplane is within the range of 16 through 19. E1/T1 numbers 16 through19 on the BTS backplane correspond to E1/T1 numbers 0 through 3 on the NodeB backplane. Crossconnection is not supported. For example, E1/T1 No. 16 on the BTS backplane only corresponds to E1/T1No. 0 on the NodeB backplane.

l E1 timeslot numbers configured on the BTS side must be consistent with those configured on the NodeBside.

Figure 272-2 GSM-UTRP-based TDM timeslot cross connection co-transmission

Procedurel Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connectionbetween a GTMU port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOPswitching parameters.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

– Set Port Subrack No. and Port Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot wherethe BTS port connected to the NodeB interface board is located. Set TOP BoardSubrack No. and TOP Board Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot wherethe NodeB interface board is located.

– Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

– Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.

NOTEWhen E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type toTOPEXTOUTPORT.

l Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based)

1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.

– Set Subrack No. and Slot No. to numbers of the subrack and slot that house theIub interface board.

– Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.

– Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the GTMU.

NOTESimilar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, andonline and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actualnetworking mode.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add itto the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD orBASE_BOARD.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.

– Set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

– Set Rate Unit to KBPS or CELL/S. Only one rate unit can be used. Therefore,rate units in other configuration must be consistent.

5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).

– Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value isH'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).



7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, setNCP/CCP Port Type to NCP(NCP Port).

8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, setNCP/CCP Port Type to CCP(CCP Port).




272-3

NOTEBefore a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP porton the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run theBSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

l Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)

1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSCONNECT to add a connectionbetween a UTRP port and the NodeB. Set Dest Node Type to OTHER.

2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD BTSTOPCONFIG to configure the TOPswitching parameters.

– Set Port Type to TOPEXTOUTPORT.

– Set TS Mask to the timeslot of the NodeB backplane.

NOTEWhen E1 transmission resources on the BTS side are shared by the NodeB, set Port Type toTOPEXTOUTPORT.

l Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)

1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD BACKE1T1 to add a backplane E1/T1 link.

– Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to the numbers of the cabinet,subrack, and slot that house the Iub interface board.

– Set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD.

– Set Destination Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the UTRP.

NOTESimilar to a common E1, the backplane E1 can be configured with the upper-layer bearer. It,however, does not support the configuration of the operating work mode and loopback mode, andonline and offline tests. The upper-layer link bearer of the backplane E1 can be UNILNK/IMALNK/FRAATMLNK/PPLNK/MPLNK. You need to configure the link bearer according to actualnetworking mode.

2. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMAGRP to add an IMA group. In this step,set Subboard Type to BASE_BOARD.

3. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IMALNK to add an IMA link and then add itto the MP group. In this step, set Subboard Type to BACK_BOARD orBASE_BOARD.

4. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SAALLNK to add an SAAL link.



5. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2NODE to add an AAL2 node.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(LOCAL).

– Set ATM Address to a valid ATM address. The recommended value isH'3900000000000000000000000000000000000000.

6. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to add an AAL2 path.

– Set Node Type to LOCAL(End Node).






Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

7. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add an NCP link. In this step, setNCP/CCP Port Type to NCP.

8. Run the NodeB MML command ADD IUBCP to add a CCP link. In this step, setNCP/CCP Port Type to CCP.

NOTEBefore a CCP link is added, the number of the CCP port must be the same as that of the CCP porton the BSC6900 side. To query information about the CCP link on the BSC6900 side, run theBSC6900 MML command LST UIUBCP.

----End

Example//Activating the BTS data (GTMU-based) //Configuring a connection between a GTMU port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=6, DESTNODE=OTHER;//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the GTMU and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the GTMU provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the GTMU ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=6, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;

//Activating the NodeB data (GTMU-based) //Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=6;//Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;//Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";//Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512;//Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;//Activating the BTS data (GSM-UTRP-based)//Configuring a connection between a UTRP port and the NodeB ADD BTSCONNECT: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, INPN=1, INCN=0, INSRN=0, INSN=0, DESTNODE=OTHER;//Configuring the TOP switching relation between the UTRP and the WMPT: E1 port 16 on the backplane corresponds to port 0 on the WMPT, the UTRP provides the WMPT with a transmission path, the port type is TOPEXTINPO, and the output port is E1 port 1 on the UTRP




272-5

ADD BTSTOPCONFIG: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=255, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, E1T1PORTNO=16, TOPBOARDCN=0, TOPBOARDSRN=0, TOPBOARDSLOTNO=7, PORTTYPE=TOPEXTOUTPORT, ORIPORT=1, TSMASK=TS1-1&TS2-1&TS3-1&TS4-1&TS5-1&TS6-1&TS7-1&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-1&TS13-1&TS14-1&TS15-1&TS16-1&TS17-1&TS18-1&TS19-1&TS20-1&TS21-1&TS22-1&TS23-1&TS24-1&TS25-1&TS26-1&TS27-1&TS28-1&TS29-1&TS30-1&TS31-1;

Activating the NodeB data (GSM-UTRP-based)//Adding a backplane E1/T1 link ADD BACKE1T1: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, DSTSN=0;//Adding an IMA group ADD IMAGRP: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding an IMA link ADD IMALNK: SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BACK_BOARD, IMAGRPSBT=BASE_BOARD;//Adding three SAAL links ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=4, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=0, VCI=32, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=1024;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=5, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=1, VCI=33, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;ADD SAALLNK: SAALNO=6, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=2, VCI=34, RU=KBPS, ST=CBR, PCR=256;//Adding an AAL2 node ADD AAL2NODE: NT=LOCAL, LN=4, ADDR="H'3900000000000000000000000000000000001980";//Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: NT=LOCAL, PATHID=23, CN=0, SRN=0, SN=7, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, JNRSCGRP=DISABLE, VPI=4, VCI=36, RU=KBPS, ST=RTVBR, PCR=1024, SCR=512, RCR=512;//Adding an NCP or CCP link ADD IUBCP: CPPT=NCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=5;ADD IUBCP: CPPT=CCP, BEAR=ATM, LN=6;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

273 Configuring Multi-Mode BSCommon Reference Clock (NodeB)

About This Chapter

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221601Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB).

273.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM andUMTS Common Reference Clock.

273.2 Configuring UMTS and LTE Common Reference ClockThis section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature UMTS andLTE Common Reference Clock.


273 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock(NodeB)


273-1

273.1 Configuring GSM and UMTS Common ReferenceClock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature GSM andUMTS Common Reference Clock.


– The GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station whose GSM and UMTS modes share theBBU supports this feature.

– If GPS or BITS clock signals are shared, the USCU board must be configured on theBBU.

l Dependencies on Other Features– MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock– WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet– GBFD-118601 Abis over IP– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface– WRFD-050501 Clock Sync on Ethernet in NodeB


l Other Prerequisites– This feature has to be activated with MRFD-221601 Multi-mode BS Common

Reference Clock (NodeB) simultaneously.

ContextThe feature GSM and UMTS common reference clock enables the GSM and UMTS modes toshare the same clock source. Therefore, an external clock source must be configured for onemode while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.

Scenarios of this feature are as follows:l Common GPS reference clock

– Common GPS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)– Common GPS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)

l Common BITS reference clock– Common BITS reference clock on the GSM side (GSM USCU)– Common BITS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)

l Common E1/T1 reference clock– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical

scenario)




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

l Common Ethernet reference clock– Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)– Common Ethernet reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical

scenario)l Common IP reference clock

– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)– Common IP reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) (non-typical scenario)– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical scenario)

NOTEFor non-typical scenarios, further descriptions are not provided.

Common GPS reference clock

When a USCU and an external GPS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-mode basestation, GPS clock signals are transmitted through a GPS clock interface. The GSM and UMTSmodes obtain the GPS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure273-1.

Figure 273-1 Common GPS reference clock

Common BITS reference clock

When a USCU and an external BITS clock are configured for a GSM and UMTS dual-modebase station, BITS clock signals are transmitted through a BITS clock interface. The GSM andUMTS modes obtain the BITS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown inFigure 273-2.




273-3

Figure 273-2 Common BITS reference clock

Common E1/T1 reference clock

When a common E1/T1 reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,clock signals can be obtained from the E1/T1 port on the side of one mode while the other modeis configured to share the opposite mode's clock source. Followings are examples of commonE1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU) and common E1/T1 reference clock on theUMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 273-3 and Figure 273-4.

Figure 273-3 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)

Figure 273-4 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common Ethernet reference clock




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

When a common Ethernet reference clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station,one mode obtains Ethernet clock signals from the transmission network through a FEtransmission link while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.Following is an example of common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT), asshown in Figure 273-5.

Figure 273-5 Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common IP reference clock

When the IEEE1588 clock is used on a GSM and UMTS dual-mode base station, the commonIP reference clock is shared by two modes. Only one mode needs to be configured with anIEEE1588 client, and then clock signals can be obtained from the IEEE1588 server by connectinga FE transmission link to the transmission network. The other mode should be configured toshare the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of common IP reference clockon the UMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 273-6.

Figure 273-6 Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Procedurel Common GPS reference clock

1. Configuration on the GBTS side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSUSCUBP to set the parameters ofa USCU board.




273-5

– Set Board Parameter Configuration Enabled to YES(YES).– Set GPS Work Mode to GPS(GPS).– Set Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power).

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set Clock Type toTRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock).

(3) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLKPARA to set BTS clockparameters based on the actual situation.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command SAV BTSCLKPARA to save BTS clockparameters.

2. Configuration on the NodeB side

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to GPS(GPS Clock).

l Common BITS reference clock1. Configuration on the GBTS side

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set an external clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to EXTSYN_CLK(External Sync clock).


(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock link.(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to BITS(BITS Clock).

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GSM side (GTMU)1. Configuration on the GBTS side

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to set the BTS to track the clocksignals received from the BSC6900. In this step, set Clock Type to TRCBSC_CLK(Trace BSC Clock).


NOTE

Before configuring on the NodeB side, ensure that the clock source on the GBTS side is E1/T1 clock link.

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer reference clocklink.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)1. Configuration on the NodeB side




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

NOTE

Before configuring the LINE clock source, ensure that an E1/T1 clock link is available.

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD LINECLK to configure the E1/T1 clocksource. In this step, set Port Type to E1T1(E1T1).

(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to LINECLK(Line Clock).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER(PEER Clock).

l Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side1. Configuration on the NodeB side

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronous-Ethernet clock link.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER_CLK(Peer Clock).

l Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side1. Configuration on the NodeB side

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK to add an IP clock link.(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock).


Run the BSC6900 MML command SET BTSCLK to configure the PEER clocksource. In this step, set Clock Type to PEER_CLK(Peer Clock).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT and the BSC6900 MML command

LST BTSCLK. Check the results.

If... Then...

The clock source information matchesthe configuration.


The clock source informationmismatches the configuration.





273-7

2. Check whether any alarm is generated.

If... Then...

The clock conflict alarm is generated. The configurations on the GSM andUMTS sides conflict with each other.Therefore, the configuration fails.

----End

Example//Common GPS reference clock//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSUSCUBP: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=1, CFGFLAG=YES, GPSORGLONASS=GPS, ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER;SET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK;SET BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, SRN=0, SN=1, CLKMOD=GPSCLK, TRCRNGLMT=ENABLE, CALVAL=2222;SAV BTSCLKPARA: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120;//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD GPS: GN=0,SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;//Common BITS reference clock//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=EXTSYN_CLK;//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD BITS: SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the GBTS side (GTMU)//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=TRCBSC_CLK;//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD PEERCLK:;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;//Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD LINECLK: SN=6, PT=E1T1, PN=0;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;//Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;//Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=PTP, SN=7, CNM=UNICAST, CIP="82.0.1.107", SIP="82.0.1.128";SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK;//Configuration on the GBTS sideSET BTSCLK: IDTYPE=BYID, BTSID=120, ClkType=PEER_CLK;




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

273.2 Configuring UMTS and LTE Common ReferenceClock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature UMTS andLTE Common Reference Clock.


– The UMTS and LTE dual-mode base station whose UMTS and LTE modes share theBBU supports this feature.

– If GPS or BITS clock signals are shared, the USCU board must be configured on theBBU.

– The 1588V2 reference clock must be configured IP Clock Server.l Dependencies on Other Features

– MRFD-210501 BTS/NodeB Clock– LOFD-00301301 Synchronization with Ethernet (ITU-T G.8261)– WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface– LOFD-00301302 IEEE1588 V2 Clock Synchronization


l Other Prerequisites– This feature has to be activated with MRFD-231601 Multi-mode BS Common

Reference Clock (eNodeB) simultaneously.

ContextThe feature UMTS and LTE common reference clock enables the UMTS and LTE modes toshare the same clock source. Therefore, an external clock source must be configured for onemode while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.

Scenarios of this feature are as follows:l Common GPS reference clock

– Common GPS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)– Common GPS reference clock on the LTE side (LTE USCU)

l Common BITS reference clock– Common BITS reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS USCU)– Common BITS reference clock on the LTE side (LTE USCU)

l Common E1/T1 reference clock– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical

scenario)– Common E1/T1 reference clock on the LTE side (LTE UTRP) (non-typical scenario)




273-9

l Common Ethernet reference clock

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT) (non-typical scenario)

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typicalscenario)

– Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LTE UTRP) (non-typical scenario)l Common IP reference clock

– Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT) (non-typical scenario)

– Common IP reference clock on the UMTS side (UMTS UTRP) (non-typical scenario)

– Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LTE UTRP) (non-typical scenario)

NOTEFor non-typical scenarios, further descriptions are not provided.

Common GPS reference clock

When a USCU and an external GPS clock are configured for a UMTS and LTE dual-mode basestation, GPS clock signals are transmitted through a GPS clock interface. The UMTS and LTEmodes obtain the GPS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure273-7.

Figure 273-7 Common GPS reference clock

NOTEAs shown in Figure 273-7, only one USCU can be configured on either the UMTS side or the LTE side.

Common BITS reference clock

When a USCU and an external BITS clock are configured for a UMTS and LTE dual-mode basestation, BITS clock signals are transmitted through a BITS clock interface. The UMTS and LTEmodes obtain the BITS clock signals through a backplane clock channel, as shown in Figure273-8.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

Figure 273-8 Common BITS reference clock

NOTEAs shown in Figure 273-8, only one USCU can be configured on either the UMTS side or the LTE side.

Common E1/T1 reference clock

When a common E1/T1 reference clock is used on a UMTS and LTE dual-mode base station,clock signals can be obtained from the E1/T1 port on the side of one mode while the other modeis configured to share the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of commonE1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT), as shown in Figure 273-9.

Figure 273-9 Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side (WMPT)

Common Ethernet reference clock

When a common Ethernet reference clock is used on a UMTS and LTE dual-mode base station,one mode obtains Ethernet clock signals from the transmission network through a FE/GEtransmission link while the other mode is configured to share the opposite mode's clock source.Following is an example of common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT), as shownin Figure 273-10.




273-11

Figure 273-10 Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

Common IP reference clock

When the IEEE1588 clock is used on a UMTS and LTE dual-mode base station, the commonIP reference clock is shared by two modes. Only one mode needs to be configured with anIEEE1588 client, and then clock signals can be obtained from the IEEE1588 server by connectinga FE/GE transmission link to the transmission network. The other mode should be configuredto share the opposite mode's clock source. Following is an example of common IP referenceclock on the LTE side (LMPT), as shown in Figure 273-11.

Figure 273-11 Common IP reference clock on the LTE side (LMPT)

Procedurel Common GPS reference clock


(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link.(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to GPS(GPS Clock).

2. Configuration on the eNodeB side




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link. In thisstep, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the USCU.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to GPS(GPS Clock).

l Common BITS reference clock1. Configuration on the NodeB side

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock link.(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to BITS(BITS Clock).


(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD BITS to add a BITS clock link. In thisstep, set Slot No. to the number of the slot that houses the USCU.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to BITS(BITS Clock).

l Common E1/T1 reference clock on the UMTS side1. Configuration on the NodeB side

NOTE

Before configuring the LINE clock source, ensure that an E1/T1 clock link is available.

(1) Run the NodeB MML command ADD LNKSRC to a line clock source. In thisstep, set Port Type to E1T1.

(2) Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to LINECLK(Line Clock).


NOTE

Before configuring on the eNodeB side, ensure that the clock source on the NodeB side is E1/T1 clock link.

(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD PEERCLK to add a peer reference clocklink. In this step, set PeerClk No. to the number of the peer reference clock.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).

l Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side1. Configuration on the eNodeB side




273-13

(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD SYNCETH to add a synchronous-Ethernet clock link.– Set Subrack No. to the number of the subrack where the synchronous-

Ethernet clock link is configured. The recommended value is 7.– Set Port No. to the number of the port where the synchronous-Ethernet clock

link is configured.(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of

the reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock).


Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of thereference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).

l Common IP reference clock on the LTE side1. Configuration on the eNodeB side

(1) Run the eNodeB MML command ADD IPCLKLINK to add an IP clock link.– Set Protocol Type to PTP(PTP).– Set Slot No. to the number of the slot where the IP clock link is configured.– Set Client IP to the client IP address of the IP clock link.– Set Server IP to the server IP address of the IP clock link.

(2) Run the eNodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode ofthe reference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to IPCLK(IP Clock).


Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of thereference clock source.– Set Clock Working Mode to MANUAL(Manual).– Set Selected Clock Source to PEERCLK(Peer Clock).

l Verification Procedure1. Run the DSP CLKSTAT command on the NodeB and eNodeB sides and check the

returned message.

If... Then...

The clock source information matchesthe configuration.


The clock source informationmismatches the configuration.


2. Check whether any alarm is generated.




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

If... Then...

The Inter-System BBU BoardParameter Settings Conflict (alarm ID:26273) is generated.

The configurations on the UMTS andLTE sides conflict with each other.Therefore, the configuration fails.

----End

Example//Common GPS reference clock//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD GPS: SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD GPS: SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0;//Common BITS reference clock//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD BITS: SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD BITS: SN=4;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS;//Common UMTS E1/T1 reference clock//Configuration on the NodeB sideADD LINECLK: SN=6, PT=E1T1, PN=0;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINECLK;//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD PEERCLK:;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;//Common Ethernet reference clock on the LTE side//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD SYNCETH: SN=7, PN=0;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH;//Configuration on the NodeB sideSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;//Common IP reference clock on the LTE side//Configuration on the eNodeB sideADD IPCLKLINK: ICPT=PTP, SN=7, PN=0, CNM=UNICAST, CIP="82.0.1.107", SIP="82.0.1.128", SYNMODE=OFF;SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK, SRCNO=0;//Configuration on the NodeB sideSET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK;




273-15

274 Configuring 2.0 MHz CentralFrequency Point Separation Between GSM and

UMTS Mode (UMTS)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-2217032.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTS Mode (UMTS).

Prerequisite

l Dependencies on Hardware

– MRFU and RRU3908 of V2 or later versions support the feature.


– GBFD-114801 Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) Downlink

– GBFD-117601 HUAWEI III Power Control Algorithm

– GBFD-117602 Active Power Control

– MRFD-211703 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTSMode (GSM)

l License



– GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing is not supported in GSM dynamic transmitdiversity.

– It is not recommended that GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing coexist with thebaseband frequency hopping algorithm involving two power amplifiers because theircoexistence would result in a certain level of performance loss.

– GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing in MIMO is not recommended.

Context

This feature improves frequency utilization. It enables the UMTS carriers to use the bandwidth3.8 MHz and therefore increase the capacity of the GSM network.


274 Configuring 2.0 MHz Central Frequency PointSeparation Between GSM and UMTS Mode (UMTS)


274-1


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH to set the minimal frequencybandwidth on the UMTS side. In this step, set Frequency Min Bandwidth to 3800.

2. To ensure that the UMTS carrier bandwidth is 3.8 MHz and the frequency spacingbetween GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz, as set in step 1, do as follows to modifyfrequency points on the GSM or UMTS side:

– Modify the UMTS carrier Central Frequency Point

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate a cell.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP. In this step,modify frequency points for UMTS cells at the BSC6900. Set BandIndicator, UL Frequency Ind, Uplink UARFCN and DownlinkUARFCN.

(3) Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify some propertiesof a local cell. In this step, set UL Frequency Channel Number and DLFrequency Channel Number.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate a cell.

– Modify the GSM central frequency point separation

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GTRX to modify the frequencyof a TRX. In this step, set Frequency to ensure that the frequency spacingbetween GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz.


1. Run the NodeB MML command LST FREQBWH to check whether the UMTScarrier bandwidth is 3.8 MHz.

2. Check on the NodeB side whether all TRXs work properly when the frequency spacingbetween GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz.

3. Check on the BSC side whether services in all cells are normal when the frequencyspacing between GSM and UMTS carriers is 2.0 MHz.


1. Run the NodeB MML command SET FREQBWH to set the UMTS carrierbandwidth. The UMTS carrier bandwidth should range from 4.2 MHz to 5.0 MHz.

2. To ensure that the UMTS carrier bandwidth is the bandwidth set in step 1, do as followsto modify frequency points on the GSM or UMTS side:

– Modify the UMTS central frequency point separation

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL to deactivate a cell.

(2) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLSETUP. In this step,modify frequency points for UMTS cells at the BSC6900 and set BandIndicator, UL Frequency Ind and Downlink UARFCN.

(3) Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL to modify some propertiesof a local cell. In this step, set UL Frequency Channel Number and DLFrequency Channel Number.

(4) Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL to activate a cell.

– Modify the GSM central frequency point separation




Issue 02 (2011-07-11)

(1) Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD GTRX to modify the frequencyof a TRX. In this step, set Frequency to ensure that the frequency spacingbetween GSM and UMTS carriers no less than 2.2 MHz.

----End

Example//Activation procedure //Setting the UMTS carrier bandwidth to 3.8 MHz SET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, FMBWH=3800;

//Setting the uplink and downlink frequencies of a UMTS cell to 2815 and 3040 DEA UCELL: CellId=101;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=101, BandInd=Band8, UARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, UARFCNDownlink=3040;MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=101, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ULFREQ=2815, DLFREQ=3040;ACT UCELL: CellId=101;

//Setting the frequency of a specified GSM TRX to 55 MOD GTRX: TRXID=122, FREQ=55;//Verification procedure LST FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0;//Deactivation procedure //Setting the UMTS carrier bandwidth to 5.0 MHz SET FREQBWH: CN=0, SRN=4, SN=0, FMBWH=5000;

//Setting the uplink and downlink frequencies of a UMTS cell to 2821 and 3046 DEA UCELL: CellId=101;MOD UCELLSETUP: CellId=101, BandInd=Band8, UARFCNUplinkInd=FALSE, UARFCNDownlink=3046;MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=101, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, ULFREQ=2821, DLFREQ=3046;ACT UCELL: CellId=101;

//Setting the frequency of a specificed GSM TRX to 52 MOD GTRX: TRXID=122, FREQ=52;




274-3

Documents

RAN Feature Activation Guide Huawei